2019 Frontier

2019 FRONTIER
OWNER’S MANUAL
and MAINTENANCE INFORMATION
For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING
WARNING
Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger
vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to
chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid
breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as
necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area
and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when
servicing your vehicle. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
FOREWORD READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY
This manual was prepared to help you un- warnings, cautions and instructions con- Before driving your vehicle, please read this
derstand the operation and maintenance cerning proper use of such accessories Owner’s Manual carefully. This will ensure
of your vehicle so that you may enjoy many prior to operating the vehicle and/or ac- familiarity with controls and maintenance
miles (kilometers) of driving pleasure. cessory. It is recommended that you visit a requirements assisting you in the safe op-
Please read through this manual before NISSAN dealer for details concerning the eration of your vehicle.
operating your vehicle. particular accessories with which your ve-
hicle is equipped. WARNING
A separate Warranty Information Book-
let explains details about the warranties IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION
covering your vehicle. The “Maintenance REMINDERS!
and schedules” section of this manual Follow these important driving rules to
explains details about maintaining and help ensure a safe and comfortable trip
servicing your vehicle. Additionally, a for you and your passengers!
separate Customer Care/Lemon Law ∙ NEVER drive under the influence of al-
Booklet (U.S. only) will explain how to re- cohol or drugs.
solve any concerns you may have with
your vehicle, and clarify your rights un- ∙ ALWAYS observe posted speed limits
der your state’s lemon law. and never drive too fast for
conditions.
When you require any service or have any
questions, a NISSAN dealer will be glad to ∙ ALWAYS give your full attention to
assist you with the extensive resources driving and avoid using vehicle fea-
available to them. tures or taking other actions that
could distract you.
In addition to factory-installed options,
your vehicle may also be equipped with ∙ ALWAYS use your seat belts and ap-
additional accessories installed prior to de- propriate child restraint systems. Pre-
livery. It is recommended that you visit a teen children should be seated in the
NISSAN dealer for details concerning the rear seat.
particular accessories with which your ve-
hicle is equipped. It is important that you
familiarize yourself with all disclosures,
∙ ALWAYS provide information about For additional information, refer to WARNING
the proper use of vehicle safety fea- “On-pavement and off-road driving Installing an aftermarket On-Board Di-
tures to all occupants of the vehicle. precautions”, “Avoiding collision and agnostic (OBD) plug-in device that uses
∙ ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual rollover” and “Driving safety precau- the port during normal driving, for ex-
for important safety information. tions” in the “Starting and driving” ample remote insurance company
section of this manual. monitoring, remote vehicle diagnostics,
For descriptions specified for 4-wheel drive telematics or engine reprogramming,
models, a mark is placed at the be- MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE may cause interference or damage to
ginning of the applicable sections/items. This vehicle should not be modified. vehicle systems. We do not recommend
As with other vehicles with features for Modification could affect its or endorse the use of any aftermarket
off-road use, failure to operate 4-wheel performance, safety, emissions or du- OBD plug-in devices, unless specifically
drive models correctly may result in loss rability and may even violate govern- approved by NISSAN. The vehicle war-
of control or a collision. For additional ranty may not cover damage caused by
mental regulations. In addition, dam-
information, refer to “Driving safety pre- any aftermarket plug-in device.
age or performance problems
cautions” in the “Starting and driving”
resulting from modifications may not
section of this manual.
be covered under NISSAN warranties.
ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD DRIV-
ING
This vehicle will handle and maneuver
differently from an ordinary passen-
ger car because it has a higher center
of gravity for off-road use. As with
other vehicles with features of this
type, failure to operate this vehicle
correctly may result in loss of control
or an accident.
WHEN READING THE MANUAL
This manual includes information for all sumer Affairs. For contact information, re-
features and equipment available on this fer to the NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PRO-
model. Features and equipment in your ve- GRAM page in this Owner’s Manual.
hicle may vary depending on model, trim
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT
level, options selected, order, date of pro-
duction, region or availability. Therefore, THIS MANUAL
you may find information about features or You will see various symbols in this manual.
equipment that are not included or in- They are used in the following ways:
stalled on your vehicle.
All information, specifications and illustra-
WARNING
tions in this manual are those in effect at This is used to indicate the presence of
the time of printing. NISSAN reserves the a hazard that could cause death or seri-
right to change specifications, perfor- ous personal injury. To avoid or reduce
mance, design or component suppliers the risk, the procedures must be fol- APD1005
without notice and without obligation. lowed precisely.
If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do
From time to time, NISSAN may update or this” or “Do not let this happen.”
revise this manual to provide Owners with CAUTION
the most accurate information currently This is used to indicate the presence of
available. Please carefully read and retain a hazard that could cause minor or
with this manual all revision updates sent If you see a symbol similar to these in an
moderate personal injury or damage to
to you by NISSAN to ensure you have ac- illustration, it means the arrow points to
your vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk,
cess to accurate and up-to-date informa- the front of the vehicle.
the procedures must be followed
tion regarding your vehicle. Current ver- carefully.
sions of vehicle Owner’s Manuals and any
updates can also be found in the Owner
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to
section of the NISSAN website at
these indicate movement or action.
https://owners.nissanusa.com/nowners/
navigation/manualsGuide. If you have
questions concerning any information in
your Owner’s Manual, contact NISSAN Con-
SiriusXM® services
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to require a subscrip-
these call attention to an item in the illus- tion after trial pe-
tration. riod and are sold
CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE separately or as a
ADVISORY package. The
satellite service is
Some vehicle parts, such as lithium bat-
available only in
teries, may contain perchlorate material.
The following advisory is provided: “Per- the 48 contiguous
chlorate Material – special handling may USA and DC.
apply. For additional information, refer SiriusXM® satellite
to www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ service is also
perchlorate/”. available in
BLUETOOTH® is a Canada; see
trademark owned www.siriusxm.ca.
by Bluetooth SIG,
Inc. and licensed
© 2018 NISSAN NORTH AMERICA, INC.
to Visteon and
Bosch. All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’s
Manual may be reproduced or stored in a
retrieval system, or transmitted in any
form, or by any means, electronic, me-
chanical, photocopying, recording or oth-
erwise, without the prior written permis-
sion of Nissan North America, Inc.
NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM
NISSAN CARES . . .
Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your
NISSAN dealer are our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service
needs.
However, if there is something that your The Consumer Affairs Department will ask You can write to NISSAN with the informa-
NISSAN dealer cannot assist you with or for the following information: tion at:
you would like to provide NISSAN directly For U.S. customers
– Your name, address, and telephone
with comments or questions, please con- Nissan North America, Inc.
number
tact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Depart- Consumer Affairs Department
ment using our toll-free number: – Vehicle identification number (attached P.O. Box 685003
to the top of the instrument panel on the Franklin, TN 37068-5003
For U.S. customers
driver’s side) or via e-mail at:
1-800-NISSAN-1
(1-800-647-7261) – Date of purchase [email protected]
For Canadian customers
For Canadian customers – Current odometer reading
Nissan Canada Inc.
1-800-387-0122
– Your NISSAN dealer’s name 5290 Orbitor Drive
Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5
– Your comments or questions or via e-mail at:
OR [email protected]
If you prefer, visit us at:
www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers)
or
www.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers)
We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.
Table of Illustrated table of contents 0
Contents Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1
Instruments and controls 2
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4
Starting and driving 5
In case of emergency 6
Appearance and care 7
Do-it-yourself 8
Maintenance and schedules 9
Technical and consumer information 10
Index 11
0 Illustrated table of contents
Air bags, seat belts and child restraints . . . . . . . . . . 0-2 Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-6
Exterior front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-3 Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . 0-8
Exterior rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-4 Warning and indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-10
Passenger compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-5
AIR BAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILD
RESTRAINTS
1. Rear seat belts (P. 1-15)

2. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact
and rollover supplemental air bag
(P. 1-73)
3. Head restraints/headrests (P.1-10)
4. Front seat belts with pretension-
er(s) and shoulder height adjuster
(P. 1-15, 1-73)
5. Supplemental front-impact air
bags (P.1-73)
6. Seats (P. 1-2)
7. Occupant classification sensor
(pressure sensor) (P. 1-73)
8. Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag (P. 1-73)
9. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren) system (P. 1-28)
10. Top tether strap anchor (P. 1-28)
Refer to the page number indicated in
parentheses for operating details.
LII2310
0-2 Illustrated table of contents

EXTERIOR FRONT
1. Engine hood (P. 3-10)

2. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-28)
3. Windshield (P. 8-20)
4. Windows (P. 2-49)
5. Door locks (P. 3-3)
Key fob (if so equipped) (P. 3-6)
Keys (P. 3-2)
6. Mirrors (P. 3-15)
7. Tire pressure (P. 8-32)
Flat tire (P. 6-3)
Tire chains (P. 8-32)
8. Headlight and turn signal switch
(P. 2-29)
Daytime Running Lights (DRL)
system (if so equipped) (P. 2-29)
Replacing bulbs (P. 8-27)
9. Fog light switch (if so equipped)
(P. 2-29)
LII2481
Illustrated table of contents 0-3

EXTERIOR REAR
1. Rear sliding window

(if so equipped) (P. 2-49)
2. Vehicle loading (P. 10-20)
Tailgate (P. 3-18)
Truck box (P. 3-18)
Rearview camera (P. 4-16)
3. Towing (if so equipped) (P. 10-30)
4. Rear sonar sensors (if so equipped)
(P. 5-42)
5. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-27)
6. Fuel-filler cap (P. 3-11)
Fuel recommendation (P. 10-2)
LIC3975

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
1. Power moonroof
2. Map lights (P. 2-54)
3. Sun visors (P. 3-14)
4. Rearview mirror (P. 3-15)
HomeLink® universal trans-
ceiver (if so equipped) (P. 2-55)
5. Glove box (P. 2-40)
6. Shift lever (P. 5-14)
7. Cup holders (P. 2-40)
8. Console box (P. 2-40)
9. Spare tire tools location (P. 6-3)
LII2483

INSTRUMENT PANEL
1. Vents (P. 4-23)

2. Headlight/fog light (if so
equipped)/turn signal switch
(P. 2-29)
3. Steering wheel switch for audio
control (P. 4-75)
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System (P. 4-85, 4-103)
4. Driver supplemental air bag
(P. 1-73)
Horn (P. 2-33)
5. Meters and gauges (P. 2-3)
Warning and indicator lights
(P. 2-14)
6. Cruise control switches (P. 5-22)
8. Storage (P. 2-40)
9. Audio system (P. 4-37)
10. Front passenger supplemental air
bag (P. 1-73)
11. Upper and lower glove box (P. 2-40)
12. Passenger air bag status light
(P. 1-73)
13. USB connection port (P. 4-58)
AUX input (P. 4-58)
14. Power outlets (P. 2-39)
LII2484

15. Electronic locking rear differential
(E-Lock) system switch
Heated seat switches
Rear sonar switch (if so equipped)
(P. 2-39)
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF
switch (P. 2-35)
17. 4WD shift switch (if so equipped)
(P. 5-26)
18. Climate controls (P. 4-23, P. 4-32)
19. Hazard warning flasher switch
(P. 6-2)
20. Ignition switch (P. 5-11)
21. Tilt steering wheel control
22. Cargo lamp switch (P. 2-34)
Clutch interlock (clutch start)
switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-38)
Hill descent control switch
Outside mirror controls

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK
LOCATIONS
QR25DE engine
1. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir
(P. 8-13)
2. Fuse/Fusible link box (P. 8-22)
3. Fuse box (P. 8-22)
4. Air cleaner (P. 8-18)
5. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-7)
6. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-7)
7. Brake and clutch (if so equipped)
fluid reservoir (P. 8-12)
8. Drive belt location (P.8-16)
9. Radiator cap (P. 8-5)
10. Power steering fluid reservoir
(P. 8-11)
11. Battery (P. 8-14)
12. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-5)
WDI0643

VQ40DE engine
(P. 8-13)
2. Fuse/Fusible link box (P. 8-22)
3. Fuse box (P. 8-22)
4. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-7)
5. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-7)
fluid reservoir (P. 8-12)
7. Air cleaner (P. 8-18)
8. Drive belt location (P.8-16)
9. Radiator cap (P. 8-5)
(P. 8-11)
11. Battery (P. 8-14)
12. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-5)
*Engine cover removed for clarity.
LII0167

WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
Warning Name Page Warning Name Page Indicator Name Page

light light light
4WD warning light 2-15 Charge warning 2-17 4WD shift indica- 2-20
( model) light tor light (
model)
Anti-lock Braking 2-15 Door open warn- 2-17
System (ABS) ing light Automatic trans- 2-20
warning light mission position
or
Engine oil pres- 2-17 indicator light (if
sure warning light so equipped)
CRUISE indicator 2-20

Automatic trans- 2-16 Low fuel warning 2-18
light
mission oil tem- light
perature warning Electronic locking 2-21
light (if so Low tire pressure 2-18
rear differential
equipped) warning light
(E-Lock) system
ON indicator light
Automatic trans- 2-16 Low windshield- 2-19
(if so equipped)
mission park washer fluid
warning light warning light (if so Front passenger 2-21
( model) equipped) air bag status
light
Brake warning 2-16 Seat belt warning 2-19
light light and chime High beam indi- 2-21
or cator light (blue)
Supplemental air 2-20
bag warning light

Indicator Name Page Indicator Name Page
light light
Hill descent con- 2-21 Turn signal/ 2-23

trol system ON hazard indicator
indicator light (if lights
so equipped)
Vehicle Dynamic 2-23
Malfunction Indi- 2-21 Control (VDC) OFF
cator Light (MIL) indicator light
Overdrive OFF 2-22

indicator light (if
so equipped)
Security indicator 2-22

light (if so
equipped)
SET indicator light 2-22
Slip indicator light 2-23
Transfer 4LO posi- 2-23

tion indicator light
( model)

1 Safety—Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Pregnant women. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18

Front manual seat adjustment Injured persons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3 Three-point type seat belt with
Front power seat adjustment retractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Seat belt extenders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Rear bench seat (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Jump seat (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7 Child safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Armrest (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7 Infants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Flexible seating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7 Small children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Head restraints/headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10 Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
Adjustable head restraint/headrest Child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
Non-adjustable head restraint/ LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
headrest components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12 CHildren) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-31
Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12 Rear-facing child restraint installation
Install. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13 using LATCH (Crew Cab models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13 Rear-facing child restraint installation
Front-seat active head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14 using LATCH — jump seat
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15 (King Cab® models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37
Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15 Rear-facing child restraint installation
Seat belt warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18 using the seat belts (Crew Cab models). . . . . . .1-41
Rear-facing child restraint installation Forward-facing child restraint
using the seat belts — jump seat installation using the seat belts — front
(King Cab® models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-44 passenger and jump seats
Forward-facing child restraint (King Cab® models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-61
installation using LATCH (Crew Cab Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-68
models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-48 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). . . . . . . . . . . 1-73
Forward-facing child restraint Precautions on SRS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-73
installation using LATCH — jump seat
(King Cab® models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-52 Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . 1-89
Forward-facing child restraint Supplemental air bag warning light. . . . . . . . . . 1-90
installation using the seat belts — front
passenger and rear bench seat
(Crew Cab models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-56
SEATS
∙ Do not leave children unattended in-

side the vehicle. They could unknow-
ingly activate switches or controls or
make the vehicle move. Unattended
children could become involved in se-
rious accidents.
∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the
vehicle and/or its systems, do not
leave children, people who require the
assistance of others or pets unat-
tended in your vehicle. Additionally,
the temperature inside a closed ve-
ARS1152 hicle on a warm day can quickly be-
come high enough to cause a signifi-
WARNING ∙ For the most effective protection cant risk of injury or death to people
when the vehicle is in motion, the seat and pets.
∙ Do not ride in a moving vehicle when
should be upright. Always sit well
the seatback is reclined. This can be ∙ Do not adjust the driver’s seat while
back and upright in the seat with both
dangerous. The shoulder belt will not driving so full attention may be given
feet on the floor and adjust the seat
be against your body. In an accident, to vehicle operation. The seat may
properly. For additional information,
you could be thrown into it and remove suddenly and could cause loss
refer to “Precautions on seat belt us-
ceive neck or other serious injuries. of control of the vehicle.
age” in this section.
You could also slide under the lap belt
∙ The seatback should not be reclined
and receive serious internal injuries. ∙ After adjustment, gently rock in the
any more than needed for comfort.
seat to make sure it is securely locked.
Seat belts are most effective when the
passenger sits well back and straight
up in the seat. If the seatback is re-
clined, the risk of sliding under the lap
belt and being injured is increased.
1-2 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

CAUTION
When adjusting the seat positions, be
sure not to contact any moving parts to
avoid possible injuries and/or damage.
FRONT MANUAL SEAT
ADJUSTMENT (if so equipped)
Your vehicle seats can be adjusted manu-
ally. For additional information about ad-
justing the seats, refer to the steps outlined
in this section.
WRS0175 WRS0176
Forward and backward Reclining
Pull the lever up and hold it while you slide To recline the seatback, pull the lever up
the seat forward or backward to the de- and lean back. To bring the seatback for-
sired position. Release the lever to lock the ward, pull the lever up and lean your body
seat in position. forward. Release the lever to lock the seat-
back in position.
The reclining feature allows adjustment of
the seatback for occupants of different
sizes for added comfort and to help obtain
proper seat belt fit. For additional informa-
tion, refer to “Precautions on seat belt us-
age” in this section. Also, the seatback can
be reclined to allow occupants to rest
when the vehicle is stopped and the shift
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3
lever is in P (Park) or N (Neutral) position
with the parking brake fully applied.
WRS0131 WRS0389
Seat lifter (if so equipped for Lumbar support (if so equipped
driver’s seat) for driver’s seat)
Turn either dial to adjust the angle and The lumbar support feature provides ad-
height of the seat cushion to the desired justable lower back support to the driver.
position. Move the lever forward or backward to ad-
just the seat lumbar area.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of
the seatback for occupants of different
sizes for added comfort and to help obtain
proper seat belt fit. For additional informa-
tion, refer to “Precautions on seat belt us-
age” in this section. Also, the seatback can
be reclined to allow occupants to rest
when the vehicle is stopped and the shift
lever is in P (Park) or N (Neutral) position
with the parking brake fully applied.
LRS2897
FRONT POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT Forward and backward
(if so equipped) Moving the switch as shown will slide the
Operating tips seat forward or backward to the desired
position.
∙ The power seat motor has an auto-
reset overload protection circuit. If the Reclining
motor stops during operation, wait Move the recline switch as shown until the
30 seconds then reactivate the switch. desired angle is obtained.
∙ Do not operate the power seat switch
for a long period of time when the en-
gine is off. This will discharge the bat-
tery.

LRS2898 WRS0389 LRS2903
Seat lifter (driver’s seat) Lumbar support (driver’s seat) REAR BENCH SEAT (if so equipped)
Move the switch as shown to adjust the The lumbar support feature provides ad- The rear bench seat is non-adjustable.
angle and height of the seat cushion. justable lower back support to the driver. However, the seats can be folded up and
Move the lever forward or backward to ad- folded to lay flat. For additional information,
just the seat lumbar area. refer to “Flexible seating” in this section.

∙ Do not allow people to ride in any area
of your vehicle that is not equipped
with seats and seat belts. Be sure ev-
eryone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
∙ Do not allow more than one person to
use the same seat belt.
∙ Do not fold down the rear seats when
occupants are in the rear seat area or
any luggage is on the rear seats.
– Make sure that the seat path is
clear before moving the seat.
LRS0556 LRS2901 – Be careful not to allow hands or
JUMP SEAT (if so equipped) ARMREST (if so equipped) feet to get caught or pinched in the
seat.
WARNING To use the center armrest on the rear
∙ Head restraints/headrests should be
bench seat, pull on the tab in the center of adjusted properly as they may pro-
∙ Do not use a child restraint in the driv- the seat and fold it down as shown.
er’s side jump seat. This seating posi- vide significant protection against in-
tion is not suitable for child restraint FLEXIBLE SEATING jury in an accident. Always replace
installation. A child restraint can be in- and adjust them properly if they have
stalled in the passenger’s side jump been removed for any reason.
WARNING
seat when the seat extension is un- ∙ If the head restraints/headrests are
∙ Never allow anyone to ride in the
folded from the seat base. removed for any reason, they should
cargo area or on the rear seats when
∙ When folding the jump seat, be careful be securely stored to prevent them
they are in the fold-down position. In a
not to squeeze your finger between from causing injury to passengers or
collision, people riding in these areas
the seat cushion and the body side. damage to the vehicle in case of sud-
without proper restraints are more
den braking or an accident.
likely to be seriously injured or killed.

∙ When returning the seatbacks to the
upright position, be certain they are
completely secured in the latched po-
sition. If they are not completely se-
cured, passengers may be injured in
an accident or sudden stop.
∙ Properly secure all cargo to help pre-
vent it from sliding or shifting. Do not
place cargo higher than the seat-
backs. In a sudden stop or collision,
unsecured cargo could cause per-
sonal injury.
LRS2475 LRS2476
Folding the rear bench seat up (if 2. Fold the bottom of the seat cushion
so equipped) toward the back of the vehicle until it
locks in place.
To fold the rear bench seat up:
1. Lift up on the lever, located on the side
of the seat, while lifting the front of the
seat cushion up.

WARNING
∙ When the vehicle is being used to
carry cargo, properly secure all cargo
to help prevent it from sliding or shift-
ing. Do not place cargo higher than
the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col-
lision, unsecured cargo could cause
personal injury.
∙ Do not allow people to ride in any area
with seats and seat belts. Be sure ev-
eryone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly. Never ride
LRS2477 in the rear seat unless the seat bot- LRS2478
3. Repeat this process to raise and secure tom cushions are in place and latched. A. Child restraint anchor points
the seat cushion on the other side of ∙ When returning the seatbacks to the
the vehicle for maximum storage ca- upright position, be certain they are
Folding the rear bench seat down
pacity. completely secured in the latched po- (if so equipped)
To return the rear bench seat to a seating sition. If they are not completely se- The rear bench seatback can be tilted for-
cured, passengers may be injured in
position, reverse the process. Make sure to ward to access the child restraint anchor
an accident or sudden stop.
properly push the seat cushion down point locations or the jacking equipment.
into place.
To tilt the seatback forward, pull the strap
up 䊊 1 and tilt the seatback. The child re-
straint anchor points can be accessed be-
hind the rear bench seatback. The jacking
equipment can be accessed from behind
the passenger’s side seatback.

HEAD RESTRAINTS/HEADRESTS
WARNING WARNING
Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo Head restraints/headrests supplement
area or on the rear seat when it is in the the other vehicle safety systems. They
fold-down position. Use of these areas may provide additional protection
by passengers without proper re- against injury in certain rear end colli-
straints could result in serious injury or sions. Adjustable head
death in an accident or sudden stop. restraints/headrests must be adjusted
properly, as specified in this section.
Check the adjustment after someone
else uses the seat. Do not attach any-
thing to the head restraint/headrest
stalks or remove the head
restraint/headrest. Do not use the seat
if the head restraint/headrest has been LRS2361
removed. If the head restraint/headrest Crew Cab
was removed, reinstall and properly ad-
just the head restraint/headrest before
an occupant uses the seating position.
Failure to follow these instructions can
reduce the effectiveness of the head
restraints/headrests. This may in-
crease the risk of serious injury or death
in a collision.

∙ Your vehicle is equipped with a head
restraint/headrest that may be inte-
grated, adjustable or non-adjustable.
∙ Adjustable head restraints/headrests
have multiple notches along the stalk(s)
to lock them in a desired adjustment
position.
∙ The non-adjustable head
restraints/headrests have a single lock-
ing notch to secure them to the seat
frame.
∙ Proper Adjustment:
LRS2362 – For the adjustable type, align the LRS2300
King Cab® head restraint/headrest so the cen-
ter of your ear is approximately level
ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT/
The illustration shows the seating posi- HEADREST COMPONENTS
tions equipped with head with the center of the head
restraint/headrest. 1. Removable head restraint/headrest
restraints/headrests.
– If your ear position is still higher than
䉱 Indicates the seating position is 2. Multiple notches
the recommended alignment, place
equipped with a head restraint. the head restraint/headrest at the 3. Lock knob
䡲 Indicates the seating position is equipped highest position. 4. Stalks
with a headrest. ∙ If the head restraint/headrest has been
+ Indicates the seating position is not removed, ensure that it is reinstalled
equipped with a head restraint or headrest and locked in place before riding in that
(if applicable). designated seating position.

5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head
restraint/headrest before an occupant
uses the seating position.
LRS2299 LRS2302
NON-ADJUSTABLE HEAD REMOVE
RESTRAINT/HEADREST Use the following procedure to remove the
COMPONENTS head restraint/headrest:
1. Removable head restraint/headrest 1. Pull the head restraint/headrest up to
2. Single notch the highest position.
3. Lock knob 2. Push and hold the lock knob.
4. Stalks 3. Remove the head restraint/headrest
from the seat.
4. Store the head restraint/headrest
properly in a secure place so it is not
loose in the vehicle.

LRS2303 WRS0134 LRS2351
INSTALL ADJUST For non-adjustable head restraint/
headrest
1. Align the head restraint/headrest For adjustable head restraint/headrest
stalks with the holes in the seat. Make Make sure the head restraint/headrest is
Adjust the head restraint/headrest so the positioned so the lock knob is engaged in
sure that the head restraint/headrest is
center is level with the center of your ears. If the notch before riding in that designated
facing the correct direction. The stalk
with the notch (notches) 䊊 1 must be your ear position is still higher than the seating position.
recommended alignment, place the head
installed in the hole with the lock knob
䊊2 . restraint/headrest at the highest position.
2. Push and hold the lock knob and push

the head restraint/headrest down.
3. Properly adjust the head restraint/
headrest before an occupant uses the
seating position.

LRS2305 LRS2306 SPA1025
Raise Lower FRONT-SEAT ACTIVE HEAD
To raise the head restraint/headrest, pull it To lower, push and hold the lock knob and RESTRAINTS
up. push the head restraint/headrest down.
WARNING
Make sure the head restraint/headrest is Make sure the head restraint/headrest is
positioned so the lock knob is engaged in positioned so the lock knob is engaged in ∙ Always adjust the head restraints
the notch before riding in that designated the notch before riding in that designated properly as specified in this section.
seating position. seating position. Failure to do so can reduce the effec-
tiveness of the active head restraint.
∙ Active head restraints are designed to
supplement other safety systems. Al-
ways wear seat belts. No system can
prevent all injuries in any accident.

SEAT BELTS
∙ Do not attach anything to the head

restraint stalks. Doing so could impair
active head restraint function.
The active head restraint moves forward
utilizing the force that the seatback re-
ceives from the occupant in a rear-end col-
lision. The movement of the head restraint
helps support the occupant’s head by re-
ducing its backward movement and help-
ing absorb some of the forces that may
lead to whiplash-type injuries.
Active head restraints are effective for col-
lisions at low to medium speeds in which it
is said that whiplash injury occurs most. SSS0136
PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces
Active head restraints operate only in cer- or territories specify that seat belts be
tain rear-end collisions. After the collision, USAGE
worn at all times when a vehicle is being
the head restraints return to their original driven.
If you are wearing your seat belt properly
positions.
adjusted and you are sitting upright and
Properly adjust the active head restraints well back in your seat with both feet on the
as described in this section. floor, your chances of being injured or killed
in a collision and/or the severity of injury
may be greatly reduced. NISSAN strongly
encourages you and all of your passengers
to buckle up every time you drive, even if
your seating position includes a supple-
mental air bag.

SSS0134 SSS0016
WARNING WARNING
∙ Every person who drives or rides in ∙ The seat belt should be properly ad-
this vehicle should use a seat belt at justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so
all times. Children should be in the may reduce the effectiveness of the
rear seats and in an appropriate entire restraint system and increase
restraint. the chance or severity of injury in an
accident. Serious injury or death can
occur if the seat belt is not worn
properly.

∙ Be sure the seat belt tongue is se- ∙ Once seat belt pretensioner(s) have
curely fastened to the proper buckle. activated, they cannot be reused and
must be replaced together with the
∙ Do not wear the seat belt inside out or
retractor. It is recommended that you
twisted. Doing so may reduce its
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
effectiveness.
∙ All seat belt assemblies, including re-
∙ Do not allow more than one person to
tractors and attaching hardware,
use the same seat belt.
should be inspected after any colli-
∙ Never carry more people in the vehicle sion. It is recommended that you visit
than there are seat belts. a NISSAN dealer for this service.
∙ If the seat belt warning light glows NISSAN recommends that all seat belt
continuously while the ignition is assemblies in use during a collision be
turned ON with all doors closed and all replaced unless the collision was mi-
SSS0014 seat belts fastened, it may indicate a nor and the belts show no damage
malfunction in the system. Have the and continue to operate properly.
WARNING system checked. It is recommended Seat belt assemblies not in use during
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this a collision should also be inspected
∙ Always route the shoulder belt over
service. and replaced if either damage or im-
your shoulder and across your chest.
proper operation is noted.
Never put the belt behind your back, ∙ No changes should be made to the
under your arm or across your neck. seat belt system. For example, do not ∙ All child restraints and attaching
The belt should be away from your modify the seat belt, add material, or hardware should be inspected after
face and neck, but not falling off your install devices that may change the any collision. Always follow the re-
shoulder. seat belt routing or tension. Doing so straint manufacturer’s inspection in-
may affect the operation of the seat structions and replacement recom-
∙ Position the lap belt as low and snug
belt system. Modifying or tampering mendations. The child restraints
as possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT
with the seat belt system may result should be replaced if they are
THE WAIST. A lap belt worn too high
in serious personal injury. damaged.
could increase the risk of internal inju-
ries in an accident.

For additional information, refer to “Warn- THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT
ing lights, indicator lights and audible re- WITH RETRACTOR
minders” in the “Instruments and controls”
WARNING
PREGNANT WOMEN ∙ Every person who drives or rides in
NISSAN recommends that pregnant this vehicle should use a seat belt at
women use seat belts. The seat belt should all times. Children should be in the
be worn snug and always position the lap rear seats and in an appropriate
belt as low as possible around the hips, not restraint.
the waist. Place the shoulder belt over your ∙ Do not ride in a moving vehicle when
shoulder and across your chest. Never run the seatback is reclined. This can be
the lap/shoulder belt over your abdominal dangerous. The shoulder belt will not
area. Contact your doctor for specific rec- be against your body. In an accident,
LRS0786 ommendations. you could be thrown into it and re-
SEAT BELT WARNING LIGHT INJURED PERSONS ceive neck or other serious injuries.
You could also slide under the lap belt
Both the driver’s and passenger’s front NISSAN recommends that injured persons and receive serious internal injuries.
seats are equipped with a seat belt warn- use seat belts. Check with your doctor for
ing light. The warning light, located on the ∙ For the most effective protection
specific recommendations.
instrument panel, will show the status of when the vehicle is in motion, the seat
the driver and passenger seat belt. should be upright. Always sit well
back and upright in the seat with both
NOTE: feet on the floor and adjust the seat
belt properly.
The front passenger seat belt warning
light will not light up if the seat is not
occupied.

∙ Do not allow children to play with the
seat belts. Most seating positions are
equipped with Automatic Locking Re-
tractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the
seat belt becomes wrapped around a
child’s neck with the ALR mode acti-
vated, the child can be seriously in-
jured or killed if the seat belt retracts
and becomes tight. This can occur
even if the vehicle is parked. Unbuckle
the seat belt to release the child. If the
seat belt cannot be unbuckled or is
already unbuckled, release the child
by cutting the seat belt with a suitable
tool (such as a knife or scissors) to WRS0175
release the seat belt. Manual front seat shown (if so equipped)
Fastening the seat belts (front
seats all models and rear seats
Crew Cab models)

LRS2897 LRS2674
Power front seat shown (if so equipped) 2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the re-
1. Adjust the seat. For additional informa- tractor and insert the tongue into the
tion, refer to “Seats” in this section. buckle 䊊A until you hear and feel the
latch engage.
∙ The retractor is designed to lock
during a sudden stop or on impact.
A slow pulling motion permits the
seat belt to move, and allows you
some freedom of movement in the
seat.
∙ If the seat belt cannot be pulled
from its fully retracted position,
firmly pull the belt and release it.
Then smoothly pull the belt out of
the retractor.
The ELR mode allows the seat belt to ex- WARNING
tend and retract to allow the driver and
passengers some freedom of movement When fastening the seat belts, be cer-
in the seat. The ELR locks the seat belt tain that the seatbacks are completely
when the vehicle slows down rapidly or secured in the latched position. If they
during certain impacts. are not completely secured, passengers
may be injured in an accident or sudden
The ALR mode (child restraint mode) locks stop.
the seat belt for child restraint installation.
When the ALR mode is activated, the seat
belt cannot be extended again until the
seat belt tongue is detached from the
buckle and fully retracted. The seat belt re-
turns to the ELR mode after the seat belt
LRS2675
fully retracts. For additional information, re-
3. Position the lap belt portion low and fer to “Child restraints” in this section.
snug on the hips 䊊B as shown.
The ALR mode should be used only for
4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward child restraint installation. During nor-
the retractor to take up extra slack 䊊C .
mal seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR
Be sure the shoulder belt is routed over
mode should not be activated. If it is ac-
your shoulder and across your chest.
tivated it may cause uncomfortable seat
The front passenger seat and the rear belt tension. It can also change the op-
seating positions’ three-point seat belts eration of the front passenger air bag.
have two modes of operation: For additional information, refer to
∙ Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) “Front passenger air bag and status
light” in this section.
∙ Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR)

LRS0556 LRS2723 LRS2724
Fastening the seat belts ( jump 2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the re- 3. Position the lap belt portion low and
seats for King Cab® models) tractor and insert the tongue into the snug on the hips 䊊B as shown.
buckle 䊊A until you hear and feel the
1. Open the jump seat. For additional in- 4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward
latch engage.
formation, refer to “Seats” in this sec- the retractor to take up extra slack 䊊C .
tion. ∙ The retractor is designed to lock dur- Be sure the shoulder belt is routed over
ing a sudden stop or on impact. A your shoulder and across your chest.
slow pulling motion permits the seat
The jump seat position’s three-point seat
belt to move, and allows you some
belts have two modes of operation:
freedom of movement in the seat.
∙ Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
∙ If the seat belt cannot be pulled from
its fully retracted position, firmly pull ∙ Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
the belt and release it. Then smoothly
pull the belt out of the retractor.

The ELR mode allows the seat belt to ex- WARNING
tend and retract to allow the passengers
some freedom of movement in the seat. When fastening the seat belts, be cer-
The ELR locks the seat belt when the ve- tain that the seatbacks are completely
hicle slows down rapidly or during certain secured in the latched position. If they
impacts. are not completely secured, passengers
may be injured in an accident or sudden
The ALR mode (child restraint mode) locks stop.
the seat belt for child restraint installation.
When the ALR mode is activated, the seat
belt cannot be extended again until the
seat belt tongue is detached from the
buckle and fully retracted. The seat belt re-
turns to the ELR mode after the seat belt
WRS0139
fully retracts. For additional information, re-
fer to “Child restraints” in this section. Unfastening the seat belts
The ALR mode should be used only for To unfasten the seat belt, press the button
child restraint installation. During nor- on the buckle 䊊 1 . The seat belt automati-
mal seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR cally retracts.
mode should not be activated. If it is ac-
tivated it may cause uncomfortable seat
Checking seat belt operation
belt tension. It can also change the op- Seat belt retractors are designed to lock
eration of the front passenger air bag. seat belt movement by two separate
For additional information, refer to methods:
“Front passenger air bag and status
light” in this section. ∙ When the seat belt is pulled quickly from
the retractor
∙ When the vehicle slows down rapidly

To increase your confidence in the seat WARNING
belts, check the operation as follows:
∙ After adjustment, release the adjust-
∙ Grasp the shoulder belt and pull for- ment button and try to move the
ward quickly. The retractor should lock shoulder belt anchor up and down to
and restrict further belt movement. make sure it is securely fixed in
If the retractor does not lock during this position.
check, get the system checked. It is recom- ∙ The shoulder belt anchor height
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for should be adjusted to the position
this service or to learn more about seat belt best for you. Failure to do so may re-
operation. duce the effectiveness of the entire
restraint system and increase the
chance or severity of injury in an
accident.
LRS0242
Shoulder belt height adjustment SEAT BELT EXTENDERS
(front seats) If, because of body size or driving position, it
is not possible to properly fit the
The shoulder belt anchor height should be lap/shoulder belt and fasten it, an extender
adjusted to the position best for you. For that is compatible with the installed seat
additional information, refer to “Precau- belts is available for purchase. The ex-
tions on seat belt usage” in this section. To tender adds approximately 8 in (200 mm)
adjust, pull out the adjustment button 䊊 1
of length and may be used for either the
and move the shoulder belt anchor to the driver or front passenger seating position.
desired position 䊊2 , so the belt passes over
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
the center of the shoulder. The belt should dealer for assistance with purchasing an
be away from your face and neck, but not extender if an extender is required.
falling off your shoulder. Release the ad-
justment button to lock the shoulder belt
anchor into position.
CHILD SAFETY
WARNING ∙ If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt WARNING

guide of the seat belt anchors, the
∙ Only NISSAN seat belt extenders, seat belts may retract slowly. Wipe the Do not allow children to play with the
made by the same company which shoulder belt guide with a clean, dry seat belts. Most seating positions are
made the original equipment seat cloth. equipped with Automatic Locking Re-
belts, should be used with NISSAN tractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat
seat belts. ∙ Periodically check to see that the seat belt becomes wrapped around a child’s
belt and the metal components, such neck with the ALR mode activated, the
∙ Adults and children who can use the as buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible child can be seriously injured or killed if
standard seat belt should not use an wires and anchors, work properly. If the seat belt retracts and becomes
extender. Such unnecessary use loose parts, deterioration, cuts or other tight. This can occur even if the vehicle
could result in serious personal injury damage on the webbing is found, the is parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to re-
in the event of an accident. entire seat belt assembly should be release the child. If the seat belt cannot be
∙ Never use seat belt extenders to in- placed. unbuckled or is already unbuckled, re-
stall child restraints. If the child release the child by cutting the seat belt
straint is not secured properly, the with a suitable tool (such as a knife or
child could be seriously injured or scissors) to release the seat belt.
killed in a collision or a sudden stop.
Children need adults to help protect
SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE them. They need to be properly re-
strained.
∙ To clean the seat belt webbing, apply
a mild soap solution or any solution rec- In addition to the general information in
ommended for cleaning upholstery or this manual, child safety information is
available from many other sources, includ-
carpet. Then wipe with a cloth and allow
ing doctors, teachers, government traffic
the seat belts to dry in the shade. Do not
safety offices, and community organiza-
allow the seat belts to retract until they tions. Every child is different, so be sure to
are completely dry. learn the best way to transport your child.

There are three basic types of child re- All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or Vehicle Safety Standards. You should choose
straint systems: territories require the use of approved child a child restraint that fits your vehicle and
restraints for infants and small children. For always follow the manufacturer’s instruc-
∙ Rear-facing child restraint
additional information, refer to “Child re- tions for installation and use.
∙ Forward-facing child restraint straints” in this section. SMALL CHILDREN
∙ Booster seat A child restraint may be secured in the vehicle
Children that are over 1 year old and weigh
The proper restraint depends on the child’s by using either the LATCH (Lower Anchors at least 20 lbs. (9 kg) should remain in a
size. Generally, infants up to about 1 year and Tethers for CHildren) system or with the rear-facing child restraint as long as pos-
and less than 20 lbs. (9 kg) should be placed vehicle seat belt. For additional information, sible up to the height or weight limit of the
in rear-facing child restraints. Forward- refer to “Child restraints” in this section. child restraint. Children who outgrow the
facing child restraints are available for chil- height or weight limit of the rear-facing
NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens
dren who outgrow rear-facing child re- child restraint and are at least 1 year old
and children be restrained in the rear
straints and are at least 1 year old. Booster should be secured in a forward-facing child
seats are used to help position a vehicle seat if available (Crew Cab models). Stud-
ies show that children are safer when restraint with a harness. Refer to the manu-
lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no facturer’s instructions for minimum and
longer use a forward-facing child restraint. properly restrained in the rear seat than
in the front seat. maximum weight and height recommen-
dations. NISSAN recommends that small
WARNING This is especially important because children be placed in child restraints that
Infants and children need special pro- your vehicle has a supplemental re- comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
tection. The vehicle’s seat belts may not straint system (air bag system) for the Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle
fit them properly. The shoulder belt may front passenger. For additional informa- Safety Standards. You should choose a
come too close to the face or neck. The tion, refer to “Supplemental Restraint child restraint that fits your vehicle and al-
lap belt may not fit over their small hip System (SRS)” in this section. ways follow the manufacturer’s instruc-
bones. In an accident, an improperly fit- tions for installation and use.
INFANTS
ting seat belt could cause serious or fa-
tal injury. Always use appropriate child Infants up to at least 1 year old should be
restraints. placed in a rear-facing child restraint. NISSAN
recommends that infants be placed in child
restraints that comply with Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor
LARGER CHILDREN A booster seat should be used until the
child can pass the seat belt fit test below:
Children should remain in a forward-facing
child restraint with a harness until they ∙ Are the child’s back and hips against the
reach the maximum height or weight limit vehicle seatback?
allowed by the child restraint manufac- ∙ Is the child able to sit without slouch-
turer. ing?
Once a child outgrows the height or weight ∙ Do the child’s knees bend easily over
limit of the harness-equipped forward- the front edge of the seat with feet flat
facing child restraint, NISSAN recommends on the floor?
that the child be placed in a commercially
available booster seat to obtain proper ∙ Can the child safely wear the seat belt
seat belt fit. For a seat belt to fit properly, the (lap belt low and snug across the hips
booster seat should raise the child so that and shoulder belt across mid-chest
the shoulder belt is properly positioned and shoulder)? LRS2690
across the chest and the top, middle por- ∙ Is the child able to use the properly ad- If you answered no to any of these ques-
tion of the shoulder. The shoulder belt justed head restraint/headrest? tions, the child should remain in a booster
should not cross the neck or face and seat using a three-point type seat belt.
should not fall off the shoulder. The lap belt ∙ Will the child be able to stay in position
should lie snugly across the lower hips or for the entire ride? NOTE:
upper thighs, not the abdomen. A booster
seat can only be used in seating positions Laws in some communities may follow
that have a three-point type seat belt. The different guidelines. Check local and
booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and state regulations to confirm your child is
have a label certifying that it complies with using the correct restraint system before
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or traveling.
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.

CHILD RESTRAINTS
WARNING
Never let a child stand or kneel on any
seat and do not allow a child in the
cargo area. The child could be seriously
injured or killed in a sudden stop or
collision.
ARS1098 WRS0256
PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD
RESTRAINTS
WARNING
∙ Failure to follow the warnings and in-
structions for proper use and installa-
tion of child restraints could result in
serious injury or death of a child or
other passengers in a sudden stop or
collision:
– Do not install rear-facing child re-
straints in the driver’s side rear
seating position.

– For forward-facing child seats and – Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air – A child restraint with a top tether
boosters, DO NOT install if the child Bag System, never install a rear- strap should not be used in the
restraint base extends past the facing child restraint in the front front passenger seat (King Cab®
forward edge of the seat cushion. seat. An inflating air bag could se- models).
riously injure or kill a child. A rear-
– The child restraint must be used – Keep seatbacks as upright as pos-
facing child restraint must only be
and installed properly. Always fol- sible after fitting the child
used in the rear seat.
low all of the child restraint manu- restraint.
facturer’s instructions for installa- – Be sure to purchase a child re-
– Infants and children should always
tion and use. straint that will fit the child and ve-
be placed in an appropriate child
hicle. Some child restraints may
– Infants and children should never restraint while in the vehicle.
not fit properly in your vehicle.
be held on anyone’s lap. Even the
∙ When the child restraint is not in use,
strongest adult cannot resist the – Child restraint anchorages are de-
keep it secured with the LATCH system
forces of a collision. signed to withstand only those
or a seat belt. In a sudden stop or col-
loads imposed by correctly fitted
– Do not put a seat belt around both lision, loose objects can injure occu-
child restraints. Under no circum-
a child and another passenger. pants or damage the vehicle.
stances are they to be used to at-
– NISSAN recommends that all child tach adult seat belts, or other items
restraints be installed in the rear or equipment to the vehicle. Doing CAUTION
seat. Studies show that children so could damage the child re- A child restraint in a closed vehicle can
are safer when properly restrained straint anchorages. The child re- become very hot. Check the seating
in the rear seat than in the front straint will not be properly in- surface and buckles before placing a
seat. If you must install a forward- stalled using the damaged child in the child restraint.
facing child restraint in the front anchorage, and a child could be se-
seat, refer to “Forward-facing child riously injured or killed in a
restraint installation using the seat collision.
belts” in this section.
– Never use the anchor points for
adult seat belts, or other items.

This vehicle is equipped with a universal ∙ If the child restraint is compatible with All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
child restraint anchor system, referred to your vehicle, place your child in the child territories require that infants and small
as the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers restraint and check the various adjust- children be restrained in an approved
for CHildren) system. Some child restraints ments to be sure the child restraint is child restraint at all times while the ve-
include rigid or webbing-mounted attach- compatible with your child. Choose a hicle is being operated. Canadian law re-
ments that can be connected to these an- child restraint that is designed for your quires the top tether strap on forward-
chors. For additional information, refer to child’s height and weight. Always follow facing child restraints be secured to the
“LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for all recommended procedures. designated anchor point on the vehicle.
CHildren) system” in this section. ∙ If the combined weight of the child and
child restraint is less than 65 lbs.
If you do not have a LATCH compatible
(29.5 kg), you may use either the LATCH
child restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be
anchors or the seat belt to install the
used. child restraint (not both at the same
Several manufacturers offer child re- time).
straints for infants and children of various ∙ If the combined weight of the child and
sizes. When selecting any child restraint, child restraint is greater than 65 lbs.
keep the following points in mind: (29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not
∙ Choose only a restraint with a label cer- the lower anchors) to install the child
tifying that it complies with Federal Mo- restraint.
tor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Cana- ∙ Be sure to follow the child restraint
dian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213. manufacturer’s instructions for installa-
tion.
∙ Check the child restraint in your vehicle
to be sure it is compatible with the vehi-
cle’s seat and seat belt system.

LATCH lower anchor
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and in-
structions for proper use and installa-
tion of child restraints could result in
serious injury or death of a child or
other passengers in a sudden stop or
collision:
– Attach LATCH system compatible
child restraints only at the loca-
tions shown in the illustration.
LRS2962 LRS2963
– Do not secure a child restraint in
the center rear seating position us-
LATCH system lower anchor locations LATCH system lower anchor locations ing the LATCH lower anchors. The
(Crew Cab models) (King Cab® models) child restraint will not be secured
LATCH (Lower Anchors and cle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to properly.
Tethers for CHildren) SYSTEM install the child restraint. Be sure to follow
the child restraint manufacturer’s instruc- – Inspect the lower anchors by in-
Your vehicle is equipped with special an- tions for installation. serting your fingers into the lower
chor points that are used with LATCH sys- anchor area. Feel to make sure
tem compatible child restraints. This sys- The LATCH lower anchor points are pro- there are no obstructions over the
tem may also be referred to as the ISOFIX vided to install child restraints in the rear anchors such as seat belt webbing
or ISOFIX compatible system. With this sys- outboard seating positions only. Do not at- or seat cushion material. The child
tem, you do not have to use a vehicle seat tempt to install a child restraint in the cen- restraint will not be secured prop-
belt to secure the child restraint unless the ter position using the LATCH lower an- erly if the lower anchors are
combined weight of the child and child re- chors. obstructed.
straint exceeds 65 lbs., (29.5 kg). If the com-
bined weight of the child and child restraint
is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg) use the vehi-
Child restraint anchorages are de-
signed to withstand only those loads
imposed by correctly fitted child re-
straints. Under no circumstances are
they to be used to attach adult seat
belts, or other items or equipment to
the vehicle. Doing so could damage the
child restraint anchorages. The child re-
straint will not be properly installed us-
ing the damaged anchorage, and a
child could be seriously injured or killed
in a collision.
LRS3036 LRS2984
LATCH lower anchor location LATCH label locations (Crew Cab models)
LATCH lower anchor location
The LATCH lower anchors are located as
shown. A label is attached to the seatback
(Crew Cab models) to help you locate the
LATCH lower anchors.

Top tether anchor
WARNING
∙ Do not allow cargo to contact the top
tether strap when it is attached to the
top tether anchor. Properly secure the
cargo so it does not contact the top
tether strap. Cargo that is not properly
secured or cargo that contacts the top
tether strap may damage it during a
collision. A child could be seriously in-
jured or killed in a collision if the top
tether strap is damaged.
LRS0661 LRS0662 ∙ Child restraint anchorages are de-
LATCH webbing-mounted attachment LATCH rigid-mounted attachment signed to withstand only those loads
Installing child restraint LATCH When installing a child restraint, carefully imposed by correctly fitted child re-
read and follow the instructions in this straints. Under no circumstances are
lower anchor attachments they to be used to attach adult seat
manual and those supplied with the child
LATCH compatible child restraints include restraint. belts, or other items or equipment to
two rigid or webbing-mounted attach- the vehicle. Doing so could damage
ments that can be connected to two an- the child restraint anchorages. The
chors located at certain seating positions child restraint will not be properly in-
stalled using the damaged anchor-
in your vehicle. With this system, you do not
ages, and a child could be seriously
have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the
injured or killed in a collision.
child restraint. Check your child restraint for
a label stating that it is compatible with
LATCH. This information may also be in the
instructions provided by the child restraint
manufacturer.

LRS0572 LRS0393 LRS2101
Front passenger seat (King Cab® models) Rear bench seat (Crew Cab models) Jump seats
1. Top tether strap ∙ Under the rear window behind the rear (King Cab® models - passenger side
bench seat (Crew Cab models) as shown)
2. Anchor point
shown. 1. Cover plate
Top tether anchor point locations 2. Routing bracket
Anchor points are located in the following 3. Anchor point
locations:
∙ On the floor between the jump seat belt
∙ On the back of the front passenger seat buckles in the center of the vehicle (King
(King Cab® models) as shown. Cab® models) as shown.
The anchor point is located on the floor
between the jump seat belt buckles in the
center of the vehicle. The routing bracket is
located behind the cover plate under the
rear window above the jump seat.
REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
INSTALLATION USING LATCH (Crew
Cab models)
For additional information, refer to all Warn-
ings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and
“Child restraints” sections of this manual
before installing a child restraint.
Do not use the lower anchors if the com-
bined weight of the child and the child re-
straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-
bined weight of the child and the child
restraint is greater than 65 lbs., (29.5 kg) use
the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower an-
LRS2997 LRS2996
chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure
to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s Rear-facing webbing-mounted – step 2 Rear-facing rigid-mounted – step 2
instructions for installation. 2. Secure the child restraint anchor at-
tachments to the LATCH lower an-
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing chors. Check to make sure the LATCH
child restraint in the rear seats using the attachment is properly attached to the
LATCH system: lower anchors.
1. Position the child restraint on the seat.
Always follow the child restraint manu-
facturer’s instructions.

the vehicle seat belt (if applicable). Not
all child restraints fit in all types of ve-
hicles.
5. Check to make sure the child restraint
is properly secured prior to each use. If
the child restraint is loose, repeat
steps 2 through 4.
LRS0673 LRS0674
Rear-facing – step 3 Rear-facing – step 4
3. For child restraints that are equipped 4. After attaching the child restraint, test
with webbing-mounted attachments, it before you place the child in it. Push it
remove any additional slack from the from side to side while holding the child
anchor attachments. Press downward restraint near the LATCH attachment
and rearward firmly in the center of the path. The child restraint should not
child restraint with your hand to com- move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from
press the vehicle seat cushion and side to side. Try to tug it forward and
seatback while tightening the webbing check to see if the LATCH attachment
of the anchor attachments.
holds the restraint in place. If the re-
straint is not secure, tighten the LATCH
attachment as necessary, or put the
restraint in another seat and test it
again. You may need to try a different
child restraint or try installing by using
– Do not install a child restraint sys-
tem on the passenger’s side jump
seat without unfolding the seat
extender.
LRS2357 LRS2356
REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT WARNING
INSTALLATION USING LATCH — ∙ To install a rear-facing child restraint
JUMP SEAT (King Cab® models) on the passenger’s side jump seat, it
will be necessary to move the front
WARNING passenger’s seat fully forward and
∙ If a child restraint system is not in- place the front seatback upright or tilt
stalled properly, the child could be se- it forward. Failure to do so may cause
riously injured or killed in a sudden the child restraint to not be installed
stop or collision. properly and cause serious injury or
death in a sudden stop or collision.
– Never install a rear-facing child re-
straint system on the driver’s side
jump seat.

– The front seat cannot be used Follow these steps to install a child re-
when a rear-facing child restraint straint on the jump seat.
is installed on the jump seat. At- 1. To access the jump seat extension
tempting to do so could cause se- (passenger’s side only) 䊊 A on the jump
rious injury in a sudden stop or seat, pull up 䊊 B on the extension to un-
collision. fold it to the open position. Then unfold
the two support legs 䊊 C and lower the
jump seat to the full open seating posi-
tion.
LRS2725
restraint is greater than 65 lbs., (29.5 kg) use
to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for installation.

LRS2502 LRS2552 LRS2997
Full open seating position Rear-facing — step 2 Rear-facing webbing-mounted – step 4
2. Move the front passenger’s seat into 4. Secure the child restraint anchor at-
the full forward position. Then move tachments to the LATCH lower an-
the front seatback to the upright or chors. Check to make sure the LATCH
tilted forward position. Position the attachment is properly attached to the
child restraint on the jump seat. The lower anchors.
direction of the child restraint depends
on the type of the child restraint and
the size of the child. Always follow the
child restraint manufacturer’s instruc-
tions.

LRS2996 LRS0673 LRS0674
Rear-facing rigid-mounted – step 4 Rear-facing – step 5 Rear-facing – step 6
child restraint with your hand to com- move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from
of the anchor attachments.
child restraint or try installing by using
the vehicle seat belt (if applicable). Not Do not use the lower anchors if the com-
all child restraints fit in all types of ve- bined weight of the child and the child re-
hicles. straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-
7. Check to make sure the child restraint restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use
is properly secured prior to each use. If the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower an-
the child restraint is loose, repeat chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure
steps 1 through 6. to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT Follow these steps to install a rear-facing
child restraint using the vehicle seat belts in
BELTS (Crew Cab models) the rear seats:
WARNING
WRS0256
The three-point seat belt with Auto-
Rear-facing – step 1
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be
used when installing a child restraint. 1. Child restraints for infants must be
Failure to use the ALR mode will result in used in the rear-facing direction and
the child restraint not being properly therefore must not be used in the
secured. The restraint could tip over or front seat. Position the child restraint
be loose and cause injury to a child in a on the seat. Always follow the child re-
sudden stop or collision. Also, it can straint manufacturer’s instructions.
change the operation of the front pas-
senger air bag. For additional informa-
tion, refer to “Front passenger air bag
and status light” in this section.
WRS0761 LRS0669 LRS0670
Rear-facing – step 2 Rear-facing – step 3 Rear-facing – step 4
2. Route the seat belt tongue through the 3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is 4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on
child restraint and insert it into the fully extended. At this time, the seat belt the shoulder belt to remove any slack
buckle until you hear and feel the latch retractor is in the ALR mode (child re- in the belt.
engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint mode). It reverts to the ELR
straint manufacturer’s instructions for mode when the seat belt is fully re-
belt routing. tracted.

7. Check to make sure that the child re-
straint is properly secured prior to each
use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat
steps 3 through 6.
After the child restraint is removed and the
seat belt fully retracted, the ALR mode
(child restraint mode) is canceled.
WRS0762 WRS0763
Rear-facing – step 5 Rear-facing – step 6
5. Remove any additional slack from the 6. After attaching the child restraint, test
seat belt; press downward and rear- it before you place the child in it. Push it
ward firmly in the center of the child from side to side while holding the child
restraint to compress the vehicle seat restraint near the seat belt path. The
cushion and seatback while pulling up child restraint should not move more
on the seat belt. than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side.
Try to tug it forward and check to see if
the belt holds the restraint in place. If
the restraint is not secure, tighten the
seat belt as necessary, or put the re-
straint in another seat and test it again.
You may need to try a different child
restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all
types of vehicles.

WARNING
∙ The three-point seat belt with Auto-
used when installing a child restraint.
Failure to use the ALR mode will result
in the child restraint not being prop-
erly secured. The restraint could tip
over or be loose and cause injury to a
child in a sudden stop or collision.
Also, it can change the operation of
the front passenger air bag. For addi-
tional information, refer to “Front pas-
senger air bag and status light” in this
LRS0597 section. LRS0549
REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT ∙ A child restraint system will not be in-
stalled properly and the child could be
WARNING
INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT seriously injured or killed in a sudden ∙ To install a rear-facing child restraint
BELTS — JUMP SEAT (King Cab® stop or collision. on the passenger’s side jump seat, it
models) – Never install a rear-facing child re-
will be necessary to move the front
passenger’s seat fully forward and
straint system on the driver’s side
place the front seatback upright or tilt
jump seat.
it forward. Failure to do so may cause
– Do not install a child restraint sys- the child restraint to not be installed
tem on the passenger’s side jump properly and cause serious injury or
seat without unfolding the seat death in a sudden stop or collision.
extender.

– The front seat cannot be used Follow these steps to install a child re-
when a rear-facing child restraint straint on the passenger’s side jump seat.
is installed on the jump seat. At- 1. To access the jump seat extension 䊊 A
tempting to do so could cause se- on the passenger’s side jump seat, pull
rious injury in a sudden stop or up 䊊B on the extension to unfold it to
collision. the open position. Then unfold the two
support legs 䊊 C and lower the jump
seat to the full open seating position.
LRS2725
restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use

LRS2502 LRS2552 LRS2726
Full open seating position Rear-facing — step 2 Rear-facing — step 3
2. Move the front passenger’s seat into 3. Route the seat belt tongue through the
the full forward position. Then move child restraint and insert it into the
the front seatback to the upright or buckle until you hear and feel the latch
tilted forward position. Position the engage 䊊 A .
child restraint on the jump seat. The
Be sure to follow the child restraint
direction of the child restraint depends
manufacturer’s instructions for belt
on the type of the child restraint and
routing.
the size of the child. Always follow the
child restraint manufacturer’s instruc-
tions.

LRS2727 LRS2728 WRS0762
Rear-facing — step 4 Rear-facing — step 5 Rear-facing – step 6
4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is 5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on 6. Remove any additional slack from the
fully extended 䊊 B . At this time, the seat the shoulder belt 䊊 C to remove any seat belt; press downward and rear-
belt retractor is in the ALR mode (child slack in the belt. ward firmly in the center of the child
restraint mode). It reverts to the ELR restraint to compress the vehicle seat
mode when the seat belt is fully re- cushion and seatback while pulling up
tracted. on the seat belt.

8. Check to make sure that the child re- Follow these steps to install a forward-
straint is properly secured prior to each facing child restraint in the rear seats using
use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat the LATCH system:
steps 3 through 7.
After the child restraint is removed and the Always follow the child restraint manu-
seat belt fully retracted, the ALR mode facturer’s instructions.
FORWARD-FACING CHILD
RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING
LATCH (Crew Cab models)
WRS0918 “Child restraints” sections of this manual
Rear-facing — step 7 before installing a child restraint.
7. After attaching the child restraint, test it Do not use the lower anchors if the com-
before you place the child in it. Push it bined weight of the child and the child re-
from side to side while holding the seat straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-
near the seat belt path. The child re- bined weight of the child and the child
straint should not move more than restraint is greater than 65 lbs., (29.5 kg) use
1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try to the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower an-
tug it forward and check to see if the chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure
seat belt holds the restraint in place. If to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
the restraint is not secure, tighten the instructions for installation.
seat belt as necessary, or put the re-
types of vehicles.
ditional information, refer to “Head
restraints/headrests” in this section.
If the seating position does not have
an adjustable head restraint/headrest
and it is interfering with the proper
child restraint fit, try another seating
position or a different child restraint.
LRS2995 LRS2994
Forward-facing webbing-mounted – Forward-facing rigid-mounted – step 2
step 2 Do not install child restraints that re-
2. Secure the child restraint anchor at- quire the use of a top tether strap in
tachments to the LATCH lower an- seating positions that do not have a
chors. Check to make sure the LATCH top tether anchor.
attachment is properly attached to the
3. The back of the child restraint should
lower anchors.
be secured against the vehicle seat-
If the child restraint is equipped with a back.
top tether strap, route the top tether
If necessary, adjust or remove the head
strap and secure the tether strap to
restraint/headrest to obtain the cor-
the tether anchor point. For additional
rect child restraint fit. If the head
information, refer to “Installing top
restraint/headrest is removed, store it
tether strap” in this section.
in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall
the head restraint/headrest when
the child restraint is removed. For ad-
steps 3 through 6.
LRS0671 WRS0697
Forward-facing – step 4 Forward-facing – step 6
child restraint with your knee to com- move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from
of the anchor attachments. holds the restraint in place. If the re-
5. Tighten the tether strap according to
the manufacturer’s instructions to re-
move any slack.
child restraint. Not all child restraints fit
in all types of vehicles.
restraint is removed. For additional in-
formation, refer to “Head
2. Position the top tether strap as shown.
3. Secure the tether strap to the tether
anchor point as shown.
4. Return the seatback to the locked po-
sition.
5. Refer back to child restraint installation
steps before tightening the tether
strap.
If you have any questions when install-
LRS0392 LRS0576
ing a top tether strap, it is recommended
Anchor point access Rear bench seat (Crew Cab models) that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
1. Pull strap 1. Top tether strap service.
2. Anchor points 2. Tether strap
Installing top tether strap (rear 3. Tether anchor point
bench seat for Crew Cab models) Before securing the child restraint with the
LATCH lower anchors (rear outboard seat-
To access the anchor points behind the
ing positions for Crew Cab models) follow
rear bench seat, tilt the rear seatback for-
ward by lifting up on the pull strap behind these steps.
the seatback. 1. If necessary, raise or remove the head
restraint/headrest to position the top
tether strap as shown. If the head
in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the
head restraint/headrest when the child
– Do not install a child restraint sys-
seat without unfolding the seat
extender.
– For forward-facing child seats and
boosters, DO NOT install if the child
restraint base extends past the
forward edge of the driver’s side
seat cushion.
LRS2360 LRS2725
FORWARD-FACING CHILD For additional information, refer to all Warn-
RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING ings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and
LATCH — JUMP SEAT (King Cab® before installing a child restraint.
models)
WARNING straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-
∙ If a child restraint system is not in- bined weight of the child and the child
stalled properly, the child could be se- restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use
riously injured or killed in a sudden the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower an-
stop or collision. chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure
Follow these steps to install a child re-
straint on the jump seat.
1. To access the jump seat extension
(passenger’s side only) 䊊 A on the jump
seat, pull up 䊊 B on the extension to un-
fold it to the open position. Then unfold
the two support legs 䊊 C and lower the
jump seat to the full open seating posi-
tion.
LRS2502 LRS2995
Full open seating position Forward-facing webbing-mounted –
2. Position the child restraint on the seat. step 3
Always follow the child restraint manu- 3. Secure the child restraint anchor at-
facturer’s instructions. tachments to the LATCH lower an-
chors. Check to make sure the LATCH
attachment is properly attached to the
lower anchors.
If the child restraint is equipped with a
tether strap” in this section. Do not in-
stall child restraints that require the
use of a top tether strap in seating po-
LRS2994 LRS0671
Forward-facing rigid-mounted – step 3 Forward-facing – step 5
sitions that do not have a top tether 5. For child restraints that are equipped
anchor. with webbing-mounted attachments,
remove any additional slack from the
4. The back of the child restraint should anchor attachments. Press downward
be secured against the vehicle seat- and rearward firmly in the center of the
back. child restraint with your knee to com-
If necessary, adjust or remove the head press the vehicle seat cushion and
restraint/headrest to obtain the cor- seatback while tightening the webbing
rect child restraint fit. If the head of the anchor attachments.
restraint/headrest is removed, store it 6. Tighten the tether strap according to
in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the manufacturer’s instructions to re-
the head restraint/headrest when move any slack.
steps 1 through 7.
WRS0697 LRS0561
Forward-facing – step 7 Jump seat (King Cab® models)
7. After attaching the child restraint, test it 1. Top tether strap
before you place the child in it. Push it
2. Routing bracket
from side to side while holding the child
restraint near the LATCH attachment 3. Tether anchor point
path. The child restraint should not
move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from
side to side. Try to tug it forward and
check to see if the LATCH attachment
attachment as necessary, or put the re-
types of vehicles.
Installing top tether strap — jump The child restraint top tether strap must be FORWARD-FACING CHILD
seat (King Cab® models) used when installing the child restraint with RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING
LATCH lower anchor attachments. THE SEAT BELTS — FRONT
WARNING First, secure the child restraint with the PASSENGER AND REAR BENCH
∙ Do not secure the top tether strap to LATCH lower anchors (rear seating posi- SEAT (Crew Cab models)
the routing bracket. If the child re- tions).
straint is not anchored properly, the 1. Pull the cover plate off to access the top WARNING
risk of a child being injured or killed in
tether strap routing bracket for the The three-point seat belt with Auto-
a collision or a sudden stop greatly
jump seat. matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be
increases.
∙ Child restraint anchorages are de- 2. Route the top tether strap through the
Failure to use the ALR mode will result in
signed to withstand only those loads routing bracket.
the child restraint not being properly
imposed by correctly fitted child re- 3. Secure the top tether strap to the secured. The restraint could tip over or
straints. Under no circumstances are tether anchor point as shown. be loose and cause injury to a child in a
they to be used to attach adult seat sudden stop or collision. Also, it can
belts, or other items or equipment to 4. Refer back to child restraint installation change the operation of the front pas-
the vehicle. Doing so could damage steps before tightening the tether senger air bag. For additional informa-
the child restraint anchorages. The strap. tion, refer to “Front passenger air bag
child restraint will not be properly in- and status light” in this section.
stalled using the damaged anchor- If you have any questions when install-
ages, and a child could be seriously ing a top tether strap, it is recommended
injured or killed in a collision. that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.

Follow these steps to install a forward- If the seating position does not have
facing child restraint using the vehicle seat an adjustable head restraint/headrest
belt in the rear seats (Crew Cab models) or and it is interfering with the proper
in the front passenger seat: child restraint fit, try another seating
1. If you must install a child restraint in
the front seat, it should be placed in a
forward-facing direction only. Move
the seat to the rearmost position.
Child restraints for infants must be
used in the rear-facing direction and
therefore must not be used in the
front seat.
WRS0699
Forward-facing (front passenger seat) –
step 1
For additional information, refer to all Warn- The back of the child restraint should
ings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and be secured against the vehicle seat-
“Child restraints” sections of this manual back.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head
Do not use the lower anchors if the com- restraint/headrest to obtain the cor-
bined weight of the child and the child re- rect child restraint fit. If the head
straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com- restraint/headrest is removed, store it
bined weight of the child and the child in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall
restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use the head restraint/headrest when
the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower an- the child restraint is removed. For ad-
chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure ditional information, refer to “Head
to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s restraints/headrests” in this section.
Do not install child restraints that re-
quire the use of a top tether strap in
seating positions that do not have a
top tether anchor.
WRS0680 LRS0667
Forward-facing – step 3 Forward-facing – step 4
3. Route the seat belt tongue through the 4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is
child restraint and insert it into the fully extended. At this time, the seat belt
buckle until you hear and feel the latch retractor is in the ALR mode (child re-
engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint mode). It reverts to ELR mode
straint manufacturer’s instructions for when the seat belt is fully retracted.
belt routing.
the tether anchor point (rear seat in-
stallation only). For additional informa-
tion, refer to “Installing top tether strap”
in this section.

LRS0668 WRS0681 WRS0698
Forward-facing – step 5 Forward-facing – step 6 Forward-facing – step 8
5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on 6. Remove any additional slack from the 8. After attaching the child restraint, test
the shoulder belt to remove any slack seat belt; press downward and rear- it before you place the child in it. Push it
in the belt. ward firmly in the center of the child from side to side while holding the child
restraint with your knee to compress restraint near the seat belt path. The
the vehicle seat cushion and seatback child restraint should not move more
while pulling up on the seat belt. than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side.
7. Tighten the tether strap according to Try to tug it forward and check to see if
the manufacturer’s instructions to re- the seat belt holds the restraint in
move any slack. place. If the restraint is not secure,
tighten the seat belt as necessary, or
put the restraint in another seat and
test it again. You may need to try a
different child restraint. Not all child re-
straints fit in all types of vehicles.

the seat belt is not locked, repeat
steps 3 through 8.
WRS0475 LRS0392
Forward-facing – step 10 Anchor point access
10. If the child restraint is installed in the 1. Pull strap
front passenger seat, place the ignition
2. Anchor points
switch in the ON position. The front
passenger air bag status light Installing top tether strap (rear
should illuminate. If this light is not illu- bench seat for Crew Cab models)
minated, refer to "Front passenger air
bag and status light" in this section. To access the anchor points behind the
Move the child restraint to another rear bench seat, tilt the rear seatback for-
seating position. Have the system ward by lifting up on the pull strap behind
checked. It is recommended that you the seatback.
seat belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode

in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the
head restraint/headrest when the child
restraint is removed. For additional in-
formation, refer to “Head restraints/
headrests” in this section.
2. Position the top tether strap as shown.
3. Secure the tether strap to the tether
anchor point as shown.
4. Return the seatback to the locked po-
sition.
5. Refer back to child restraint installation
steps before tightening the tether
LRS0576 strap. LRS0598
Rear bench seat (Crew Cab models) If you have any questions when install- FORWARD-FACING CHILD
1. Top tether strap ing a top tether strap, it is recommended RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING
2. Tether strap that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
THE SEAT BELTS — FRONT
3. Tether anchor point PASSENGER AND JUMP SEATS
The child restraint top tether strap must be (King Cab® models)
used when installing the child restraint with
the seat belts.
First, secure the child restraint with the seat
belt.
1. If necessary, raise or remove the head
tether strap as shown. If the head
WARNING
∙ The three-point seat belt with Auto-
Failure to use the ALR mode will result
in the child restraint not being prop-
erly secured. The restraint could tip
over or be loose and cause injury to a
child in a sudden stop or collision.
Also, it can change the operation of
the front passenger air bag. For addi-
tional information, refer to “Front pas-
senger air bag and status light” in this
section. WRS0699 LRS2725
∙ If a child restraint system is not in- Forward-facing (front passenger seat) — Forward-facing ( jump seat for King Cab®
stalled properly, the child could be se- step 1 models) — step 2
riously injured or killed in a sudden For additional information, refer to all Warn- Follow these steps to install a forward-
stop or collision. ings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and facing child restraint using the vehicle seat
– Do not install a child restraint sys- “Child restraints” sections of this manual belt in the jump seats (King Cab® models)
tem on the passenger’s side jump before installing a child restraint. or in the front passenger seat:
seat without unfolding the seat Do not use the lower anchors if the com- 1. If you must install a child restraint in
extender. bined weight of the child and the child re- the front seat, it should be placed in a
– For forward-facing child seats and straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com- forward-facing direction only. Move
boosters, DO NOT install if the child bined weight of the child and the child the seat to the rearmost position.
restraint system base extends restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg) use Child restraints for infants must be
past the forward edge of the driv- the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower an- used in the rear-facing direction and
er’s side seat cushion. chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure therefore must not be used in the
to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s front seat.
LRS2502 WRS0919
Full open seating position Forward-facing — step 3
2. To access the jump seat extension 3. Position the child restraint on the seat.
(passenger’s side only) 䊊A on the jump Always follow the child restraint manu-
seat, pull up 䊊 B on the extension to facturer’s instructions.
unfold it to the open position. Then un-
fold the two support legs 䊊 C and lower The back of the child restraint should be
secured against the vehicle seatback.
the jump seat to the full open seating
position. If necessary, adjust or remove the head
restraint/headrest to obtain the cor-
rect child restraint fit. If the head
in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall
the head restraint/headrest when
Do not install child restraints that re-
quire the use of a top tether strap to
seating positions that do not have a
top tether anchor.
WRS0680 LRS0667
Forward-facing — step 4 Forward-facing — step 5
4. Route the seat belt tongue through the 5. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is
child restraint and insert it into the fully extended. At this time, the seat belt
buckle until you hear and feel the latch retractor is in the ALR mode (child re-
engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint mode). It reverts to the ELR
straint manufacturer’s instructions for mode when the seat belt is fully re-
belt routing. tracted.
tether strap” in this section.

LRS0668 WRS0681 WRS0698
Forward-facing — step 6 Forward-facing – step 7 Forward-facing — step 9
6. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on 7. Remove any additional slack from the 9. After attaching the child restraint, test
the shoulder belt to remove any slack seat belt; press downward and rear- it before you place the child in it. Push it
in the belt. ward firmly in the center of the child from side to side while holding the seat
restraint with your knee to compress near the seat belt path. The child re-
the vehicle seat cushion and seatback straint should not move more than
while pulling up on the seat belt. 1 inch (25 mm) from side to side. Try to
8. Tighten the tether strap according to tug it forward and check to see if the
the manufacturer’s instructions to re- belt holds the restraint in place. If the
move any slack. restraint is not secure, tighten the belt
as necessary, or put the restraint in an-
other seat and test it again. You may
need to try a different child restraint.
Not all child restraints fit in all types of
vehicles.

10. Check to make sure that the child re-
straint is properly secured prior to each
use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat
steps 3 through 9.
WRS0475 LRS0572
Forward-facing — step 11 Front passenger seat (King Cab® models)
11. If the child restraint is installed in the 1. Top tether strap
2. Anchor point
switch in the ON position. The front pas-
senger air bag status light should
illuminate. If this light is not illuminated,
refer to “Front passenger air bag and
status light” in this section. Move the
child restraint to another seating po-
sition. Have the system checked. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
seat belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode

Installing top tether strap — front restraint/headrest when the child re-
passenger seat (King Cab® straint is removed. For additional infor-
mation, refer to “Head
models) restraints/headrests” in this section.
WARNING 2. Position the top tether strap as shown.

Child restraint anchorages are de- 3. Secure the tether strap to the tether
signed to withstand only those loads anchor point as shown.
imposed by correctly fitted child re- 4. Tighten the tether strap according to
straints. Under no circumstances are the manufacturer’s instructions to re-
they to be used to attach adult seat move any slack.
belts, or other items or equipment to
the vehicle. Doing so could damage the If you have any questions when install-
child restraint anchorages. The child re- ing a top tether strap, it is recommended
straint will not be properly installed us- that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this LRS0561
ing the damaged anchorages, and a service. Jump seat (King Cab® models)
child could be seriously injured or killed 1. Top tether strap
in a collision.
2. Routing bracket
The child restraint top tether strap must be 3. Tether anchor point
the seat belts.
belt.
1. If necessary, raise or remove the head
tether straps over the top of the seat-
back. If the head restraint/headrest is
removed, store it in a secure place. Be
sure to reinstall the head
Installing top tether strap — jump 1. Pull the cover plate off to access the top Precautions on booster seats
seat (King Cab® models) tether strap routing bracket for the
jump seat. WARNING
WARNING 2. Route the top tether strap through the If a booster seat and seat belt are not
routing bracket. used properly, the risk of a child being
∙ Do not secure the top tether strap to
the routing bracket. If the child re- 3. Secure the top tether strap to the injured or killed in a sudden stop or col-
straint is not anchored properly, the tether anchor point as shown. lision greatly increases:
risk of a child being injured or killed in – Make sure the shoulder portion of
a collision or a sudden stop greatly 4. Refer back to child restraint installation
steps before tightening the tether the belt is away from the child’s
increases. face and neck and the lap portion
strap.
∙ Child restraint anchorages are de- of the belt does not cross the
signed to withstand only those loads If you have any questions when install- stomach.
imposed by correctly fitted child re- ing a top tether strap, it is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this – Make sure the shoulder belt is not
straints. Under no circumstances are behind the child or under the
they to be used to attach adult seat service.
child’s arm.
belts, or other items or equipment to BOOSTER SEATS
the vehicle. Doing so could damage – A booster seat must only be in-
the child restraint anchorages. The For additional information on installing a stalled in a seating position that
child restraint will not be properly in- booster seat in your vehicle, follow the in- has a lap/shoulder belt.
stalled using the damaged anchor- structions outlined in this section.
ages, and a child could be seriously
injured or killed in a collision.
The child restraint top tether strap must be
the seat belts.
belt.

LRS2479 LRS0453 LRS0464
A. Low back booster seat Booster seats of various sizes are offered ∙ Make sure the child’s head will be prop-
by several manufacturers. When selecting erly supported by the booster seat or
B. High back booster seat
any booster seat, keep the following points vehicle seat. The seatback must be at
in mind: or above the center of the child’s ears.
For example, if a low back booster seat
∙ Choose only a booster seat with a label
is chosen, the vehicle seatback must be
certifying that it complies with Federal
at or above the center of the child’s ears.
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or
If the seatback is lower than the center
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-
of the child’s ears, a high back booster
dard 213.
seat should be used.
∙ Check the booster seat in your vehicle
to be sure it is compatible with the vehi-
cle’s seat and seat belt system.

∙ If the booster seat is compatible with Follow these steps to install a booster seat
your vehicle, place the child in the in the rear seat or in the front passenger
booster seat and check the various ad- seat:
justments to be sure the booster seat is
compatible with the child. Always follow
all recommended procedures.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories require that infants and small
children be restrained in an approved
child restraint at all times while the ve-
hicle is being operated.
The instructions in this section apply to
booster seat installation in the rear seats
or the front passenger seat. WRS0699
Booster seat installation — front 1. If you must install a booster seat in

the front seat, move the seat to the
passenger seat (all models) and rearmost position.
rear seat (Crew Cab models)
2. Position the booster seat on the seat.
WARNING Only place it in a front-facing direction.
Always follow the booster seat manu-
To avoid injury to child, do not use the facturer’s instructions.
lap/shoulder belt in the Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) mode when us-
ing a booster seat with the seat belts.
ings and Cautions in the “Child safety”,
“Child restraints” and “Booster seats” sec-
tions of this manual before installing a child
restraint.
booster seat fit, try another seating
position or a different booster seat.
4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt
low and snug on the child’s hips. Be
sure to follow the booster seat manu-
facturer’s instructions for adjusting the
seat belt routing.
5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the
seat belt toward the retractor to take
up extra slack. Be sure the shoulder
LRS0454 belt is positioned across the top, WRS0475
Front passenger position middle portion of the child’s shoulder.
7. If the booster seat is installed in the
3. The booster seat should be positioned Be sure to follow the booster seat
on the vehicle seat so that it is stable. manufacturer’s instructions for adjust-
ing the seat belt routing. switch in the ON position. The front pas-
If necessary, adjust or remove the head senger air bag status light may or
restraint/headrest to obtain the cor- 6. Follow the warnings, cautions and in- may not illuminate, depending on the
rect booster seat fit. If the head structions for properly fastening a seat size of the child and the type of booster
restraint/headrest is removed, store it belt shown in “Three-point type seat seat being used. For additional infor-
in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall belt with retractor” in this section.
mation, refer to “Front passenger air
the head restraint/headrest when bag and status light” in this section.
the booster seat is removed. For ad-

Booster seat installation — jump
seat (King Cab® models)
WARNING
∙ If a child restraint system is not in-
stalled properly, the child could be se-
riously injured or killed in a sudden
stop or collision.
– For boosters, DO NOT install if the
child restraint system base ex-
tends past the forward edge of the
seat cushion.
– Do not install a child restraint sys- LRS2725 LRS2502
seat without unfolding the seat 1. To access the jump seat extension
extender. (passenger’s side only) 䊊 A on the jump
seat, pull up 䊊 B on the extension to un-
∙ To avoid injury to child, do not use the fold it to the open position. Then unfold
lap/shoulder belt in the Automatic the two support legs 䊊 C and lower the
Locking Retractor (ALR) mode when jump seat to the full open seating posi-
using a booster seat with the seat tion.
belts.
ings and Cautions in the “Child safety”,
“Child restraints” and “Booster seats” sec-
tions of this manual before installing a child
restraint.
Follow these steps to install a booster seat
in the jump seats:

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
(SRS)
If the seating position does not have PRECAUTIONS ON SRS

and it is interfering with the proper This SRS section contains important infor-
booster seat fit, try another seating mation concerning the following systems:
position or a different booster seat. ∙ Driver and front passenger supplemen-
4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt tal front-impact air bag (NISSAN Ad-
low and snug on the child’s hips. Be vanced Air Bag System)
sure to follow the booster seat manu-
facturer’s instructions for adjusting the ∙ Front seat-mounted side-impact
seat belt routing. supplemental air bag
5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the ∙ Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and
seat belt toward the retractor to take rollover supplemental air bag
up extra slack. Be sure the shoulder ∙ Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front
LRS0539 belt is positioned across the top, seats)
2. Position the booster seat on the seat. middle portion of the child’s shoulder.
Be sure to follow the booster seat Supplemental front-impact air bag sys-
Only place it in a front-facing direction. tem
Always follow the booster seat manu- manufacturer’s instructions for adjust-
facturer’s instructions. ing the seat belt routing. The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can
6. Follow the warnings, cautions and in- help cushion the impact force to the head
3. The booster seat should be positioned and chest of the driver and front passenger
on the vehicle seat so that it is stable. structions for properly fastening a seat
belt shown in “Three-point type seat in certain frontal collisions.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head belt with retractor” in this section. Front seat-mounted side-impact
restraint/headrest to obtain the cor- supplemental air bag system
rect booster seat fit. If the head
restraint/headrest is removed, store it This system can help cushion the impact
in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall force to the chest area of the driver and
the head restraint/headrest when front passenger in certain side-impact col-
the booster seat is removed. For ad- lisions. The side air bags are designed to
ditional information, refer to “Head inflate on the side where the vehicle is im-
restraint/headrest” in this section. pacted.
Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and
rollover supplemental air bag system
This system can help cushion the impact
force to the head of occupants in front and
rear outboard seating positions in certain
side-impact or rollover collisions. In a side-
impact, the curtain air bags are designed
to inflate on the side where the vehicle is
impacted. In a rollover, the curtain air bags
are designed to inflate and remain inflated
for a short time.
The SRS is designed to supplement the
crash protection provided by the seat belts
and is not a substitute for them. Seat belts WRS0031
should always be correctly worn and the
occupant seated a suitable distance away WARNING
from the steering wheel, instrument panel ∙ The front air bags ordinarily will not
and door finishers. For additional informa- inflate in the event of a side impact,
tion, refer to “Seat belts” in this section. rear impact, rollover, or lower severity
The supplemental air bags operate only frontal collision. Always wear your
when the ignition switch is in the ON or seat belts to help reduce the risk or
START position. severity of injury in various kinds of
accidents.
After placing the ignition switch in the
ON position, the supplemental air bag ∙ The front passenger air bag will not
warning light illuminates. The supple- inflate if the passenger air bag status
mental air bag warning light will turn off light is lit or if the front passenger seat
after about 7 seconds if the system is is unoccupied. For additional infor-
operational. mation, refer to “Front passenger air
bag and status light” in this section.

∙ The seat belts and the front air bags ∙ The front passenger seat is equipped
are most effective when you are sit- with an occupant classification sen-
ting well back and upright in the seat. sor (pressure sensor) that turns the
The front air bags inflate with great front passenger air bag OFF under
force. Even with the NISSAN Advanced some conditions. This sensor is only
Air Bag System, if you are unre- used in this seat. Failure to be properly
strained, leaning forward, sitting side- seated and wearing the seat belt can
ways or out of position in any way, you increase the risk or severity of injury in
are at greater risk of injury or death in an accident. For additional informa-
a crash. You may also receive serious tion, refer to “Front passenger air bag
or fatal injuries from the front air bag and status light” in this section.
if you are up against it when it inflates.
∙ Keep hands on the outside of the
Always sit back against the seatback
steering wheel. Placing them inside
and as far away as practical from the
the steering wheel rim could increase
steering wheel or instrument panel.
the risk that they are injured when the
Always properly use the seat belts.
front air bag inflates.
∙ The driver and front passenger seat
belt buckles are equipped with sen-
sors that detect if the seat belts are
fastened. The NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System monitors the severity of a
collision and seat belt usage, then in-
flates the air bags as needed. Failure
to properly wear seat belts can in-
crease the risk or severity of injury in
an accident.

ARS1133 ARS1041
WARNING
∙ Never let children ride unrestrained or
extend their hands or face out of the
window. Do not attempt to hold them
in your lap or arms. Some examples of
dangerous riding positions are shown
in the illustrations.

ARS1042 ARS1043 ARS1044
WARNING
∙ Children may be severely injured or
killed when the front air bags, side air
bags or curtain air bags inflate if they
are not properly restrained. Pre-teens
and children should be properly re-
strained in the rear seat, if possible.

ARS1045 WRS0256 WRS0431
Do not lean against the door.
WARNING
WARNING
∙ Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System, never install a rear- Front seat-mounted side-impact
facing child restraint in the front seat. supplemental air bags and roof-
An inflating front air bag could seri- mounted curtain side-impact and roll-
ously injure or kill your child. For addi- over supplemental air bags:
tional information, refer to “Child re- ∙ The side air bags and curtain air bags
straints” in this section. ordinarily will not inflate in the event
of a frontal impact, rear impact, or
lower severity side collision. Always
wear your seat belts to help reduce
the risk or severity of injury in various
kinds of accidents.

WARNING
∙ The seat belts, the side air bags and
curtain air bags are most effective
when you are sitting well back and
upright in the seat. The side air bag
and curtain air bag inflate with great
force. Do not allow anyone to place
their hand, leg or face near the side air
bag on the side of the seatback of the
front seat or near the side roof rails.
Do not allow anyone sitting in the
front seats or rear outboard seats to
extend their hand out of the window
LRS0396 SSS0162 or lean against the door. Some ex-
Do not lean against doors or windows. Do not lean against doors or windows. amples of dangerous riding positions
are shown in the previous
illustrations.

LRS0421 SSS0159
WARNING
∙ When sitting in the rear seat, do not
hold onto the seatback of the front
seat. If the side air bag inflates, you
may be seriously injured. Be espe-
cially careful with children, who
should always be properly restrained.
Some examples of dangerous riding
positions are shown in the
illustrations.
∙ Do not use seat covers on the front
seatbacks. They may interfere with
side air bag inflation.

NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System
(front seats)
and rollover supplemental air bag infla-
tors
2. Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front
seats)
3. Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag module
and rollover supplemental air bags
5. Seat belt buckle switches
6. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)
7. Front door satellite sensor (driver’s side
shown; passenger’s side similar)
8. Supplemental front-impact air bag
modules
9. Crash zone sensor
10. Occupant classification system control
unit
11. Occupant classification sensor (pres-
sure sensor)
LRS3124 12. Satellite sensors

This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN front passenger, it additionally monitors lease of smoke. This smoke is not harmful
Advanced Air Bag System for the driver and the weight of an occupant or object on the and does not indicate a fire. Care should be
front passenger seats. This system is de- seat and seat belt tension. Based on infor- taken to not inhale it, as it may cause irrita-
signed to meet certification requirements mation from the sensors, only one front air tion and choking. Those with a history of a
under U.S. regulations. It is also permitted in bag may inflate in a crash, depending on breathing condition should get fresh air
Canada. However, all of the information, the crash severity and whether the front promptly.
cautions and warnings in this manual occupants are belted or unbelted. Addi-
Front air bags, along with the use of seat
still apply and must be followed. tionally, the front passenger air bag may be
belts, help to cushion the impact force on
automatically turned off under some con-
The driver supplemental front-impact air the face and chest of the front occupants.
ditions, depending on the weight detected
bag is located in the center of the steering They can help save lives and reduce seri-
on the front passenger seat and how the
wheel. The front passenger supplemental ous injuries. However, an inflating front air
seat belt is used. If the front passenger air
front-impact air bag is mounted in the bag may cause facial abrasions or other
bag is OFF, the front passenger air bag sta-
dashboard above the glove box. The front injuries. Front air bags do not provide re-
tus light will be illuminated (if the seat is
air bags are designed to inflate in higher straint to the lower body.
unoccupied, the light will not be illumi-
severity frontal collisions, although they
nated, but the air bag will be off). For addi- Even with NISSAN Advanced Air Bags, seat
may inflate if the forces in another type of
tional information, refer to “Front passen- belts should be correctly worn and the
collision are similar to those of a higher
ger air bag and status light” in this section.
severity frontal impact. They may not in- driver and front passenger seated upright
One front air bag inflating does not indicate
flate in certain frontal collisions. Vehicle as far as practical away from the steering
improper performance of the system.
damage (or lack of it) is not always an indi- wheel or instrument panel. The front air
cation of proper front air bag system op- If you have any questions about your air bags inflate quickly in order to help protect
eration. bag system, it is recommended that you the front occupants. Because of this, the
visit a NISSAN dealer to obtain information force of the front air bag inflating can in-
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System
about the system. If you are considering crease the risk of injury if the occupant is
monitors information from the crash zone
modification of your vehicle due to a dis- too close to, or is against, the front air bag
sensor, the Air bag Control Unit (ACU), seat
ability, you may also contact NISSAN. Con- module during inflation.
belt buckle sensors, occupant classifica-
tact information is contained in the front of
tion sensor (pressure sensor) and passen- The front air bags deflate quickly after a
this Owner’s Manual.
ger seat belt tension sensor. Inflator opera-
collision.
tion is based on the severity of a collision When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud
and seat belt usage for the driver. For the noise may be heard, followed by the re-
The front air bags operate only when the Status light
ignition switch is in the ON or START po- The front passenger air bag status
sition. light is located near the climate con-
After placing the ignition switch in the trols. After the ignition switch is placed in
ON position, the supplemental air bag the "ON" position, the front passenger air
warning light illuminates. The supple- bag status light on the instrument panel
mental air bag warning light will turn off illuminates for about 7 seconds and then
after about 7 seconds if the system is turns off or remains illuminated depending
operational. on the front passenger seat occupied sta-
tus. The light operates as follows:
∙ Unoccupied front passenger’s seat:
The light is OFF and the front pas-
senger air bag is OFF and will not inflate
WRS0475 in a crash.
Front passenger air bag and status light ∙ Front passenger’s seat occupied by a
small adult, child or child restraint as
WARNING outlined in this section: The light
illuminates to indicate that the front
The front passenger air bag is designed
passenger air bag is OFF and will not
to automatically turn OFF under some
inflate in a crash.
conditions. Read this section carefully
to learn how it operates. Proper use of ∙ Occupied front passenger seat and the
the seat, seat belt and child restraints is passenger meet the conditions out-
necessary for most effective protec- lined in this section: The light is
tion. Failure to follow all instructions in OFF to indicate that the front passen-
this manual concerning the use of ger air bag is operational.
seats, seat belts and child restraints can
increase the risk or severity of injury in
an accident.

Front passenger air bag the air bag to turn OFF. Occupant classifi- seated and wearing the seat belt properly
The front passenger air bag is designed to cation sensor operation can vary depend- for the most effective protection by the
automatically turn OFF when the vehicle is ing on the front passenger seat belt sen- seat belt and supplemental air bag.
operated under some conditions as de- sors.
NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and
scribed below in accordance with U.S. regu- The front passenger seat belt sensors are children be properly restrained in a rear
lations. If the front passenger air bag is OFF designed to detect if the seat belt is buck- seat. NISSAN also recommends that ap-
it will not inflate in a crash. The driver air bag led and the amount of tension on the seat propriate child restraints and booster
and other air bags in your vehicle are not
belt, such as when it is in the Automatic seats be properly installed in a rear seat. If
part of this system.
Locking Retractor (ALR) mode (child re- this is not possible, the occupant classifica-
The purpose of the regulation is to help straint mode). Based on the weight on the tion sensor and seat belt sensors are de-
reduce the risk of injury or death from an seat detected by the occupant classifica- signed to operate as described above to
inflating air bag to certain front passenger tion sensor and the belt tension detected turn the front passenger air bag OFF for
seat occupants, such as children, by requir- on the seat belt, the NISSAN Advanced Air specified child restraints as required by the
ing the air bag to be automatically turned Bag System determines whether the front regulations. Failing to properly secure child
OFF. Certain sensors are used to meet the passenger air bag should be automatically restraints and to use the ALR mode may
requirements. turned OFF as required by the regulations. allow the restraint to tip or move in a colli-
sion or sudden stop. This can also result in
One sensor used is the occupant classifi- Front passenger seat adult occupants who
the passenger air bag inflating in a crash
cation sensor (pressure sensor). It is in the are properly seated and using the seat belt
instead of being OFF. For additional infor-
bottom of the front passenger seat cush- as outlined in this manual should not
mation, refer to “Child restraints” in this sec-
ion and is designed to detect an occupant cause the front passenger air bag to be
tion.
and objects on the seat by weight. It works automatically turned OFF. For small adults
together with seat belt sensors described it may be turned OFF, however, if the occu- If the front passenger seat is not occupied,
in this section. For example, if a child is in pant does not sit in the seat properly (for the front passenger air bag is designed not
the front passenger seat, the NISSAN Ad- example, by not sitting upright, by sitting on to inflate in a crash. However, heavy objects
vanced Air Bag System is designed to turn an edge of the seat, or by otherwise being placed on the seat could result in air bag
the front passenger air bag OFF in accor- out of position), this could cause the sensor inflation, because of the object’s weight de-
dance with the regulations. Also, if a child to turn the air bag OFF. In addition, if the tected by the occupant classification sen-
restraint of the type specified in the regula- occupant improperly uses the seat belt in sor. Other conditions could also result in air
tions is on the seat, its weight and the the ALR mode, this could cause the air bag bag inflation, such as if a child is standing
child’s weight can be detected and cause to be turned OFF. Always be sure to be on the seat, or if two children are on the
seat, contrary to the instructions in this status light is not illuminated, reposition is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
manual. Always be sure that you and all the occupant or child restraint in a rear dealer for this service.
vehicle occupants are seated and re- seat.
Other supplemental front-impact air
strained properly.
If the front passenger air bag status light bag precautions
Using the front passenger air bag status will not illuminate even though you believe
light, you can monitor when the front pas- that the child restraint, the seat belts and WARNING
senger air bag is automatically turned OFF the occupant are properly positioned, the ∙ Do not place any objects on the steer-
with the seat occupied. The light will not system may be sensing an unoccupied ing wheel pad or on the instrument
illuminate when the front passenger seat is seat (in which case the air bag is OFF). A panel. Also, do not place any objects
unoccupied. NISSAN dealer can check that the system is between any occupant and the steer-
OFF by using a special tool. However, until ing wheel or instrument panel. Such
If an adult occupant is in the seat but the
you have confirmed with a dealer that your objects may become dangerous pro-
front passenger air bag status light is illu-
air bag is working properly, reposition the jectiles and cause injury if the front air
minated (indicating that the air bag is OFF),
occupant or child restraint in a rear seat. bags inflate.
it could be that the person is a small adult,
or is not sitting on the seat properly or not The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System and ∙ Immediately after inflation, several
using the seat belt properly. front passenger air bag status light will front air bag system components will
take a few seconds to register a change in be hot. Do not touch them; you may
If a child restraint must be used in the front the passenger seat status. For example, if a severely burn yourself.
seat, the front passenger air bag status large adult who is sitting in the front pas-
light may or may not be illuminated, de- ∙ No unauthorized changes should be
senger seat exits the vehicle, the front pas- made to any components or wiring of
pending on the size of the child and the senger air bag status light will go from OFF the supplemental air bag system. This
type of child restraint being used. If the air to ON for a few seconds and then to OFF. is to prevent accidental inflation of
bag status light is not illuminated (indicat- This is normal system operation and does the supplemental air bag or damage
ing that the air bag might inflate in a crash), not indicate a malfunction. to the supplemental air bag system.
it could be that the child restraint or seat
If a malfunction occurs in the front passen-
belt is not being used properly. Make sure
ger air bag system, the supplemental air
that the child restraint is installed properly,
bag warning light , located in the me-
the seat belt is used properly and the occu-
ter and gauges area of the instrument
pant is positioned properly. If the air bag
panel, will blink. Have the system checked. It
∙ Do not make unauthorized changes ∙ No unauthorized changes should be When selling your vehicle, we request that
to your vehicle’s electrical system, made to any components or wiring of you inform the buyer about the front air
suspension system or front end struc- the seat belt system. This may affect bag system and guide the buyer to the
ture. This could affect proper opera- the front air bag system. Tampering appropriate sections in this Owner’s
tion of the front air bag system. with the seat belt system may result Manual.
in serious personal injury.
∙ Tampering with the front air bag sys-
tem may result in serious personal in- ∙ It is recommended that you visit a
jury. Tampering includes changes to NISSAN dealer for work on and around
the steering wheel and the instru- the front air bag. It is also recom-
ment panel assembly by placing ma- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
terial over the steering wheel pad and for installation of electrical equip-
above the instrument panel or by in- ment. The Supplemental Restraint
stalling additional trim material System (SRS) wiring harnesses*
around the air bag system. should not be modified or discon-
nected. Unauthorized electrical test
∙ Modifying or tampering with the front
equipment and probing devices
passenger seat may result in serious
should not be used on the air bag
personal injury. For example, do not
system.
change the front seats by placing ma-
terial on the seat cushion or by install- ∙ A cracked windshield should be re-
ing additional trim material, such as placed immediately by a qualified re-
seat covers, on the seat that are not pair facility. A cracked windshield
specifically designed to assure proper could affect the function of the
air bag operation. Additionally, do not supplemental air bag system.
stow any objects under the front pas-
senger seat or the seat cushion and *The SRS wiring harness connectors are
seatback. Such objects may interfere yellow and orange for easy identifica-
with the proper operation of the occu- tion.
pant classification sensor (pressure
sensor).

sion are similar to those of a higher severity air bag or curtain air bag may cause abra-
impact. They are designed to inflate on the sions or other injuries. Side air bags and
side where the vehicle is impacted. They curtain air bags do not provide restraint to
may not inflate in certain side collisions. the lower body.
Curtain air bags are also designed to inflate The seat belts should be correctly worn
in certain types of rollover collisions or near and the driver and passenger seated up-
rollovers. As a result, certain vehicle move- right as far as practical away from the side
ments (for example, during severe off- air bag. Rear seat passengers should be
roading) may cause the curtain air bags to seated as far away as practical from the
inflate. door finishers and side roof rails. The side
air bags and curtain air bags inflate quickly
Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always
in order to help protect the occupants. Be-
an indication of proper side air bag and
cause of this, the force of the side air bag
curtain air bag operation.
LRS2501 and curtain air bag inflating can increase
When the side air bags and curtain air bags the risk of injury if the occupant is too close
Front seat-mounted side-impact inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard, to, or is against, these air bag modules dur-
supplemental air bag and followed by release of smoke. This smoke is ing inflation. The side air bag will deflate
roof-mounted curtain side- not harmful and does not indicate a fire. quickly after the collision is over.
Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it
impact and rollover supplemental may cause irritation and choking. Those
The curtain air bags will remain inflated for
air bag systems a short time.
with a history of a breathing condition
The side air bags are located in the outside should get fresh air promptly. The side air bags and curtain air bags
operate only when the ignition switch is
of the seatback of the front seats. The cur- Side air bags, along with the use of seat
in the ON or START position.
tain air bags are located in the side roof belts, help to cushion the impact force on
rails. All of the information, cautions and the chest and pelvic area of the front occu- After placing the ignition switch in the
warnings in this manual apply and must pants. Curtain air bags help to cushion the ON position, the supplemental air bag
be followed. The side air bags and curtain impact force to the head of occupants in warning light illuminates. The supple-
air bags are designed to inflate in higher the front and rear outboard seating posi- mental air bag warning light will turn off
severity side collisions, although they may tions. They can help save lives and reduce after about 7 seconds if the system is
inflate if the forces in another type of colli- serious injuries. However, an inflating side operational.
WARNING ∙ Tampering with the side air bag sys- Seat belt with pretensioner(s)
∙ Do not place any objects near the
tem may result in serious personal in- (front seats)
jury. For example, do not change the
seatback of the front seats. Also, do
front seats by placing material near WARNING
not place any objects (an umbrella,
the seatbacks or by installing addi-
bag, etc.) between the front door fin- ∙ The pretensioner(s) cannot be reused
tional trim material, such as seat cov-
isher and the front seat. Such objects after activation. They must be re-
ers, around the side air bag.
may become dangerous projectiles placed together with the retractor
and cause injury if a side air bag ∙ It is recommended that you visit a and buckle as a unit.
inflates. NISSAN dealer for work on and around
the side air bag and curtain air bag. It ∙ If the vehicle becomes involved in a
∙ Right after inflation, several side air collision but pretensioner(s) are not
is also recommended that you visit a
bag and curtain air bag system com- activated, be sure to have the preten-
NISSAN dealer for installation of elec-
ponents will be hot. Do not touch sioner system checked and, if neces-
trical equipment. The SRS wiring har-
them; you may severely burn yourself. sary, replaced. It is recommended that
nesses* should not be modified or dis-
∙ No unauthorized changes should be connected. Unauthorized electrical you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
made to any components or wiring of test equipment and probing devices service.
the side air bag and curtain air bag should not be used on the side air bag ∙ No unauthorized changes should be
systems. This is to prevent damage to or curtain air bag systems. made to any components or wiring of
or accidental inflation of the side air the pretensioner system. This is to
bag and curtain air bag systems. * The SRS wiring harness or connectors prevent damage to or accidental acti-
are yellow or orange for easy identifica- vation of the pretensioner(s). Tamper-
∙ Do not make unauthorized changes tion.
to your vehicle’s electrical system, ing with the pretensioner system may
suspension system or side panel. This When selling your vehicle, we request that result in serious personal injury.
could affect proper operation of the you inform the buyer about the side air bag
curtain air bag systems. and curtain air bag systems and guide the
buyer to the appropriate sections in this
Owner’s Manual.

∙ It is recommended that you visit a When pretensioner(s) activate, smoke is re-
NISSAN dealer for work on and around leased and a loud noise may be heard. This
the pretensioner system. It is also rec- smoke is not harmful and does not indi-
ommended that you visit a NISSAN cate a fire. Care should be taken not to
dealer for installation of electrical inhale it, as it may cause irritation and
equipment. Unauthorized electrical choking. Those with a history of a breath-
test equipment and probing devices ing condition should get fresh air promptly.
should not be used on the preten- After the pretensioner(s’) activation, load
sioner system. limiters allow the seat belt to release web-
bing (if necessary) to reduce forces against
∙ If you need to dispose of the preten- the chest.
sioner(s) or scrap the vehicle, it is rec-
ommended that you visit a NISSAN The supplemental air bag warning
dealer for this service. Incorrect dis- light is used to indicate malfunctions
posal procedures could cause per- in the pretensioner system. For additional
WRS0885
sonal injury. information, refer to "Supplemental air bag
warning light" in this section. If the opera- 1. SRS Air bag warning labels
The pretensioner system may activate tion of the supplemental air bag warning The warning labels are located on the
with the supplemental air bag system in light indicates there is a malfunction, have surface of the sun visor.
certain types of collisions. Working with the the system checked. It is recommended
seat belt retractor, the pretensioner(s) help that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser- SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING
tighten the seat belt when the vehicle be- vice. LABELS
comes involved in certain types of colli- When selling your vehicle, we request that
sions, helping to restrain front seat occu- you inform the buyer about the preten- Warning labels about the supplemental
pants. sioner system and guide the buyer to the front-impact air bag system are placed in
appropriate sections in this Owner’s the vehicle as shown in the illustration.
The pretensioner(s) are encased within the Manual.
seat belt retractor and to the seat belt an-
chor affixed to the floor of the vehicle.
These seat belts are used the same way as
conventional seat belts.

WARNING If any of the following conditions occur, the
front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag
Do not use a rear-facing child restraint and pretensioner systems need servicing:
on a seat protected by an air bag in
front of it. If the air bag deploys, it may ∙ The supplemental air bag warning light
cause serious injury or death. remains on after approximately 7 sec-
onds.
∙ The supplemental air bag warning light
flashes intermittently.
∙ The supplemental air bag warning light
does not come on at all.
Under these conditions, the front air bag,
side air bag, curtain air bag or pretensioner
LRS0100
systems may not operate properly. They
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING must be checked and repaired. It is recom-
LIGHT mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
The supplemental air bag warning light,
displaying in the instrument panel, WARNING
monitors the circuits for the air bag sys-
tems, pretensioner(s) and all related wiring. If the supplemental air bag warning
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON light is on, it could mean that the front
or START position, the supplemental air air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag
bag warning light illuminates for about and/or pretensioner systems will not
7 seconds and then turns off. This means operate in an accident. To help avoid
the system is operational. injury to yourself or others, have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is

Repair and replacement WARNING ∙ If there is an impact to your vehicle
procedure ∙ Once a front air bag, side air bag, or
from any direction, your Occupant
Classification Sensor (OCS) should be
The front air bags, side air bags, curtain air curtain air bag has inflated, the air
checked to verify it is still functioning
bags and pretensioner(s) are designed to bag module will not function again
correctly. It is recommended that you
inflate on a one-time-only basis. As a re- and must be replaced. Additionally,
minder, unless it is damaged, the supple- the activated pretensioner(s) must
The OCS should be checked even if no
mental air bag warning light remains illu- also be replaced. The air bag module
air bags deploy as a result of the im-
minated after inflation has occurred. These and pretensioner(s) should be re-
pact. Failure to verify proper OCS
placed. It is recommended that you
systems should be repaired and/or re- function may result in an improper air
placed as soon as possible. It is recom- bag deployment resulting in injury or
However, the air bag module and pre-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for death.
tensioner(s) cannot be repaired.
this service.
∙ The front air bag, side air bag, curtain
When maintenance work is required on the air bag systems and the pretensioner
vehicle, the front air bags, side air bags, system should be inspected if there is
curtain air bags, pretensioner(s) and re- any damage to the front end or side
lated parts should be pointed out to the portion of the vehicle. It is recom-
person performing the maintenance. The mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
ignition switch should always be placed in for this service.
the LOCK position when working under the ∙ If you need to dispose of the supple-
hood or inside the vehicle. mental air bag or pretensioner sys-
tems or scrap the vehicle, it is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer. Incorrect disposal procedures
could cause personal injury.

2 Instruments and controls
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28

Meters and gauges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Switch operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Speedometer and odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Rear window or outside mirror defroster
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 switch (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Headlight control switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Engine oil pressure gauge Daytime Running Lights (DRL) system
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Voltmeter (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Instrument brightness control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Trip computer (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Compass and outside temperature display Fog light switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Outside temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11 Cargo lamp switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Compass. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11 Heated seat switches (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Warning lights, indicator lights and audible Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch. . . . . . 2-35
reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Hill descent control switch (if so equipped). . . . . . 2-36
Checking lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock)
Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 system switch (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 Clutch interlock (clutch start) switch
Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24 (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Security systems (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25 Rear Sonar System (RSS) OFF switch
Vehicle security system (if so equipped) . . . . . 2-25 (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System Power outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Front-door pockets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40 Power moonroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
Rear-door pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41 Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
Seatback pocket (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41 Map lights (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
Under-seat storage bins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42 HomeLink® universal transceiver
Storage trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43 (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
Glove box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44 Programming HomeLink® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45 Programming HomeLink® for Canadian
Overhead sunglasses storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45 customers and gate openers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46 Operating the HomeLink® Universal
Roof rack (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48 Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49 Programming trouble-diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
Manual windows (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49 Clearing the programmed information . . . . . . 2-58
Power windows (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49 Reprogramming a single HomeLink®
Rear sliding window (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 2-52 button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
Moonroof (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52 If your vehicle is stolen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
INSTRUMENT PANEL
1. Vents (P. 4-23)

2. Headlight/fog light (if so
equipped)/turn signal switch
(P. 2-29)
3. Steering wheel switch for audio
control (P. 4-75)
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System (P. 4-85, 4-103)
4. Driver supplemental air bag
(P. 1-73)
Horn (P. 2-33)
5. Meters and gauges (P. 2-3)
Warning and indicator lights
(P. 2-14)
6. Cruise control switches (P. 5-22)
8. Storage (P. 2-40)
9. Audio system (P. 4-37)
10. Front passenger supplemental air
bag (P. 1-73)
11. Upper and lower glove box (P. 2-40)
12. Passenger air bag status light
(P. 1-73)
13. USB connection port (P. 4-58)
AUX input (P. 4-58)
14. Power outlets (P. 2-39)
LII2484
2-2 Instruments and controls

METERS AND GAUGES
15. Electronic locking rear differential

(E-Lock) system switch
Heated seat switches
Rear sonar switch (if so equipped)
(P. 2-39)
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF
switch (P. 2-35)
17. 4WD shift switch (if so equipped)
(P. 5-26)
18. Climate controls (P. 4-23, P. 4-32)
19. Hazard warning flasher switch
(P. 6-2)
20. Ignition switch (P. 5-11)
21. Tilt steering wheel control
22. Cargo lamp switch (P. 2-34)
Clutch interlock (clutch start)
switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-38)
Hill descent control switch LIC3327
(if so equipped) (P. 2-36) 1. Warning and indicator lights 7. Odometer
Outside mirror controls 2. Tachometer Twin trip odometer
(if so equipped) (P. 3-15) 3. Speedometer Trip computer (if so equipped)
4. Fuel gauge Instrument brightness control knob
5. Change/reset button 8. Engine oil pressure gauge
6. Voltmeter (if so equipped) 9. Engine coolant temperature gauge
Instruments and controls 2-3

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER
This vehicle is equipped with a speedom-
eter and odometer. The speedometer is
located on the right side of the meter clus-
ter. The odometer is located within the trip
computer.
LIC3629 LIC0780
Speedometer With twin trip odometer
Changing the display
The speedometer indicates vehicle speed.
For vehicles equipped with a twin trip
Odometer/Twin trip odometer odometer, pressing the change/reset but-
ton changes the display as follows:
The odometer/twin trip odometer is dis-
played when the ignition switch is placed in Trip → Trip → Trip
the ON position.
The odometer records the total distance
the vehicle is driven.
The twin trip odometer records the dis-
tance of individual trips.

WIC0922 LIC3741 LIC3742
With trip computer Loose fuel cap warning message Check tire pressure warning
For vehicles equipped with a trip computer, message
pressing the change/reset button Press the change/reset button 䊊 A for more
changes the display as follows: than 1 second to reset the LOOSE FUEL CAP The CHECK TIRE PRES (pressure) warning
warning message after the fuel cap has message is displayed when the low tire
Trip → Trip → Distance to Empty been tightened. For additional information, pressure warning light is illuminated and
→ Average speed → Average fuel con- refer to “Fuel-filler cap” in the “Pre-driving low tire pressure is detected. Check and
sumption → Journey time → Trip checks and adjustments” section of this adjust the tire pressure to the recom-
For additional information, refer to “Trip manual. mended COLD tire pressure shown on the
computer” in this section. Tire and Loading Information label. The
CHECK TIRE PRES (pressure) warning mes-
Resetting the trip odometer sage turns off when the low tire pressure
Pressing the change/reset button for warning light turns off.
more than 1 second resets the currently
displayed trip odometer to zero.

The low tire pressure warning light remains
illuminated until the tires are inflated to the
recommended COLD tire pressure. The
CHECK TIRE PRES (pressure) warning mes-
sage is displayed each time the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position as long
as the low tire pressure warning light re-
mains illuminated.
For additional information, refer to “Low tire
pressure warning light” in this section, “Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the
“Starting and driving” section, and “Wheels
and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself ” section of
this manual.
LIC0738 LIC0739
TACHOMETER ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
The tachometer indicates engine speed in GAUGE
revolutions per minute (rpm). The gauge indicates the engine coolant
Do not rev the engine into the red zone 䊊
1 . temperature. The engine coolant tempera-
ture is within the normal range 䊊 1 when
CAUTION the gauge needle points within the zone
shown in the illustration.
When engine speed approaches the red
zone, shift to a higher gear or reduce The engine coolant temperature varies
engine speed. Operating the engine in with the outside air temperature and driv-
the red zone may cause serious engine ing conditions.
damage.

CAUTION Refill the fuel tank before the gauge reg-
isters 0 (Empty).
If the gauge indicates coolant tempera-
ture near the hot (H) end of the normal The indicates that the fuel-filler
range, reduce vehicle speed to decrease door is located on the driver’s side of the
temperature. If the gauge is over the vehicle.
normal range, stop the vehicle as soon
as safely possible. If the engine is over- CAUTION
heated, continued operation of the ve-
∙ If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the
hicle may seriously damage the engine.
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may
For additional information, refer to “If
come on. Refuel as soon as possible.
your vehicle overheats” in the “In case
of emergency” section of this manual After a few driving trips, the light
for immediate action required. should turn off. If the light remains on
after a few driving trips, have the ve-
LIC0740 hicle inspected. It is recommended
FUEL GAUGE that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
The gauge indicates the approximate fuel
level in the tank. ∙ For additional information, refer to
“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in
The gauge may move slightly during brak- this section.
ing, turning, acceleration, or going up or
down hills.
The gauge needle returns to 0 (Empty) af-
ter the ignition switch is placed in the OFF
position.
The low fuel warning light comes on when
the amount of fuel in the tank is getting low.

CAUTION
∙ This gauge is not designed to indicate
low engine oil level. Use the dipstick to
check the oil level. For additional in-
formation, refer to “Engine oil” in the
“Do-it-yourself ” section of this
manual.
∙ If the gauge needle does not move
with the proper amount of engine oil,
have the vehicle checked. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service. Continued vehicle op-
eration in such a condition could
LIC0741 cause serious damage to the engine. WIC1299
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE (if VOLTMETER (if so equipped)
so equipped) When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
The gauge indicates the engine lubrication position, the voltmeter indicates the bat-
system oil pressure while the engine is run- tery voltage. When the engine is running, it
ning. The needle should be in the middle of indicates the generator voltage.
the gauge when the engine is running.
While cranking the engine, the volts drop
below the normal range. If the needle is not
in the normal range (11 - 15 volts) 䊊
1 while
the engine is running, it may indicate that
the charging system is not functioning
properly. Have the system checked. It is

Distance To Empty (DTE—mile or ∙ When driving uphill or rounding
km) curves, the fuel in the tank shifts,
which may momentarily change the
The DTE mode provides you with an esti- display.
mation of the distance that can be driven
before refueling. The DTE is constantly be- Average fuel consumption (Mpg
ing calculated, based on the amount of fuel or l/100km)
in the fuel tank and the actual fuel con-
The average fuel consumption mode
sumption.
shows the average fuel consumption since
The display is updated every 30 seconds. the last reset. Resetting is done by pressing
the change/reset button for more than ap-
The DTE mode includes a low range warn-
proximately 1 second. The display is up-
ing feature: when the fuel level is low, the dated every 30 seconds. At about the first
DTE mode is automatically selected and 1/3 miles (500 m) after a reset, the display
LIC3743
the digits blink in order to draw the driver’s shows (----).
TRIP COMPUTER (if so equipped) attention. Press the change/reset button if
you wish to return to the mode that was Average speed (mph or km/h)
The display of the trip computer is situated
selected before the warning occurred. The The average speed mode shows the aver-
in the speedometer display. When the igni-
DTE mark will remain blinking until the ve- age vehicle speed since last reset. Reset-
tion switch is placed in the ON position, the
hicle is refueled. ting is done by pressing the change/reset
display scrolls all the modes of the trip
computer and then shows the mode cho- When the fuel level drops even lower, the button for more than approximately 1 sec-
sen before the ignition switch was placed DTE display will change to (----). ond. The display is updated every 30 sec-
in the OFF position. onds. The first 30 seconds after a reset, the
NOTE: display shows (----).
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, modes of the trip computer can ∙ If the amount of fuel added while the Journey time
be selected by pressing the change/reset ignition switch is off is small, the dis- The journey time mode shows the time
button. The following modes can be se- play just before the ignition switch is since the last reset. The displayed time can
lected: turned off may continue to be dis- be reset by pressing the change/reset but-
played. ton for more than approximately 1 second.
COMPASS AND OUTSIDE
TEMPERATURE DISPLAY (if so
equipped)
Trip computer reset This unit has the following functions: Type B (if so equipped)
Pressing the change/reset button for ∙ Measures terrestrial magnetism and in- Press and hold
dicates the heading direction of the ve- Feature:
more than 3 seconds will reset all modes the
(Press button again for about
except Trip A and distance to empty. hicle button for
1 second to change settings)
about:
∙ Indicates outside air temperature
1 second Compass toggles on/off
With the ignition switch in the ON position, Compass zone can be changed
press the or button as de- 8 seconds to correct false compass read-
scribed in the charts below to activate vari- ings
ous features of the automatic anti-glare Compass enters calibration
10 seconds
rearview mirror. mode
Type A (if so equipped) For additional information, refer to “Auto-
Press and hold
matic anti-glare rearview mirror” in the
Feature: “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” sec-
the
(Press button again for about tion of this manual.
button for
1 second to change settings)
about:
1 second Compass toggles on/off
Automatic anti-glare/indicator
8 seconds
light toggles on/off
Compass zone can be changed
11 seconds to correct false compass read-
ings
Compass enters calibration
13 seconds
mode

∙ The outside temperature sensor is lo-
cated in front of the radiator. The sensor
may be affected by road or engine heat,
wind direction and other driving condi-
tions. The display may differ from the
actual outside temperature or the tem-
perature displayed on various signs or
billboards.
COMPASS
Press the or button for about
1 second when the ignition switch is placed
in the ON position to toggle the outside
temperature and compass direction dis-
WIC0904 LIC0583 play 䊊1 on or off. The display will indicate
Type A (if so equipped) Type B (if so equipped) the direction that the vehicle is heading.
OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY ∙ When the outside temperature is be- N: North
tween 140°F (60°C) and 194°F (90°C), the E: East
Press the or button for about display will read 140°F (60°C). When the S: South
1 second when the ignition key is in the ON temperature is above 194°F (90°C), the W: West
position to toggle the outside temperature display will read “SC.” If the display reads “C,” calibrate the com-
and compass direction display 䊊 1 on or off. pass by driving the vehicle in three com-
∙ When the outside temperature is be-
plete circles at less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
∙ To change from °F to °C, press and hold tween than -40°F (-40°C) and -60°F
the button for about 5 seconds or (-51°C), the display will read -40°F (-40°C). You can also calibrate the compass by driv-
the button for about 3 seconds When the temperature is below -60°F ing your vehicle on your everyday route.
until the display begins to flash. Press (-51°C), the display will read “OC.” The compass will be calibrated once it has
tracked three complete circles.
the button again to toggle between °C
and °F.

Zone variation change procedure
The difference between magnetic north
and geographical north is known as vari-
ance. In some areas, this difference can
sometimes be great enough to cause false
compass readings. Follow these instruc-
tions to set the variance for your particular
location if this happens:
1. Press and hold the button for
about 11 seconds or the button
for about 8 seconds. The current zone
number will appear in the display. Re-
lease the button.
2. Find your current location on the zone
map. Refer to the illustration.
3. Press the or the button re-

peatedly to toggle through the zone
numbers until the desired number ap-
pears in the display. Once you have se-
lected a zone number, the display will
show a compass direction within a few
seconds.
WIC0355

NOTE: CAUTION
Use zone number 5 for Hawaii. ∙ Do not install a ski rack, antenna, etc.,
Inaccurate compass direction which are attached to the vehicle by
means of a magnet. They affect the
The compass display is equipped with au- operation of the compass.
tomatic correction function. If the correct
direction is not shown, follow this proce- ∙ When cleaning the mirror, use a paper
dure. towel or similar material dampened
with glass cleaner. Do not spray glass
1. With the display turned on, press and cleaner directly on the mirror as it
hold the button for about 13 sec- may cause the liquid cleaner to enter
onds or the button for about the mirror housing.
10 seconds. The “C” icon in the compass
display will illuminate.
2. Calibrate the compass by driving the
vehicle in three complete circles at a
maximum speed of 5 mph (8 km/h).
3. After completing the circles, the display
should return to normal.

WARNING LIGHTS, INDICATOR LIGHTS
AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS
4WD warning light ( model) Low windshield-washer fluid warning light Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
(if so equipped)
or Anti-lock Braking System Seat belt warning light and chime Overdrive OFF indicator light (if so
(ABS) warning light equipped)
Automatic transmission oil temperature Supplemental air bag warning light Security indicator light (if so equipped)
warning light (if so equipped)
Automatic transmission park warning 4WD shift indicator light ( SET indicator light
light ( model) model)
or Brake warning light Automatic transmission position indica- Slip indicator light
tor light (if so equipped)
Charge warning light CRUISE indicator light Transfer 4LO position indicator light
( model)
Door open warning light Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) Turn signal/hazard indicator lights
system ON indicator light (if so equipped)
Engine oil pressure warning light Front passenger air bag status light Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF indi-
cator light
Low fuel warning light High beam indicator light (blue)
Low tire pressure warning light Hill descent control system ON indicator
light (if so equipped)

CHECKING LIGHTS 4WD warning light ( – In the 4LO position for automatic
With all doors closed, apply the parking model) transmission models, stop the ve-
brake, fasten the seat belts and place the hicle and shift the shift lever to the
The 4WD warning light comes on when the N (Neutral) position with the brake
ignition switch in the ON position without ignition switch is turned to the ON position. pedal depressed and shift the 4WD
starting the engine. The following lights (if It turns off soon after the engine is started. shift switch to 2WD.
so equipped) will come on:
If the engine or vehicle is not functioning – In the 4LO position for manual
properly, the warning light will either re- transmission models, stop the ve-
, or , , , hicle and shift the shift lever to the
main illuminated or blink. For additional in-
The following lights (if so equipped) will formation, refer to “Using 4–wheel drive N (Neutral) position with the clutch
come on briefly and then go off: (4WD)” in the “Starting and driving” section pedal depressed and shift the 4WD
of this manual. shift switch to 2WD.
or , , , , , ∙ If the warning light is still on after the
CAUTION above operation, have your vehicle
, ,
∙ If the warning light comes on or blinks checked as soon as possible. It is rec-
If any light fails to come on or operate in a
during operation, have your vehicle ommended that you visit a NISSAN
way other than described, it may indicate a dealer for this service.
burned-out bulb and/or a system mal- checked as soon as possible. It is rec-
function. Have the system checked. It is ommended that you visit a NISSAN or Anti-lock Braking
recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
System (ABS)
dealer for this service. ∙ Do not drive on dry hard surface roads
in the 4H or 4LO position. If the 4WD warning light
WARNING LIGHTS warning light turns on when you are When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
This vehicle has various warning lights that driving on dry hard surface roads: position, the ABS warning light illuminates
may illuminate to indicate a potential prob- – In the 4H position, shift the 4WD and then turns off. This indicates the ABS is
lem. For additional information, refer to the shift switch to 2WD. operational.
specific light in this section.

If the ABS warning light illuminates while Automatic transmission This light indicates that the automatic
the engine is running or while driving, it transmission parking function is not en-
park warning light (
may indicate the ABS is not functioning gaged. If the transfer control is not secured
properly. Have the system checked. It is model) in any drive position while the shift lever is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN in the P (Park) position, the transmission will
dealer for this service. WARNING disengage and the drive wheels will not
lock.
If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock ∙ If the ATP light is ON, this indicates
function is turned off. The brake system that the automatic transmission P or Brake warning
then operates normally but without anti- (Park) position will not function and
lock assistance. For additional information, the transfer case is in neutral.
light
refer to “Brake system” in the “Starting and This light functions for both the parking
∙ When parking, always make sure that
driving” section of this manual. the 4WD shift indicator light illumi- brake and the foot brake systems.
Automatic transmission oil nates and the parking brake is set. Parking brake indicator
Failure to engage the transfer posi-
temperature warning light tion in 2WD, 4H or 4LO could result in When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
(if so equipped) the vehicle moving unexpectedly, reposition, the light comes on when the park-
sulting in serious personal injury or ing brake is applied.
This light comes on when the automatic
property damage.
transmission oil temperature is too high. If Low brake fluid warning light
the light comes on while driving, reduce the ∙ Shift the 4WD switch into the 2WD, 4H
or 4LO position again to turn off the When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
vehicle speed as soon as safely possible
ATP warning light when the shift lever position, the light warns of a low brake fluid
until the light turns off.
is in the P position and the ATP warn- level. If the light comes on while the engine
ing light is ON. (Before shifting the is running with the parking brake not ap-
CAUTION
4WD switch into the 4LO position, plied, stop the vehicle and perform the fol-
Continued vehicle operation when the move the shift lever into the N posi- lowing:
A/T oil temperature warning light is on tion once, shift the shift lever into P
may damage the automatic 1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake
again and make sure the ATP warning fluid as necessary. For additional infor-
transmission. light is OFF.) mation, refer to “Brake fluid” in the “Do-
it-yourself ” section of this manual.
2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have Charge warning light Engine oil pressure
the warning system checked. It is rec-
ommended that you visit a NISSAN
warning light
If this light comes on while the engine is
dealer for this service. This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If
running, it may indicate the charging sys- the light flickers or comes on during nor-
tem is not functioning properly. Turn the mal driving, pull off the road in a safe area,
WARNING engine off and check the generator belt. If stop the engine immediately and call a
∙ Your brake system may not be work- the belt is loose, broken, or missing, or if the NISSAN dealer or other authorized repair
ing properly if the warning light is on. light remains on, have the system checked. shop.
Driving could be dangerous. If you It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
judge it to be safe, drive carefully to dealer for this service. The engine oil pressure warning light is
the nearest service station for repairs. not designed to indicate a low oil level.
Otherwise, have your vehicle towed CAUTION Use the dipstick to check the oil level. For
because driving it could be additional information, refer to “Engine oil”
dangerous. ∙ Do not ground electrical accessories in the “Do-it-yourself ” section of this
directly to the battery terminal. Doing manual.
∙ Pressing the brake pedal with the en- so will bypass the variable voltage
gine stopped and/or a low brake fluid control system and the vehicle bat- CAUTION
level may increase your stopping dis- tery may not charge completely. For
tance and braking will require greater additional information, refer to “Vari- Running the engine with the engine oil
pedal effort as well as pedal travel. able voltage control system” in the pressure warning light on could cause
“Do-it-yourself ” section of this serious damage to the engine almost
∙ If the brake fluid level is below the immediately. Such damage is not cov-
MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake manual.
ered by the NISSAN New Vehicle Limited
fluid reservoir, do not drive until the ∙ Do not continue driving if the genera- Warranty. Turn off the engine as soon as
brake system has been checked. It is tor belt is loose, broken or missing. it is safe to do so.
dealer for this service. Door open warning light
This light comes on when any of the doors

are not closed securely while the ignition
switch is in the ON position.

Low fuel warning light When the low tire pressure warning light TPMS malfunction
illuminates, you should stop and adjust
If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the
This light comes on when the fuel level in the tire pressure of all four tires to the
low tire pressure warning light will flash for
the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon recommended COLD tire pressure shown
approximately 1 minute when the ignition
as it is convenient, preferably before the on the Tire and Loading Information la-
switch is placed in the ON position. The
fuel gauge reaches E (Empty). There will be bel located in the driver’s door opening.
light will remain on after 1 minute. Have the
a small reserve of fuel in the tank when The low tire pressure warning light does
system checked. It is recommended that
the fuel gauge needle reaches E (Empty). not automatically turn off when the tire
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
pressure is adjusted. After the tire is in-
Low tire pressure warning The "CHECK TIRE PRES" warning does not
flated to the recommended pressure,
appear if the low tire pressure warning light
light the vehicle must be driven at speeds
illuminates to indicate a TPMS malfunction.
above 16 mph (25 km/h) to activate the
Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pres-
TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure For additional information, refer to “Tire
sure Monitoring System (TPMS) that moni-
warning light. Use a tire pressure gauge Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the
tors the tire pressure of all tires except the
to check the tire pressure. “Starting and driving” section and “Tire
spare.
pressure” in the “Do-it-yourself ” section of
The low tire pressure warning light remains
The low tire pressure warning light warns this manual.
illuminated until the tires are inflated to the
of low tire pressure or indicates that the
recommended COLD tire pressure. The
TPMS is not functioning properly. WARNING
CHECK TIRE PRES warning message is dis-
After the ignition switch is placed in the ON played each time the ignition switch is ∙ Radio waves could adversely affect
position, this light illuminates for about placed in the ON position as long as the low electric medical equipment. Those
1 second and turns off. tire pressure warning light remains illumi- who use a pacemaker should contact
nated. the electric medical equipment
Low tire pressure warning manufacturer for the possible influ-
For additional information, refer to “Check ences before use.
If the vehicle is being driven with low tire
tire pressure warning message” in this sec-
pressure, the warning light will illumi-
tion and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System
nate. A CHECK TIRE PRES (pressure)
(TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving” section
warning message is also displayed in the
and in the “In case of emergency” section of
odometer. this manual.
∙ If the light does not illuminate with the ∙ When replacing a wheel without the Low windshield-washer
ignition switch placed in the ON posi- TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS fluid warning light (if so
tion, have the vehicle checked as soon will not function and the low tire pres-
as possible. It is recommended that you sure warning light will flash for ap-
equipped)
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. proximately 1 minute. The light will re- This light comes on when the windshield-
main on after 1 minute. Have your washer fluid is at a low level. Add
∙ If the light illuminates while driving,
avoid sudden steering maneuvers or tires replaced and/or TPMS system windshield-washer fluid as necessary. For
abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, reset as soon as possible. It is recom- additional information, refer to “Windshield-
pull off the road to a safe location and mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer washer fluid” in the “Do-it-yourself” section
stop the vehicle as soon as possible. for these services. of this manual.
Driving with under-inflated tires may ∙ Replacing tires with those not origi-
permanently damage the tires and in- Seat belt warning light and
nally specified by NISSAN could affect
crease the likelihood of tire failure. Se- the proper operation of the TPMS. chime
rious vehicle damage could occur and
may lead to an accident and could re- The light and chime remind you to fasten
sult in serious personal injury or death. CAUTION your seat belts. The light illuminates when-
Check the tire pressure for all four tires. ∙ The TPMS is not a substitute for the ever the ignition switch is placed in the ON
Adjust the tire pressure to the recom- regular tire pressure check. Be sure to or START position and remains illuminated
mended COLD tire pressure show on check the tire pressure regularly. until the driver’s seat belt is fastened. At the
the Tire and Loading Information label same time, the chime sounds for about
located in the driver’s door opening to ∙ If the vehicle is being driven at speeds
6 seconds unless the driver’s seat belt is
turn the low tire pressure warning light of less than 16 mph (25 km/h), the
securely fastened.
off. If the light still illuminates while TPMS may not operate correctly.
driving after adjusting the tire pres- ∙ Be sure to install the specified size of The seat belt warning light may also illumi-
sure, a tire may be flat or the TPMS may tires to the four wheels correctly. nate if the front passenger’s seat belt is not
be malfunctioning. If you have a flat fastened when the front passenger’s seat
tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon is occupied. For 7 seconds after the ignition
as possible. If no tire is flat and all tires switch is placed in the ON position, the sys-
are properly inflated, have the vehicle tem does not activate the warning light for
checked. It is recommended that you
the front passenger.

For additional information, refer to “Seat tion properly. For additional information, re- While the engine is running, the 4WD shift
belts” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and fer to “Supplemental Restraint System indicator light will illuminate the position
supplemental restraint system” section of (SRS)” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and selected by the 4WD shift switch.
this manual. supplemental restraint system” section of
The 4WD shift indicator light may blink
Supplemental air bag this manual.
while shifting from one drive mode to
warning light the other.
WARNING
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON If the supplemental air bag warning Automatic transmission
or START position, the supplemental air light is on, it could mean that the front
bag warning light illuminates for about
position indicator light (if
air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag
7 seconds and then turns off. This means and/or pretensioner systems will not so equipped)
the system is operational. operate in an accident. To help avoid For additional information, refer to “Driving
If any of the following conditions occur, the injury to yourself or others, have your the vehicle” in the “Starting and driving” sec-
front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag, vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is tion of this manual.
and pretensioner seat belt systems need recommended that you visit a NISSAN
servicing: dealer for this service. CRUISE indicator light
∙ The supplemental air bag warning light INDICATOR LIGHTS The light comes on when the cruise control
remains on after approximately 7 sec- ON/OFF switch is pushed. The light goes
onds. This vehicle has various indicator lights
that may illuminate to indicate a system out when the ON/OFF switch is pushed
∙ The supplemental air bag warning light status. For additional information, refer to again. When the CRUISE indicator light
flashes intermittently. the specific light in this section. comes on, the cruise control system is op-
∙ The supplemental air bag warning light erational. For additional information, refer
does not come on at all. 4WD shift indicator light to “Cruise control” in the “Starting and driv-
( model) ing” section of this manual.
dealer for these services.
The light should turn off within 1 second
Unless checked and repaired, the supple- after placing the ignition switch in the ON
mental restraint system (air bag system)
position.
and/or the pretensioner(s) may not func-
Electronic locking rear “Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemen- For additional information, refer to “Hill de-
tal restraint system” section of this manual. scent control switch” in this section and “Hill
differential (E-Lock) system
descent control system” in the “Starting
ON indicator light (if so High beam indicator light and driving” section of this manual.
equipped) (blue)
Malfunction Indicator Light
This light comes on when the electronic This blue light comes on when the head-
light high beams are on and goes out when (MIL)
locking rear differential (E-Lock) system
clutch is fully engaged. the low beams are selected. If this indicator light comes on steady or
The high beam indicator light also comes blinks while the engine is running, it may
The indicator light flashes when the sys- indicate a potential emission control mal-
tem is first turned on. When the system fully on when the passing signal is activated.
function.
engages, the light remains on. If the switch Hill descent control system
is on and the indicator light continues to The MIL may also come on steady if the
flash, the system is not engaged.
ON indicator light (if so fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, or if the
equipped) vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make sure
For additional information, refer to “Elec- the fuel-filler cap is installed and closed
tronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) sys- When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, this light comes on briefly and tightly, and that the vehicle has at least
tem switch” in this section and “Electronic 3 gal (11.4 L) of fuel in the fuel tank.
then turns off.
locking rear differential (E-Lock) system” in
the “Starting and driving” section of this The light comes on when the hill descent After a few driving trips, the light
manual. control system is activated. should turn off if no other potential emis-
sion control system malfunction exists.
Front passenger air bag If the hill descent control switch is on and
If this indicator light comes on steady for
the indicator light blinks, the system is not
status light 20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds
engaged.
when the engine is not running, it indicates
The front passenger air bag status If the indicator light does not come on that the vehicle is not ready for an emission
light will be lit and the passenger front when the hill descent switch is on, the sys- control system inspection/maintenance
air bag will be off depending on how the tem may not be functioning properly. Have test. For additional information, refer to
front passenger seat is being used. the system checked. It is recommended “Readiness for inspection/maintenance
For additional information, refer to “Front that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser- (I/M) test” in the “Technical and consumer
passenger air bag and status light” in the vice. information” section of this manual.
Operation – If possible, reduce the amount of recommended that you visit a NISSAN
cargo being hauled or towed. dealer for this service.
The MIL will come on in one of two ways:
The MIL may stop blinking and come on For additional information, refer to “Driving
∙ MIL on steady — An emission control steady. Have the vehicle inspected. It is rec- the vehicle” in the “Starting and driving” sec-
system malfunction has been de- ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer tion of this manual.
tected. Check the fuel-filler cap if the for this service. You do not need to have
LOOSE FUEL CAP warning appears in your vehicle towed to the dealer. Security indicator light (if
the trip computer. If the fuel-filler cap is so equipped)
loose or missing, tighten or install the CAUTION This light blinks when the ignition switch is
cap and continue to drive the vehicle. in the OFF, LOCK or ACC position. This func-
Continued vehicle operation without
The light should turn off after a having the emission control system tion indicates the security systems
few driving trips. If the light does checked and repaired as necessary equipped on the vehicle are operational.
not turn off after a few driving trips, have could lead to poor driveability, reduced For additional information, refer to “Security
the vehicle inspected. It is recom- fuel economy, and possible damage to systems” in this section.
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer the emission control system.
for this service. You do not need to have SET indicator light
your vehicle towed to the dealer. Overdrive OFF indicator
light (if so equipped) The light comes on while the vehicle speed
∙ MIL blinking — An engine misfire has
This light comes on when the overdrive is controlled by the cruise control system. If
been detected which may damage the
function is off. the light blinks while the engine is running,
emission control system. To reduce or it may indicate the cruise control system is
avoid emission control system dam- The automatic transmission overdrive not functioning properly. Have the system
age: function is controlled by the overdrive OFF checked. It is recommended that you visit a
switch. NISSAN dealer for this service.
– Do not drive at speeds above
45 mph (72 km/h). When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the light comes on for about
– Avoid hard acceleration or decelera- 2 seconds. If the light comes on at any
tion. other time, it may indicate the automatic
– Avoid steep uphill grades. transmission system is not functioning
properly. Have the system checked. It is
Slip indicator light Make sure the transfer 4LO position indica- You cannot move the transfer 4WD shift
tor light turns on when you shift the 4WD switch between 4H and 4LO unless you
This indicator will blink when the VDC sys- shift switch to 4LO. stop the vehicle and shift the shift lever to
tem is operating, thus alerting the driver to The indicator light may blink while shift- the N position with the brake pedal (A/T
the fact that the road surface is slippery ing from one drive mode to the other. models) or clutch pedal (M/T models) de-
and the vehicle is nearing its traction limits. pressed.
The 4LO indicator light must stop blinking
You may feel or hear the system working; and remain illuminated or turn off before Turn signal/hazard
this is normal. shifting the transmission into gear. If the indicator lights
shift lever is shifted from the N (Neutral)
The light will blink for a few seconds after position to any other gear when the 4LO The appropriate light flashes when the turn
the VDC system stops limiting wheel spin. indicator light is blinking, the vehicle may signal switch is activated.
move unexpectedly.
The indicator light also comes on NOTE:
when you place the ignition switch in the When you shift between 4H and 4LO, follow
ON position. The light will turn off after ap- the instructions below: In case of turn signal light bulb malfunc-
proximately 2 seconds if the system is option, the turn signal will flash at a higher
∙ For automatic transmission (A/T) mod- frequency when the turn signal switch is
erational. If the light does not come on els, stop the vehicle and shift the shift
have the system checked. It is recom- activated.
lever to the N (Neutral) position with the
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for brake pedal depressed, then depress Both lights flash when the hazard switch is
this service. and turn the 4WD shift switch to 4LO or turned on.
Transfer 4LO position 4H.
Vehicle Dynamic Control
indicator light ( ∙ For manual transmission (M/T) models,
stop the vehicle and shift the shift lever (VDC) OFF indicator light
model) to the N (Neutral) position with the This indicator light comes on when the
This light comes on when the 4WD shift clutch pedal depressed, then depress VDC OFF switch is pushed to the OFF posi-
switch is set in the 4LO position with the and turn the 4WD shift switch to 4LO or tion, the transfer case is in the 4LO position
ignition switch in the ON position. 4H. ( model), or when the VDC system
is not functioning properly. This indicates
The transfer case may be damaged if you
the VDC system is not operating.
shift the switch while driving.
Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart While the VDC system is operating, you Light reminder chime
the engine and the system will operate might feel slight vibration or hear the sys-
normally. For additional information, refer tem working when starting the vehicle or With the ignition switch placed in the OFF
to “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system” accelerating, but this is normal. position, a chime sounds when the driver’s
door is opened if the headlights or parking
in the “Starting and driving” section of this
The VDC system will be disabled and the lights are on.
manual.
VDC light will illuminate when the elec-
Turn the headlight control switch off before
The VDC light also comes on when you turn tronic locking rear differential (E-lock) sys- leaving the vehicle.
the ignition key to the ON position. The light tem switch (if so equipped) is turned on
will turn off after about 2 seconds if the and the E-lock system is engaged. If the
system is operational. If the light stays on E-lock system disengages or the switch is
or comes on along with the indicator turned off, the VDC system will be enabled
light while you are driving, have the VDC and the VDC light will turn off.
system checked. It is recommended that
AUDIBLE REMINDERS
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
If the battery is removed or discharged, the Brake pad wear warning
VDC system is disabled and the VDC indi-
cator light will not turn off after 2 seconds The disc brake pads have audible wear
when the ignition switch is placed in the ON warnings. When a disc brake pad requires
position. To reset the system, you must replacement, it makes a high pitched
perform the reset procedure. For addi- scraping sound when the vehicle is in mo-
tional information, refer to “Vehicle Dy- tion, whether or not the brake pedal is de-
namic Control (VDC) system” in the “Start- pressed. Have the brakes checked as soon
ing and driving” section of this manual. as possible if the warning sound is heard.
If the light does not go off after performing Key reminder chime
the reset procedure, have the traction con- A chime sounds if the driver’s door is
trol system checked. It is recommended opened while the key is left in the ignition
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser- switch. Remove the key and take it with you
vice. when leaving the vehicle.
SECURITY SYSTEMS (if so equipped)
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM (if so How to arm the vehicle security

equipped) system
The vehicle security system provides visual 1. Close all windows. (The system can be
and audible alarm signals if someone armed even if the windows are open.)
opens the doors when the system is
2. Remove the key from the ignition
armed. It is not, however, a motion
switch.
detection-type system that activates
when a vehicle is moved or when a vibra- 3. Close all doors. Lock all doors. The
tion occurs. doors can be locked with the key,
power door lock switch (if the door is
The system helps deter vehicle theft but
opened, locked and then closed), or
cannot prevent it, nor can it prevent the
with the key fob.
theft of interior or exterior vehicle compo-
LIC3766 nents in all situations. Always secure your Key fob operation:
Your vehicle may have two types of security vehicle even if parking for a brief period.
Never leave your keys in the ignition, and ∙ Press the button on the key
systems: fob. All doors lock. The hazard lights
always lock the vehicle when unattended.
∙ Vehicle security system (if so equipped) Be aware of your surroundings, and park in flash twice and the horn beeps once
secure, well-lit areas whenever possible. to indicate all doors are locked.
∙ NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System (if
so equipped) Many devices offering additional protec- ∙ When the button is pressed
tion, such as component locks, identifica- with all doors locked, the hazard
tion markers, and tracking systems, are lights flash twice and the horn beeps
available at auto supply stores and spe- once as a reminder that the doors
cialty shops. A NISSAN dealer may also offer are already locked.
such equipment. Check with your insur- The horn may or may not beep. For
ance company to see if you may be eligible additional information, refer to “Silenc-
for discounts for various theft protection ing the horn beep feature” in the “Pre-
features. driving checks and adjustments” sec-
tion of this manual.
4. Confirm that the indicator light Vehicle security system activation NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
comes on. The indicator light The vehicle security system will give the SYSTEM (if so equipped)
stays on for about 30 seconds. The ve- following alarm: The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
hicle security system is now pre- will not allow the engine to start without
∙ The headlights blink and the horn
armed. After about 30 seconds the ve- the use of a registered key.
sounds intermittently.
hicle security system automatically
shifts into the armed phase. The ∙ The alarm automatically turns off after If the engine fails to start using a registered
indicator light begins to flash once ev- a period of time. However, the alarm key (for example, when interference is
ery 3 seconds. If, during the 30-second reactivates if the vehicle is tampered caused by another registered key, an auto-
pre-arm time period, the driver’s door with again. The alarm can be shut off by mated toll road device or automatic pay-
is unlocked by the key or the key fob or unlocking the driver’s door with the key ment device on the key ring), restart the
the ignition switch is placed in ACC or engine using the following procedures:
or by pressing the button on the
ON position, the system will not arm. key fob. 1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON po-
∙ If the key is turned slowly when lock- The alarm is activated by: sition for approximately 5 seconds.
ing the driver’s door, the system may ∙ Opening a door without using the key or 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or
not arm. Furthermore, if the key is key fob (even if the door is unlocked by LOCK position, and wait approximately
turned beyond the vertical position using the inside lock knob or the power 10 seconds.
toward the unlock position the sys- door lock switch).
tem may be disarmed when the key is 3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.
removed. If the indicator light fails to How to stop an activated alarm 4. Restart the engine while holding the
glow for a period of time, unlock the The alarm stops only by unlocking the driv- device (which may have caused the in-
door once and lock it again. er’s door with the key or by pressing terference) separate from the regis-
∙ Even when the driver and/or passen- the button on the key fob. tered key.
gers are in the vehicle, the system will If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN
arm with all doors closed and locked recommends placing the registered key on
with the ignition switch placed in the a separate key ring to avoid interference
OFF position. from other devices.

FCC Notice: If the light still remains on and/or the
engine will not start, seek service for the
For USA:
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System as
This device complies with Part 15 of the soon as possible. Please bring all regis-
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol- tered keys that you have. It is recom-
lowing two conditions; (1) This device mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
may not cause harmful interference, and for this service.
(2) this device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation of
the device.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for LIC0474
compliance could void the user’s author- Security indicator light
ity to operate the equipment.
This light blinks when the ignition switch is
For Canada: placed in the LOCK position with the key
This device complies with Industry removed from the ignition switch.
Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). This function indicates the NISSAN Vehicle
Operation is subject to the following two Immobilizer System is operational.
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must ac- If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is
cept any interference, including interfer- malfunctioning, the light will remain on
ence that may cause undesired opera- while the ignition switch is placed in the ON
tion of the device. position.

WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH REAR WINDOW OR OUTSIDE MIRROR
DEFROSTER SWITCH (if so equipped)
Push the lever up 䊊 4 to have one sweep

operation (MIST) of the wiper.
Pull the lever toward you 䊊5 to operate the
washer. The wiper will also operate several
times.
WARNING
In freezing temperatures the washer
solution may freeze on the windshield
and obscure your vision which may lead
to an accident. Warm the windshield
with the defroster before you wash the
windshield.
LIC3775 LIC1419
CAUTION Type A (if so equipped)
SWITCH OPERATION
∙ Do not operate the washer continu- To defrost the rear window glass (if so
The windshield wiper and washer operates ously for more than 30 seconds. equipped), place the ignition switch in the
when the ignition switch is in the ON posi- ON or START position and push the rear
tion. ∙ Do not operate the washer if the res-
window defroster switch on. The rear win-
ervoir tank is empty.
Push the lever down to operate the wiper dow defroster indicator light on the switch
at the following speed: comes on. Push the switch again to turn
the defroster off.
䊊
1 Intermittent (INT) — intermittent op-
eration can be adjusted by turning the To defrost the outside mirrors (if so
knob toward 䊊 A (Slower) or 䊊
B (Faster) equipped), place the ignition switch in the
ON or START position and push the outside
䊊
2 Low (LO) — continuous low speed op-
mirror defroster switch on. The outside
eration
mirror defroster indicator light on the
䊊
3 High (HI) — continuous high speed op- switch comes on. Push the switch again to
eration turn the defroster off.
HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL
SWITCH
LIC3279 WIC1424 WIC1452

Type B (if so equipped) Type A (if so equipped) Type B (if so equipped)
The rear window/outside mirror defroster HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH CAUTION
(if so equipped) automatically turns off af- Lighting
ter approximately 15 minutes. Use the headlights with the engine run-
䊊
1 Rotate the switch to the position, ning to avoid discharging the vehicle
battery.
CAUTION and the front parking, tail, license plate,
When cleaning the inner side of the rear and instrument panel lights will come
window, be careful not to scratch or on.
damage the rear window defroster.
䊊
2 Rotate the switch to the position,
and the headlights will come on and all
the other lights remain on.

To turn on the autolight system:
1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO
position 䊊
1 .
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON.

3. The autolight system automatically
turns the headlights on and off.
Initially, if the ignition switch is turned off
and a door is opened and left open, the
headlights remain on for a period of time. If
another door is opened while the head-
lights are on, then the timer is reset.
To turn the autolight system off, turn the
WIC1426 LIC0561
Type C (if so equipped) switch to the OFF, , or posi-
Autolight system (if so equipped) tion.
The autolight system allows the headlights
to be set so they turn on and off automati-
cally. The autolight system can:
∙ Turn on the headlights, front parking,
tail, license plate and instrument panel
lights automatically when it is dark.
∙ Turn off all the lights when it is light.
∙ Keep all the lights on for a period of time
after you turn the key to the OFF posi-
tion and all doors are closed.

䊊
3 Pulling and releasing the lever flashes
the headlight high beams on and off.
The low beams need not be engaged
for this function.
Battery saver system
The battery saver system automatically
turns off the following lights after a period
of time when the ignition switch is placed in
the OFF position and the doors are closed:
∙ Headlights, when the headlight switch
is in the or position
∙ Interior lights, when left in the ON posi-
LIC0835 LIC0562
tion (if so equipped)
Be sure you do not put anything on top Headlight beam select After the headlights automatically turn off
of the autolight sensor 䊊 1 located in the
top side of the instrument panel. The au- 䊊
1 To select the high beam function, en- with the headlight switch in the
tolight sensor controls the autolight; if it sure the low beams are engaged and or position, the headlights will illumi-
is covered, the autolight sensor reacts as push the lever forward. The high beam nate again if the headlight switch is moved
if it is dark out and the headlights will to the OFF position and then turned to
lights come on and the light illu-
illuminate. If this occurs while parked minates. For additional information, re- the or position.
with the engine off and the switch in the fer to “Headlight control switch” in this
ON position, your vehicle’s battery could section. CAUTION
become discharged.
䊊
2 Pull the lever back to return to the low Even though the battery saver feature
automatically turns off the headlights
beams.
after a period of time, you should turn
the headlight switch to the OFF position
when the engine is not running to avoid
discharging the vehicle battery.

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRL)
SYSTEM (if so equipped)
The DRL system automatically illuminates
when the engine is started with the parking
brake released. The DRL system operates
with the headlight switch in the OFF posi-
tion or in the position. Turn the head-
light switch to the position for full illu-
mination when driving at night.
If the parking brake is applied before the
engine is started, the DRL system does not
illuminate. The DRL system illuminates
when the parking brake is released. The
DRL system will remain on until the ignition WIC0917 LIC0563
switch is placed in the OFF position.
INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
WARNING CONTROL Turn signal
The instrument brightness control oper-
When the DRL system is active, tail
lights on your vehicle are not on. It is ates when the headlight control switch is in 䊊
1 Move the lever up or down to signal the
turning direction. When the turn is
necessary at dusk to turn on your head- the AUTO (if so equipped), or completed, the turn signal cancels au-
lights. Failure to do so could cause an position. tomatically.
accident injuring yourself and others. Turn the control 䊊
A to adjust the brightness
of the instrument panel lights when driving Lane change signal
at night.
䊊
2 Move the lever up or down until the
turn signal begins to flash, but the lever
does not latch, to signal a lane change.
Hold the lever until the lane change is
complete.

HORN
The headlights must be on and the low

beams selected for the fog lights to oper-
ate. The fog lights automatically turn off
when the high beam headlights are se-
lected.
LIC0393 WIC1449
FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so To sound the horn, push the area between
equipped) the horn icons on the steering wheel.
To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight WARNING

switch to the position, then turn the Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so
fog light switch to the position. could affect proper operation of the
To turn the fog lights on with the headlight supplemental front air bag system.
switch in the AUTO position (if so equipped), Tampering with the supplemental front
the headlights must be on, then turn the air bag system may result in serious
fog light switch to the position. personal injury.
To turn the fog lights off, turn the fog light
switch to the OFF position.

CARGO LAMP SWITCH HEATED SEAT SWITCHES (if so
equipped)
3. When the seat is warmed or before you

leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the
switch off.
WARNING
Do not use or allow occupants to use
the seat heater if you or the occupants
cannot monitor elevated seat tempera-
tures or have an inability to feel pain in
body parts that contact the seat. Use of
the seat heater by such people could
result in serious injury.
LIC0616 LIC3762
CAUTION
To turn on the cargo lamp, push the switch The front seats are warmed by built-in ∙ Do not use the seat heater for ex-
down to the ON position. heaters. tended periods or when no one is us-
ing the seat.
CAUTION 1. Place the ignition switch in the ON or
∙ Do not put anything on the seat which
START position.
Be sure to turn the light switch to the insulates heat, such as a blanket,
OFF position when you leave the vehicle 2. Push the LO or HI position of the switch, cushion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise,
for extended periods of time, otherwise as desired, depending on the tempera- the seat may become overheated.
the battery will go dead. ture. The indicator light in the switch ∙ Do not place anything hard or heavy
will illuminate. on the seat or pierce it with a pin or
The heater is controlled by a thermo- similar object. This may result in dam-
stat, automatically turning the heater age to the heater.
on and off. The indicator light will re- ∙ Any liquid spilled on the heated seat
main on as long as the switch is on. should be removed immediately with
a dry cloth.

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)
OFF SWITCH
∙ When cleaning the seat, never use Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart
gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any the engine to turn on the system. For addi-
similar materials. tional information, refer to “Vehicle Dy-
namic Control (VDC) system” in the “Start-
∙ If any malfunctions are found or the ing and driving” section of this manual.
heated seat does not operate, turn
the switch off and have the system
checked. It is recommended that you
∙ The battery could run down if the seat
heater is operated while the engine is
not running.
LIC3344
The vehicle should be driven with the VDC
system on for most driving conditions.
If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the
VDC system reduces the engine output to
reduce wheel spin. The engine speed will
be reduced even if the accelerator is de-
pressed to the floor. If maximum engine
power is needed to free a stuck vehicle,
turn the VDC system off.
To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC
OFF switch. The indicator will come
on.

HILL DESCENT CONTROL SWITCH (if
so equipped)
∙ The hill descent control may not con- ∙ The 4WD switch must be in the 4L posi-
trol the vehicle speed on a hill under tion and the vehicle speed must be un-
all load or road conditions. Always be der 15 mph (25 km/h) or
prepared to depress the brake pedal ∙ The 4WD switch must be in the 4H posi-
to control vehicle speed. Failure to do tion and the vehicle speed must be un-
so may result in a collision or serious der 21 mph (35 km/h), and
personal injury.
∙ The hill descent control system switch
CAUTION must be ON.
When the hill descent control system The hill descent control system ON indica-
operates continuously for a long time, tor light will come on when the system is
the temperature of the brake pads may activated. Also, the stop/tail lights illumi-
increase and the hill descent control nate while the hill descent control system
LIC0743 system may be temporarily disabled applies the brakes to control vehicle speed.
(the indicator light will blink). If the indi- If the accelerator or brake pedal is de-
WARNING cator light does not come on continu- pressed while the hill descent control sys-
∙ Never rely solely on the hill descent ously after blinking, stop using the tem is on, the system will stop operating
control system to control vehicle system. temporarily. As soon as the accelerator or
speed when driving on steep downhill The hill descent control system is designed brake pedal is released, the hill descent
grades. Always drive carefully when to reduce driver workload when going control system begins to function again if
using the hill descent control system down steep hills. The hill descent control the hill descent control operating condi-
and decelerate the vehicle speed by tions are fulfilled.
system helps to control vehicle speed so
depressing the brake pedal if neces-
the driver can concentrate on steering the The hill descent control system ON indica-
sary. Be especially careful when driv-
ing on frozen, muddy or extremely vehicle. tor light blinks if the switch is on and all
steep downhill roads. Failure to con- conditions for system activation are not
To activate the hill descent control system: met or if the system becomes disengaged
trol vehicle speed may result in a loss
of control of the vehicle and possible ∙ The shift lever must be in forward or for any reason.
serious injury or death. reverse gear, To turn off the hill descent control system,
push the switch to the OFF position.
ELECTRONIC LOCKING REAR
DIFFERENTIAL (E-Lock) SYSTEM
SWITCH (if so equipped)
For additional information, refer to “Hill de- When the E-Lock switch is turned on, the
scent control system ON indicator light” in indicator light will flash until the system
this section and “Hill descent control sys- engages. However, if all operation condi-
tem” in the “Starting and driving” section of tions listed above are not met or the sys-
this manual. tem becomes disengaged, the indicator
light will continue to flash.
The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) is dis-
abled and the ABS light illuminates when
the E-Lock system is on. Also, the Vehicle
Dynamic Control (VDC) system is disabled
and the VDC light illuminates when the
E-Lock system is on.
For additional information, refer to “Elec-
LIC0729
tronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) sys-
The E-Lock system can help provide added tem” in the “Starting and driving” section of
traction if the vehicle is stuck or becoming this manual for further explanation and
stuck. system limitations.
To activate the E-Lock system:
WARNING
∙ The 4WD switch must be in the 4LO po-
sition (4-Wheel Drive vehicles), ∙ Never leave the E-Lock system on
when driving on paved or hard-
∙ The vehicle must be stopped or moving surfaced roads. Turning the vehicle
at 4 mph (7 km/h) or less, and may result in the rear wheels slipping
∙ The E-Lock system switch must be and result in an accident and personal
turned on. injury. After using the E-Lock system
to free the vehicle, turn the system off.

CLUTCH INTERLOCK (clutch start)
∙ Use the E-Lock system only when To use the clutch interlock switch:
freeing a stuck vehicle. Try the 4LO po- 1. Set the parking brake.
sition before using the E-Lock system.
Never use the E-Lock system on a slip- 2. Depress the brake pedal with your right
pery road surface such as snow or ice foot.
surface. Using the E-Lock system 3. Place your left foot on the brake pedal
when driving in these road conditions and release the parking brake.
may cause unexpected movement of
the vehicle during engine braking, ac- 4. Turn the ignition switch to the ON posi-
celerating or turning, which may re- tion.
sult in an accident and serious per- 5. Push and release the clutch interlock
sonal injury. switch. The CANCEL light on the switch
will illuminate.
CAUTION
WIC0817 6. Turn the ignition to the START position
∙ After using the E-Lock system, turn to start the engine and, at the same
the switch off to prevent possible WARNING time, depress the accelerator pedal
damage to driveline components Pay special attention to your surround- with your right foot. As the vehicle be-
from extended use. ings when using the clutch interlock gins to move, take your left foot off the
∙ Do not drive over 12 mph (20 km/h) switch. The vehicle will move forward or brake. Once the engine has started, the
when the system is engaged. Doing so backward according to the gear clutch interlock switch CANCEL light
could result in possible damage to the selected. shuts off. Do not use the interlock
driveline. switch to start the engine under nor-
The clutch interlock (clutch start) switch mal driving conditions.
∙ Do not turn on the E-Lock system allows for starting the engine without de-
while the tires are spinning. Doing so pressing the clutch pedal. This feature
could damage drivetrain helps you restart the engine if it stops un-
components. der difficult conditions. (For example, the
engine stops on a steep hill and a slight
movement forward or backward might be
dangerous.)
REAR SONAR SYSTEM (RSS) OFF POWER OUTLETS
The RSS can be disabled by pushing the

OFF switch. When the system is disabled,
the indicator light on the switch will illumi-
nate.
The system will automatically reset the
next time the ignition switch is placed in
the ON position.
For additional information, refer to “Rear
Sonar System (RSS)” in the “Starting and
driving” section in this manual.
LIC0471 WIC1420
Front row
WARNING
The power outlets are for powering electri-
The Rear Sonar System is a conve- cal accessories such as cellular tele-
nience but it is not a substitute for phones. They are rated at 12 volt, 120W (10A)
proper backing. Always turn and check maximum.
that it is safe to do so before backing up.
The power outlets are powered only when
Always back up slowly.
the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON po-
The RSS (if so equipped) is active when the sition.
ignition switch is placed in the ON position Open the cap to use a power outlet.
and the shift lever is in R (Reverse).
When sensors detect obstacles within 6 ft
(1.8 m) of the rear bumper, a beeping tone is
emitted.

STORAGE
∙ Do not use double adapters or more

than one electrical accessory.
∙ Use power outlets with the engine
running to avoid discharging the ve-
hicle battery.
∙ Avoid using power outlets when the
air conditioner, headlights or rear win-
dow defroster is on.
∙ Before inserting or disconnecting a
plug, be sure the electrical accessory
being used is turned off.
∙ Push the plug in as far as it will go. If
LIC0761 good contact is not made, the plug WIC0824
Center console may overheat or the internal tem- FRONT-DOOR POCKETS
perature fuse may open.
CAUTION
∙ When not in use, be sure to close the
∙ The outlet and plug may be hot during
cap. Do not allow water or any other
or immediately after use.
liquids to contact the outlet.
∙ Only certain power outlets are de-
signed for use with a cigarette lighter
unit. Do not use any other power out-
let for an accessory lighter. It is rec-
dealer for additional information.
∙ Do not use with accessories that ex-
ceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.

LIC0826 LIC0825 LIC1328
Type A (if so equipped) Type B (if so equipped) SEATBACK POCKET (if so
REAR-DOOR POCKETS equipped)
A seatback pocket may be located on the
back of the driver’s seat. The pocket may
be used to store maps.

UNDER-SEAT STORAGE BINS
WARNING
∙ Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
straps to help prevent it from sliding
or shifting. In a sudden stop or colli-
sion, unsecured cargo could cause
personal injury.
∙ The cargo restrained in the under-
seat storage bins must not exceed the
weight limits listed below or the bins
may not stay secured. In a sudden
stop or collision, the unsecured bins
could cause personal injury.
King Cab® model: 16 lbs. (7.25 kg)
Crew Cab model
Driver’s side: 16 lbs. (7.25 kg)
Passenger’s side: 25 lbs. (11.33 kg)
∙ If the under-seat storage bins are re-
moved for any reason, they should be
securely stored to prevent them from
LIC0821 LIC0820
causing injury to passengers or dam-
age to the vehicle in case of sudden
Rear row under-seat storage bin Rear row under-seat storage bin
braking or an accident.
(King Cab® model) (Crew Cab model)

∙ Do not place sharp objects in the
under-seat storage bins. Such objects
may become dangerous projectiles
and cause injury when the vehicle is
moving or if the vehicle is involved in a
collision.
To access the under-seat storage bins:
For King Cab® models, lift up the jump seat.
For additional information, refer to “Jump
seat” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system” section of
this manual.
For Crew Cab models, lift up the rear bench LIC0822 LIC1539
seat. For additional information, refer to To remove the under-seat storage bins: Top center tray
“Folding the rear bench seat down” in the
“Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemen- 1. Remove the storage net. STORAGE TRAYS
tal restraint system” section of this manual.
2. Turn the knobs to the UNLOCK position WARNING
䊊2 .
Do not place sharp objects in the trays
3. Remove the tray by lifting it out of the to help prevent injury in an accident or
storage bin (King Cab® model). sudden stop.
To install the under-seat storage bins:
1. Position the under-seat storage bin so
the holes line up with the holes in the
floorboard.
2. Insert the knobs and turn them to the
LOCK position 䊊1 .

LIC0818 LIC3646 LIC3647
A/T model M/T model — Type A (if so equipped) M/T model — Type B (if so equipped)
GLOVE BOX
To open the top portion of the glove box,
push the latch 䊊
A up and raise the lid.
To open the lower portion of the glove box,

pull the handle 䊊
B down and lower the lid.
WARNING
Keep the glove box lid closed while driv-
ing to help prevent injury in an accident
or a sudden stop.

LIC0768 LIC0766 LIC3387
CONSOLE BOX OVERHEAD SUNGLASSES CAUTION

Pull up on the lever 䊊
1 to open the console STORAGE ∙ Do not use for anything other than
box lid 䊊
2 .
To open the sunglasses holder, push and
sunglasses.
release. ∙ Do not leave sunglasses in the sun-
glasses holder while parking in direct
Only store one pair of sunglasses in the sunlight. The heat may damage the
holder. sunglasses.
WARNING
Keep the sunglasses holder closed
while driving to avoid obstructing the
driver’s view and to help prevent an
accident.

WARNING
∙ The cup holder should not be used
while driving so full attention may be
given to vehicle operation.
∙ Avoid abrupt starting and braking
when the cup holder is being used to
prevent spilling the drink. If the liquid
is hot, it can scald you or your
passenger.
CAUTION
Use only soft cups in the cup holder.
WIC0827 Hard objects can injure you in an WIC0771
Front accident. Rear seat (rear of front console)
CUP HOLDERS To open the rear row cup holders (rear of
the front console), lower the lid. To close,
The front cup holders have adapters that raise the lid. If stepped on, the cup holder is
can be removed to accommodate larger designed to snap loose from the console.
cups. To re-install, close the cup holder assembly
and push it back into the console opening.
To fold the rear seat back, first close the cup
holder.

LIC0784 WIC0828
Front bottle holders Rear bottle holders
CAUTION
∙ Do not use the bottle holder for any
other objects that could be thrown
about in the vehicle and possibly in-
jure people during sudden braking or
an accident.
∙ Do not use the bottle holder for open
liquid containers.

WARNING
∙ Drive extra carefully when the vehicle
is loaded at or near the cargo carrying
capacity, especially if the significant
portion of that load is carried on the
roof rack.
∙ Heavy loading of the roof rack has the
potential to affect the vehicle stability
and handling during sudden or ab-
normal handling maneuvers.
∙ Roof rack load should be evenly
distributed.
∙ Do not exceed maximum roof rack
load weight capacity.
personal injury.
WIC0857 CAUTION
ROOF RACK (if so equipped) Use care when placing or removing
items from the roof rack. If you cannot
comfortably lift the items onto the roof
rack from the ground, use a ladder or
stool.

WINDOWS
Always evenly distribute the cargo on the 5. Always check the tightness of the
tubular roof rack. The maximum total crossbar adjusting screws.
load is 125 lbs. (56 kg) evenly distributed. To remove:
Be careful that your vehicle does not ex-
ceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 1. Loosen the adjusting screws with the
(GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Ratings TORX® driver 䊊1 by turning counter-
(GAWR front and rear). The GVWR and GAWR clockwise 䊊
A .
are located on the F.M.V.S.S. label (located 2. Rotate the clamps 䊊
C .
on the driver’s side door jamb pillar). For
additional information, refer to “Vehicle 3. Remove the crossbar.
loading information” in the “Technical and 4. Reverse to install.
consumer information” section of this
manual. 5. Always check the tightness of the
crossbar adjusting screws.
The front crossbar can be adjusted or re- LIC3352
moved. Use the TORX® driver provided in If you hear wind noise coming from the roof
the tool kit to loosen both crossbar adjust- rack while driving, adjust the roof rack MANUAL WINDOWS (if so
ing screws. crossbar to the neutral position. equipped)
To adjust: The side windows can be opened or closed
1. Loosen the adjusting screws with the by turning the hand crank on each door.
TORX® driver 䊊1 by turning counter-
POWER WINDOWS (if so equipped)
clockwise 䊊
A .
2. When the clamp is loosened, move the WARNING

crossbar so the cargo can be posi-
tioned on the crossbar 䊊
B. ∙ Make sure that all passengers have
their hands, etc., inside the vehicle
3. Tighten the crossbar adjusting screws while it is in motion and before closing
with the TORX® driver by turning clock- the windows. Use the window lock
wise. switch to prevent unexpected use of
the power windows.
4. Secure the cargo with rope.
∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death Driver’s side power window
through unintended operation of the switch
vehicle and/or its systems, including
The driver’s side control panel is equipped
entrapment in windows or inadver-
with switches to open or close the front
tent door lock activation, do not leave
and rear passenger windows.
children, people who require the as-
sistance of others or pets unattended To open a window, push the switch and
in your vehicle. Additionally, the tem- hold it down. To close a window, pull the
perature inside a closed vehicle on a switch and hold it up. To stop the opening
warm day can quickly become high or closing function at any time, simply re-
enough to cause a significant risk of lease the switch.
injury or death to people and pets.
The power windows operate when the ig-
nition switch is placed in the ON position or LIC1329
for a period of time after the ignition switch
1. Window lock button
is placed in the ACC or OFF position. If the
driver’s or passenger’s door is opened dur- 2. Power door lock switch
ing this period of time, the power to the 3. Front passenger side window
windows is canceled. switch
4. Right rear passenger window
switch (Crew Cab models only)
5. Left rear passenger window switch
(Crew Cab models only)
6. Driver’s side automatic switch

WIC0260 LIC2663 LIC0410
Front passenger’s power window Rear power window switch (Crew Automatic operation
switch Cab models only) To fully open a window equipped with au-
The passenger’s window switch operates The rear power window switches open or tomatic operation, push the window
only the corresponding passenger’s win- close only the corresponding passenger switch down to the second detent and re-
dow. To open the window, push the switch window. To open the window, push the lease it; it need not be held. The window
and hold it down 䊊 1 . To close the window, switch and hold it down 䊊1 . To close the automatically opens all the way. To stop
pull the switch up 䊊
2 . window, push the switch up 䊊2 . the window, lift the switch up while the win-
dow is opening.
Locking passengers’ windows
When the window lock switch is depressed,
only the driver’s side window can be
opened or closed. Push it again to cancel
the window lock function.

MOONROOF (if so equipped)
∙ Do not place objects through the

opened rear window. Do not use the
rear window as a cargo area pass-
through. This may result in damage to
the rear window system or personal
injury.
Squeeze the handles of the lever 䊊
1 , then
slide the window open 䊊
2 .
LIC3488 WIC0882
REAR SLIDING WINDOW (if so POWER MOONROOF
equipped) The moonroof will only operate when the
ignition switch is in the ON position. The
WARNING power moonroof is operational for about
∙ You must ensure all occupants and 45 seconds, even if the ignition switch is
objects are free of the rear window placed in the ACC or OFF position. If the
area prior to and during operation. driver’s door or the front passenger’s door
Failure to do so may result in injury is opened during this period of about
and/or damage to the rear window 45 seconds, power to the moonroof is can-
system. celed.
∙ The rear window is not designed to Sliding the moonroof
carry long items through it.
To fully open the moonroof, push the
switch toward DOWN/OPEN 䊊
1 .

To fully close the moonroof, push the WARNING WARNING
switch toward UP/CLOSE 䊊
2 .
There are some small distances imme- ∙ In an accident you could be thrown
To open or close the moonroof part way, diately before the closed position which from the vehicle through an open
push the switch in any direction while the cannot be detected. Make sure that all moonroof. Always use seat belts and
moonroof is sliding to stop it in the desired passengers have their hands, etc., in- child restraints.
position. side the vehicle before closing the
∙ Do not allow anyone to stand up or
Tilting the moonroof moonroof.
extend any portion of their body out
Close the moonroof by pushing the switch When closing of the moonroof opening while the
toward UP/CLOSE 䊊 2 . Release the switch,
If the control unit detects something
vehicle is in motion or while the
then push the UP/CLOSE switch again to moonroof is closing.
caught in the moonroof as it moves to the
tilt the moonroof up.
front, the moonroof will immediately open CAUTION
To tilt the moonroof down, push the switch backward.
toward DOWN/OPEN 䊊 1 . ∙ Remove water drops, snow, ice or
When tilting down sand from the moonroof before
Auto-reverse function (when If the control unit detects something
opening.
closing or tilting down the caught in the moonroof as it tilts down, the ∙ Do not place heavy objects on the
moonroof) moonroof will immediately tilt up. moonroof or surrounding area.
The auto-reverse function can be acti- If the auto-reverse function malfunctions If the moonroof does not close
vated when the moonroof is closed or and repeats opening or tilting up the
tilted down by automatic operation when Have your moonroof checked and re-
moonroof, keep pushing the tilt down
the ignition switch is placed in the ON po- paired. It is recommended that you visit a
switch within 5 seconds after it happens; NISSAN dealer for this service.
sition or for a period of time after the igni- the moonroof will fully close gradually.
tion switch is placed in the OFF position. Make sure nothing is caught in the moon-
Depending on the environment or driv- roof.
ing conditions, the auto-reverse func-
tion may be activated if an impact or
load similar to something being caught
in the moonroof occurs.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
LIC0789 LIC0792 LIC0630

Type A (if so equipped) Type B (if so equipped) Type C (if so equipped)
The interior lights have a three-position ∙ The doors are unlocked by the key fob, a ∙ The ignition switch is turned on.
switch and operate regardless of ignition key or the power door lock switch while
The lights will turn off automatically after a
switch position. all doors are closed and the ignition
period of time while doors are open to pre-
switch is in the OFF position.
When the switch is in the ON position 䊊 1 , vent the battery from becoming dis-
the interior lights illuminate, regardless of ∙ The driver’s door is opened and then charged.
closed while the key is removed from
door position. The lights will go off after a When the switch is in the OFF position 䊊 3 ,
period of time unless the ignition switch is the ignition switch.
the interior lights do not illuminate, regard-
in the ON position. ∙ The key is removed from the ignition less of door position.
switch while all doors are closed.
When the switch is in the O (DOOR) position
CAUTION
䊊2 , the interior lights will stay on for a period The lights will turn off while the timer is
of time when: activated when: Do not use for extended periods of time
with the engine stopped. This could re-
∙ The driver’s door is locked by the key
sult in a discharged battery.
fob, a key, or the power door lock switch.
HOMELINK® UNIVERSAL
TRANSCEIVER (if so equipped)
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver pro- WARNING

vides a convenient way to consolidate the
functions of up to three individual hand- ∙ Do not use the HomeLink® Universal
held transmitters into one built-in device. Transceiver with any garage door
opener that lacks safety stop and re-
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver: verse features as required by federal
∙ Will operate most Radio Frequency de- safety standards. (These standards
became effective for opener models
vices such as garage doors, gates,
manufactured after April 1, 1982.) A
home and office lighting, entry door
garage door opener which cannot de-
locks and security systems. tect an object in the path of a closing
∙ Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. No garage door and then automatically
separate batteries are required. If the stop and reverse does not meet cur-
vehicle’s battery is discharged or is dis- rent federal safety standards. Using a
LIC0791 connected, HomeLink® will retain all garage door opener without these
programming. features increases the risk of serious
MAP LIGHTS (if so equipped) injury or death.
To turn the map lights on, press the lenses. When the HomeLink® Universal Trans-
∙ During the programming procedure
To turn them off, press the lenses of the ceiver is programmed, retain the original
your garage door or security gate will
lights again. transmitter for future programming pro- open and close (if the transmitter is
cedures (Example: new vehicle pur- within range). Make sure that people
CAUTION chases). Upon sale of the vehicle, the or objects are clear of the garage door,
programmed HomeLink® Universal gate, etc., that you are programming.
Do not use for extended periods of time Transceiver buttons should be erased for
with the engine stopped. This could re- ∙ Your vehicle’s engine should be
security purposes. For additional infor-
sult in a discharged battery. turned off while programming the
mation, refer to “Programming
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver.
HomeLink®” in this section.

PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® NOTE:
If you have any questions or are having Some devices may require you to replace
difficulty programming your HomeLink® step 2 with the cycling procedure noted
buttons, refer to the HomeLink® web site at: in “Programming HomeLink® for Cana-
www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515. dian customers and gate openers” in this
section.
NOTE:
Place the ignition switch in the ACC posi-
tion when programming HomeLink®. It is
also recommended that a new battery
be placed in the hand-held transmitter
of the device being programmed to
HomeLink® for quicker programming
and accurate transmission of the radio- LIC2365
frequency. 2. Using both hands, simultaneously
1. Position the end of your hand-held press and hold the desired HomeLink®
transmitter 1–3 in (2–8 cm) away from button and hand-held transmitter but-
the HomeLink® surface, keeping the ton. DO NOT release until the
HomeLink® indicator light 䊊1 in view. HomeLink® indicator light 䊊 1 flashes
slowly and then rapidly. When the indi-
cator light flashes rapidly, both buttons
may be released. (The rapid flashing
indicates successful programming.)

4. At the receiver located on the garage PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® FOR
door opener motor in the garage, lo- CANADIAN CUSTOMERS AND GATE
cate the “learn” or “smart” button (the
name and color of the button may vary
OPENERS
by manufacturer but it is usually lo- Canadian radio-frequency laws require
cated near where the hanging an- transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)
tenna wire is attached to the unit). If after several seconds of transmission –
there is difficulty locating the button, which may not be long enough for
reference the garage door opener’s HomeLink® to pick up the signal during
manual. training. Similar to this Canadian law, some
5. Press and release the “learn” or “smart” U.S. gate operators are designed to “tim-
button. eout” in the same manner.
6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press If you live in Canada or you are having diffi-
and hold the trained HomeLink® but- culties training a gate operator or garage
LIC2366
ton for 2 seconds and release. Repeat door opener by using the “Training” proce-
3. Press and hold the programmed dures, replace “Programming HomeLink®”
HomeLink® button and observe the in- the “press/hold/release” sequence up
to three times to complete the training step 2 with the following:
dicator light.
process. HomeLink® should now acti-
∙ If the indicator light 䊊 1 is vate your rolling code equipped device. NOTE:
solid/continuous, programming is
complete and your device should 7. If you have any questions or are having When programming a garage door
activate when the HomeLink® button difficulty programming your opener, etc., unplug the device during
is pressed and released. HomeLink® buttons, refer to the the “cycling” process to prevent possible
damage to the garage door opener com-
∙ If the indicator light 䊊
1 blinks rapidly HomeLink® web site at:
www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355- ponents.
for 2 seconds and then turns to a
solid/continuous light, continue 3515. 1. For additional information, refer to “Pro-
with steps 4-6 for a rolling code de- gramming HomeLink®” step 1 in this
vice. A second person may make the section.
following steps easier. Use a ladder or
other device. Do not stand on your
vehicle to perform the next steps.
2. Using both hands, simultaneously OPERATING THE HOMELINK® ∙ Position the hand-held transmitter 1 -
press and hold the desired HomeLink® UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER 3 inches (26 - 76 mm) away from the
button and the hand-held transmitter HomeLink® surface. Hold the transmit-
button. During training, your hand-held The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver, after ter in that position for up to 15 seconds.
transmitter may automatically stop it is programmed, can be used to activate If HomeLink® is not programmed within
transmitting. Continue to press and the programmed device. To operate, sim- that time, try holding the transmitter in
hold the desired HomeLink® button ply press and release the appropriate pro- another position – keeping the indicator
while you press and re-press (“cycle”) grammed HomeLink® Universal Trans- light in view at all times.
your hand-held transmitter every ceiver button. The amber indicator light will
2 seconds until the frequency signal illuminate while the signal is being trans- If you have any questions or are having
has been learned. The HomeLink® indi- mitted. difficulty programming your HomeLink®
cator light will flash slowly and then buttons, refer to the HomeLink® web site at:
rapidly after several seconds upon For convenience, the hand-held transmit- www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.
successful training. DO NOT release un- ter of the device may also be used at any
til the HomeLink® indicator light flashes time. CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED
slowly and then rapidly. When the indi- INFORMATION
cator light flashes rapidly, both buttons PROGRAMMING TROUBLE-
may be released. The rapid flashing in- DIAGNOSIS The following procedure clears the pro-
dicates successful training. grammed information from both buttons.
Proceed with “Programming If the HomeLink® does not quickly learn the Individual buttons cannot be cleared. How-
HomeLink®” step 3 to complete. hand-held transmitter information: ever, individual buttons can be repro-
If the device was unplugged during the grammed. For additional information, refer
∙ Replace the hand-held transmitter bat-
programming procedure, remember to “Reprogramming a single HomeLink®
teries with new batteries.
to plug it back in when programming is button” in this section.
completed. ∙ Position the hand-held transmitter with To clear all programming:
its battery area facing away from the
HomeLink® surface. 1. Press and hold the two outer HomeLink®
buttons until the indicator light begins to
∙ Press and hold both the HomeLink® flash in approximately 10 seconds. Do not
and hand-held transmitter buttons hold for longer than 20 seconds.
without interruption.
2. Release both buttons.
HomeLink® is now in the programming IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN NOTE:
mode and can be programmed at any
If your vehicle is stolen, you should change Changes or modifications not expressly
time beginning with “Programming
the codes of any non-rolling code device approved by the party responsible for
HomeLink®” - Step 1.
that has been programmed into compliance could void the user’s author-
REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE HomeLink®. Consult the Owner’s Manual of ity to operate the equipment.
HOMELINK® BUTTON each device or call the manufacturer or For Canada:
To reprogram a HomeLink® Universal dealer of those devices for additional infor-
This device complies with Industry
Transceiver button, complete the following: mation.
Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® When your vehicle is recovered, you will Operation is subject to the following two
button. DO NOT release the button. need to reprogram the HomeLink® Uni- conditions: (1) this device may not cause
versal Transceiver with your new trans- interference, and (2) this device must ac-
2. The indicator light will begin to flash mitter information. cept any interference, including interfer-
after 20 seconds. Without releasing the ence that may cause undesired opera-
HomeLink® button, proceed with “Pro- FCC Notice: tion of the device.
gramming HomeLink®” - Step 1.
For USA:
For questions or comments, contact
This device complies with Part 15 of the
HomeLink® at: www.homelink.com or
1–800–355–3515 (except Mexico). FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) This device
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver but- may not cause interference, and (2) this
ton has now been reprogrammed. The device must accept any interference re-
new device can be activated by pressing ceived, including interference that may
the HomeLink® button that was just pro- cause undesired operation.
grammed. This procedure will not affect
any other programmed HomeLink® but-
tons.

MEMO

3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-11

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System Fuel-filler cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-11
keys (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Tilt operation (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Locking with key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Locking with inside lock knob. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Vanity mirrors (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Locking with power door lock switch Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Manual anti-glare rearview mirror
Rear doors (King Cab® models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Automatic door locks (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 3-6 Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror
Child safety rear door lock (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Remote keyless entry system (if so equipped) . . . 3-6 Truck box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
How to use remote keyless entry Tailgate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Bed extender (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 Tie down hooks (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
KEYS
A key number is only necessary when you System. After the registration process,
have lost all your keys. If you still have a key, these components will only recognize keys
it can duplicated without knowing the key coded into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer
number. System during registration. Any key that is
not given to the dealer at the time of regis-
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER tration will no longer be able to start your
SYSTEM KEYS (if so equipped) vehicle.
You can only drive your vehicle using the CAUTION
master key which is registered to the
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System com- Do not allow the immobilizer system
ponents in your vehicle. This key has a tran- key, which contains an electrical tran-
sponder, to come into contact with wa-
sponder chip in the key head.
ter or salt water. This could affect sys-
The master key can be used for all the tem function.
LPD0348
locks.
1. Two master keys with transponder chip
and chrome NISSAN brand symbol on Never leave these keys in the vehicle.
one side Additional or replacement keys:
2. Transponder chip If you still have a key, the key number is not
3. Key number plate necessary when you need extra NISSAN
Vehicle Immobilizer System keys. A NISSAN
A key number plate is supplied with your dealer can duplicate your existing key. As
keys. Record the key number and keep the many as five NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer
plate in a safe place (such as your wallet), System keys can be used with one vehicle.
not in the vehicle. If you lose your keys, it is You should bring all NISSAN Vehicle Immo-
recommended that you visit a NISSAN bilizer System keys that you have to the
dealer for duplicates by using the key num- NISSAN dealer for registration. This is be-
ber. NISSAN does not record key numbers cause the registration process will erase
so it is very important to keep track of your the memory of all key codes previously reg-
key number plate. istered into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer
3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
DOORS
When the doors are locked using one of the

following methods, the doors cannot be through unintended operation of the
opened using the inside or outside door vehicle and/or its systems, including
handles. The doors must be unlocked to entrapment in windows and/or inad-
open the doors. vertent door lock activation, do not
WARNING assistance of others and/or pets un-
∙ Always have the doors locked while attended in your vehicle. Additionally,
driving. Along with the use of seat the temperature inside a closed ve-
belts, this provides greater safety in hicle on a warm day can quickly be-
the event of an accident by helping to come high enough to cause a signifi-
prevent persons from being thrown cant risk of injury or death to people
from the vehicle. This also helps keep and pets.
children and others from unintention- WPD0311
ally opening the doors, and will help
Driver’s side and Passenger’s side (if so
keep out intruders.
equipped)
∙ Before opening any door, always look LOCKING WITH KEY
for and avoid oncoming traffic.
To lock or unlock the vehicle, turn the key as
shown.
Manual
To lock a door, turn the key toward the front
of the vehicle 䊊 1 . To unlock, turn the key
toward the rear 䊊 2 .
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

LPD0240 LPD0298 WPD0381
Driver’s side Inside lock Driver’s and Passenger’s side
Power (if so equipped) LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR
The power door lock system allows you to To lock the door without the key, move the LOCK SWITCH (if so equipped)
lock or unlock all doors at the same time. inside lock knob to the lock position 䊊 1 ,
To lock all the doors without a key, push the
then close the door.
Turning the key toward the front 䊊
1 of the door lock switch (driver’s or passenger’s
vehicle locks all the doors. To unlock the door without the key, move side) to the lock position 䊊1 . When locking
the inside lock knob to the unlock position the door this way, be certain not to leave
Turning the key 1 time toward the rear 䊊
2 of
the vehicle unlocks that door. From that 䊊2 . the key inside the vehicle.
position, returning the key to neutral 䊊 3 To unlock all the doors without a key, push
(where the key can only be removed and the door lock switch (driver’s or passen-
inserted) and turning it toward the rear ger’s side) to the unlock position 䊊
2 .
again within 5 seconds unlocks all doors
䊊4 .

Lockout protection
When the power door lock switch (driver’s
side) is moved to the lock position with the
key in the ignition switch and any door
opens, all doors will lock and then unlock
automatically. This helps to prevent the
keys from being accidently locked inside
the vehicle.
LPD0278 LPD0312
REAR DOORS (King Cab® models) 2. From the outside, pull the door handle
1. Open the driver’s or passenger’s door.
䊊A toward you.

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM (if
so equipped)
WARNING
∙ Radio waves could adversely affect
electric medical equipment. Those
who use a pacemaker should contact
the electric medical equipment
manufacturer for the possible influ-
ences before use.
∙ The remote keyless entry key fob
transmits radio waves when the but-
tons are pressed. The FAA advises ra-
dio waves may affect aircraft naviga-
tion and communication systems. Do
not operate the remote keyless entry
WPD0313 WPD0037 key fob while on an airplane. Make
3. Open the door to the desired position. CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK sure the buttons are not operated un-
(if so equipped) intentionally when the unit is stored
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS (if so for a flight.
equipped) Child safety locks help prevent the rear
doors from being opened accidentally, es- It is possible to lock/unlock all doors, turn
∙ All doors lock automatically when the the interior light on, and activate the panic
pecially when small children are in the ve-
vehicle speed reaches 15 mph alarm by using the key fob from outside the
hicle.
(24 km/h). vehicle.
The child safety lock levers are located on
∙ All doors unlock automatically when the Be sure to remove the key from the ve-
the edge of the rear doors.
transmission is placed in the P (Park) hicle before locking the doors.
position, when the ignition is turned to When the lever is in the LOCK position,
the OFF position, or when the key is re- the door can be opened only from the The key fob can operate at a distance of
moved from the ignition. outside. approximately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle.
The effective distance depends upon the
conditions around the vehicle.

As many as five key fobs can be used with
∙ Do not place the key fob for an ex-
one vehicle. For information concerning
tended period in an area where tem-
the purchase and use of additional key
peratures exceed 140°F (60°C)
fobs, it is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer. ∙ Do not attach the key fob with a key
holder that contains a magnet.
The key fob will not function when:
∙ Do not place the key fob near equip-
∙ The battery is discharged. ment that produces a magnetic field,
∙ The distance between the vehicle and such as a TV, audio equipment and
the key fob is over 33 ft (10 m). personal computers.
The panic alarm will not activate when If a key fob is lost or stolen, NISSAN rec-
the key is in the ignition switch. ommends erasing the ID code of that
key fob. This will prevent the key fob
CAUTION from unauthorized use to unlock the LPD0209
vehicle. For information regarding the
Listed below are conditions or occur- erasing procedure, it is recommended HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS
rences which will damage the key fob: that you visit a NISSAN dealer. ENTRY SYSTEM
∙ Do not allow the key fob, which con- Locking doors
tains electrical components, to come
into contact with water or salt water. 1. Close all windows.
This could affect the system function.
2. Remove the key from the ignition
∙ Do not drop the key fob. switch.
∙ Do not strike the key fob sharply 3. Close the hood and all doors.
against another object.
∙ Do not change or modify the key fob.
∙ Wetting may damage the key fob. If
the key fob gets wet, immediately
wipe until it is completely dry.

4. Press the button on the key fob. Press the button on the key fob again
All the doors lock. The hazard warning within 5 seconds.
lights flash twice and the horn beeps
∙ All doors unlock.
once to indicate all doors are locked.
∙ The hazard warning lights flash once if
∙ When the button is pressed all doors are completely closed.
with all doors locked, the hazard
The interior lights can be turned off without
warning lights flash twice and the
waiting by inserting the key into the ignition
horn beeps once as a reminder that
switch and placing the ignition switch in
the doors are already locked.
the ON or START position, locking the doors
∙ If a door is open and you press with the key fob or pushing the interior light
the button, the doors will lock switch to the OFF position.
but the horn will not beep and the Auto relock
hazard lights will not flash.
LPD0210
The horn may or may not beep. For addi- When the button on the key fob is
tional information, refer to “Silencing the Unlocking doors pressed, all doors will lock automatically
horn beep feature” in this section. within 1 minute unless one of the following
Press the button on the key fob once. operations is performed:
∙ Only the driver’s door unlocks. ∙ Any door is opened.
∙ The hazard warning lights flash once if ∙ A key is inserted into the ignition switch
all doors are completely closed with the and the switch is cycled from OFF to ON.
ignition switch in any position except
the ON position.
∙ The interior lights illuminate for a period
of time when the interior light switch is
in the normal operation position.

Opening automatic windows (if so Using the interior lights
equipped)
Press the button on the key fob once
The key fob allows you to open windows to turn on the interior lights.
equipped with automatic operation. For additional information, refer to “Interior
lights” in the “Instruments and controls”
∙ To open the windows, press the section in this manual.
button on the key fob for longer than
3 seconds after all doors are unlocked.
The door windows will open while pressing
the button on the key fob.
The door windows cannot be closed by
using the key fob.
LPD2497
Using the panic alarm
If you are near your vehicle and feel threat-
ened, you may activate the panic alarm to
call attention by pressing and holding
the button on the key fob for longer
than 0.5 seconds.
The panic alarm and headlights will stay on
for a period of time.
The panic alarm stops when:
∙ It has run for a period of time.
∙ Any button is pressed on the key fob.

HOOD
The hazard warning lights will flash once

and the horn will sound once to confirm
that the horn beep feature has been reac-
tivated.
Deactivating the horn beep feature does
not silence the horn if the alarm is trig-
gered.
LPD0262 LPD0302
Silencing the horn beep feature 1. Pull the hood lock release handle 䊊 1
located below the driver’s side instru-
If desired, the horn beep feature can be ment panel. The hood will spring up
deactivated using the key fob. slightly.
To deactivate: Press and hold the 2. Push the lever 䊊 2 at the front of the
and buttons for at least 2 seconds. hood to the side as illustrated with your
The hazard warning lights will flash three fingertips and raise the hood.
times to confirm that the horn beep fea- 3. Insert the support rod into the slot on
ture has been deactivated. the underside of the hood 䊊 3 .
To activate: Press and hold the When closing the hood, return the hood rod
and buttons for at least 2 seconds to its original position. Lower the hood ap-
once more. proximately 12 in (30 cm) above the latch
and release it. This allows proper engage-
ment of the hood latch.
FUEL-FILLER DOOR
WARNING ∙ Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank

after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off
∙ Make sure the hood is completely
automatically. Continued refueling
closed and latched before driving.
may cause fuel overflow, resulting in
Failure to do so could cause the hood
fuel spray and possibly a fire.
to fly open and result in an accident.
∙ Use only an original equipment type
∙ If you see steam or smoke coming
fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has
from the engine compartment, to
a built-in safety valve needed for
avoid injury do not open the hood.
proper operation of the fuel system
and emission control system. An in-
correct cap can result in a serious mal-
function and possible injury. It could
also cause the Malfunction Indi-
LPD2698 cator Light (MIL) to come on.
FUEL-FILLER CAP ∙ Never pour fuel into the throttle body
to attempt to start your vehicle.
WARNING ∙ Do not fill a portable fuel container in
∙ Gasoline is extremely flammable and the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity
highly explosive under certain condi- can cause an explosion of flammable
tions. You could be burned or seri- liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or
ously injured if it is misused or mis- trailer. To reduce the risk of serious
handled. Always stop the engine and injury or death when filling portable
do not smoke or allow open flames or fuel containers:
sparks near the vehicle when – Always place the container on the
refueling. ground when filling.
– Do not use electronic devices when
filling.

– Keep the pump nozzle in contact ∙ Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) fuel recom-
with the container while you are properly may cause the Mal- mendation (if so equipped):
filling it. function Indicator Light (MIL) to illumi- ∙ Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door
– Use only approved portable fuel nate. If the light illuminates be- label can operate on up to E-85 fuel.
containers for flammable liquid. cause the fuel-filler cap is loose or Fuel system or other damage can oc-
missing, tighten or install the cap and cur if up to E-85 fuel is used in vehicles
CAUTION continue to drive the vehicle. that are not designed to run on E-85
The light should turn off after a fuel. For additional information, refer
∙ The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning mes- to “Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) fuel rec-
few driving trips. If the light does
sage will be displayed if the fuel-filler ommendation” in the “Technical and
not turn off after a few driving trips,
cap is not properly tightened. It may consumer information” section of this
have the vehicle inspected. It is rec-
take a few driving trips for the mes- manual.
sage to be displayed. Failure to
dealer for this service. Fuel recommendation (for QR25DE
tighten the fuel-filler cap properly af-
ter the LOOSE FUEL CAP warning mes- ∙ For additional information, refer to models):
sage is displayed may cause the the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” ∙ Do not use a fuel containing more
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) to in the “Instruments and Controls” sec- than 15% ethanol in your vehicle. For
illuminate. tion in this manual. additional information, refer to “Fuel
∙ If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body, recommendation (for QR25DE mod-
flush it away with water to avoid paint els)” in the “Technical and consumer
damage. information” section of this manual.
Fuel recommendation (for VQ40DE For additional information, refer to “Fuel
models): recommendation (for QR25DE models),”
∙ Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in your “Fuel recommendation (for VQ40DE mod-
vehicle. For additional information, els)” or “Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) fuel rec-
refer to “Fuel recommendation (for ommendation” in the “Technical and con-
VQ40DE models)” in the “Technical sumer information” section of this manual.
and consumer information” section of
this manual.

3. Press the loose fuel cap change/reset
button 䊊 A in the meter for about one
second to turn off the LOOSE FUEL CAP
warning message after tightening the
fuel-filler cap.
For additional information, refer to “Meters
and gauges” in the “Instruments and con-
trols” section of this manual.
LPD2699 LRS2004
To remove the fuel-filler cap: LOOSE FUEL CAP warning
1. Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclock- message
wise to remove.
The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning message
2. Loop the tether strap around the hook displays in the odometer when the fuel-
䊊1 while refueling. filler cap is not tightened correctly after the
To install the fuel-filler cap: vehicle has been refueled. It may take a few
driving trips for the message to be dis-
1. Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into the played. To turn off the warning message,
fuel-filler tube. perform the following:
2. Turn the fuel-filler cap clockwise until a 1. Remove and install the fuel-filler cap as
single click is heard. described above as soon as possible.
2. Tighten the fuel-filler cap until it clicks.

STEERING WHEEL SUN VISORS
∙ Do not adjust the steering wheel any

closer to you than is necessary for
proper steering operation and com-
fort. The driver’s air bag inflates with
great force. If you are unrestrained,
leaning forward, sitting sideways or
out of position in any way, you are at
greater risk of injury or death in a
crash. You may also receive serious or
fatal injuries from the air bag if you
are up against it when it inflates. Al-
ways sit back against the seatback
and as far away as practical from the
steering wheel. Always use the seat
LPD0304 belts.
TILT OPERATION (if so equipped) Pull the lock lever toward the driver and
hold it to adjust the steering wheel up or
WARNING down to the desired position.
∙ Do not adjust the steering wheel while Release the lock lever to lock the steering
driving. You could lose control of your wheel in place.
vehicle and cause an accident.
WPD0344

MIRRORS
1. To block glare from the front, swing

down 䊊1 the main sun visor.
2. To block glare from the side, remove

the main sun visor from the center
mount and swing the visor to the side
䊊2 .
3. To extend 䊊3 the sun visor, slide in or

out as needed (if so equipped).
CAUTION
∙ Do not store the sun visor before re-
turning the extension to its original
position.
LPD2573 WPD0126
∙ Do not pull the extension sun visor
forcedly downward.
VANITY MIRRORS (if so equipped) MANUAL ANTI-GLARE REARVIEW
To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun MIRROR (if so equipped)
visor down and flip open the mirror cover. Use the night position 䊊1 to reduce glare
Some vanity mirrors are illuminated and from the headlights of vehicles behind you
turn on when the mirror cover is open. at night.
Use the day position 䊊
2 when driving in
daylight hours.
WARNING
Use the night position only when neces-
sary, because it reduces rear view
clarity.

AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE
REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped)
The inside mirror is designed so that it au-
tomatically dims during night time condi-
tions and according to the intensity of the
headlights of the vehicle following you. The
automatic anti-glare sensor 䊊 1 is activated
when the ignition switch is in the ON posi-
tion.
The indicator light 䊊
2 will illuminate when
the automatic anti-glare sensor feature is
operating.
NOTE: LPD2505 LPD2504

Type A (if so equipped) Type B (if so equipped)
Do not hang any objects over the sen-
The indicator light will illuminate when the For information on HomeLink® Universal
sors or apply glass cleaner to the sen-
automatic anti-glare feature is operating. Transceiver (if so equipped) operation, refer
sors. Doing so will reduce the sensitivity
to the “HomeLink® Universal Transceiver” in
of the sensors, resulting in improper op- With the ignition switch in the ON position,
the “Instruments and controls” section of
eration. press the button as described: this manual.
∙ To turn off the anti-glare feature, press For additional information about the com-
the button. The indicator light will pass 䊊 3 and compass features, refer to
turn off. “Compass and outside temperature dis-
play” in the “Instruments and controls” sec-
∙ To turn on the anti-glare feature, press tion of this manual.
the button again. The indicator
light will turn on.

OUTSIDE MIRRORS
WARNING
∙ Objects viewed in the outside mirror
on the passenger side are closer than
they appear. Be careful when moving
to the right. Using only this mirror
could cause an accident. Use the in-
side mirror or glance over your shoul-
der to properly judge distances to
other objects.
∙ Do not adjust the mirrors while driv-
ing. You could lose control of your ve-
hicle and cause an accident. WPD0170 LPD0237
Manual control type (if so Electric control type (if so
equipped) equipped)
The outside mirrors can be moved in any The outside mirror remote control will op-
direction for a better rear view. erate only when the ignition switch is
placed in the ACC or ON position.
Move the small switch 䊊 1 to select the right
or left mirror. Move the large switch 䊊 2 to
adjust each mirror to the desired position.
Move the small switch 䊊 1 to the center
(neutral) position to prevent accidentally
moving the mirror.

TRUCK BOX
For additional information on proper truck

box loading, refer to “Vehicle loading infor-
mation” in the “Technical and consumer in-
formation” section of this manual.
WARNING
∙ Never allow anyone to ride in the
cargo area or on the rear seat when it
is in the folded position. Use of these
areas by passengers without proper
restraints could result in serious injury
or death in an accident or sudden
stop.
LPD0259 LPD0270 ∙ It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area inside a vehicle. In a colli-
Foldable outside mirrors TAILGATE sion, people riding in these areas are
Pull the outside mirror toward the door to Opening the tailgate more likely to be seriously injured or
fold it. killed.
Pull the tailgate handle upward and lower
Heated mirrors (if so equipped) ∙ Do not allow people to ride in any area
the tailgate. The support cables hold the
tailgate open.
Some outside mirrors can be heated to with seats and seat belts.
defrost, defog, or de-ice for improved vis- When closing the tailgate, make sure the
∙ Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
ibility. For additional information, refer to latches are securely locked.
seat and using a seat belt properly.
“Rear window or outside mirror defroster
Do not drive the vehicle with the tailgate
switch (if so equipped)” in the “Instruments
down, unless equipped with NISSAN’s
and controls” section of this manual.
Bed Extender (accessory) or equivalent
in the extended position.

6. Take the tailgate plug from the glove
box and connect it to the tailgate wir-
ing harness to avoid contamination
which will lead to malfunction of the
rear camera.
7. Remove the tailgate. For additional in-
formation, refer to “Removing the tail-
gate” in this section.
LPD2097
Disconnecting the rear camera (if 3. Disconnect the chassis wiring harness
so equipped) 䊊3 by pressing inward on the locking
tab, in the direction shown, while pulling
Before removing the tailgate disconnect the connectors apart. Hold the con-
the rear camera by performing the follow- nector firmly to prevent the connector
ing: in the chassis harness from falling into
the sill.
1. Open the tailgate to access the rear
camera connector bracket 䊊1 located 4. Take the chassis plug and bracket from
on the rear sill. the glove box and connect them to the
2. Remove the connector bracket 䊊 2 chassis wiring harness to avoid con-
tamination to the terminals which will
from the sill by pressing the locking tab
lead to malfunction of the rear camera.
inward, in the direction shown, while
pulling the bracket apart. 5. Insert the bracket back into the sill.

4. Slide the tailgate out of the left side
hinge.
Installing the tailgate
1. Insert the tailgate into the left side
hinge.
2. Hold the tailgate at a 15 degree angle
and insert into the right side hinge.
3. Continue to hold the tailgate at a 15
degree angle and attach the tailgate
support cables.
4. Close the tailgate securely.
LPD2208
Removing the tailgate
1. Release the tailgate support cables.
CAUTION
∙ The tailgate is heavy. Two people
should remove or install it. Be careful
not to drop it during removal.
∙ After releasing the support cables, do
not let the tailgate rest on the
bumper.
2. Hold the tailgate at a 15 degree angle.
3. Pull the tailgate out from the right side
hinge.
6. Securely fix the rear camera connector
bracket 䊊1 to the rear sill.
7. Close the tailgate securely.
LPD2097
Connecting the rear camera (if so 3. Disconnect the chassis plug and
equipped) bracket from the chassis wiring har-
ness 䊊 3 . Keep the connector and
Before closing the tailgate reconnect the bracket in a safe place such as the
rear camera by performing the following: glove box.
1. After attaching the rear tailgate to the 4. Disconnect the tailgate plug from the
truck, keep the tailgate open and check tailgate wiring harness. Keep the tail-
that the tailgate harness is not hanging gate plug in a safe place such as the
below the tailgate. glove box.
2. Remove the connector bracket 䊊 2 5. Connect the tailgate wiring harness to

the chassis wiring harness.
from the sill by pressing the locking tab
inward, in the direction shown, while
pulling the bracket apart.

BED EXTENDER (if so equipped)
CAUTION
∙ Do not overload the bed extender.
Maximum load on the open tailgate is
200 lbs. (890N).
∙ Evenly distribute and properly secure
all cargo.
∙ Do not use the bed extender or tail-
gate to secure cargo.
LPD0272 LPD0480
Locking the tailgate Positioning the bed extender
To lock the tailgate, turn the key toward the To use the bed extender in the inward po-
passenger side of the vehicle 䊊 1 . To unlock, sition perform the following:
turn the key toward the driver side 䊊 2 .
1. Rotate the bed extender 䊊
1 toward the
cab of the truck.
2. If necessary, remove tethers from the
tailgate latch.
3. Tighten the knobs to secure the ex-
tender into the desired position.
4. Close the tailgate.

5. Place cargo inside the bed extender in NOTE:
the truck bed.
Use care when rotating extender, buck-
6. Properly secure the cargo. les may come in contact with the truck
bed railing.
Removing and installing the bed
extender
To remove or install the bed extender per-
form the following:
1. Open the tailgate.
2. Rotate the bed extender into a vertical
position and lift straight up (to remove)
LPD0479 or lower straight down (to install).
To use the bed extender in the outward To store the bed extender in the front of the
position perform the following: truck when not in use perform the follow-
ing:
1. Open the tailgate.
1. Position the sliding brackets past the
2. Rotate the bed extender 䊊 2 away from
center of the wheel well.
the cab of the truck until the extender
sits on the tailgate. 2. Re-install the extender into the brack-
ets (see above).
3. Lock the buckles 䊊 3 into the tailgate
latch on both sides. 3. Rotate the extender to the inward po-
sition.
The bed extender can be adjusted in the
outward position by moving the extender 4. Push the brackets forward until the ex-
tender comes in contact with the front
along the rail.
wall of the truck box.

WARNING
personal injury.
LTI0102
TIE DOWN HOOKS (if so equipped)
For your convenience, tie down hooks are
placed at each corner of the truck box.
These may be used to help secure cargo
loaded into the truck box.
∙ The weight of the cargo load must be
evenly distributed over both the front
and the rear axles.
∙ All cargo should be securely fastened
with ropes or straps to prevent it from
shifting or sliding within the vehicle.

4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and
voice recognition systems
Control panel buttons — models without RearView Monitor system limitations . . . . . . . . 4-21
Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 System maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
How to use the touch-screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 Vents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
How to use the MENU button . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 Heater and air conditioner (manual)
(brightness control) button . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
How to use the VOL (volume) knob / Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
PUSH (power) button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Selecting menu from launch bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Control panel buttons — models with Air conditioner operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 Air flow charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
How to use the touch-screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11 Heater and air conditioner (automatic)
How to use the BACK button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13 (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
How to use the button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13 Automatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15 Manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
How to use the ON-OFF button/VOL Operating tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
(volume) control knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15 Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
How to use the CAMERA button . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15 Audio system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
RearView Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16 Radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
RearView Monitor system operation . . . . . . . . . 4-17 FM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
How to read the displayed lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18 AM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Difference between predicted and Satellite radio reception (if so equipped) . . . . . 4-38
actual distances. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18 Audio operation precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Adjusting the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20 FM/AM radio (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
FM/AM/SAT radio with Compact Disc Siri® Eyes Free (models without Navigation
(CD) player (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51 System) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
USB (Universal Serial Bus) connection Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
port (models without Navigation Operating Siri® Eyes Free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
System) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-58 Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-80
USB (Universal Serial Bus) connection Siri® Eyes Free (models with Navigation
port (models with Navigation System) System) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
iPod®* player operation without Siri® Activation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 4-63 Operating Siri® Eyes Free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82
iPod®* player operation with Navigation Changing Siri® Eyes Free settings . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82
System (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67 Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83
Bluetooth® streaming audio without Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-84
Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 4-70 Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
Bluetooth® streaming audio with without Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . .4-85
Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 4-73 Regulatory information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87
CD care and cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75 Using the system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87
Steering wheel switch for audio control. . . . . . 4-75 Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-88
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76 Control buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-89
NissanConnect® Mobile Apps (if so equipped). . . 4-77 Connecting procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90
Registering with NissanConnect® Voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91
Mobile Apps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77 Phone display screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93
Connect Phone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77 Making a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94
Application download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77 Receiving a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-95
During a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-95 Bluetooth® settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-110
Ending a call. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96 Phone settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-111
Text messaging (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96 Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-112
Bluetooth® connections screen . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-100 NISSAN Voice Recognition System
Phone and text message settings . . . . . . . . . . 4-101 (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-113
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System with Using the system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-113
Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103 System features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-114
Regulatory information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-105 Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
Voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-106 voice commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115
Connecting procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-106 Navigation System voice commands . . . . . . . 4-116
Vehicle phonebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-107 Audio system voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-116
Making a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-107
Information voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-116
Receiving a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-107
My Apps voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-117
During a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-107
Help voice commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-117
Ending a call. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-108
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-117
Text messaging (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-108
CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS —
MODELS WITHOUT NAVIGATION
WARNING
∙ Positioning of the heating or air con-
ditioning controls and display con-
trols should not be done while driving
in order that full attention may be
given to the driving operation.
∙ Do not disassemble or modify this
system. If you do, it may result in acci-
dents, fire, or electrical shock.
∙ Do not use this system if you notice
any abnormality, such as a frozen
screen or lack of sound. Continued
use of the system may result in acci-
dent, fire or electric shock.
∙ In case you notice any foreign object
in the system hardware, spill liquid on
it, or notice smoke or smell coming
from it, stop using the system imme-
diately. Ignoring such conditions may
lead to accidents, fire or electrical
shock. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for servicing. LHA4680
1. MENU button 5. VOL (volume) knob / PUSH
(power) button
2. button* * For additional information regarding the
3. Display screen Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
control button, refer to “Bluetooth® Hands-
4. (brightness control) button
4-4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Free Phone System without Navigation
∙ Do not splash any liquid such as water
System” in this section. or car fragrance on the display. Con-
When you use this system, make sure the tact with liquid will cause the system
engine is running. to malfunction.
If you use the system with the engine not To help ensure safe driving, some functions
running for a long time, it will discharge cannot be operated while driving.
the battery, and the engine will not start. The on-screen functions that are not avail-
Reference symbols: able while driving will be “grayed out” or
muted.
“Example” — Words marked in quotes refer
to a key shown only on the display. These WARNING
keys can be selected by touching the ∙ ALWAYS give your full attention to
screen. driving. LHA4700
HOW TO USE THE TOUCH-SCREEN ∙ Avoid using vehicle features that
could distract you. If distracted, you
CAUTION could lose control of your vehicle and
cause an accident.
∙ The glass display screen may break if
it is hit with a hard or sharp object. If
the glass screen breaks, do not touch
it. Doing so could result in an injury.
∙ To clean the display, never use a rough
cloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or any
kind of solvent or paper towel with a
chemical cleaning agent. They will
scratch or deteriorate the panel.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-5

Touch-screen operation
Menu Item Result
Selecting the item Touch an item to select. To select the “Phone” key, touch the “Phone” key on the screen. Touch the “ ” key to
return to the previous screen.
Adjusting the item Touch the “+” key or the “⫺” key to adjust the settings of an item. Touch the up arrow to scroll up the page one
item at a time. Touch the down arrow to scroll down the page one item at a time.
Inputting characters Touch the number key. There are some options available when inputting characters.
123 Touch to manually enter numbers.
OK Completes the character input.

Touch-screen maintenance
If you clean the display screen, use a dry,
soft cloth. If additional cleaning is neces-
sary, use a small amount of neutral deter-
gent with a soft cloth. Never spray the
screen with water or detergent. Dampen
the cloth first and then wipe the screen.
LHA4706 LHA4700

HOW TO USE THE MENU 1. Press the MENU button.
BUTTON 2. Touch the “Settings” key.
To select and/or adjust several functions,
3. Touch the desired item.
features and modes that are available for
your vehicle:
Menu item Result
Settings Touch to change the following steps.
Connections Touch this key to select either Bluetooth® phone, Bluetooth® audio or USB audio options. For additional
information, refer to “USB connections screen” and “Bluetooth® connections screen” in this section.
Phone For additional information, refer to “Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System without Navigation System” in
this section.
Sound For additional information, refer to “Audio system” in this section.
Volume & Beeps For additional information, refer to “Volume & beeps” in this section.
Clock Touch this key to adjust clock settings.
On-screen Clock Touch to toggle ON or OFF the clock display on the upper right corner of the display screen.
Clock Format Touch to set the clock to 12 hours or 24 hours formats.
Daylight Savings Time Touch to adjusts the daylight saving time to ON or OFF.
Set Clock Manually Touch to adjust the clock manually; then touch to change between AM and PM, the hour and the
minutes.
System Voice For additional information, refer to “Settings” in this section.
Camera Touch this key to change the camera settings.
Others Touch this key to select and/or adjust various functions of this system. A screen with additional options
will appear.
Display Touch this key to adjust the appearance of the display. For additional information, refer to “Adjusting the
screen” in this section.
Language Touch this key to change the language on the display.
OSS Licenses Touch this key to display software licensing information.
Return All Settings To Default Touch this key to return all settings to default and to clear the memory.

(brightness control) BUTTON The following menu items are available on
the Launch Bar:
To change the display brightness, press ∙ AM
the button. Pressing the button again
will change the display to the day or the ∙ FM
night display. ∙ USB/iPod
Press and hold the button for more
∙ Bluetooth
than 2 seconds to turn the display off. Press
and hold the button again to turn the dis- ∙ AUX
play on.
∙ Settings
HOW TO USE THE VOL (volume)
KNOB / PUSH (power)
BUTTON
LHA4707
Press the PUSH (power) button to
turn audio function on and off. Turn the VOL SELECTING MENU FROM LAUNCH
(volume) knob to adjust audio volume. BAR
Various system functions can be accessed
by touching the items on the Launch Bar
䊊1 which is displayed on most of the main
menu screens (the Launch Bar does not
appear on some screens such as settings
screens, camera screens, etc.)
Touch the keys on the Launch Bar to dis-
play the corresponding menu screens.

CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS —
MODELS WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM
(if so equipped)
9. CAMERA button
10. NAV button*
* For additional information, refer to the
separate NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual
regarding the Navigation system control
buttons.
** For additional information, refer to the
“Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
with Navigation System” in this section.
When you use this system, make sure the
engine is running.
If you use the system with the engine not
running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long
time, it will discharge the battery, and
the engine will not start.
Reference symbols:
“Example” — Words marked in quotes refer
to a key shown only on the display. These
keys can be selected by touching the
LHA3138
screen.
1. MAP button* 5. (brightness control) button
2. Display screen 6. BACK button
3. button** 7. ENTER/AUDIO button / TUNE knob
4. button 8. ON-OFF button/VOL (volume) control
knob
HOW TO USE THE TOUCH-SCREEN WARNING
CAUTION ∙ ALWAYS give your full attention to
driving.
∙ The glass display screen may break if
it is hit with a hard or sharp object. If ∙ Avoid using vehicle features that
the glass screen breaks, do not touch could distract you. If distracted, you
it. Doing so could result in an injury. could lose control of your vehicle and
cause an accident.
∙ To clean the display, never use a rough
cloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or any
kind of solvent or paper towel with a
chemical cleaning agent. They will
scratch or deteriorate the panel.
∙ Do not splash any liquid such as water
LHA3748
or car fragrance on the display. Con-
tact with liquid will cause the system
to malfunction.
To help ensure safe driving, some functions
cannot be operated while driving.
The on-screen functions that are not avail-
able while driving will be grayed out or
muted.
Park the vehicle in a safe location and then
operate the navigation system.

Touch-screen operation
Menu Item Result
Selecting the item Touch an item to select . To select the “Audio” key, touch the “Audio” key on the screen. Press the BACK button to
return to the previous screen.
Adjusting the item Touch the “+” key or the “⫺” key to adjust the settings of an item. Touch the down arrow to scroll down the page.
Touch the up arrow to scroll up the page.
Inputting characters Touch the letter or number key. There are some options available when inputting characters.
123/ABC Changes the available character set to numbers.
Space Inserts a space.
Delete Deletes the last inputted character with one touch. Touch and hold the “Delete” key to delete all of the
characters.
OK Completes the character input.

Touch-screen maintenance
If you clean the display screen, use a dry,
soft cloth. If additional cleaning is neces-
sary, use a small amount of neutral deter-
gent with a soft cloth. Never spray the
screen with water or detergent. Dampen
the cloth first and then wipe the screen.
HOW TO USE THE BACK BUTTON
Press the BACK button to return to the pre-
vious screen.
LHA2773 LHA3748
HOW TO USE THE BUTTON To select and/or adjust several functions,
features and modes that are available for
For additional information, refer to the
your vehicle:
separate NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual
regarding the “SiriusXM® Travel Link” and 1. Press the [ ] button.
“SiriusXM® Traffic” features.
2. Touch the “Settings” key.
For additional information, refer to
“NissanConnect® Mobile Apps” in this sec- 3. Touch the desired item.
tion.
For additional information, refer to “NISSAN
Voice Recognition System” in this section.

Menu item Result
Audio For additional information, refer to “Audio system” in this section.
Navigation For additional information, refer to the separate NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual.
Phone & Bluetooth For additional information, refer to “Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System with Navigation System” in this section.
System Touch this key to select and/or adjust various functions of this system. A screen with additional options will appear.
Display Touch this key to adjust the appearance of the display.
Brightness Adjusts the brightness of the display.
Display Mode Adjusts to fit the level of lighting in the vehicle. Touch key to cycle through options. “Day” and “Night” modes are suited for
the respective times of day while “Auto” controls the display automatically.
Scroll Direc- Adjusts the direction of the menu scroll. Choose to either move up or down.
tion
Clock/Date Touch this key to adjust the time and date.
Time Format The clock can be set to 12 hours or 24 hours.
Date Format Select from two possible formats for displaying the day, month, and year.
Clock Mode Adjust the mode for the clock. “Auto” uses the system’s GPS to automatically maintain the time. “Manual” allows you to
set the clock using the “Set Clock Manually” key. Select a time zone using the “Time Zone” key.
Set Clock Adjust the clock manually, Touch the “+” or “-” keys to adjust the hours, minutes, day, month and year up or down. “Clock
Manually Mode” must be set to manual for this option to be available.
Daylight Sav- Adjusts the daylight savings time on or off.
ings Time
Time Zone Choose the applicable time zone from the list.
Language Touch this key to change the language on the display.
Camera Settings Touch this key to change the camera settings.
Display Mode Touch this key to select the touch-screen display mode (day, night, or automatic).
Brightness Adjust touch-screen brightness.
Contrast Adjust touch-screen contrast.
Color Adjust touch-screen color.

Menu item Result
Temperature Unit Touch this key to change the temperature unit being displayed (Fahrenheit or Celsius).
Touchscreen click Toggles the touch-screen click feature on or off. When activated a click sound will be heard every time a key on the
screen is touched.
System Beeps Toggle the system beep tones feature on or off. When activated, a beep sound will be heard when a pop-up message
appears on the screen or a button on the unit (such as the button) is pressed and held for 2 seconds.
Return to Factory Settings/ Touch this key to return all settings to default and to clear the memory.
Clear Memory
Software Licenses Touch this key to display software licensing information.
Minimize Voice Feedback Touch this key to turn ON or OFF the control voice feedback.
System Software Version Touch this key to display software version information.
Traffic Touch this key display the traffic settings. For additional information, refer to the separate NissanConnect® Owner’s
Manual.
SXM Touch this key to display SXM status information. For additional information, refer to the “Audio System” in this section.
BUTTON HOW TO USE THE ON-OFF

To change the display brightness, press BUTTON/VOL (volume) CONTROL
the button. Pressing the button again KNOB
will change the display to auto or night Press the ON-OFF button to turn audio
display mode. function on and off. Turn the volume con-
If no operation is performed within 5 sec- trol knob to adjust audio volume.
onds, the display will return to the previous
display. HOW TO USE THE CAMERA
BUTTON
Press and hold the button for more
than 2 seconds to turn the display off. Press For additional information, refer to “Rear-
the button again to turn the display on. View Monitor” in this section.

REARVIEW MONITOR
LHA4818
1. CAMERA button (if so equipped)

WARNING CAUTION
∙ Failure to follow the warnings and in- Do not scratch the camera lens when
structions for proper use of the Rear- cleaning dirt or snow from the front of
View Monitor system could result in the camera.
serious injury or death.
The RearView Monitor system automati-
∙ RearView Monitor is a convenience cally shows a rear view of the vehicle when
feature and is not a substitute for the shift lever is shifted into the R (Reverse)
proper backing. Always turn and look position. Press the CAMERA button (if so
out the windows and check mirrors to equipped) while in the R (Reverse) position
be sure that it is safe to move before to cycle through guideline options. The ra-
operating the vehicle. Always back up dio can still be heard while the RearView
slowly. Monitor is active.
∙ The system is designed as an aid to LHA3671
the driver in showing large stationary
objects directly behind the vehicle, to To display the rear view, the RearView Moni-
help avoid damaging the vehicle. tor system uses a camera located next to
the tailgate handle 䊊 1 .
∙ The distance guide line and the ve-
hicle width line should be used as a REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
reference only when the vehicle is on a OPERATION
level paved surface. The distance
viewed on the monitor is for reference With the ignition switch in the ON position,
only and may be different than the move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) po-
actual distance between the vehicle sition to operate the RearView Monitor.
and displayed objects.

∙ Green line 䊊
4 : approx. 3 m (10 ft) (if so
equipped)
Vehicle width guide lines 䊊
5
Indicate the vehicle width when backing

up.
DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTED
AND ACTUAL DISTANCES
The displayed guidelines and their loca-
tions on the ground are for approximate
reference only. Objects on uphill or downhill
surfaces or projecting objects will be actu-
ally located at distances different from
LHA2944 those displayed in the monitor relative to
HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED the guidelines (refer to illustrations). When
LINES in doubt, turn around and view the objects
as you are backing up, or park and exit the
Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle vehicle to view the positioning of objects
width and distances to objects with refer- behind the vehicle.
ence to the vehicle body line 䊊A are dis-
played on the monitor.
Distance guide lines LHA3672
Indicate distances from the vehicle body. Backing up on a steep uphill

∙ Red line 䊊
1 : approx. 0.5 m (1.5 ft) When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the
distance guide lines and the vehicle width
∙ Yellow line 䊊
2 : approx. 1 m (3 ft)
guide lines are shown closer than the actual
∙ Green line 䊊
3 : approx. 2 m (7 ft) distance. Note that any object on the hill is
further than it appears on the monitor.
on the hill is closer than it appears on the
monitor.
LHA3673 LHA4513
Backing up on a steep downhill Backing up near a projecting
When backing up the vehicle down a hill,
object
the distance guide lines and the vehicle The vehicle may seem to nearly clear the
width guide lines are shown farther than object in the display. However, the vehicle
the actual distance. Note that any object may hit the object if it projects over the
actual backing up course.
object when backing up to the position 䊊 A
if the object projects over the actual back-
ing up course.
LHA3522
Models without Navigation System
ADJUSTING THE SCREEN
The procedure for adjusting the display
settings of the screen differs depending on
the type of screen present on the vehicle.
For vehicles without Navigation System
LHA3674 1. While on the main menu screen, touch
Backing up behind a projecting the “Settings” key.
object 2. Touch the “Camera” key.
The position 䊊 C is shown farther than the
3. Touch the “Brightness”, “Contrast”, “Tint”
position 䊊B in the display. However, the po-
“Color”, or “Black Level” key.
sition 䊊
C is actually at the same distance as
the position 䊊 A . The vehicle may hit the

4. Turn the TUNE knob to adjust the set-
∙ Underneath the bumper and the cor-
ting up or down. ner areas of the bumper cannot be
5. Press the button again to access viewed on the RearView Monitor be-
the Auto settings. cause of its monitoring range limita-
tion. The system will not show small
6. Turn the TUNE knob to adjust the set- objects below the bumper, and may
ting up or down. not show objects close to the bumper
∙ Do not adjust the display settings of the or on the ground.
RearView Monitor while the vehicle is ∙ Objects viewed in the RearView Moni-
moving. tor differ from actual distance be-
cause a wide-angle lens is used.
REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
LIMITATIONS ∙ Objects in the RearView Monitor will
appear visually opposite compared to
LHA3679 when viewed in the rearview and out-
Models with Navigation System WARNING
side mirrors.
4. Adjust the item by touching the “+” or “-” Listed below are the system limitations
∙ Use the displayed lines as a reference.
key on the touch-screen display. for RearView Monitor. Failure to operate
The lines are highly affected by the
the vehicle in accordance with these
∙ Do not adjust the display settings of the number of occupants, fuel level, ve-
system limitations could result in seri-
RearView Monitor while the vehicle is hicle position, road conditions and
ous injury or death.
moving. road grade.
∙ The system cannot completely elimi-
For vehicles with Navigation System ∙ Make sure that the tailgate is securely
nate blind spots and may not show
closed when backing up.
1. Firmly apply the brake and place the every object.
shift lever in R (Reverse) ∙ Do not put anything on the rearview
camera. The rearview camera is in-
2. Press the button on the control stalled on the tailgate.
panel.
3. The screen will display the Night set-
tings.
∙ When washing the vehicle with high ∙ Objects on the monitor may not be
pressure water, be sure not to spray it clear in a dark environment.
around the camera. Otherwise, water ∙ There may be a delay when switching
may enter the camera unit causing between views.
water condensation on the lens, a
malfunction, fire or an electric shock. ∙ If dirt, rain or snow accumulate on the
camera, RearView Monitor may not dis-
∙ Do not strike the camera. It is a preci- play objects clearly. Clean the camera.
sion instrument. Otherwise, it may
malfunction or cause damage result- ∙ Do not use wax on the camera lens.
ing in a fire or an electric shock. Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth
dampened with a diluted mild cleaning
The following are operating limitations and agent, then wipe with a dry cloth.
do not represent a system malfunction:
∙ When the temperature is extremely LHA3671
high or low, the screen may not clearly SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
display objects.
∙ When strong light directly shines on the CAUTION
camera, objects may not be displayed ∙ Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner
clearly. to clean the camera. This will cause
∙ Vertical lines may be seen in objects on discoloration.
the screen. This is due to strong re- ∙ Do not damage the camera as the moni-
flected light from the bumper. tor screen may be adversely affected.
∙ The screen may flicker under fluores- If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the
cent light. camera 䊊 1 , the RearView Monitor may not
display objects clearly. Clean the camera
∙ The colors of objects on the RearView
by wiping it with a cloth dampened with a
Monitor may differ somewhat from the
diluted mild cleaning agent and then wip-
actual color of objects.
ing it with a dry cloth.
VENTS HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER
(manual) (if so equipped)
WARNING
∙ The air conditioner cooling function
operates only when the engine is
running.
∙ Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the assis-
tance of others alone in your vehicle.
Pets should also not be left alone.
They could accidentally injure them-
selves or others through inadvertent
operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot,
sunny days, temperatures in a closed
vehicle could quickly become high
LHA4512 enough to cause severe or possibly
Adjust air flow direction for the vents di- fatal injuries to people or animals.
rected at the driver’s and passenger’s side ∙ Do not use the recirculation mode for
windows 䊊 1 , driver and passenger 䊊 2 , or
long periods as it may cause the inte-
center 䊊3 by moving the vent slide and/or
rior air to become stale and the win-
vent assemblies. Open or close the driver dows to fog up.
and passenger vents by using the dial.
Move the dial toward the to open the
vents or toward the to close them.

NOTE:
∙ Odors from inside and outside the ve-
hicle can build up in the air condi-
tioner unit. Odor can enter the pas-
senger compartment through the
vents.
∙ When parking, set the heater and air
conditioner controls to turn off air re-
circulation to allow fresh air into the
passenger compartment. This should
help reduce odors inside the vehicle.
WHA1406
Type A (if so equipped)
CONTROLS 6. Max A/C button
1. Fan speed control dial 7. Air flow control buttons

8. A/C (air conditioner) button
2. Front window defroster button
3. Rear window defroster switch (if
so equipped)
4. Air recirculation button
5. Temperature control dial

— Air flows from center and side
vents and foot outlets.
— Air flows mainly from foot
outlets.
— Air flows from defroster out-
lets and foot outlets.
— Air flows mainly from de-
froster outlets.
Temperature control dial
The temperature control dial allows you to
adjust the temperature of the outlet air. To
lower the temperature, turn the dial to the
left. To increase the temperature, turn the
LHA3167
dial to the right.
Type B (if so equipped)
CONTROLS Fan control dial Air recirculation button
1. Fan speed control dial The fan control dial turns the fan on ON position (Indicator light on)
and off, and controls fan speed. Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle.
Air flow control buttons Press the button to the ON position
3. Outside mirror defroster switch (if when:
so equipped) The air flow control dial or buttons allow
you to select the air flow outlets. ∙ driving on a dusty road.
4. Air recirculation button MAX — Air flows from center and side ∙ to prevent traffic fumes from entering
5. Temperature control dial A/C vents with maximum cooling passenger compartment.
6. Max A/C button (air conditioning).
∙ for maximum cooling when using the
— Air flows from center and side
7. Air flow control buttons air conditioner.
vents.
8. A/C (air conditioner) button
OFF position (Indicator light off) HEATER OPERATION Defrosting or defogging
Outside air is drawn into the passenger Heating This mode directs the air to the defrost
compartment and distributed through the outlets to defrost/defog the windows.
selected outlet. This mode is used to direct heated air to
the foot outlets. Some air also flows from 1. Press the defrost/defog button.
Use the OFF position for normal heater or
air conditioner operation. the defrost outlets.
2. Turn the fan speed control dial to
1. Press the air flow control button. the desired position.
A/C (air conditioner) button
2. Turn the fan speed control dial to 3. Turn the temperature control dial to
Start the engine, turn the fan speed the desired position between the
control dial to the desired position and the desired position.
middle and the hot position.
press the button to turn on the air 3. Turn the temperature control dial to
conditioner. To turn off the air conditioner, ∙ To quickly remove ice or fog from the
the desired position between the
press the button again. windows, turn the fan control dial
middle and the hot position.
to the highest setting and the tempera-
The air conditioner cooling function op-
Ventilation ture control to the full HOT position.
erates only when the engine is running.
This mode directs outside air to the side ∙ When the position is selected, the
Rear window or outside mirror and center vents. air conditioner automatically turns on if
defroster switch (if so equipped) the outside temperature is more than
1. Press the button to the OFF posi-
For additional information about the rear 36°F (2°C). This dehumidifies the air
tion. The indicator light on the which helps defog the windshield.
window or outside mirror defroster switch,
button will go off. The mode automatically turns off,
refer to “Rear window or outside mirror de-
froster switch.” in the “Instruments and 2. Press the air flow control button. allowing outside air to be drawn into the
controls” section of this manual. passenger compartment to further im-
3. Turn the fan speed control dial to prove the defogging performance. The
the desired position. recirculation mode cannot be activated
in the position.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to
the desired position.

Bi-level heating ∙ When the position is selected, the cooling and dehumidifying functions are
The bi-level mode directs warmed air to air conditioner automatically turns on if added to the heater operation.
the side and center vents and to the front the outside temperature is more than The air conditioner cooling function op-
and rear floor outlets. 36°F (2°C). If the air flow control erates only when the engine is running.
button is selected for more than 1 min- Cooling
1. Press the button to the OFF posi- ute, the air conditioning system will
tion. The indicator light on This mode is used to cool and dehumidify
continue to operate until the fan
the button will go off. the air.
speed control dial is turned to OFF, the
2. Press the air flow control button. vehicle is shut off, or the A/C button is 1. Press the button to the OFF posi-
used to turn off the compressor even if tion.
3. Turn the fan speed control dial to the air flow control dial is turned to a
the desired position. 2. Press the air flow control button.
position other than the position.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to This dehumidifies the air which helps 3. Turn the fan speed control dial to
the desired position. defog the windshield. The mode the desired position.
automatically turns off, allowing outside
Heating and defogging 4. Press the button.
air to be drawn into the passenger
This mode heats the interior and defogs compartment to further improve the 5. Turn the temperature control dial to
the windshield. defogging performance. the desired position.
1. Press the air flow control button. Operating tips ∙ For quick cooling when the outside
Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades temperature is high, press the
2. Turn the fan speed control dial to button to the ON position. Be sure to
and air inlet in front of the windshield.
the desired position. return the to the OFF position for
This improves heater operation.
3. Turn the temperature control dial to normal cooling. The indicator light on
the desired position between the AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION the button will go off. You may
middle and the hot position. also select MAX A/C for quick cooling.
Start the engine, turn the fan speed
control dial to the desired position, and
press the button to activate the air
conditioner. When the air conditioner is on,
Dehumidified heating ∙ The air conditioner is always on in ∙ If the engine coolant temperature
This mode is used to heat and dehumidify the mode, regardless of whether gauge indicates engine coolant tem-
the air. the indicator light is on or off. perature over the normal range, turn
the air conditioner off. For additional
1. Press the air flow control button. 3. Turn the temperature control dial to information, refer to “If your vehicle
the desired position. overheats” in the “In case of emer-
2. Turn the fan speed control dial to gency” section of this manual.
the desired position. Operating tips
AIR FLOW CHARTS
3. Press the button on. ∙ Keep the windows and moonroof (if so
The following charts show the button and
equipped) closed while the air condi-
4. Turn the temperature control dial to dial positions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK
tioner is in operation.
heating, cooling or defrosting. The air re-
the desired position.
∙ After parking in the sun, drive for two or circulation ( ) button should always
Dehumidified defogging three minutes with the windows open be in the OFF position for heating and
This mode is used to defog the windows to vent hot air from the passenger defrosting.
and dehumidify the air. compartment. Then, close the win-
dows. This allows the air conditioner to
1. Press the air flow control button. cool the interior more quickly.
2. Turn the fan speed control dial to ∙ The air conditioning system should
the desired position. be operated for approximately
10 minutes at least once a month.
∙ When the or are selected, the air This helps prevent damage to the
conditioner automatically turns on if system due to lack of lubrication.
the outside temperature is more than
36° F (2° C). This dehumidifies the air ∙ A visible mist may be seen coming from
which helps defog the windshield. the ventilators in hot, humid conditions
as the air is cooled rapidly. This does not
The mode automatically turns off,
indicate a malfunction.
allowing outside air to be drawn into the
passenger compartment to further im-
prove the defogging performance.
WHA0916 LHA4443

LHA4444 LHA4453

LHA4446

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER
(automatic) (if so equipped)
LHA2886
Type A (if so equipped)
1. Driver temperature control dial 10. Air flow control buttons
2. A/C (air conditioner) button 11. AUTO button

4. Fan speed control dial
5. OFF button
6. Fresh air intake button
8. Passenger temperature control dial
9. DUAL button

LHA2611
Type B (if so equipped)
1. Driver temperature control dial 10. Air flow control buttons
2. A/C (air conditioner) button 11. AUTO button

4. Fan speed control dial
5. OFF button
6. Rear window defroster switch
8. Passenger temperature control dial
9. DUAL button

WARNING
∙ The air conditioner cooling function
operates only when the engine is
running.
tance of others alone in your vehicle.
Pets should also not be left alone.
They could accidentally injure them-
sunny days, temperatures in a closed
vehicle could quickly become high
LHA3168 enough to cause severe or possibly
Type C (if so equipped) fatal injuries to people or animals.
1. Driver temperature control dial 10. Air flow control buttons ∙ Do not use the recirculation mode for
2. A/C (air conditioner) button 11. AUTO button long periods as it may cause the inte-
rior air to become stale and the win-
3. Front window defroster button dows to fog up.
4. Fan speed control dial Start the engine and operate the controls
to activate the air conditioner.
5. OFF button
NOTE:
6. Outside mirror defroster switch
∙ Odors from inside and outside the ve-
7. Air recirculation button hicle can build up in the air condi-
8. Passenger temperature control dial tioner unit. Odor can enter the pas-
senger compartment through the
9. DUAL button vents.

∙ When parking, set the heater and air ∙ The temperature of the passenger Dehumidified defrosting or
conditioner controls to turn off air re- compartment will be maintained auto- defogging
circulation to allow fresh air into the matically. Air flow distribution, fan speed
passenger compartment. This should and A/C on/off are also controlled auto- 1. Press the defroster control
help reduce odors inside the vehicle. matically. switch to turn the system on. The indi-
∙ A visible mist may be seen coming from cator light in the button will illuminate.
AUTOMATIC OPERATION
the vents in hot, humid conditions as 2. Turn the temperature dial to the left or
Cooling or heating (auto) the air is cooled rapidly. This does not right to set the desired temperature.
indicate a malfunction.
This mode may be normally used all year ∙ To quickly remove ice from the outside
round as the system automatically works Heating (A/C OFF) of the windows, turn the manual fan
to keep a constant temperature. Air flow The air conditioner does not activate. When control to the maximum position.
distribution and fan speed are also con- you need to heat only, use this mode.
trolled automatically. ∙ As soon as possible after the wind-
1. Press the AUTO button. shield is clean, press the AUTO button to
1. Press the AUTO button on. return to the auto mode.
2. Turn the temperature control dial to set
2. Turn the temperature dial to the left or the desired temperature.
right to set the desired temperature.
∙ The temperature of the passenger
Driver and passenger temperatures
compartment will be maintained auto-
can be set independently. Press DUAL
matically. Air flow distribution and fan
to activate dual climate control func- speed are also controlled automatically.
tions. Turn the passenger’s side tem-
perature control dial to the left or right ∙ Do not set the temperature lower than
to set the desired passenger’s tem- the outside air temperature. Otherwise,
perature. the system may not work properly.
∙ Adjust the temperature dial to about ∙ Not recommended if windows fog up.
75°F (24°C) for normal operation.

∙ When the control is activated, the Air recirculation Air flow control
air conditioner will automatically be
turned on at outside temperatures Press the air recirculation button to Press the air flow control buttons to manu-
above 36°F (2°C). If in defrost mode for recirculate interior air inside the vehicle. ally control air flow and select the air outlet:
more than 1 minute, the air conditioning Press the AUTO button to return to auto- — Air flows from center and side
system will continue to operate until the matic mode. vents.
fan control is turned OFF, the vehicle is The air recirculation cannot be activated — Air flows from center and side
shut off or the A/C button is used to when the air conditioner is in the vents and foot outlets.
turn off the compressor even if an air front defogging mode. — Air flows mainly from foot
flow button other than is se- outlets.
lected. This dehumidifies the air which
Fresh air intake (if so equipped)
Press the fresh air intake button to — Air flows from defroster and
helps defog the windshield. The air re-
circulation mode automatically turns draw outside air into the passenger com- foot outlets.
off, allowing outside air to be drawn into partment. The indicator light on the — Air flows from defroster outlets.
the passenger compartment to further button will come on. To turn system off
improve the defogging performance. Press the OFF button.
A/C (air conditioner) button
MANUAL OPERATION Start the engine, turn the fan speed Rear window or outside mirror
Fan speed control control dial to the desired position and defroster switch (if so equipped)
press the button to turn on the air
Turn the fan speed control dial to For additional information, refer to “Rear
conditioner. To turn off the air conditioner,
manually control the fan speed. window or outside mirror defroster switch”
press the button again. in the “Instruments and controls” section of
Press the AUTO button to return to auto-
matic control of the fan speed. The air conditioner cooling function op- this manual.
erates only when the engine is running.

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER AUDIO SYSTEM
The air conditioner system in your NISSAN RADIO

vehicle is charged with a refrigerant de-
signed with the environment in mind. With the ignition placed in the ACC or ON
position, press the PUSH (power) or
This refrigerant does not harm the
ON•OFF button to turn the radio on. If you
earth’s ozone layer.
listen to the radio with the engine not run-
Special charging equipment and lubricant ning, the ignition should be placed in the
is required when servicing your NISSAN air ACC position.
conditioner. Using improper refrigerants or Radio reception is affected by station sig-
lubricants will cause severe damage to nal strength, distance from radio transmit-
your air conditioner system. For additional ter, buildings, bridges, mountains and other
information, refer to “Air conditioner sys- external influences. Intermittent changes
tem refrigerant and oil recommendations” in reception quality normally are caused by
in the “Technical and consumer informa- these external influences.
LIC0515 tion” section of this manual.
Using a cellular phone in or near the ve-
OPERATING TIPS It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN hicle may influence radio reception qual-
dealer to service your “environmentally ity.
The sunload sensor 䊊 1 , located on the top
friendly” air conditioning system.
center of the instrument panel, helps the Radio reception
system maintain a constant temperature. WARNING
Do not put anything on or around this sen- Your NISSAN radio system is equipped with
sor. The air conditioner system contains re- state-of-the-art electronic circuits to en-
frigerant under high pressure. To avoid hance radio reception. These circuits are
∙ When the engine coolant temperature personal injury, any air conditioner ser- designed to extend reception range, and to
and outside air temperature are low, the vice should be done only by an experi- enhance the quality of that reception.
air flow from the foot outlets may not enced technician with proper
operate for a maximum of 150 seconds. However, there are some general charac-
equipment. teristics of both FM and AM radio signals
However, this is not a malfunction. After
the coolant temperature warms up, air that can affect radio reception quality in a
flow from the foot outlets will operate moving vehicle, even when the finest
normally. equipment is used. These characteristics
are completely normal in a given reception
area and do not indicate any malfunction Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away for several seconds during ionospheric tur-
in your NISSAN radio system. from a station transmitter, the signals will bulence even in areas where no obstacles
tend to fade and/or drift. exist.
Reception conditions will constantly
change because of vehicle movement. Static and flutter: During signal interfer- Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical
Buildings, terrain, signal distance and inter- ence from buildings, large hills or due to power lines, electric signs and even traffic
ference from other vehicles can work antenna position (usually in conjunction lights.
against ideal reception. Described below with increased distance from the station
are some of the factors that can affect your transmitter), static or flutter can be heard. SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION (if so
radio reception. This can be reduced by adjusting the treble equipped)
control to reduce treble response. When the satellite radio is used for the first
Some cellular phones or other devices may
cause interference or a buzzing noise to Multipath reception: Because of the reflec- time or the battery has been replaced, the
come from the audio system speakers. tive characteristics of FM signals, direct and satellite radio may not work properly. This
Storing the device in a different location reflected signals reach the receiver at the is not a malfunction. Wait more than
may reduce or eliminate the noise. same time. The signals may cancel each 10 minutes with satellite radio ON and the
other, resulting in momentary flutter or loss vehicle outside of any metal or large build-
FM RADIO RECEPTION of sound. ing for satellite radio to receive all of the
Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 – necessary data.
AM RADIO RECEPTION
30 mi (40 – 48 km), with monaural (single No satellite radio reception is available and
channel) FM having slightly more range AM signals, because of their low frequency, “NO SAT” is displayed when the SAT band
than stereo FM. External influences may can bend around objects and skip along option is selected unless optional satellite
sometimes interfere with FM station re- the ground. In addition, the signals can be receiver and antenna are installed and a
ception even if the FM station is within 25 bounced off the ionosphere and bent back SiriusXM® Satellite Radio service subscrip-
mi (40 km). The strength of the FM signal is to earth. Because of these characteristics, tion is active. Satellite radio is not available
directly related to the distance between AM signals are also subject to interference in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.
the transmitter and receiver. FM signals fol- as they travel from transmitter to receiver.
low a line-of-sight path, exhibiting many of Satellite radio performance may be af-
Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing fected if cargo carried on the roof blocks
the same characteristics as light. For ex-
through freeway underpasses or in areas the satellite radio signal.
ample, they will reflect off objects.
with many tall buildings. It can also occur
If possible, do not put cargo over the satel- Compact Disc (CD) player (if so
lite antenna. equipped)
A build up of ice on the satellite radio an-
tenna can affect satellite radio perfor- CAUTION
mance. Remove the ice to restore satellite
∙ Do not force a compact disc into the
radio reception.
CD insert slot. This could damage the
CD and/or CD player.
∙ Trying to load a CD with the CD door
closed could damage the CD and/or
CD player.
∙ Only one CD can be loaded into the CD
player at a time.
∙ Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm)
round discs that have the “COMPACT
disc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the disc
or packaging.
∙ During cold weather or rainy days, the
player may malfunction due to the
humidity. If this occurs, remove the
CD and dehumidify or ventilate the
LHA0099
player completely.
AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS ∙ The player may skip while driving on
rough roads.

∙ The CD player sometimes cannot ∙ This audio system can only play pre- Compact disc with MP3 or WMA (if
function when the compartment recorded CDs. It has no capability to so equipped)
temperature is extremely high or low. record or burn CDs.
Decrease/increase the temperature Terms
∙ If the CD cannot be played, one of the
before use. ∙ MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures
following messages will be displayed.
∙ Do not expose the CD to direct sun- Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the
CHECK DISC: most well-known compressed digital
light.
∙ Confirm that the CD is inserted cor- audio file format. This format allows for
∙ CDs that are in poor condition or are near “CD quality” sound, but at a fraction
rectly (the label side is facing up,
dirty, scratched or covered with fin- of the size of normal audio files. MP3
etc.).
gerprints may not work properly. conversion of an audio track from CD-
∙ Confirm that the CD is not bent or ROM can reduce the file size by approxi-
∙ The following CDs may not work
warped and it is free of scratches. mately a 10:1 ratio with virtually no per-
properly:
PRESS EJECT: ceptible loss in quality. MP3
∙ Copy Control Compact Discs (CCCD) compression removes the redundant
This is an error due to excessive tem- and irrelevant parts of a sound signal
∙ Recordable Compact Discs (CD-R)
perature inside the player. Remove that the human ear doesn’t hear.
∙ Rewritable Compact Discs (CD-RW) the CD by pressing the EJECT button.
After a short time, reinsert the CD. ∙ WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA)* is
∙ Do not use the following CDs as they a compressed audio format created by
The CD can be played when the tem-
may cause the CD player to malfunc- Microsoft as an alternative to MP3. The
perature of the player returns to nor-
tion: WMA codec offers greater file compres-
mal.
∙ 3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter sion than the MP3 codec, enabling stor-
UNPLAYABLE: age of more digital audio tracks in the
∙ CDs that are not round same amount of space when com-
The file is unplayable in this audio
∙ CDs with a paper label system (only MP3 or WMA CD). pared to MP3s at the same level of qual-
ity.
∙ CDs that are warped, scratched, or
have abnormal edges

∙ Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number ∙ The names of folders not containing
of bits per second used by a digital mu- MP3 or WMA files are not shown in the
sic file. The size and quality of a com- display.
pressed digital audio file is determined
∙ If there is a file in the top level of the disc,
by the bit rate used when encoding the
“Root Folder” is displayed.
file.
∙ The playback order is the order in which
∙ Sampling frequency — Sampling fre-
the files were written by the writing soft-
quency is the rate at which the samples
ware. Therefore, the files might not play
of a signal are converted from analog to
in the desired order.
digital (A/D conversion) per second.
∙ Multisession — Multisession is one of
the methods for writing data to media.
Writing data once to the media is called
a single session, and writing more than
once is called a multisession.
∙ ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the
part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file
that contains information about the
digital music file such as song title, art-
ist, encoding bit rate, track time dura-
tion, etc. ID3 tag information is displayed
on the Artist/song title line on the dis-
WHA1078
play.
Playback order chart
* Windows® and Windows Media® are reg- Playback order
istered trademarks and trademarks in the
United States of America and other coun- Music playback order of a CD with MP3 or
tries of Microsoft Corporation of the USA. WMA files is as illustrated.

Specification chart
Supported media CD, CD-R, CD-RW

Supported file systems ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Apple ISO, Romeo, Joliet * ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.
Version MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5
Sampling fre- 8 kHz - 48 kHz
MP3
quency
Supported Bit rate 8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR
versions*1 WMA Version WMA7, WMA8, WMA9
Sampling fre- 32 kHz - 48 kHz
quency
Bit rate 48 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR
Tag information ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3 (MP3 only)
Folder levels Folder levels: 8, Max folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512 (Max. 255 files for one folder)
Text character number limitation 128 characters
01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big Endian), 05: UNI-
Displayable character codes*2
CODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian)
*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.
*2 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.

Troubleshooting guide
Symptom Cause and Countermeasure

Check if the disc was inserted correctly.
Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.
Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the player.
If there is a temperature increase error, the CD player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.
Cannot play If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will be played.
Files with extensions other than “.MP3”,“.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of char-
acters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.
Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.
Check if the disc is protected by copyright.
Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.
Poor sound quality
Bit rate may be too low.
It takes a relatively long If there are many folders or file levels on the MP3/WMA disc, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required before the music
time before the music starts playing.
starts playing.
The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not
Music cuts off or skips
match the specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.
Skipping with high bit Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.
rate files
Moves immediately to When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, .“mp3”or “.wma”, or when play is prohibited by copyright
the next song when play- protection, there will be approximately 5 seconds of no sound and then the player will skip to the next song.
ing
Songs do not play back The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in the de-
in the desired order sired order.

USB (Universal Serial Bus) The vehicle is not equipped with a USB de- Notes for iPod® use
connection port vice. USB devices should be purchased
separately as necessary. iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis-
tered in the U.S. and other countries.
WARNING This system cannot be used to format USB
memory devices. To format a USB device, ∙ Improperly plugging in the iPod® may
Do not connect, disconnect, or operate cause a check mark to be displayed on
the USB device while driving. Doing so use a personal computer.
and off (flickering). Always make sure
can be a distraction. If distracted you In some jurisdictions, the USB device for the that the iPod® is connected properly.
could lose control of your vehicle and front seats plays only sound without im-
cause an accident or serious injury. ages for regulatory reasons, even when the ∙ An iPod® nano (1st Generation) may re-
vehicle is parked. main in fast forward or rewind mode if it
CAUTION is connected during a seek operation. In
This system supports various USB
∙ Do not force the USB device into the this case, please manually reset the
memory devices, USB hard drives and
USB port. Inserting the USB device iPod® players. Some USB devices may not iPod®.
tilted or up-side-down into the port be supported by this system. ∙ An iPod® nano (2nd Generation) will
may damage the port. Make sure that continue to fast-forward or rewind if it is
the USB device is connected correctly ∙ Partitioned USB devices may not play
correctly. disconnected during a seek operation.
into the USB port.
∙ Some characters used in other lan- ∙ An incorrect song title may appear
∙ Do not grab the USB port cover (if so
guages (Chinese, Japanese, etc.) may when the Play Mode is changed while
equipped) when pulling the USB de-
not appear properly in the display. Using using an iPod® nano (2nd Generation).
vice out of the port. This could dam-
age the port and the cover. English language characters with a USB
∙ Audiobooks may not play in the same
device is recommended.
∙ Do not leave the USB cable in a place order as they appear on an iPod®.
where it can be pulled unintentionally. General notes for USB use
∙ Large video files cause slow responses
Pulling the cable may damage the ∙ For additional information, refer to your in an iPod®. The vehicle center display
port. device manufacturer’s owner informa- may momentarily black out, but will
tion regarding the proper use and care soon recover.
of the device.

∙ If an iPod® automatically selects large ∙ Do not place the Bluetooth® audio de-
video files while in the shuffle mode, the vice in an area surrounded by metal or
vehicle center display may momen- far away from the in-vehicle Bluetooth®
tarily black out, but will soon recover. module to prevent tone quality degra-
dation and wireless connection disrup-
Bluetooth® streaming audio tion.
∙ Some Bluetooth® audio devices may ∙ While an audio device is connected
not be recognized by the in-vehicle au- through the Bluetooth® wireless con-
dio system. nection, the battery power of the device
may discharge quicker than usual.
∙ It is necessary to set up the wireless
connection between a compatible ∙ This system supports the Bluetooth®
Bluetooth® audio device and the in- Audio Distribution Profile (A2DP, AVRCP).
vehicle Bluetooth® module before using
the Bluetooth® audio. BLUETOOTH® is a
trademark owned
∙ Operating procedure of the Bluetooth®
audio will vary depending on the de- by Bluetooth SIG,
vices. Make sure how to operate your Inc. and licensed
audio device before using it with this to Visteon and
system. Bosch.
∙ The Bluetooth® audio may be stopped
under the following conditions:
∙ Receiving a call on the Hands-Free
Phone System.
∙ Checking the connection to the
hands-free phone.

For additional information, refer to “Audio
operation precautions” regarding all opera-
tion precautions in this section.
Audio main operation
VOL (volume) knob / PUSH
(power) button
Place the ignition switch in the ON position
and press the PUSH (power) button
while the system is off to call up the mode
(radio, AUX, Bluetooth® audio, USB or iPod®)
that was playing immediately before the
system was turned off.
To turn the system off, press the
PUSH (power) button.
Turn the VOL (volume) knob to adjust the
volume.
This vehicle may be equipped with Speed
Sensitive Volume. When this feature is ac-
tive, the audio volume changes as the driv-
ing speed changes.
LHA4672
FM/AM RADIO (if so equipped) 3. Display screen MENU button
Press the MENU button to show the
1. MENU button 4. / (SEEK/TRACK) buttons
Menu screen. Touch the “Settings” key on
2. AUDIO button 5. VOL (volume) knob / PUSH the display, then touch the “Sound” key.
(power) button

Sound Settings
Bass Adjusts the bass to the desired level.
Treble Adjusts the treble to the desired level.
Balance Adjusts the balance to the desired level. Balance adjusts the sound level between the left and
right speakers.
Fade Adjusts the fade to the desired level. Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear
speakers.
Speed Sensitive Volume Adjusts the speed sensitive volume function, which increases the volume of the audio system
as the speed of the vehicle increases. Set to “OFF” to disable the feature. The higher the setting,
the more the volume increases in relation to vehicle speed.
Bass, treble, balance, fade and Speed Sensitive Volume can be adjusted by touching “-” or “+” keys.

AUDIO button 5. Preset list
To listen to a preset station, touch the
Push to display the audio screen. When this
button is pushed while the audio screen is corresponding station from the preset
not displayed, the last audio source played list. If displayed, touch the “<” or “>” keys
will play. to scroll the preset list.
AM radio operation
Press the MENU button and touch the
“AM” key or press the AUDIO button and
select AM on the bottom of the Launch Bar
to bring up the AM display screen.
If another audio source is playing when the
“AM” key is pressed, the audio source play-
LHA4708 ing will automatically be turned off and the
last radio station played will begin playing.
AM/FM radio screen
AM Menu
1. “AM Menu” / “FM Menu” key
Touch to display the radio menu Touch the “AM Menu” key to display the AM
screen. Menu screen options:
2. “Direct Tune” (if so equipped) ∙ SCAN: To scan tune the stations, touch
Touch to manually enter a station. the “AM Menu” key on the radio screen
and then touch the “SCAN” key. The sta-
3. Audio source indicator
tions will be tuned from low to high fre-
Indicates the currently selected audio
quencies and stop at each broadcast-
source.
ing station for several seconds.
4. Reception information display Touching the “SCAN” key again during
Reception information currently avail- this period of several seconds will stop
able such as frequency, station name, tuning and the radio will remain tuned
etc. is displayed. to that station.
∙ Refresh: Touch the “Refresh” key to scan FM radio operation ∙ Refresh: Touch the “Refresh” key to up-
and update the station list displayed on date the station list displayed on the
Press the MENU button and touch the
the right side of the AM Menu screen. right side of the FM Menu screen.
“FM” key or press the AUDIO button and
(SEEK/TRACK) buttons select FM on the bottom of the Launch Bar ∙ RDS Info: Radio station and song infor-
to bring up the FM display screen. mation can be displayed on the FM dis-
Press the or buttons to tune If another audio source is playing when the play screen.
from low to high or high to low frequencies “FM” key is pressed, the audio source play-
and to stop at the next broadcasting sta- (SEEK/TRACK) buttons
ing will automatically be turned off and the
tion. last radio station played will begin playing.
1 to 6 station memory operations Press the or buttons to tune
The FM stereo indicator (STEREO) is shown from low to high or high to low frequencies
Up to six stations can be registered in the on the screen during FM stereo reception. and to stop at the next broadcasting sta-
preset list. tion.
When the stereo broadcast signal is weak,
1. Select the AM radio band. the radio automatically changes from ste- 1 to 12 Station memory operations
reo to monaural reception.
2. Tune to the station you wish to store. Up to 12 stations can be registered in the
3. Touch and hold one of the preset num- FM Menu preset list.
bers in the preset list. Touch the “FM Menu” key to display the FM 1. Select the FM radio band.
The information such as frequency will be Menu screen options:
2. Tune to the station you wish to store.
displayed on the preset list. ∙ SCAN: To scan tune the stations, touch
3. Touch and hold one of the preset num-
To select and listen to the preset stations, the “FM Menu” key on the radio screen
bers in the preset list.
and then touch the “SCAN” key. The sta-
push or on the steering wheel
briefly or touch a preferred station on the tions will be tuned from low to high fre- The information such as frequency will be
preset list on the radio screen. quencies and stop at each broadcast- displayed on the preset list.
ing stations for several seconds.
To select and listen to the preset stations,
Touching the “SCAN” key again during
this period of several seconds will stop push or on the steering wheel
tuning and the radio will remain tuned briefly or touch a preferred station on the
to that station. preset list on the radio screen.

Auxiliary (AUX) devices operation ∙ AUX from Launch Bar
Touch to change from another source
Connecting auxiliary devices to AUX.
Connect an AUX device into the AUX input Additional features
jack located on the center console below
the heater and air conditioner controls. For additional information, refer to “iPod®
player operation without Navigation Sys-
The AUX input jack accepts any standard
tem” in this section.
analog audio input such as from a portable
cassette player, CD player, MP3 player or For additional information, refer to “USB
phone. (Universal Serial Bus) connection port
(models without Navigation System)” in this
Insert a 1/8 in (3.5 mm) stereo mini plug in
section.
the audio input jack. If a cable with a mono
plug is used, the audio output may not For additional information, refer to
function normally. LHA4709 “Bluetooth® streaming audio without Navi-
AUX screen gation System” in this section.
Activation and playing
Turn on the AUX device. Connect an AUX ∙ Audio source indicator Microsoft (WMA) Obligation of
cable to the AUX device and the AUX input Indicates that the AUX source is cur- Labeling
jack. Select AUX mode from the audio rently playing.
Additional Obligation of Labeling
source menu screen or by pressing the ∙ “Volume Setting” keys
Source button on the steering wheel. This product is protected by certain intel-
Touch one of the keys to select the
lectual property rights of Microsoft
sound output gain from Low, Medium Corporation and third parties. Use or distri-
and High. bution of such technology outside of this
product is prohibited without a license
from Microsoft or an authorized Microsoft
subsidiary and third parties.

7. AUDIO button / TUNE knob
8. Display screen
9. ON-OFF button / VOL (volume) control
knob
10. CD button
11. SXM button*
*No satellite radio reception is available
when the SXM button is pressed to access
satellite radio stations unless optional sat-
ellite receiver and antenna are installed
and an SiriusXM® Satellite Radio service
subscription is active. Satellite radio is not
available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.
For additional information, refer to “Audio
operation precautions” regarding all opera-
tion precautions in this section.
ON-OFF button / VOL (volume) control
LHA2895 knob
FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITH 3. AUX button
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER (if so 4. CD insert slot position and press the ON-OFF button
equipped) while the system is off to call up the mode
5. Backward seek button and (radio, CD, AUX, Bluetooth® audio, USB or
1. CD eject button Forward seek button iPod®) that was playing immediately before
2. FM-AM button 6. BACK button the system was turned off.
To turn the system off, press the ON-OFF Audio settings
button.
1. Press the [ ] button.
Turn the VOL (volume) control knob to ad-
just the volume. 2. Touch the “Settings” key.
This vehicle may be equipped with Speed 3. Touch the “Audio” key.
Sensitive Volume. When this feature is ac- Use the touch-screen to adjust the follow-
tive, the audio volume changes as the driving items to the desired setting:
ing speed changes.
Audio
Bass Adjusts the bass to the desired level.
Treble Adjusts the treble to the desired level.
Balance Adjusts the balance to the desired level. Balance adjusts the sound level between the left and right
speakers.
Fade Adjusts the fade to the desired level. Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers.
Speed Sensitive Vol. Adjusts the speed sensitive volume function, which increases the volume of the audio system as the
speed of the vehicle increases. Set to “ 0 ” to disable the feature. The higher the setting, the more the vol-
ume increases in relation to vehicle speed.
AUX Volume Level Controls the volume level of incoming sound when an auxiliary device is connected to the system. Avail-
able options are Low (Quiet), Medium, and High (Loud).
Bass, treble, balance and fade can also be adjusted by pressing the AUDIO button and turning the TUNE knob to select the item to adjust.
When the desired item is shown on the display, turn the tuning to adjust and then press the AUDIO button until the display returns to the
main audio screen. If the button is not pressed for approximately 10 seconds, the radio or CD display will automatically reappear.

SXM settings SXM band select While the radio is in SXM mode, the opera-
tion can be controlled through the touch-
To view the SXM settings: Pressing the SXM button will change the
band as follows: screen. Touch the “Categories” key to dis-
1. Press the [ ] button. play a list of categories. Touch a category
SXM1* → SXM2* → SXM3* → SXM1* (satellite, displayed on the list to display options
2. Touch the “Settings” key. if so equipped) within that category.
3. Touch the “SXM” key. When the SXM button is pressed while the Tuning with the touch-screen
The signal strength, activation status and ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position,
other information are displayed on the the radio will come on at the last station When in AM or FM mode, the radio can be
screen. played. tuned using the touch-screen. To bring up
the visual tuner, touch the “Tune” key on the
FM/AM/SAT radio operation The last station played will also come on
lower right corner of the screen. A screen
when the ON-OFF button is pressed to turn
appears with a bar running from low fre-
FM·AM button the radio on.
quencies on the left to high frequencies on
Press the FM·AM button to change the *When the SXM button is pressed, the sat- the right. Touch the screen at the location
band as follows: ellite radio mode will be skipped unless an of the frequency you wish to tune and the
optional satellite receiver and antenna are station will change to that frequency. To
AM →P1→ FM1 →FM→P2 installed and a SiriusXM® Satellite Radio return to the regular radio display screen,
If another audio source is playing when the service subscription is active. Satellite radio touch the “OK” key.
FM·AM button is pressed, the audio source is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.
Tuning with the TUNE knob
playing will automatically be turned off and If a compact disc is playing when the SXM
the last radio station played will begin play- button is pressed, the compact disc will The radio can also be manually tuned us-
ing. automatically be turned off and the last ing the TUNE knob. When in FM or AM mode,
radio station played will come on. turn the TUNE knob to the left for lower
The FM stereo indicator (STEREO) is shown
frequencies or to the right for higher fre-
on the screen during FM stereo reception.
quencies. When in SXM mode, turn the
When the stereo broadcast signal is weak,
TUNE knob to change the channel.
the radio automatically changes from ste-
reo to monaural reception.

SEEK tuning 3. The channel indicator will then come
on and the sound will resume. Pro-
When in FM or AM mode, press the gramming is now complete.
or seek buttons to tune from low to 4. Other buttons can be set in the same
high or high to low frequencies and to stop manner.
at the next broadcasting station.
If the battery cable is disconnected or if the
When in SXM mode, press the fuse opens, the radio memory will be can-
or seek buttons to change the cat- celed. In that case, reset the desired sta-
egory. tions.
Presets can also be selected by touching
the desired preset number on the screen.
LHA2899
1 to 6 Station memory operations
Twelve stations can be set for the FM band
(six for FM1, six for FM2) and six stations can
be set for the AM band. Eighteen stations
can be set for the SXM band (six for SXM1, six
for SXM2 & six SXM3).
1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2
using the FM·AM select button or
choose the radio band SXM1, SXM2 &
SXM3 using the SXM button.
2. Tune to the desired station using
manual or seek tuning. Press and hold
any of the desired station memory but-
tons (1 – 6) until a beep sound is heard.
To program a Smart Favorite preset:
1. Press the SXM button.
2. Touch the “Setup” key.
3. Touch the “Tune Start” key to activate
(ON) or deactivate (OFF) Smart Favor-
ites.
4. Touch the “Add Preset” key to select an
available preset.
For additional information, refer to “1 to 6
station memory operations” in this section
regarding preset memory options.
LHA3085 NOTE: LHA3087
Smart Favorites Preset Setup (if • Smart Favorites will start functioning
Replay Screen
so equipped) only after the audio unit is turned on for The Replay Screen gives the user the ability
The Smart Favorites feature allows the a few minutes. to replay, skip, pause or rewind the cur-
user to designate presets, within the SXM1, • Tune Start is supported for music chan- rently aired track.
SXM2 and SXM3 bands, as their Smart Fa- nels only.
vorites. When any of the Smart Favorite When the “Replay” key is touched, the Re-
presets are selected, the current track on play Screen is prompted.
that station will play from the beginning of
the song.

REPLAY To replay a track from PAUSE To pause a track, press Compact Disc (CD) player
the beginning, press the the “ ” key. operation
“ ” key. The user can If the radio is already operating, it automati-
continue to press the cally turns off and the compact disc begins
REWIND/ To rewind/ fast forward a to play.
“ ” key to replay pre-
FAST track, hold the “ ” or CD button
vious songs, but can only
FORWARD “ ” key.
go back as far as the When the CD button is pressed with the
system permits. The sys- system off and the compact disc loaded,
tem will warn the user the system will turn on and the compact
when they cannot skip disc will start to play.
any further back by dis- When the CD button is pressed with a com-
playing “At the End” in the pact disc loaded and the radio playing, the
bottom left corner of the radio will automatically be turned off and
screen. the compact disc will start to play.
SKIP To skip a track, press the

“ ” key. “Live” will ap-
pear in the bottom left
corner of the screen indi-
cating the difference
from play time to live
audio.

CD/MP3 display mode
Menu item
While listening to a CD or an MP3/WMA CD, certain text may be displayed (when a CD encoded
with text is being used). Depending on how the CD or MP3/WMA CD is encoded, the text is dis-
CD/MP3 display mode
played listing the artist, album and song title. There are other keys displayed on the screen when
a CD is playing:
Touch the “Random” key to apply a random play pattern to the CD. If an MP3 CD is playing, touch-
ing “Random” or alternates between Random Folder, and Random All. This text will appear on the
Random/Mix
display. To cancel Random/Mix mode, touch the “Random” or “Mix” key until the key is no longer
highlighted.
Touch the “Repeat” key to apply a repeat play pattern to the CD. If an MP3 CD is playing, touching
“Repeat” alternates between repeating the current song and repeating the current folder. This text
Repeat
will appear on the display. To cancel Repeat mode, touch the “Repeat” key until the key is no longer
highlighted
Touch the “Browse” key to display the titles on the CD in list format. Touch the title of a song in the
list to begin playing that song. If an MP3 CD is playing, touching the “Browse” key will also list the
Browse
folders on the disc. Follow the procedure for selecting a song with the touch-screen to choose a
folder.

SEEK (Reverse or Fast AUX button
Forward) buttons The AUX IN audio input port accepts any
standard analog audio input such as from
Press and hold the or seek but- a portable cassette tape/CD player, MP3
tons for 1.5 seconds while the compact disc player or a laptop computer. Press the AUX
is playing to reverse or fast forward the button to play a compatible device
track being played. The compact disc plays plugged into the AUX IN port.
at an increased speed while reversing or
fast forwarding. When the button is re- CD EJECT button
leased, the compact disc returns to normal
play speed. When the CD EJECT button is pressed
with a compact disc loaded, the compact
SEEK buttons disc will eject and the last source will be
played.
Press the seek button while a CD or If the disc is not removed within 10 seconds, LHA4319
MP3/WMA CD is playing to return to the the disc will reload.
beginning of the current track. Press USB (Universal Serial Bus)
the seek button several times to skip
Additional features CONNECTION PORT (models
backward several tracks. For additional information, refer to “iPod® without Navigation System) (if so
Press the seek button while a CD or player operation with Navigation System” equipped)
MP3/WMA CD is playing to advance one in this section.
track. Press the seek button several Connecting a device to the USB
For additional information, refer to “USB
times to skip forward several tracks. If the (Universal Serial Bus) connection port connection port
last track on a CD is skipped, the first track (models with Navigation System)” in this
on the disc is played. If the last track in a section. WARNING
folder of an MP3/WMA CD is skipped, the
For additional information, refer to Do not connect, disconnect, or operate
first track of the next folder is played.
“Bluetooth® streaming audio with Naviga- the USB device while driving. Doing so
tion System” in this section. can be a distraction. If distracted you
could lose control of your vehicle and
cause an accident or serious injury.

CAUTION When a compatible storage device is
plugged into the connection port, compat-
∙ To avoid damage and loss of function ible audio files on the storage device can be
when using a USB device, note the fol- played through the vehicle’s audio system.
lowing precautions. The port is illuminated for better visibility
∙ Do not force the USB device into the when the headlight switch is in the ON po-
USB port. Inserting the USB device sition.
tilted or up-side-down into the port
may damage the port. Make sure that
the USB device is connected correctly
into the USB port.
equipped) when pulling the USB de-
vice out of the port. This could dam- LHA4711
age the port and the cover.
USB connections screen
∙ Do not leave the USB cable in a place
where it can be pulled unintentionally. Press the MENU button and touch the
Pulling the cable may damage the “Connections” key or press the “Settings”
port. key and touch the “Connections” key to
change USB settings.
For additional information, refer to your de-
vice manufacturer’s owner information re- ∙ Auto Change Source
garding the proper use and care of the Touch ON or OFF to change the audio
device. source settings for USB memory de-
vices or an iPod® connected through a
The USB port is located on the center con- USB cable.
sole beneath the heater and air condi-
tioner controls. Insert the USB device into
the connection port.

4. USB operation keys USB memory device player
Touch to control USB playback func- operation
tions
5. Play time and progress bar
Connecting the USB memory device into
The play time of the track is displayed.
the port will start playing the USB memory.
The bar indicates the progress in play-
ing a track. USB memory device can also be played by
touching the “USB” key on the Menu screen
USB operation keys
or by touching USB on the Launch Bar.
Touch to control USB playback functions.
To pause playing the USB memory device
Keys Description touch the “ ” key. To resume playing,
Each time “ ” key is touch the “ ” key.
touched, the repeat mode
LHA4710 changes.
Skipping tracks
USB screen Touch to return to the be- To skip the tracks, push the or
ginning of the current track. buttons on the control panel or touch the
1. “USB Menu” key Touch again to select the
“ ” or “ ” keys on the screen repeat-
Touch to switch to the USB Menu previous track. Touch and
edly until the preferred track is selected.
screen. hold to rewind the current
track.
2. Track information NOTE:
Touch to play the track.
Track information such as the song Depending on the condition, skipping to
name, artist name and album name Touch to pause the track. the previous track may require pushing
are displayed. the button or touching the key twice.
Touch to select the next Pushing the button or touching the key
3. Audio source indicator track. Touch and hold to once may only restart the current track
Indicates the currently selected audio fast-forward the track. from the beginning.
source. Each time “ ” key is
touched, the random mode
changes.

Fast-forwarding/rewinding USB menu
To rewind or fast-forward the track, push
Touch the “USB Menu” key on the USB
and hold the or buttons on the screen to display the USB Menu screen.
control panel or touch and hold the “ ”
“Now Playing” key Touch to display the USB
or “ ” keys on the screen. screen.
Changing play mode “Folder List” key Touch to display the folder
list. Touch an item on the list
Repeat mode
to select the folder. The sub-
Touch the “ ” key on the USB screen to folder or track list will be
change the repeat mode. displayed. Select a sub-folder
or track from the list.
The following modes are available:
“Album Artwork” Touch to run on/off the al-
No text displayed: Repeat off bum artwork display on the
All: Repeat all USB screen. LHA4319
1 Folder: Repeat folder/sub-folder USB (Universal Serial Bus)

1 Track: Repeat track
CONNECTION PORT (models with
Navigation System) (if so
Random mode
equipped)
Touch the “ ” key on the screen to
Connecting a device to the USB
change the random mode as follows:
No text displayed: Random off
connection port
Random: Random play WARNING
All: Repeat all Do not connect, disconnect, or operate
the USB device while driving. Doing so
1 Folder: Repeat folder/sub-folder can be a distraction. If distracted you

CAUTION Audio file operation
∙ Do not force the USB device into the AUX (auxiliary) button
USB port. Inserting the USB device Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACC
tilted or up-side-down into the port position and press the AUX button to
may damage the port. Make sure that switch to the USB input mode. If another
the USB device is connected correctly audio source is playing and a USB connec-
into the USB port. tion port device is inserted, press the AUX
∙ Do not grab the USB port cover (if so button until the center display changes to
equipped) when pulling the USB de- the USB memory mode.
vice out of the port. This could dam- If the system has been turned off while the
age the port and the cover. USB memory was playing, press the ON-
∙ Do not leave the USB cable in a place OFF button to restart the USB memory.
where it can be pulled unintentionally. LHA4006
Pulling the cable may damage the
port. Play information
For additional information, refer to your de- Information about the audio files being
vice manufacturer’s owner information re- played is shown on the display screen of
garding the proper use and care of the the vehicle’s audio system. Touch “Browse”
device. to display the list of folders and files on the
USB device. Touch the name of a song on
The USB port is located on the instrument the screen to begin playing that song.
panel. Insert the USB device into the instru-
Seeking buttons
ment panel.
When a compatible storage device is Press the seeking button while an
plugged into the connection port, compat- audio file on the USB device is playing to
ible audio files on the storage device can be return to the beginning of the current track.
played through the vehicle’s audio system. Press the seeking button several
times to skip backward several tracks.
Press the seeking button while an Repeat
audio file on the USB device is playing to Touch the “Repeat” key to apply a repeat
advance one track. Press the seeking play pattern to the USB device. When the
button several times to skip forward sev- Repeat mode is active, the text on the “Re-
eral tracks. If the last track in a folder on the peat” key will illuminate and the text “Re-
USB device is skipped, the first track of the peat Track” appears. By touching the “Re-
next folder is played. peat” key once more, the text “Repeat
Folder” appears. To cancel Repeat mode,
Random and repeat play mode touch the “Repeat” key until no text is illumi-
While files on a USB device are playing, the nated.
play pattern can be altered so that songs
are repeated or played randomly.
Random
Touch the “Random” key to apply a random
play pattern to the USB device. When the LHA4319
Random mode is active, the text “Random” iPod®* PLAYER OPERATION
on the key will illuminate and the text “Ran-
dom Folder” appears. By touching the “Ran-
WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if
dom” key once more, the text “Random All” so equipped)
appears. To cancel Random mode, touch
the “Random” key until no text is illumi-
Connecting iPod®
nated.
WARNING
Do not connect, disconnect, or operate
the USB device while driving. Doing so
can be a distraction. If distracted you

CAUTION supports charging via a USB connection, its ∙ iPod® Touch 3rd generation (firmware
battery will be charged while connected to version 5.1 or later)
∙ Do not force the USB device into the the vehicle with the ignition switch in the
USB port. Inserting the USB device ∙ iPod® Touch 4th generation (firmware
ON position. The port is illuminated for bet-
tilted or up-side-down into the port version 5.1 or later)
ter visibility when the headlight switch is in
may damage the port. Make sure that the ON position. ∙ iPod® nano - 1st generation (firmware
the USB device is connected correctly version 1.3.1 or later)
into the USB port. While connected to the vehicle, the iPod®
can only be operated by the vehicle audio ∙ iPod® nano - 2nd generation (firmware
equipped) when pulling the USB de- controls. version 1.1.3 or later)
vice out of the port. This could dam- To disconnect the iPod® from the vehicle, ∙ iPod® nano - 3rd generation (firmware
age the port and the cover. remove the USB end of the cable from the version 1.1.3 or later)
∙ Do not leave the USB cable in a place USB connection port on the vehicle, then
∙ iPod® nano - 4th generation (firmware
where it can be pulled unintentionally. remove the cable from the iPod®.
version 1.0.4 or later)
Pulling the cable may damage the * iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis-
port. ∙ iPod® nano - 5th generation (firmware
For additional information, refer to your de-
Compatibility ∙ iPod® nano - 6th generation (firmware
vice manufacturer’s owner information re-
garding the proper use and care of the The following models are compatible: version 1.1 or later)
device. ∙ iPhone® 3G (firmware version 4.2.1 or
∙ iPod® Classic 5th generation (firmware
To connect an iPod® to the vehicle so that version 1.3.0 or later) later)
the iPod® can be controlled with the audio ∙ iPhone® 3GS (firmware version 5.1 or
∙ iPod® Classic 6th generation (firmware
system controls and display screen, use later)
the USB connection port located on the
center console below the heater and air ∙ iPod® Classic 7th generation (firmware ∙ iPhone® 4 (firmware version 5.1 or later)
conditioner controls. Connect the iPod®- version 2.0.4 or later) ∙ iPhone® 4S (firmware version 5.1 or later)
specific end of the cable to the iPod® and
the USB end of the cable to the USB con- ∙ iPod® Touch 2nd generation (firmware * Some features of this iPod® may not be
nection port on the vehicle. If your iPod® version 4.2.1 or later)* fully functional.
Make sure that your iPod® firmware is up- 4. Album artwork
dated to the version indicated above. An image of the album artwork is dis-
played when available if the setting is
turned on.
5. iPod® operation keys
Touch to control iPod® playback func-
tions
6. Play time and progress bar
The play time of the track is displayed.
The bar indicates the progress in play-
ing a track.
iPod® operation keys
LHA4724
Touch to control iPod® playback functions.
iPod screen
Keys Description
1. “iPod Menu” key Each time “ ” key is
Touch to switch to the iPod Menu touched, the repeat mode
screen. changes.
Touch to return to the be-
2. Track information ginning of the current track.
Track information such as the song Touch again to select the
name, artist name and album name previous track. Touch and
are displayed. hold to rewind the current
track.
Touch to play the track.
source. Touch to pause the track.

Keys Description NOTE: iPod® Menu
Touch to select the next Depending on the condition, skipping to Touch the “iPod Menu” key on the iPod®
track. Touch and hold to the previous track may require pushing screen to display the iPod® Menu screen.
fast-forward the track. the button or touching the key twice.
Each time “ ” key is Pushing the button or touching the key “Now Playing” key Touch to display the USB
touched, the random mode once may only restart the current track screen.
changes. from the beginning. “Folder List” key Touch to display the folder
(if so equipped) list. Touch an item on the list
Fast-forwarding/rewinding to select the folder. The sub-
iPod® memory device player
folder or track list will be
operation To rewind or fast-forward the track, push
displayed. Select a sub-folder
and hold the or buttons on the or track from the list.
control panel or touch and hold the “ ” “Album Artwork” Touch to run on/off the al-
Connecting the iPod® to the vehicle via USB or “ ” keys on the screen, key bum artwork display on the
cable will activate the iPod® mode. USB screen.
Changing play mode “Playlists” key Touch to display the list ac-
The iPod® can also be played by touching Repeat mode “Artists” key cording to the selected item.
the “iPod” key on the Menu screen or by “Albums” key
touching iPod on the Launch Bar. Touch the “ ” key on the iPod® screen
“Songs” key
to change the repeat mode. The following
Skipping tracks “Podcasts” key
modes are available.
“Genres” key
No text displayed: Repeat off
To skip the tracks, push the or “Composers” key
buttons on the control panel or touch the All: Repeat all “Audiobooks” key
“iTunes Radio”
“ ” or “ ” keys on the screen repeat- One: Repeat track
key
edly until the preferred track is selected.
Random mode
Touch the “ ” key on the screen to
change the random mode as follows.
No text displayed: Random off
Songs: Random play
CAUTION while connected to the vehicle with the ig-
nition switch in the ACC or ON position.
∙ Do not force the USB device into the
USB port. Inserting the USB device While connected to the vehicle, the iPod®
tilted or up-side-down into the port can only be operated by the vehicle audio
may damage the port. Make sure that controls.
the USB device is connected correctly To disconnect the iPod® from the vehicle,
into the USB port.
remove the USB end of the cable from the
∙ Do not grab the USB port cover (if so USB port on the vehicle, then remove the
equipped) when pulling the USB de- cable from the iPod®.
vice out of the port. This could dam-
age the port and the cover. * iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis-
∙ Do not leave the USB cable in a place
LHA4319
where it can be pulled unintentionally. Compatibility
Pulling the cable may damage the The following models are compatible:
iPod®* PLAYER OPERATION WITH port.
NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if so ∙ iPod® Classic 5th generation (firmware
For additional information, refer to your de- version 1.3.0 or later)
equipped) vice manufacturer’s owner information re-
garding the proper use and care of the ∙ iPod® Classic 6th generation (firmware
Connecting iPod® version 2.0.1 or later)
device.
WARNING To connect an iPod® to the vehicle so that ∙ iPod® Classic 7th generation (firmware
the iPod® can be controlled with the audio version 2.0.4 or later)
Do not connect, disconnect or operate
the USB device while driving. Doing so system controls and display screen, use ∙ iPod® Touch 2nd generation (firmware
can be a distraction. If distracted you the USB port located on the instrument version 4.2.1 or later)*
could lose control of your vehicle and panel. Connect the iPod®-specific end of
∙ iPod® Touch 3rd generation (firmware
cause an accident or serious injury. the cable to the iPod® and the USB end of
version 5.1 or later)
the cable to the USB port on the vehicle. If
your iPod® supports charging via a USB ∙ iPod® Touch 4th generation (firmware
connection, its battery will be charged version 5.1 or later)
∙ iPod® nano - 1st generation (firmware AUX button
When the AUX button is pressed with the
∙ iPod® nano - 2nd generation (firmware system off and the iPod® connected, the
version 1.1.3 or later) system will turn on. If another audio source
is playing and the iPod® is connected, press
∙ iPod® nano - 3rd generation (firmware
the AUX button repeatedly until the center
display changes to the iPod® mode.
version 1.1 or later)
LHA4007
∙ iPhone® 3G (firmware version 4.2.1 or
later)
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
∙ iPhone® 3GS (firmware version 5.1 or
position. Press the AUX button repeatedly
later)
to switch to the iPod® mode.
∙ iPhone® 4 (firmware version 5.1 or later)
If the system has been turned off while the
∙ iPhone® 4S (firmware version 5.1 or later) iPod® was playing, pressing the ON·OFF
button will start the iPod®.
* Some features of this iPod® may not be
fully functional.
Make sure that your iPod® firmware is up-
dated to the version indicated above.

∙ Playlists Repeat
Touch the “Repeat” key to apply a repeat
∙ Artists
play pattern to the iPod®. When the repeat
∙ Albums mode is active, the text is illuminated and
will display “Repeat song” text above the
∙ Genres “Repeat” key. To cancel Repeat mode, touch
∙ Songs the “Repeat” key again until the text is no
longer illuminated.
∙ Composers
SEEK buttons
∙ Audiobooks
∙ Podcasts Press the SEEK button or to
Shuffle and repeat play mode skip backward or forward one track.
While the iPod® is playing, the play pattern Press and hold the SEEK button
LHA2907 or for 1.5 seconds while a track is
can be altered so that songs are repeated
Interface or played randomly. playing to reverse or fast forward the track
being played. The track plays at an in-
The interface for iPod® operation shown on Shuffle creased speed while reversing or fast for-
the vehicle’s audio system display screen is Touch the “Shuffle” key to apply a random warding. When the button is released, the
similar to the iPod® interface. Use the play pattern to the iPod®. When the Shuffle track returns to normal play speed.
touch-screen, BACK button or the scrolling mode is active, the text is illuminated and
knob to navigate the menus on the screen. will display “Shuffle songs” text above the
“Shuffle” key. To cancel Shuffle mode, touch
When the iPod® is playing, touch the “Menu” the “Shuffle” key again until the text is no
key to bring up the iPod® interface. longer illuminated.
Depending on the iPod® model, the follow-
ing items may be available on the menu list
screen. For additional information, refer to
the iPod® Owner’s Manual regarding each
menu item.

BLUETOOTH® STREAMING AUDIO
WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if
so equipped)
If you have a compatible Bluetooth® audio
device that is capable of playing audio files,
the device can be connected to the vehi-
cle’s audio system so that the audio files on
the device play through the vehicle’s
speakers.
LHA2279 LHA4726
Scrolling menus Connecting procedure
While navigating long lists of artists, al-
bums or songs in the music menu, it is NOTE:
possible to scroll the list by the first charac-
ter in the name. To activate character in- The connecting procedure must be per-
dexing, touch and hold the “A-Z” key in the formed when the vehicle is stationary. If
upper right corner of the screen. Turn the the vehicle starts moving during the pro-
TUNE knob to choose the number or letter cedure, the procedure will be canceled.
to jump to in the list and then press the
ENTER/AUDIO button.
If no character is selected after a few sec-
onds, the display returns to normal.

To connect a phone to the Bluetooth® 3. In the Bluetooth tab, touch the “Add
Hands-Free Phone System: New” key to connect a phone.
Manual Connecting Procedure 4. When a compatible phone is found a
message with a PIN appears on the
1. Press the MENU button on the
screen.
control panel.
5. Verify the PIN is correct and accept the
2. Touch the “Connections” key on the
screen. connection.
Menu Item Result

Bluetooth Allows user to switch Bluetooth® on and off. Bluetooth® must be turned on in order to connect a device.
ON Turns Bluetooth® functionality on. To turn off, touch the “ON” key again. The indicator light will go off.
Favorite (Connection first) Allows user to toggle “Phone” and “Audio” favorite settings on and off.
PIN Allows user to customize the PIN to a four digit number.

Automatic Connecting Procedure 4. Bluetooth® audio operation keys
Touch to control Bluetooth® audio
If no phone is connected to the system,
playback functions
press and hold the button on the
steering wheel for less than 1.5 seconds. 5. Play time and progress bar
After the prompt, speak “Add Phone”, the The play time of the track is displayed.
system will announce “transferring to the The bar indicates the progress in play-
add phone settings menu”. The system will ing a track.
start the pairing procedure. When a com-
patible phone is found, a message with a Bluetooth® operation keys
PIN appears on the screen. Operate the Touch to control Bluetooth® playback
Bluetooth® phone to complete the con- functions.
nection process. For additional informa-
tion, refer to “Bluetooth® connections Keys Description
screen” in this section. Each time “ ” key is touched,
LHA4727
the repeat mode changes.
Bluetooth® screen Touch to return to the beginning of
the current track. Touch again to se-
1. “BT Menu” key lect the previous track. Touch and
Depending on the Bluetooth® version hold to rewind the current track.
supported by the connected device, ei- Touch to play the track.
ther the “BT Menu” key or “Connections”
key is displayed. Touch to pause the track.
2. Track information
Touch to select the next track. Touch
Track information such as the song and hold to fast-forward the track.
name, artist name and album name
Each time “ ” key is touched,
are displayed.
the random mode changes.
source.

Bluetooth® audio operation Fast-forwarding/rewinding “Now Playing” key Touch to display the
To fast-forward or rewind the track, push Bluetooth® audio screen.
The ability to pause, change tracks, fast
“Current List” key (if so A list of track in the cur-
forward, rewind, randomize and repeat and hold the or buttons on the equipped)* rently selected folder is
music may be different between devices. control panel or touch the “ ” or “ ” displayed.
Some or all of these functions may not be keys on the screen. “Connections” key Touch to display the
supported on each device. connections screen.
Changing play mode “Folder List” key* Touch to display the
NOTE: Repeat mode folder list. Touch an item
on the list to select the
Depending on the Bluetooth® audio de- Touch the “ ” key on the screen to folder.
vice that is connected, it may not be pos- change the repeat mode.
sible to perform audio operations or a *: displayed only when available.
Random mode
delay may occur before music is played
back. Touch the “ ” key on the screen to NOTE:
change the random mode. Depending on the connected device, the
“BT Menu” key may not be displayed.
A Bluetooth® audio device can be played by NOTE:
touching the “Bluetooth” key on the Menu BLUETOOTH® STREAMING AUDIO
Available repeat/random modes change
screen or by touching Bluetooth on the WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if so
depending on the connected device.
Launch Bar. equipped)
To pause playing the Bluetooth® audio,
BT Menu If you have a compatible Bluetooth® audio
Touch the “BT Menu” key on the Bluetooth® device that is capable of playing audio files,
touch the “ ” key. Touch the “ ” key audio screen to display the Bluetooth® au-
to resume playing. the device can be connected to the vehi-
dio menu screen. cle’s audio system so that the audio files on
Changing folders The following items are available. the device play through the vehicle’s
To change folders, touch the “BT Menu” key. speakers.

NOTE:
The connecting procedure of the cellular
phone varies according to each cellular
phone model. For additional informa-
tion, refer to the cellular phone Owner’s
Manual. You can also visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or
www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for instruc-
tions on connecting NISSAN recom-
mended cellular phones.
To switch to the Bluetooth® audio mode,
press the AUX button repeatedly until the
LHA2773 LHA2844
Bluetooth® audio mode is displayed on the
Connecting Bluetooth® audio 4. Touch the “Connect New Device” key. screen.
To connect your Bluetooth® audio device 5. The system acknowledges the com- The controls for the Bluetooth® audio are
to the vehicle, follow the procedure below: mand and asks you to initiate connect- displayed on the screen.
ing from the phone handset.
3. Touch the “Phone & Bluetooth” key.

∙ A new disc may be rough on the inner
and outer edges. Remove the rough
edges by rubbing the inner and outer
edges with the side of a pen or pencil as
illustrated.
LHA0049 LHA2559
CD CARE AND CLEANING STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR
∙ Handle a CD by its edges. Do not bend
AUDIO CONTROL
the disc. Never touch the surface of the The audio system can be operated using
disc. the controls on the steering wheel.
∙ Always place the discs in the storage 1. Volume control switch
case when they are not being used. 2. MODE select switch
∙ To clean a disc, wipe the surface from 3. Tuning switch
the center to the outer edge using a
clean, soft cloth. Do not wipe the disc
using a circular motion.
∙ Do not use a conventional record
cleaner or alcohol intended for indus-
trial use.
MODE select switch AM and FM ∙ Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds
to increase or decrease the folder num-
Push the MODE select switch to change ∙ Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to ber.
the mode in the following sequence: increase or decrease the preset station.
Bluetooth® Audio
AM →P1→ FM1 → FM2→ P2→ (SXM1 → SXM2 ∙ Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds
→ SXM3 (satellite radio, if so equipped)) → to seek up or down to the next station. ∙ Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
CD* (if so equipped) → USB/iPod®* → skip ahead or back to the next song.
Bluetooth® Audio* → AUX* → AM→P1. SXM (if so equipped)
∙ Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds
* These modes are only available when ∙ Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to to reverse or fast forward the current
compatible media storage is inserted into increase or decrease the preset station. song.
the device or connected to the system. ∙ Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds ANTENNA
Volume control switch to go to the next or previous channel.
The antenna cannot be shortened, but can
Push the volume control switch to increase iPod® be removed. When you need to remove the
or decrease the volume. ∙ Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to antenna, turn the antenna rod counter-
clockwise.
Tuning switch increase or decrease the track number.
To install the antenna rod, turn the antenna
While the display is showing a map or audio CD (if so equipped)
rod clockwise and hand tighten.
screen, tilt the Tuning switch upward or ∙ Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
downward to select a station, track, CD or increase or decrease the track number. CAUTION
folder. For most audio sources, tilting the
switch up/down for more than 1.5 seconds ∙ Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds ∙ Always properly tighten the antenna
provides a different function than a tilting to increase or decrease the folder num- rod during installation or the antenna
up/down for less than 1.5 seconds. ber (if playing compressed audio files). rod may break during vehicle
operation.
USB
∙ Be sure that the antenna is removed
∙ Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to before the vehicle enters an auto-
increase or decrease the track number. matic car wash.

NISSANCONNECT® MOBILE APPS (if
so equipped)
This vehicle is equipped with Smartphone CONNECT PHONE APPLICATION DOWNLOAD

Integration technology. This allows many
compatible Smartphone applications to To use this feature, a compatible smart- Once connected, the NissanConnect® App
be displayed and easily controlled through phone must be connected via Bluetooth® will search your phone to determine which
the vehicle’s touch-screen. or USB to the vehicle. For additional infor- compatible applications are currently in-
mation, refer to “Bluetooth® Hands-Free stalled. The user will then choose which
NOTE: Phone System with Navigation System” in apps they want to bring into their vehicle
this section. from the list of apps within the “Manage My
A compatible smartphone and registra- Apps” section of the NissanConnect® App
tion is required to use mobile applica- NOTE: on their smartphone. The vehicle will then
tions or to access connected features of download the in-vehicle interface for each
certain vehicle applications. Apple iPhones® require the phone to be
of these compatible applications. Once
plugged in via USB for NissanConnect®
REGISTERING WITH downloaded, the user can access their se-
Mobile Apps to function.
lected smartphone applications through
NISSANCONNECT® MOBILE APPS For Android phones, NissanConnect®
the vehicle touch-screen. For additional in-
Mobile Apps requires the phone to be
To use the Smartphone Integration feature, formation, refer to www.nissanusa.com/
paired via Bluetooth®.
it is necessary for the user to register. In connect or www.nissan.ca/en/connect or
order to register, visit the NissanConnect® www.nissan.ca/fr/connect regarding
Mobile Apps website, application availability.
www.nissanusa.com/connect/ or
www.nissan.ca/en/connect or
www.nissan.ca/fr/connect and sign up or
create an account through the prompts on
the NissanConnect® Mobile Apps. Once
registered, download the NissanConnect®
Mobile Apps from your compatible phone’s
application download source and then log
into the application. If you already have an
account created through the App, please
log in.

SIRI® EYES FREE (models without
Navigation System) (if so equipped)
Apple Siri® Eyes Free personal assistant REQUIREMENTS

can be accessed from the vehicle. Siri Eyes
Free can be accessed in Siri Eyes Free Siri® is only available on the iPhone® 4S or
mode to reduce user distraction. In this later. Devices released before iPhone® 4S
mode, Siri Eyes Free is available for interac- are not supported by the Siri® Eyes Free
tion by voice control. After connecting a system. Visit www.apple.com/ios/siri for
compatible Apple device by using details about device compatibility.
Bluetooth®, Siri Eyes Free can be activated Siri must be enabled on the phone. Please
from the button on the steering check phone settings.
wheel.
If the device has a lock screen, Siri must be
Siri® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered
accessible from the lock screen. Please
in the U.S. and other countries.
check phone settings.
∙ Some Siri Eyes Free functions, such as
For best results, always update your device
displaying pictures or opening apps,
to the latest software version. LHA2589
may not be available while driving.
OPERATING SIRI® EYES FREE
∙ For getting best results, always update
your device to the latest software ver- 1. Push button for more than
sion. 1.5 seconds.
∙ Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet 2. Speak your command and then listen
as possible. Close the windows to elimi- to the Siri® Eyes Free reply.
nate the surrounding noises (traffic After starting Siri Eyes Free, push the
noises, vibration sounds, etc.), which button again within 5 seconds of the end of
may prevent the system from recogniz- the Siri Eyes Free announcement to extend
ing the voice commands correctly. the session.
∙ For functions that can be used in Siri
Eyes Free, please refer to the Apple
website.

Example 1 – Playing music Example 2 – Replying to text messages
1. Push button for more than 1. If a compatible iPhone® is connected
1.5 seconds. and “Show Notifications” of the iPhone®
settings is enabled, the vehicle will dis-
2. Say “Play (artist name, song name, play a notification for new incoming
etc.)”. text messages.
3. Your vehicle will automatically change 2. After reading the message, push or
to Bluetooth® Audio or iPod® mode*
push and hold the button to reply
when the music starts playing. Mode
using Siri Eyes Free.
selection is determined by the phone.
* If the iPhone® is also connected with the 3. After a beep sounds, say “Text mes-
USB cable. sage” or a similar command to reply
using Siri Eyes Free.
If the audio track does not start playing
automatically after Siri Eyes Free ends, try
changing the track or audio source to re-
sume playback.
NOTE:
For best results, use the native music
app. Performance of music control func-
tion while using Podcasts, Audiobook or
other 3rd party music apps may vary and
is controlled by the iPhone®.

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Cannot access Siri Eyes Check if a Bluetooth® connection is established between the iPhone® and the system.
Free from switch on the Check if Siri is enabled on the device. On your phone, go to Siri setting.
steering wheel Check that Siri can be accessed from the device lock screen. This can be set in the settings menu of your phone.
For best results, use the native Music app. Performance of music control function while using Podcasts, Audiobook or other 3rd party
Audio Source does not music apps may vary.
change automatically to For best results, play media already stored on your device. Streaming music or playback from cloud storage may degrade
iPod® or Bluetooth® Au- performance.
dio mode Switch the source manually by pressing the AUX or MEDIA button on the vehicle audio system or the SOURCE select switch on the
steering wheel.
Play, pause, next track, For best results, use the native Music app. Performance of music control function while using Podcasts, Audiobook or other 3rd party
previous track or play music apps may vary and is controlled by the device.
timer does not work
Cannot hear any music/ Check that the audio source is set to Bluetooth® Audio or iPod® mode. A USB connection is required for iPod® mode.
audio being played back
from a connected
iPhone®
Cannot receive text mes- Check if “Send Notifications” is enabled on your phone. On the phone, go to Bluetooth® settings. Find the device name, like “My Car”.
sage notifications on the Press the INFO button. Turn on “Show Notifications”.
vehicle audio system
Cannot reply to text After receiving an incoming text message, follow on-screen guidance. Push the button on the steering wheel for more than
message notifications by 1.5 seconds for Siri Eyes Free. After Siri Eyes Free starts, say “Text Message”.
Siri Eyes Free

SIRI® EYES FREE (models with
Navigation System) (if so equipped)
Apple Siri® Eyes Free personal assistant REQUIREMENTS

can be accessed from the vehicle. Siri Eyes
Free can be accessed in Siri Eyes Free Siri® is only available on the iPhone® 4S or
mode to reduce user distraction. In this later. Devices released before iPhone® 4S
mode, Siri Eyes Free is available for interac- are not supported by the Siri® Eyes Free
tion by voice control. After connecting a system. Visit www.apple.com/ios/siri for
compatible Apple device by using details about device compatibility.
Bluetooth®, Siri Eyes Free can be activated Siri must be enabled on the phone. Please
from the button on the steering check phone settings.
wheel.
If the device has a lock screen, Siri must be
Siri® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered
accessible from the lock screen. Please
in the U.S. and other countries.
check phone settings.
∙ Some Siri Eyes Free functions, such as
For best results, always update your device
displaying pictures or opening apps,
to the latest software version. LHA2589
may not be available while driving.
SIRI® ACTIVATION
∙ For best results, always update your de-
vice to the latest software version. Siri® Eyes Free function can be activated by
pushing button on the steering
∙ Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet
wheel for more than 1.5 seconds.
as possible. Close the windows to elimi-
nate the surrounding noises (traffic 1. Connect a Siri Eyes Free enabled
noises, vibration sounds, etc.), which iPhone® to the vehicle. For additional
may prevent the system from recogniz- information, refer to “Connecting pro-
ing the voice commands correctly. cedure” in this section.
∙ For functions that can be used in Siri 2. After the Bluetooth® connection is es-
Eyes Free, please refer to the Apple tablished, push and hold the but-
website. ton to activate the Siri Eyes Free func-
tion.

OPERATING SIRI® EYES FREE NOTE: CHANGING SIRI® EYES FREE
For best results, use the native music SETTINGS
1. Push or push and hold the button.
app. Performance of music control func- Settings for Siri® Eyes Free can be found in
2. Speak your command and then listen tion while using Podcasts, Audiobook or the Bluetooth® settings menu. For addi-
to the Siri Eyes Free reply. other 3rd party music apps may vary and tional information, refer to “Bluetooth® set-
After starting Siri Eyes Free, push the is controlled by the iPhone®. tings” in this section.
button again within 5 seconds of the end of Example 2 – Replying to text messages
the Siri Eyes Free announcement to extend 1. If a compatible iPhone® is connected
the session. and “Show Notifications” of the iPhone® 2. Touch the “Settings” key.
Example 1 – Playing music settings is enabled, the vehicle will dis- 3. Touch the “Phone & Bluetooth” key.
play a notification for new incoming
1. Push or push and hold the button. text messages. 4. Touch the “Phone settings” key.
2. Say “Play (artist name, song name, 2. After reading the message, push or 5. Select “Short Press” or “Long Press” to
etc.)”. set the activation.
push and hold the button to reply
3. Your vehicle will automatically change using Siri Eyes Free.
to Bluetooth® Audio or iPod® mode* 3. After a beep sounds, say “Text mes-
when the music starts playing. Mode sage” or a similar command to reply
selection is determined by the phone. using Siri Eyes Free.
* If the iPhone® is also connected with the
USB cable.
If the audio track does not start playing
automatically after Siri Eyes Free ends, try
changing the track or audio source to re-
sume playback.


Cannot access Siri Eyes Check if a Bluetooth® connection is established between the iPhone® and the system.
Free from switch on the Check if Siri is enabled on the device. On your phone, go to Siri setting.
steering wheel Check that Siri can be accessed from the device lock screen. This can be set in the settings menu of your phone.
For best results, use the native Music app. Performance of music control function while using Podcasts, Audiobook or other 3rd party
Audio Source does not music apps may vary.
change automatically to For best results, play media already stored on your device. Streaming music or playback from cloud storage may degrade
iPod® or Bluetooth® Au- performance.
dio mode Switch the source manually by pressing the AUX or MEDIA button on the vehicle audio system or the SOURCE select switch on the
steering wheel.
Play, pause, next track, For best results, use the native Music app. Performance of music control function while using Podcasts, Audiobook or other 3rd party
previous track or play music apps may vary and is controlled by the device.
timer does not work
Cannot hear any music/ Check that the audio source is set to Bluetooth® Audio or iPod® mode. A USB connection is required for iPod® mode.
audio being played back
from a connected
iPhone®
Cannot hear map turn- Check that the audio source is set to Bluetooth® Audio or iPod® mode. A USB connection is required for iPod® mode.
by-turn direction guid-
ance from a connected
iPhone®
Cannot receive text mes- Check if “Send Notifications” is enabled on your phone. On the phone, go to Bluetooth® settings. Find the device name, like “My Car”.
sage notifications on the Press the info button. Turn on “Show Notifications”.
vehicle audio system
Cannot reply to text After receiving an incoming text message, follow on-screen guidance. Push or push and hold the button on the steering wheel
message notifications by for Siri Eyes Free. After Siri Eyes Free starts, say “Text Message”.
Siri Eyes Free

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO
When installing a CB, ham radio or car CAUTION ∙ Use electrical accessories with the en-
phone in your vehicle, be sure to observe gine running to avoid discharging the
the following precautions; otherwise, the ∙ Keep the antenna as far away as pos-
vehicle battery.
new equipment may adversely affect the sible from the electronic control
engine control system and other electronic modules.
parts. ∙ Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in
(20 cm) away from the electronic con-
WARNING trol system harnesses. Do not route
∙ A cellular phone should not be used the antenna wire next to any harness.
for any purpose while driving so full ∙ Adjust the antenna standing-wave
attention may be given to vehicle op- ratio as recommended by the
eration. Some jurisdictions prohibit manufacturer.
the use of cellular phones while
∙ Connect the ground wire from the CB
driving.
radio chassis to the body.
∙ If you must make a call while your ve-
∙ For additional information, it is rec-
hicle is in motion, the hands free cellu-
lar phone operational mode (if so
dealer.
equipped) is highly recommended.
Exercise extreme caution at all times ∙ Do not ground electrical accessories
so full attention may be given to ve- directly to the battery terminal. Doing
hicle operation. so will bypass the variable voltage
control system and the vehicle bat-
∙ If you are unable to devote full atten-
tery may not charge completely. For
tion to vehicle operation while talking
additional information, refer to “Vari-
on the phone, pull off the road to a
able voltage control system” in the
safe location and stop your vehicle.
“Do-it-yourself ” section of this
manual.

BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE
SYSTEM WITHOUT NAVIGATION
WARNING
∙ Use a phone after stopping your ve-
hicle in a safe location. If you have to
use a phone while driving, exercise ex-
treme caution at all times so full at-
tention may be given to vehicle
operation.
tion to vehicle operation while talking
on the phone, pull off the road to a
safe location and stop your vehicle.
CAUTION
To avoid discharging the vehicle bat-
tery, use a phone after starting the
engine.
LHA4813
Your NISSAN is equipped with the make or receive a hands-free telephone
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System. If call with your cellular phone in the vehicle.
you have a compatible Bluetooth® enabled
cellular phone, you can set up the wireless Once your cellular phone is connected to
connection between your cellular phone the in-vehicle phone module, no other
and the in-vehicle phone module. With phone connecting procedure is required.
Bluetooth® wireless technology, you can Your phone is automatically connected
with the in-vehicle phone module when ∙ Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular ∙ Do not place the cellular phone in an
the ignition switch is placed in the ON po- phones may not be recognized or work area surrounded by metal or far away
sition with the previously connected cellu- properly. Please visit from the in-vehicle phone module to
lar phone turned on and carried in the ve- www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or prevent tone quality degradation and
hicle. www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for a recom- wireless connection disruption.
mended phone list and connecting in-
∙ While a cellular phone is connected
NOTE: structions.
through the Bluetooth® wireless con-
Some devices require the user to accept ∙ You will not be able to use a hands-free nection, the battery power of the cellu-
connections to other Bluetooth® de- phone under the following conditions: lar phone may discharge quicker than
vices. If your phone does not connect au- usual. The Bluetooth® Hands-Free
– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular
tomatic ally to the system, consult the Phone System cannot charge cellular
service area.
phones.
phone’s Owner’s Manual for details on
– Your vehicle is in an area where it is
device operation. ∙ For additional information, you can visit
difficult to receive a cellular signal;
You can connect up to five different such as in a tunnel, in an under-
www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for trouble-
Bluetooth® cellular phones to the in- ground parking garage, near a tall
shooting help.
vehicle phone module. However, you can building or in a mountainous area.
talk on only one cellular phone at a time. ∙ Some cellular phones or other devices
– Your cellular phone is locked to pre-
may cause interference or a buzzing
Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free vent it from being dialed.
noise to come from the audio system
Phone System, refer to the following notes. ∙ When the radio wave condition is not speakers. Storing the device in a differ-
∙ Set up the wireless connection be- ideal or ambient sound is too loud, it ent location may reduce or eliminate
may be difficult to hear the other per- the noise.
tween a compatible cellular phone and
son’s voice during a call.
the in-vehicle phone module before us- ∙ For additional information, refer to the
ing the hands-free phone system. cellular phone Owner’s Manual regard-
ing the telephone charges, cellular
phone antenna and body, etc.

REGULATORY INFORMATION Operating tips
BLUETOOTH® is a
To get the best performance out of the
FCC Regulatory information trademark owned NISSAN Voice Recognition System, observe
– CAUTION: To maintain compliance with by Bluetooth SIG, the following:
FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only Inc. and licensed ∙ Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet
the supplied antenna. Unauthorized an-
tenna, modification, or attachments
to Panasonic. as possible. Keep all vents pointed away
from the microphone and close the
could damage the transmitter and may USING THE SYSTEM windows to eliminate surrounding
violate FCC regulations.
The system allows hands-free operation of noises (traffic noises, vibration sounds,
– Operation is subject to the following two the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System. etc.), which may prevent the system
conditions: from recognizing voice commands cor-
If the vehicle is in motion, some commands rectly.
1. This device may not cause interference may not be available so full attention may
and be given to vehicle operation. ∙ Wait until the tone sounds before
speaking a command. Otherwise, the
2. this device must accept any interfer- Initialization command will not be received properly.
ence, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the de- When the ignition switch is placed in the ON ∙ Start speaking a command within
vice. position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initial- 5 seconds after the tone sounds.
ized, which takes a few seconds. If the
IC Regulatory information button is pressed before the initialization ∙ Speak in a natural voice without paus-
completes, the system will announce ing between words.
– Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause “There is no phone connected” and will not ∙ For calling contacts by name, please
interference, and (2) this device must ac- react to voice commands. say both the first and last name of the
cept any interference, including interfer- contact for better recognition.
ence that may cause undesired opera-
tion of the device.
– This Class B digital apparatus meets all
requirements of the Canadian
Interference-Causing Equipment Regu-
lations.
Giving voice commands ∙ You can cancel a command when the
system is waiting for a response by say-
To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, ing, “Cancel” or “Quit.” The system an-
press the button located on the nounces “Exit” and ends the Voice Rec-
steering wheel for less than 1.5 seconds. ognition session. You can also press
After the tone sounds, speak a command. and hold the button on the steer-
The command given is picked up by the ing wheel for 1.5 seconds at any time to
microphone, and voice feedback is given end the Voice Recognition session.
when the command is accepted. Whenever the Voice Recognition ses-
sion is canceled, a double beep is
∙ If a command is not recognized, the played to indicate you have exited the
system announces, “Please say or se- system.
lect a command from the displayed list.”
Make sure the command is said exactly ∙ If you want to adjust the volume of the
voice feedback, push the (+ or -) volume
as prompted by the system and repeat LHA4723
control switches on the steering wheel
the command in a clear voice. INDICATORS
while being provided with feedback. You
∙ If you want to go back to the previous can also use the radio volume control When a cellular phone is connected
command, you can say “Go back” any knob. through the Bluetooth® wireless connec-
time the system is waiting for a re- Voice Prompt Interrupt tion, indicators 䊊
1 for the phone and text
sponse. messaging are displayed on the top of the
In most cases you can interrupt the voice
screen.
feedback to speak the next command by
pressing the button on the steering
wheel. After interrupting the system, wait
for a beep before speaking your command.

Indicator Description Press and hold the button
Indicates there are un- for less than 1.5 seconds to initi-
read received ate the Voice Recognition
messages.
session. To exit the Voice Recog-
Indicates the
Bluetooth® device that
nition session press and hold
is currently connected. the for less than 1.5 sec-
Indicates the strength onds. For additional information,
of the signal the refer to “Voice prompt interrupt”
Bluetooth® device is
receiving.
in this section.
Indicates the amount
of remaining You can use the button to
Bluetooth® device interrupt the system feedback
battery. LHA2561 and give a command at once.
CONTROL BUTTONS
If an iPhone® is connected, Siri®
The control buttons for the Bluetooth®
can be accessed by pressing
Hands-Free Phone System are located on
the steering wheel. the button for more than
VOICE COMMAND BUTTON two seconds. For additional
information, refer to “Siri® Eyes
Free” in this section.
PHONE BUTTON
To answer an incoming call or to
end a call press the button.
To reject a call press and hold

the button.
CONNECTING PROCEDURE 2. Touch the “Connections” key on the
screen.
NOTE: 3. In the Bluetooth tab, touch the “Add
The connecting procedure must be per- New” key to connect a phone.
formed when the vehicle is stationary. If 4. When a compatible phone is found a
the vehicle starts moving during the pro- message with a PIN appears on the
cedure, the procedure will be canceled. screen.
To connect a phone to the Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System: 5. Verify the PIN is correct and accept the
connection.
Manual Connecting Procedure
6. To access the Bluetooth® settings
1. Press the MENU button on the menu touch the “ ” key on the Con-
control panel. nections screen. The following options
LHA4726
are available:
Menu Item Result
Bluetooth Allows user to switch Bluetooth® on and off. Bluetooth® must be turned on in order to connect a device.
ON Turns Bluetooth® functionality on. To turn off, touch the “ON” key again. The indicator light will go off.
Favorite (Connection first) Allows user to toggle “Phone” and “Audio” favorite settings on and off.
PIN Allows user to customize the PIN to a four digit number.

NOTE: VOICE COMMANDS ∙ Call <name> Other
Some cellular phones may require you to Voice commands can be used to operate ∙ Settings
accept certain permissions in order to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.
enable features on your Bluetooth® sys- Press and hold the button for more “Call <name>”
tem. During the Bluetooth® pairing pro- than 1.5 seconds to bring up the phone Speak this command to make a call to a
cess, please check your cellular phone’s
command menu. The commands avail- contact that is stored in the phonebook.
display for a pop-up with the request to
able are: Say “Call” followed by a phonebook name to
grant phonebook access.
initiate a call. If the system does not recog-
Granting phonebook access permission ∙ Call <name> nize the name it will display a list of similar
will allow your contacts to be down-
∙ Dial <number> names. After the prompt, speak or touch
loaded to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® sys-
an item number from the displayed list to
tem. A pop-up may display on your cellu- ∙ Recent Calls place the call.
lar phone stating that the Bluetooth®
system would like to access your con- ∙ Read/Send Text (if so equipped) “Dial <number>”
tacts and call history. Please select “Al- ∙ Siri® (if so equipped)
low” or Yes” to grant this permission. Speak this command to make a call with a
∙ Voice Assistant (if so equipped) spoken phone number. After the prompt,
Automatic Connecting Procedure say “Dial” followed by a 7 to 10 digit phone
∙ Phonebook number. The system will repeat the num-
If no phone is connected to the system,
press and hold the button on the ∙ Quick Dial ber back. Say “Dial” to initiate the call or
steering wheel for less than 1.5 seconds. “Correction” to re-enter the phone number.
∙ Redial
After the prompt, speak “Add Phone”, the
system will announce “transferring to the ∙ Select Phone
add phone settings menu”. The system will
start the pairing procedure. When a com- ∙ Add Phone
patible phone is found, a message with a ∙ Call <name> Mobile
PIN appears on the screen. Operate the
Bluetooth® phone to complete the con- ∙ Call <name> Home
nection process. For additional informa- ∙ Call <name> Office
tion, refer to “Bluetooth® connections
screen” in this section. ∙ Call <name> Main
“Recent Calls” ∙ Missed Calls ∙ <Say a Contact Name> Main
Speak this command to list the last 20
The following commands are available un- ∙ <Say a Contact Name> Home
missed calls to the vehicle. If the call is
der “Recent Calls”: from an entry in the phonebook, the ∙ <Say a Contact Name> Mobile
∙ Incoming Calls name will be displayed. Otherwise, the
∙ <Say a Contact Name> Office
Speak this command to list the last phone number of the missed call will be
20 incoming calls to the vehicle. If the displayed. ∙ <Say a Contact Name> Other
call is from an entry in the phonebook, When prompted, speak or touch the
For additional information on manually se-
the name will be displayed. Otherwise, item number on the screen to place the
lecting phonebook entries, refer to “Making
the phone number of the incoming call call. Select the “Next” key to move
a call” in this section.
will be displayed. through the list of missed calls.
When prompted, speak or touch the “Read Text/Send Text” (if so “Quick dial”
item number on the screen to place the
equipped) Speak this command to access the Quick
call. Select the “Next” key to move
dial menu. After the prompt, speak or se-
through the list of incoming calls. Speak this command to access text mes-
lect an item number on the displayed list to
saging functions. For additional informa-
∙ Outgoing Calls tion, refer to “Text messaging” in this sec- place the call. For additional information,
Speak this command to list the last 20 tion. refer to “Making a call” in this section.
outgoing calls from the vehicle. If the
call was to an entry in the phonebook, “Phonebook through voice “Redial”
the name will be displayed. Otherwise, command” Speak this command to call the last num-
the phone number of the outgoing call ber dialed. After the prompt, say “Redial” to
will be displayed. Speak “Phonebook” to view a list of quick
steps to access entries stored in the dial the number of the last outgoing call.
When prompted, speak or touch the The system will display “Redialing
phonebook. Commands are organized by
item number on the screen to place the <name/number>”. The name of the
the phone number type selected in the cel-
call. Select the “Next” key to move lular device. For additional information, re- phonebook entry will be displayed if it is
through the list of outgoing calls. fer to the cellular phone’s Owner’s Manual. available, otherwise the number being re-
dialed will be displayed.
The following commands are available:
∙ <Say a Contact Name>
“Select Phone” ∙ Best Match List
When the system doesn’t recognize a
Speak this command to access the Con- phonebook name or dial number, it will
nections menu. For additional information, provide a list of similar sounding results.
refer to “Bluetooth® connections screen” in To turn this off, touch the “ON” button,
this section. the indicator light will turn off. To turn on,
touch the “ON” key again, the indicator
“Add Phone” light will turn on.
Speak this command to access the Con-
nections menu. For additional information,
refer to “Bluetooth® connections screen” in
this section.
“Settings”
LHA4705
Speak this command to access the Sys-
tem Voice settings menu. The system will PHONE DISPLAY SCREEN
exit Voice Recognition mode. Touch one of The Phone screen can be displayed by
the following options on the screen to pressing the button on the control
change the settings. panel.
∙ Beep Only for Opening Prompt The following options are displayed:
By touching the “ON” key, the indicator ∙ Quick Dial
light will illuminate, the system voice will Displays the Quick Dial screen. For addi-
turn off and only a tone will sound when tional information, refer to “Quick dial” in
the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone Sys- this section.
tem is activated. To turn the system
voice back on, touch the “ON” key again,
the indicator light will turn off.

∙ Phonebook MAKING A CALL For additional options to make a call, refer
Displays the Phonebook screen. For ad- to “Voice commands” in this section.
ditional information, refer to “Making a To make a call press the button on
call” in this section. the control panel. Touch an option from Quick Dial
menu screen: Quick Dial entries can be used to quickly
∙ Call History make a call. The system allows up to 20
Displays the Call History screen. For ad- ∙ Phonebook entries to be stored. To set up a quick dial
ditional information, refer to “Making a Select a person and the phone number press the button on the control
call” in this section. you wish to call from the phonebook. panel. Touch the “Quick Dial” key to display a
∙ Dial Number Depending on the device, the phone- list of quick dial entries. Touch the “Edit” key
Displays the Dial Number screen. For book will be downloaded from the cel- to edit current entries or touch the “Add
additional information, refer to “Making lular phone automatically when it is New” key to make a new entry. Two meth-
a call” in this section. connected. If the automatic download ods are given to create a quick dial entry:
does not take place, the phone number
∙ Text Message ∙ Touch the “Copy from Call History” key
must be transferred to the hands-free
Displays the received message screen. to save a phone number from the In-
phone system from the cellular phone coming, Outgoing or Missed call history
For additional information, refer to “Text
messaging” in this section. prior to using this method. For addi- lists. Select the person or phone num-
tional information, refer to “Phone and ber from the menu to be added. A reg-
∙ Connections text message settings” in this section. istration menu will display the Entry #,
Displays the Connections screen. For phone number, phone number type
additional information, refer to ∙ Call History
Select a phonebook name or phone stored in the cellular phone and Voice
“Bluetooth® connections screen” in this Tag. Select the “OK” key.
section. number from the recent incoming, out-
going or missed calls tabs. Touch a ∙ Touch the “Copy from Phonebook” key to
∙ Volume phonebook name or phone number save a number from the phonebook. Use
Displays the volume adjustment listed to initiate the call. the scroll keys on the side to move up
screen. For additional information, refer and down through the menu. Select a
to “Volume & beeps” in this section. ∙ Dial Number
Enter the phone number manually us- person to be added. A menu will display
ing the keypad displayed on the screen. the Entry #, phone number, phone num-
Press the “OK” key on the screen to initi- ber type stored in the cellular phone and
ate the call. Voice Tag. Select the “OK” key.

Voice tag If the user is not able to answer the call ∙ Switch Call
A voice tag can be recorded for each of the right away, touch the “Hold Call” key dis- This option will only be available when a
registered Quick Dial numbers and can be played on the screen. A message will be second call is active.
used to dial the number by speaking it. On played for the caller: “I’m not able to take a
If supported by the phone, the
the Quick Dial registration screen, touch call right now.” The user may then accept
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
the “Voice Tag” key. Select a relationship the call when available or reject the call.
allows for call waiting functionality. If a
from the list or create a new voice tag. To To reject a call, press and hold the call is received while another call is al-
record a new voice tag touch the “Custom- button on the steering wheel. ready active, a message will be dis-
ize” key on the screen then touch the “Store”
key. Speak a name after the prompt, the DURING A CALL played on the screen. Press the
new tag will be stored. To edit or create a While a call is active the following options button on the steering wheel or touch
new voice tag select the “Customize” key will appear on the control panel display: the “ Answer” key on screen to ac-
again. Touch the “Play” key to play the re- cept the incoming call. Touch the
∙ Mute “ Decline” key on the screen to re-
corded voice tag, touch the “Restore” key to
Touch this key to mute or unmute the ject the second call.
edit the voice tag or “Delete” to delete the
system.
current voice tag. While a call is active, press the button
∙ Dial Number on the steering wheel to access additional
RECEIVING A CALL Touch this key to dial digits during the options. Speak one of the following com-
When a call is received by the phone con- phone call. mands:
nected to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® Hands- ∙ Use Handset ∙ “Send Digits”
Free Phone System, the call information is Touch this key to transfer the call to the Speak this command followed by the
displayed on the control panel display. handset. To transfer the call back from digits to enter digits during the phone
Press the button on the steering the handset to the Bluetooth® Hands- call.
wheel or touch the “ Answer” key on Free Phone System, press the
∙ “Switch call”
the screen to accept the call. To reject the button on the control panel then select
Speak this command to hold the sec-
the “Transfer Hands-free” key on the
call touch the “ Decline” key on the ond call and switch back to the original
screen.
screen. call.

ENDING A CALL NOTE: The availability of the text message func-
tion may vary depending on the cellular
To end an active call, press the button This feature is automatically disabled if
phone.
on the steering wheel or touch the the connected device does not support
the Message Access Profile (MAP). For When the cellular phone connected to the
“ Hang up” key on the screen.
additional information, refer to the vehicle receives a text message, a notifica-
TEXT MESSAGING (if so equipped) phone’s Owner’s Manual for details and tion will appear on the control panel dis-
instructions. play. To check the message, touch the
WARNING “Read” key. Touch the “Ignore” key to save
NOTE: the message to be checked later.
∙ Laws in some jurisdictions may re-
strict the use of “Text-to-Speech”. Many phones may require special per- Access text messaging through the ve-
Check local regulations before using mission to enable text messaging. Check hicles Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone or
this feature. the phone’s screen during Bluetooth® through the vehicles control panel.
∙ Laws in some jurisdictions may re- pairing. For some phones, you may need Text messaging using Bluetooth®
strict the use of some of the applica- to enable ‘Notifications’ in the phone’s
Bluetooth® menu for text messages to
Hands-Free Phone System (if so
tions and features, such as social net-
working and texting. Check local appear on the headunit. For additional equipped)
regulations for any requirements. information, refer to your phone’s Own- Sending a text message (if so equipped)
er’s manual. Text message integration
∙ Use the text messaging feature after requires that the phone support MAP 1. Press and hold the button on the
stopping your vehicle in a safe loca- (Message Access Profile) for both receiv- steering wheel for less than 1.5 sec-
tion. If you have to use the feature ing and sending text messages. Some onds.
while driving, exercise extreme cau- phones may not support all text mes-
tion at all times so full attention may 2. Say “Send Text” after the tone.
saging features. Please refer to
be given to vehicle operation. www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or 3. The system will provide a list of avail-
∙ If you are unable to devote full atten- www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for compat- able commands in order to determine
tion to vehicle operation while using ibility information, as well as your de- the recipient of the text message.
the text messaging feature, pull off vice’s Owner’s manual. Choose from the following:
the road to a safe location and stop The system allows for the sending and re-
∙ Phonebook
your vehicle. ceiving of text messages through the ve-
hicle interface. ∙ Quick Dial
∙ Incoming Calls To send one of the custom messages, ∙ Call
say “Custom Messages”. If more than Speak this command to call the sender.
∙ Outgoing Calls
one custom message is stored, the ∙ Previous
∙ Missed Calls system will prompt for the number of Speak this command to move to the
∙ Dial the desired custom message. For ad- previous text message (if available).
ditional information on setting and
4. Once a recipient is chosen, the system managing custom text messages, re- ∙ Next
prompts for which message to send. fer to “Phone and text message set- Speak this command to move to the
Nine predefined messages are avail- tings” in this section. next text message (if available).
able as well as three custom mes-
Reading a received text message Siri® Eyes Free (if so equipped)
sages. To choose one of the predefined
messages, speak one of the following 1. Press and hold the button on the If a connected phone is equipped with Siri®,
after the tone: steering wheel for less than 1.5 sec- it can also be used to create custom mes-
onds. sages that are sent through the phone. For
∙ “Driving, can’t text”
additional information, refer to “Siri® Eyes
∙ “Call me” 2. Say “Read Text” after the tone. Free (models without Navigation System)”
The display will show a list of 20 messages in this section.
∙ “On my way”
with the sender and delivery time. Touch
∙ “Running late” the “Next” key on the screen to view all mes- NOTE:
sages. To view a text message press Text messages are only displayed if the
∙ “Okay”
the button on the steering wheel and vehicle speed is less than 5 mph
∙ “Yes” speak the number item list on the screen. (8 km/h).
∙ “No” The following options will be available:
∙ Play NOTE:
∙ “Where are you?”
Speak this command to have the sys- For Apple iPhones®, text messages can
∙ “When?” tem say the message. only be sent through Siri.
∙ Reply
Speak this command to send a text
message response to the sender of the
text message.
Text messaging using the control Available actions: Sending a text message (if so equipped)
panel ∙ Prev. This function may not be supported de-
Display received message list Touch this key to read the previous pending on the cellular phone.
message.
1. Press the button on the control 1. Press the button on the control
panel. ∙ Next panel.
Touch this key to read the next mes-
2. Touch the “Text Message” key on the sage. 2. Touch the “Text Message” key on the
screen screen.
∙ Play/Stop
3. Touch an item on the list to read or Touch the “Play” key to have the hands- 3. Touch the “Create Message” key on the
reply to the message. free phone system read out the re- screen.
Up to 100 messages can be stored in the ceived message. Touch the “Stop” key to
message list. stop reading.
Received message screen ∙ Call
Touching the “Read” key on the incoming If the sender of the message is regis-
message notification screen or selecting a tered in the phonebook, touch the “Call”
message from the message list will show key to make a call to the sender.
the details of the received message on the ∙ Reply
display. A reply message can be selected from
the predefined list or by a custom mes-
sage.

The following items are available:
Available item Action
To Enter Number by Keypad Enter the phone number of the recipient using the keypad. Touch the “OK” key to confirm.
Quick Dial Select a recipient from the quick dial list.
Phonebook Select a recipient from the phonebook.
Call History Select a recipient/phone number from call history.
Select Text Fixed Touch to display a list of predefined text messages.
Customized Touch to display a list of custom text messages. Custom text can be created or edited from the setting
menu. For additional information, refer to “Phone and text message settings” in this section.
Send Touch to send the message.

Access the Connections screen to change Bluetooth tab
settings and view Bluetooth® information.
To access the Connections screen press This tab will display up to 6 Bluetooth® de-
the MENU button on the control vices. If 6 devices are already connected,
panel. Touch the “Connections” key on the one of the devices must be deleted before
screen then select the Bluetooth tab. another device can be connected.
The paired phone will be added to the list “Add New” key
on the Bluetooth® connections screen.
Touch the this key on the screen to con-
Touching the name of another device on
the list will switch the connected device. nect a new Bluetooth® device. For addi-
tional information, refer to “Connecting
“ ” (back) key procedure” in this section.,
Touch the “ ” key to go back to the “ ” (Bluetooth® settings) key
LHA4716 previous screen.
Touch the “ ” key on the screen to dis-
BLUETOOTH® CONNECTIONS Connecting Bluetooth® play a list of options.
SCREEN For additional information on connecting a
∙ Bluetooth
cellular phone or device to the Bluetooth®
1. “ ” (back) key Touch this key to turn the Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System, refer to “Con-
2. Bluetooth tab necting procedure” in this section. connection on or off
3. Connections screen
∙ Favorite (Connection first)
4. “Add New” key NOTE: Touch this key to change which device
5. “ ” (settings) key
Some cellular phones or other devices will be connected first when multiple
6. “ ” (info) key may cause interference or a buzzing devices are connected to the vehicle.
7. “ ” (Bluetooth® Audio connec- noise to come from the audio system Turn the “ ” key on or off to make the
tion) key speakers. Storing the device in a differ- device a favorite connection.
8. “ ” (Bluetooth® Hands-Free ent location may reduce or eliminate the Turn the “ ” key on or off to make the
noise.
Phone System connection) key device a favorite connection.

∙ Pin “ ” (Bluetooth® Audio
Touch this key to customize the PIN connection) key
code. Input a four digit number then
touch the “OK” key. The new PIN will be A list of connected devices will be displayed
set. on the screen. Touch the “ ” key next to
the name to connect a device to
“ ” (info) key Bluetooth® Audio. If the device is listed as a
favorite, a star will appear on the icon. Se-
Touch the “ ” key on the screen to dis-
lect the key again to disconnect the device.
play the information of the cellular phone
The device will not be removed from the
or to delete the device. list. For additional information on removing
Touch the “Delete” key to remove a paired a device, refer to “ (info) key” in this
device then select “Yes” when a message section.
appears.
“ ” (Bluetooth® Hands-Free LHA4721
Phone System connection) key PHONE AND TEXT MESSAGE

A list of connected devices will be displayed
SETTINGS
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System set-
on the screen. Touch the “ ” key next to tings can be changed according to the us-
the name to connect a device to the er’s preference. To access the “Phone” set-
Hands-Free Phone System. If the phone is
tings menu press the MENU button
listed as a favorite, a star will appear on the on the control panel. Touch the “Settings”
icon. Select the key again to disconnect the key then select the “Phone” key.
device. The device will not be removed
from the list. For additional information on
removing a device, refer to “ (info) key”
in this section.

The following options are available:
Menu Item Result
Quick Dial Edit Entries in the Quick Dial can be edited. For additional information, refer to “Quick dial” in this section.
Delete All Deletes all of the stored phone numbers in quick dial.
Phonebook Download Entire Phonebook All the phone numbers that are stored in a phonebook in the cellular phone that is connected to the
vehicle are downloaded at once. For additional information, refer to the cellular phone’s Owner’s
manual.
Auto Downloaded Turns on/off automatic downloading of the phonebook when a new phone is connected.
Text Message Text Message Turns the text messaging function on/off.
Text Message Ringtone Turn the incoming message sound on/off.
Signature Turns the signature setting for the outgoing text message on/off.
Auto Reply Turns the automatic text message reply function on/off.
Auto Reply Text Message Select the text message to be used for the automatic reply. Choose from a list of predefined mes-
sages or create a custom message.
Edit Custom Text Create or edits a customized text message reply. To set a custom message, touch the “Add New” key.
Select a message from the recent text log. Touch the “OK” key to set the message or the “Select” key to
choose a different message. Up to three custom messages can be set. To delete a message select the
custom message and touch the “Delete” key.
Notifications Driver Only When this item is turned on, incoming call notification is displayed only on the handset.
Vehicle Ringtone Turns the vehicle ringtone on/off.
Automatic Hold When this item turns on, an incoming call will be put on hold automatically.

BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE
SYSTEM WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM
(if so equipped)
Volume & beeps Volume Settings WARNING
The Volume settings screen can be found
There are several methods to customize by pressing the button on the control ∙ Use a phone after stopping your ve-
the volume settings. panel then touching the “Volume” key on hicle in a safe location. If you have to
the screen. To adjust the volume of the use a phone while driving, exercise ex-
Volume & Beeps
following options, touch the “–” and “+” keys treme caution at all times so full at-
The Volume & Beeps screen can be found
on the screen. tention may be given to vehicle
by pressing the MENU button on the operation.
The available settings are:
control panel, touching the “Settings” key
on the screen and selecting “Volume & ∙ Ringtone ∙ If you are unable to devote full atten-
Beeps”. To adjust the volume of the follow- Adjust the volume level of the ringtone tion to vehicle operation while talking
ing options, touch the “–” and “+” keys on the of incoming calls. on the phone, pull off the road to a
screen. safe location and stop your vehicle.
∙ Outgoing Call
The available settings are:
Adjust the volume level of the outgoing CAUTION
∙ Ringtone calls.
Adjust the volume level of the ringtone To avoid discharging the vehicle bat-
of incoming calls. tery, use a phone after starting the
engine.
∙ Outgoing Call
Adjust the volume level of the outgoing
calls.
∙ Voice Prompt Vol.
Adjust the volume level of the system
voice.
∙ Text-to-speech Vol.
Adjust the volume of the replay voice for
text messaging.
∙ Button Beeps
Turns on/off the button beep sounds
and alarm for prohibited operations.
with the in-vehicle phone module when
the ignition switch is placed in the ON po-
sition with the connected cellular phone
turned on and carried in the vehicle.
You can register up to five different
Bluetooth® cellular phones to the in-
vehicle phone module. However, you can
talk on only one cellular phone at a time.
NISSAN Voice Recognition system sup-
ports the phone commands, so dialing a
phone number using your voice is possible.
For additional information, refer to “NISSAN
Voice Recognition System” in this section.
Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free
Phone System, refer to the following notes.
∙ Set up the wireless connection be-
tween a cellular phone and the in-
vehicle phone module before using the
hands-free phone system.
∙ Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular
phones may not be recognized by the
LHA3144
in-vehicle phone module. Please visit
Your NISSAN is equipped with the make or receive a hands-free telephone www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System. If call with your cellular phone in the vehicle. www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for a recom-
you have a compatible Bluetooth® enabled mended phone list and connecting in-
cellular phone, you can set up the wireless Once your cellular phone is connected to
structions.
connection between your cellular phone the in-vehicle phone module, no other
and the in-vehicle phone module. With phone connecting procedure is required.
Bluetooth® wireless technology, you can Your phone is automatically connected
∙ You will not be able to use a hands-free ∙ While a cellular phone is connected REGULATORY INFORMATION
phone under the following conditions: through the Bluetooth® wireless con-
nection, the battery power of the cellu- FCC Regulatory information
– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular lar phone may discharge quicker than
service area. – CAUTION: To maintain compliance with
usual. The Bluetooth® Hands-Free FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only
– Your vehicle is in an area where it is Phone System cannot charge cellular the supplied antenna. Unauthorized an-
difficult to receive cellular signal; phones. tenna, modification, or attachments
such as in a tunnel, in an under- ∙ If the hands-free phone system seems could damage the transmitter and may
ground parking garage, near a tall to be malfunctioning, refer to “Trouble- violate FCC regulations.
building or in a mountainous area. shooting guide” in this section. You can – Operation is subject to the following two
also visit conditions:
– Your cellular phone is locked to pre-
vent it from being dialed. www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for trouble- 1. This device may not cause interference
∙ When the radio wave condition is not shooting help. and
ideal or ambient sound is too loud, it ∙ Some cellular phones or other devices 2. this device must accept any interfer-
may be difficult to hear the other per- may cause interference or a buzzing ence, including interference that may
son’s voice during a call. noise to come from the audio system cause undesired operation of the de-
speakers. Storing the device in a differ- vice.
∙ Immediately after the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position, it may be im- ent location may reduce or eliminate IC Regulatory information
the noise.
possible to receive a call for a short pe- – Operation is subject to the following two
riod of time. ∙ Refer to the cellular phone owner’s conditions: (1) this device may not cause
manual regarding the telephone interference, and (2) this device must ac-
∙ Do not place the cellular phone in an charges, cellular phone antenna and
area surrounded by metal or far away cept any interference, including interfer-
body, etc. ence that may cause undesired opera-
from the in-vehicle phone module to
prevent tone quality degradation and ∙ The signal strength display on the tion of the device.
wireless connection disruption. monitor will not coincide with the signal – This Class B digital apparatus meets all
strength display of some cellular requirements of the Canadian
phones. Interference-Causing Equipment Regu-
lations.
One Shot Call
BLUETOOTH® is a
To use the system faster, you may speak
trademark owned the second level commands with the main
by Bluetooth SIG, menu command on the main menu. For
Inc. and licensed example, press the button and after
to Bosch. the tone say, “Call Redial”.
VOICE COMMANDS
You can use voice commands to operate
various Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone Sys-
tem features using the NISSAN Voice Rec-
ognition system. For additional informa-
tion, refer to “NISSAN Voice Recognition
System” in this section. LHA2773
Voice Prompt Interrupt CONNECTING PROCEDURE
While using the Voice Recognition system,
the system voice can be interrupted to al- NOTE:
low the user to speak commands. While The connecting procedure must be per-
the system is speaking, press the formed when the vehicle is stationary. If
button on the steering wheel. The system the vehicle starts moving during the pro-
voice will stop and a tone will be heard. cedure, the procedure will be canceled.
After the tone, speak desired command
(displayed on the touch-screen). 1. Press the [ ] button on the control
panel.
4. Touch the “Connect New Device” key.

5. Initiate the connecting process from NOTE: RECEIVING A CALL
the handset. The system will display When a call is placed to the connected
To scroll quickly through the list, touch
the message: “Confirm on your the “A-Z” key in the upper right corner of phone, the display will change to phone
Bluetooth device that the PIN XXXXXX is the screen. Turn the TUNE knob to mode.
displayed”. If the PIN is displayed on choose a letter or number and then
your Bluetooth® device, select “Pair” to To accept the incoming call, either:
press the ENTER/AUDIO button. The list
complete the pairing process. will move to the first entry that begins ∙ Press the button on the steering
For additional information, refer to the with that number or letter. wheel, or
Bluetooth® device’s Owner’s Manual. MAKING A CALL ∙ Touch the icon on the screen.
VEHICLE PHONEBOOK To make a call, follow the procedure below: To reject the incoming call, either:
To access the vehicle phonebook: 1. Press the button on the control ∙ Press the button on the steering
panel. The “Phone” screen will appear wheel, or
1. Press the button on the control on the display.
panel. ∙ Touch the icon on the screen.
2. Select one of the following options to
2. Touch the “Phonebook” key. make a call: DURING A CALL
While a call is active, the following options
3. Choose the desired entry from the dis- ∙ “Phonebook”: Select the name from an are available on the screen:
played list. entry stored in the vehicle phonebook.
∙ “Handset”
4. The number of the entry will be dis- ∙ “Call Lists”: Select the name from the Select this option to switch control of
played on the screen. Touch the num- incoming, outgoing or missed. the phone call over to the handset.
ber to initiate dialing. ∙ “Redial”: Dial the last outgoing call from ∙ “Mute Mic.”
the vehicle. Select this option to mute the micro-
∙ “ ”: Input the phone number manu- phone. Select again to unmute the mi-
ally using a keypad displayed on the crophone.
screen. For additional information, refer ∙ Phone icon
to “How to use the touch-screen” in this Select to end the phone call.
section.

ENDING A CALL NOTE: The system allows for the sending and re-
ceiving of text messages through the ve-
To end a phone call, select the phone This feature is automatically disabled if
hicle interface.
icon on the screen or press the but- the connected device does not support
the Message Access Profile (MAP). For Sending a text message:
ton on the steering wheel.
additional information, refer to the 1. Press the button on the steering
TEXT MESSAGING (if so equipped) phone’s Owner’s Manual for details and wheel.
instructions.
WARNING 2. Say “Phone” after the tone.
NOTE: 3. Say “Send Text” after the tone.
∙ Laws in some jurisdictions may re-
strict the use of “Text-to-Speech”. Many phones may require special per- 4. The system will provide a list of avail-
Check local regulations before using mission to enable text messaging. Check able commands in order to determine
this feature. the phone’s screen during Bluetooth® the recipient of the text message.
pairing. For some phones, you may need Choose from the following:
∙ Laws in some jurisdictions may re- to enable ‘Notifications’ in the phone’s
strict the use of some of the applica- Bluetooth® menu for text messages to ∙ To (a name)
tions and features, such as social net- appear on the headunit. For additional
working and texting. Check local ∙ Enter Number
information, refer to your phone’s Own-
regulations for any requirements. er’s manual. Text message integration ∙ Missed Calls
∙ Use the text messaging feature after requires that the phone support MAP
∙ Incoming Calls
stopping your vehicle in a safe loca- (Message Access Profile) for both receiv-
tion. If you have to use the feature ing and sending text messages. Some ∙ Outgoing Calls
while driving, exercise extreme cau- phones may not support all text mes-
For additional information about these
tion at all times so full attention may saging features. For additional informa-
options, refer to “Voice commands” in
be given to vehicle operation. tion, please refer to
this section.
www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for compat-
tion to vehicle operation while using
ibility information, as well as your de-
the text messaging feature, pull off
vice’s Owner’s manual.
the road to a safe location and stop
your vehicle.

5. Once a recipient is chosen, the system fer to “Bluetooth® settings” in this sec- ∙ Previous Text
prompts for which message to send. tion. Speak this command to move to the
Nine predefined messages are avail- Reading a received text message: previous text message (if available).
able as well as three custom mes- ∙ Next Text
sages. To choose one of the predefined 1. Press the button on the steering
Speak this command to move to the
messages, speak one of the following wheel.
next text message (if available).
after the tone: 2. Say “Phone” after the tone.
Siri® Eyes Free (if so equipped)
∙ “Driving, can’t text” 3. Say “Read Text” after the tone. If a connected phone is equipped with Siri®,
∙ “Call me” The text message, sender and delivery it can also be used to create custom mes-
time are shown on the screen. Use sages that are sent through the phone. For
∙ “On my way”
the buttons to scroll through all additional information, refer to “Siri® Eyes
∙ “Running late” text messages if more than one are avail- Free (models with Navigation System)” in
able. Press the button to exit the text this section.
∙ “Okay”
message screen. Press the button to NOTE:
∙ “Yes”
access the following options for replying to
∙ “No” the text message: Text messages are only displayed if the
vehicle speed is less than 5 mph
∙ “Where are you?” ∙ Call Back (8 km/h).
Speak this command to call the sender
∙ “When?”
of the text message using the NOTE:
∙ “Custom Messages” Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.
For Apple iPhones®, text messages can
To send one of the custom messages, ∙ Send Text only be sent through Siri.
say “Custom Messages”. If more than Speak this command to send a text
one custom message is stored, the message response to the sender of the
system will prompt for the number of text message.
the desired custom message. For ad-
∙ Read Text
ditional information on setting and
Speak this command to read the text
managing custom text messages, re-
message again.
BLUETOOTH® SETTINGS
To access the phone settings:
LHA2844
Menu Item Result

Phone Settings For additional information, refer to “Phone settings” in this section.
Connect New Device Select to connect a new Bluetooth® device to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.
Select Connected Device Select to choose a Bluetooth® device from a list of those devices connected to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.
Replace Connected Device Select to replace a Bluetooth® device from a list of those devices connected to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.
Delete Connected Device Select to delete a Bluetooth® device from a list of those devices connected to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.
Bluetooth Select to toggle Bluetooth® on and off.

PHONE SETTINGS ∙ Download Phonebook Now: ∙ Auto Reply Message:
To access the phone settings: Touch to download the phonebook to Touch to indicate preferred message to
the vehicle from the chosen source. be sent when “Auto Reply” function is
1. Press the [ ] button. activated.
∙ Record Name for Phonebook Entry:
2. Touch the “Settings” key. Touch to record a name for a phone- ∙ Use Vehicle’s Signature:
book entry for use with the NISSAN Touch to toggle on or off the addition of
Voice Recognition System. the vehicle signature to outgoing mes-
4. Touch the “Phone Settings” key and ad- sages.
∙ Phone Notifications for:
just the following settings as desired:
Notifications may be displayed on the ∙ Custom Text Messages:
∙ Start Siri® by: center display screen. Touch this option to select a custom
Touch “Short Press” or “Long Press” to message to edit. There are 4 customer
∙ Text Messaging (if so equipped):
set how Siri® is operated on the steering message slots available.
Touch to toggle the text message func-
wheel.
tionality on or off.
∙ Sort Phonebook By:
∙ Show Incoming Text for:
Touch “First Name” or “Last Name” to
Text notifications may be displayed on
choose how phonebook entries are al-
the center display screen. Touch “Off” to
phabetically displayed on the screen.
turn off all text notifications.
∙ Use Phonebook From:
∙ Auto Reply:
Touch “Handset” to use the phone’s
Touch to toggle the auto reply function-
phonebook. Touch “SIM” to use the
ality on or off.
phonebook on the SIM card. Select
“Both” to use both sources.

The system should respond correctly to all
voice commands without difficulty. If prob-
lems are encountered, try the following so-
lutions.
Where the solutions are listed by number,
try each solution in turn, starting with num-
ber 1, until the problem is resolved.
Symptom Solution
1. Ensure that the command is valid. For additional information, refer to “NISSAN Voice Recognition Sys-
tem” in this section.
2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.
3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in
System fails to interpret the command correctly.
the vehicle.
4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on).
NOTE: If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.
5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.
1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. For additional
The system consistently selects the wrong entry from information, refer to “Vehicle phonebook” in this section.
the phone book. 2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.
3. Please speak both first and last name of contact to improve recognition accuracy.

NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION
The NISSAN Voice Recognition System al- 4. Voice and display feedback are pro-
lows hands-free operation of the systems vided when the command is accepted.
equipped on this vehicle, such as the
∙ If the command is not recognized, the
phone and navigation systems.
system announces: “Command not
To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, recognized”. Repeat the command in a
press the button located on the clear voice.
steering wheel. When prompted, speak the ∙ If you want to cancel the command or
command for the system you wish to acti- go back to the previous menu of com-
vate. The command given is picked up by
mands, press the button. The sys-
the microphone and performed when it is
tem will announce: “Canceling Voice
properly recognized. NISSAN Voice Recog-
Recognition” or “Go back” depending on
nition will provide a voice response as well
the current menu level.
as a message in the center display to in-
form you of the command results. ∙ If you want to adjust the volume of the
LHA2589
voice feedback, use the volume control
USING THE SYSTEM Giving voice commands switches on the steering wheel or the
Initialization volume knob on the control panel.
1. Press the button.
When the ignition switch is in the ON posi- ∙ The voice command screen can also be
tion, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized, 2. The system announces: “Please say a accessed using the control panel dis-
which takes a few seconds. When com- category like phone or a command like play:
pleted, the system is ready to accept voice points of interest followed by a brand
name”. A list of available commands is 1. Press the [ ] button.
commands. If the button is pressed
then spoken by the system.
before the initialization completes, the sys- 2. Touch the “Voice Commands” key.
tem will announce: “Voice Recognition Sys- 3. After the tone sounds and the face icon
tem not ready. Please wait.” on the display changes, speak a com-
mand. Available commands are dis-
cussed in this section.

Operating tips How to say numbers
To get the best performance out of NISSAN NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a cer-
Voice Recognition, observe the following: tain way to speak numbers in voice com-
∙ Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet mands. Refer to the following examples.
as possible. Close the windows to elimi- General rule: Either “zero” or “oh” can be
nate the surrounding noises (traffic used for “0”.
noises, vibration sounds, etc.), which
may prevent the system from recogniz- Phone numbers
ing the voice commands correctly.
Speak phone numbers according to the
∙ Wait until a tone sounds before speak- following example. For 1-800-662-6200, say
ing a command. Otherwise, the com- dial number and then speak the phone
mand will not be received properly. number in any of the following formats:
∙ Start speaking a command within LHA4373
∙ “one eight oh oh six six two six two oh
3.5 seconds after the tone sounds. oh”
SYSTEM FEATURES
∙ Speak in a natural voice without paus- ∙ “one eight hundred six six two six two oh
ing between words. NISSAN Voice Recognition can activate the oh”
following systems:
∙ “one eight zero zero six six two six two
∙ Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System oh oh”
∙ Navigation For the best voice recognition phone dial-
ing results, say phone numbers as single
∙ Audio digits. Also, full numbers can only be spo-
∙ Information ken for “800”. For example, you cannot say
555-6000 as “five five five six thousand”.
∙ My Apps
∙ Help
For additional information, refer to the
separate NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual.
BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE If a phone is connected and Bluetooth® is ∙ Recent Calls
PHONE SYSTEM VOICE set to “On”, the following voice commands
The system prompts for an additional
are available:
COMMANDS command. Say “Missed Calls”, “Incom-
∙ Call (a name) ing Calls” or “Outgoing Calls” to display
To access the Bluetooth® Hands-Free a list of such calls on the screen.
Phone System voice commands: Speak the name of the contact in
which you are trying to call. System will Speak the number of the entry dis-
1. Press the button. confirm correct contact. Say “Dial” to played on the screen to dial that num-
2. Say “Call” and then a name in the ve- initiate dialing. ber or say “Next Page” to view entries
hicle phonebook to call that entry. Oth- on the next page (if available).
∙ Dial Number
erwise, say “Phone” to access various ∙ Redial
phone commands. Allows for up to 24 digits to be dialed.
After the number is entered, say “Dial” Redials the last called number.
If the Bluetooth® has been set to “Off”, the
system announces: “Bluetooth® is off. to initiate dialing. Say “Correction” to ∙ Read Text
Would you like to turn Bluetooth® on?” correct the number entered. Say “Go
Back” to return to the main menu. Reads an incoming text message.
If no phone is connected to the system and ∙ Send Text
the vehicle is stationary, the system an- ∙ List Phonebook
nounces: “There is no phone connected. Sends a text message.
Starting with the first alphabetical en-
Would you like to connect a phone now?” try in the vehicle phonebook, the sys- ∙ Select Phone
Say “Yes” to connect a phone. All further tem prompts for an additional com- The system replies “Please use manual
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System mand. Say “Dial” to call the number of controls to continue”. Use manual con-
voice commands are only available if a the phonebook entry. Say “Send Text” trols to change the active phone from
phone is connected. to send a text message to the number among the listed phones connected
of the phonebook entry. Say “Next En- to the vehicle.
try” to skip to the next alphabetical en-
try in the vehicle phonebook, where ∙ Siri (if so equipped)
the same options will then be available. The system replies “starting Siri”. For
additional information, refer to “Siri®
Eyes Free (models with Navigation Sys-
tem)” in this section.
For additional information, refer to 3. Speak a command from the following For additional information, refer to “Audio
“Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System available commands: system” in this section.
with Navigation System” in this section.
∙ Play (AM, FM, etc.) INFORMATION VOICE COMMANDS
NAVIGATION SYSTEM VOICE Allows user to select radio band The following voice commands are avail-
COMMANDS able for the information functions of the
∙ Tune AM (number)
navigation system:
The following voice commands are avail- Allows user to tune directly to a desired
able for the navigation system: AM frequency ∙ Traffic
∙ Street Address (address) ∙ Tune FM (number) ∙ Fuel Prices
∙ Points of Interest (name) Allows user to tune directly to a desired ∙ Stocks
∙ POI by Category FM frequency ∙ Movie Listings
∙ Home ∙ SXM channel (number) ∙ Current Weather
∙ Address Book Allows user to tune directly to a desired ∙ Weather Map

SXM station (if so equipped)
∙ Previous Destinations ∙ 5 — day Forecast
∙ CD Track (number)
∙ Enter Address in Steps ∙ 6 — hour Forecast
Allows user to select track to be played
∙ Cancel Route For additional information, refer to the
∙ Play Song (name) separate NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual.
For additional information, refer to the Allows user to select song name to be
separate NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual. played
AUDIO SYSTEM VOICE COMMANDS ∙ Play Artist (name)
To access the audio system voice commands: Allows user to select artist to be played
1. Press the button. ∙ Play Album (name)
2. Say “Audio” Allows user to select album name to
be played
MY APPS VOICE COMMANDS HELP VOICE COMMANDS TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Many Apps can be accessed using this The following voice commands can be The system should respond correctly to all
voice command. For additional informa- spoken to have the system provide in- voice commands without difficulty. If prob-
tion, refer to “NissanConnect® Mobile Apps” structions and tips for using the NISSAN lems are encountered, follow the solutions
in this section. Voice Recognition System. given in this guide for the appropriate error.
∙ List Commands Where the solutions are listed by number,
try each solution in turn, starting with num-
∙ What Can I Say? ber one, until the problem is resolved.
∙ General Help
∙ Go Back
∙ Quit
∙ Exit
Symptom/error message Solution
The system responds “Command 1. Ensure that the command format is valid. Use the “List Commands” or “What Can I Say?” command under the “Help”
Not Recognized” or the system fails menu.
to recognize the command 2. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level.
correctly. 3. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, with the windows open or the defroster on).
NOTE:
If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that voice commands will not be recognized.
4. If optional words of the command have been omitted, then the command should be tried with these in place.

5 Starting and driving
Precautions when starting and driving . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Automatic transmission (A/T)

Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Three-way catalyst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Manual transmission (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 5-19
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
(TPMS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
On-pavement and off-road driving Precautions on cruise control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Cruise control operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Avoiding collision and rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Off-road recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Fuel efficient driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Rapid air pressure loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Increasing fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Using 4–Wheel Drive (4WD)
Driving safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Ignition switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11 Transfer case shifting procedures . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Automatic transmission Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock)
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11 system (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
Manual transmission (M/T) Parking/parking on hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Key positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Brake system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System Brake precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Active Brake Limited Slip (ABLS) system. . . . . . . . . 5-37
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system . . . . . . . . . 5-38
Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 Brake force distribution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
Hill descent control system (if so equipped) . . . . . 5-41 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
Hill start assist system (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 5-42 Draining of coolant water. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
Rear Sonar System (RSS) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . 5-42 Tire equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43 Special winter equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
Freeing a frozen door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43 Driving on snow or ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43 Engine block heater (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 5-45
PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING ∙ If you suspect that exhaust fumes are ∙ The exhaust system and body should
entering the vehicle, drive with all be inspected by a qualified mechanic
windows fully open, and have the ve- whenever:
hicle inspected immediately.
tance of others alone in your vehicle. a. The vehicle is raised for service.
Pets should also not be left alone. ∙ Do not run the engine in closed spaces
b. You suspect that exhaust fumes
They could accidentally injure them- such as a garage.
are entering into the passenger
∙ Do not park the vehicle with the en- compartment.
gine running for any extended length
sunny days, temperatures in a closed c. You notice a change in the sound of
of time.
vehicle could quickly become high the exhaust system.
enough to cause severe or possibly ∙ Keep the rear vent windows, liftgates,
d. You have had an accident involving
fatal injuries to people or animals. doors and trunk lids (if so equipped)
damage to the exhaust system,
closed while driving, otherwise ex-
∙ Properly secure all cargo with ropes or underbody, or rear of the vehicle.
haust gases could be drawn into the
straps to help prevent it from sliding ∙ If a special body, camper, or other
passenger compartment. If you must
or shifting. Do not place cargo higher equipment is added for recreational
drive with one of these open, follow
than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or other usage, follow the manufac-
these precautions:
or collision, unsecured cargo could turer’s recommendation to prevent
cause personal injury. 1. Open all the windows.
carbon monoxide entry into the ve-
EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide) 2. Set the air recirculation but- hicle. Do not occupy these areas while
ton to off and the fan control dial to the engine is running even if the ve-
high to circulate the air. hicle is parked. Some recreational ve-
WARNING
hicle appliances such as stoves, re-
∙ Do not breathe exhaust gases; they ∙ If electrical wiring or other cable con- frigerators, heaters, etc. may also
contain colorless and odorless carbon nections must pass to a trailer generate carbon monoxide.
monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dan- through the seal on the liftgate or the
gerous. It can cause unconsciousness body, follow the manufacturer’s rec-
or death. ommendation to prevent carbon
monoxide entry into the vehicle.
5-2 Starting and driving

THREE-WAY CATALYST ∙ Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc- placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
The three-way catalyst is an emission con- tions in the ignition, fuel injection, or should determine the proper tire inflation
trol device installed in the exhaust system. electrical systems can cause overrich pressure for those tires.)
Exhaust gases in the three-way catalyst fuel flow into the three-way catalyst, As an added safety feature, your vehicle
are burned at high temperatures to help causing it to overheat. Do not keep has been equipped with a Tire Pressure
reduce pollutants. driving if the engine misfires, or if no- Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates
ticeable loss of performance or other a low tire pressure telltale when one or
WARNING unusual operating conditions are de-
more of your tires is significantly under-
tected. Have the vehicle inspected
∙ The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys- inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire
promptly. It is recommended that you
tem are very hot. Keep people, ani- visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. pressure telltale illuminates, you should
mals or flammable materials away stop and check your tires as soon as pos-
from the exhaust system ∙ Avoid driving with an extremely low sible, and inflate them to the proper pres-
components. fuel level. Running out of fuel could sure. Driving on a significantly under-
cause the engine to misfire, damag- inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
∙ Do not stop or park the vehicle over ing the three-way catalyst.
flammable materials such as dry can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
grass, waste paper or rags. They may ∙ Do not race the engine while warming reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
ignite and cause a fire. it up. and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
∙ Do not push or tow your vehicle to stopping ability.
CAUTION start the engine. Please note that the TPMS is not a substi-
∙ Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits tute for proper tire maintenance, and it is
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING the driver’s responsibility to maintain cor-
from leaded gasoline will seriously re-
duce the three-way catalyst’s ability SYSTEM (TPMS) rect tire pressure, even if under-inflation
to help reduce exhaust pollutants. has not reached the level to trigger illumi-
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
nation of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recom- Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
mended by the vehicle manufacturer on TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure when the system is not operating properly.
label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different The TPMS malfunction indicator is com-
size than the size indicated on the vehicle bined with the low tire pressure telltale.
Starting and driving 5-3
When the system detects a malfunction, ∙ The low tire pressure warning light does ∙ The CHECK TIRE PRES warning is not
the telltale will flash for approximately not automatically turn off when the tire displayed if the low tire pressure warn-
1 minute and then remain continuously illu- pressure of your tires are adjusted. After ing light illuminates to indicate a TPMS
minated. This sequence will continue upon the tires are inflated to the recom- malfunction.
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as mended pressure, the vehicle must be
∙ The CHECK TIRE PRES warning appears
the malfunction exists. When the malfunc- driven at speeds above 16 mph
each time the ignition switch is placed
tion indicator is illuminated, the system (25 km/h) to activate the TPMS and turn
in the ON position as long as the low tire
may not be able to detect or signal low tire off the low tire pressure warning light.
pressure warning light remains illumi-
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions Use a tire pressure gauge to check the
nated.
may occur for a variety of reasons, includ- tire pressure.
ing the installation of replacement or alter- ∙ Tire pressure rises and falls depending
∙ The CHECK TIRE PRES (pressure) warn- on the heat caused by the vehicle’s op-
nate tires or wheels on the vehicle that
ing message is displayed in the odom- eration and the outside temperature.
prevent the TPMS from functioning prop-
eter when the low tire pressure warning Do not reduce the tire pressure after
erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
light is illuminated and low tire pressure driving because the tire pressure rises
telltale after replacing one or more tires or
is detected. The CHECK TIRE PRES warn- after driving. Low outside temperature
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
ing message turns off when the low tire can lower the temperature of the air
replacement or alternate tires and wheels
pressure warning light turns off. The low inside the tire which can cause a lower
allow the TPMS to continue to function
tire pressure warning light remains illu- tire inflation pressure. This may cause
properly.
minated until the tires are inflated to the the low tire pressure warning light to
Additional information: recommended COLD tire pressure. The illuminate. If the warning light illumi-
CHECK TIRE PRES warning message is nates, check the tire pressure for all four
∙ When replacing a wheel without the
displayed each time the ignition switch tires.
TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS
does not monitor the tire pressure of is placed in the ON position as long as ∙ The Tire and Loading Information label
the spare tire. the low tire pressure warning light re- is located in the driver’s door opening.
mains illuminated. For additional infor-
∙ The TPMS will activate only when the ve- mation, refer to “Check tire pressure For additional information, refer to “Low tire
hicle is driven at speeds above 16 mph warning message” in the “Instruments pressure warning light” in the “Instruments
(25 km/h). Also, this system may not de- and controls” section and “Tire Pressure
and controls” section of this manual.
tect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “In case of
example, a flat tire while driving). emergency” section of this manual.
WARNING ∙ When replacing a wheel without the Some devices and transmitters may tem-
TPMS such as the spare tire, when a porarily interfere with the operation of the
∙ Radio waves could adversely affect TPMS and cause the low tire pressure
spare tire is mounted or a wheel is
electric medical equipment. Those warning light to illuminate.
replaced, the TPMS will not function
and the low tire pressure warning Some examples are:
light will flash for approximately
manufacturer for the possible influ- ∙ Facilities or electric devices using simi-
1 minute. The light will remain on after
ences before use. lar radio frequencies are near the ve-
1 minute. Have your tires replaced
∙ If the low tire pressure warning light and/or TPMS system reset as soon as hicle.
illuminates while driving, avoid sudden possible. It is recommended that you ∙ If a transmitter set to similar frequen-
steering maneuvers or abrupt braking, visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. cies is being used in or near the vehicle.
reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road
∙ Replacing tires with those not origi- ∙ If a computer (or similar equipment) or
to a safe location and stop the vehicle
nally specified by NISSAN could affect a DC/AC converter is being used in or
as soon as possible. Driving with under-
the proper operation of the TPMS. near the vehicle.
inflated tires may permanently dam-
age the tires and increase the likeli- ∙ Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol The low tire pressure warning light may
hood of tire failure. Serious vehicle tire sealant into the tires, as this may illuminate in the following cases:
damage could occur and may lead to cause a malfunction of the tire pres-
an accident and could result in serious sure sensors. ∙ If the vehicle is equipped with a wheel
personal injury. Check the tire pressure and tire without TPMS.
for all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure CAUTION ∙ If the TPMS has been replaced and the
to the recommended COLD tire pres- ID has not been registered.
sure shown on the Tire and Loading In- Do not place metalized film or any
formation label to turn the low tire metal parts (antenna, etc.) on the win- ∙ If the wheel is not originally specified by
pressure warning light off. If you have a dows. This may cause poor reception of NISSAN.
flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as the signals from the tire pressure sen-
soon as possible. For additional infor- sors, and the TPMS will not function
mation, refer to “Flat tire” in the “In case properly.
of emergency” section of this manual
for changing a flat tire.

FCC Notice: ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD AVOIDING COLLISION AND
For USA: DRIVING PRECAUTIONS ROLLOVER
This device complies with Part 15 of the Utility vehicles have a significantly
higher rollover rate than other types of WARNING
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) This device vehicles. Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe
may not cause harmful interference, and and prudent manner may result in loss
They have higher ground clearance than
(2) this device must accept any interfer- of control or an accident.
passenger cars to make them capable of
ence received, including interference performing in a variety of on-pavement
that may cause undesired operation. Be alert and drive defensively at all times.
and off-road applications. This gives them Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive
a higher center of gravity than ordinary ve- speed, high speed cornering, or sudden
NOTE:
hicles. An advantage of higher ground steering maneuvers, because these driving
Changes or modifications not expressly clearance is a better view of the road, allow- practices could cause you to lose control of
approved by the party responsible for ing you to anticipate problems. However,
your vehicle.
compliance could void the user’s author- they are not designed for cornering at the
ity to operate the equipment. same speeds as conventional 2-Wheel As with any vehicle, loss of control could
Drive vehicles any more than low-slung result in a collision with other vehicles or
For Canada: sports cars are designed to perform satis- objects or cause the vehicle to roll over,
This device complies with Industry factorily under off-road conditions. If at all particularly if the loss of control causes
Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). possible, avoid sharp turns at high speeds. the vehicle to slide sideways.
Operation is subject to the following two As with other vehicles of this type, failure to
conditions: (1) this device may not cause operate this vehicle correctly may result in Be attentive at all times, and avoid driving
interference, and (2) this device must ac- loss of control or vehicle rollover. In a roll- when tired. Never drive when under the in-
cept any interference, including interfer- over crash, an unbelted person is signifi- fluence of alcohol or drugs (including pre-
ence that may cause undesired opera- cantly more likely to die than a person scription or over-the-counter drugs which
tion of the device. wearing a seat belt. may cause drowsiness). Always wear your
For additional information, refer to “Driving seat belt as outlined in the “Safety – Seats,
safety precautions” in this section. seat belts and supplemental restraint sys-
tem” section of this manual, and also in-
struct your passengers to do so.

Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in 5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by
collisions and rollovers. In a rollover crash, vehicle to follow the road while vehicle maintaining the correct air pressure and
an unbelted or improperly belted person speed is reduced. Do not attempt to visually inspecting the tires for wear and
is significantly more likely to be injured drive the vehicle back onto the road damage. For additional information, refer
or killed than a person properly wearing surface until vehicle speed is reduced. to “Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself”
a seat belt. section of this manual. If a tire rapidly loses
6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn
air pressure or “blows-out” while driving,
OFF-ROAD RECOVERY the steering wheel until both tires re-
maintain control of the vehicle by following
turn to the road surface. When all tires
While driving, the right side or left side the procedure below. Please note that this
are on the road surface, steer the ve-
wheels may unintentionally leave the road procedure is only a general guide. The ve-
hicle to stay in the appropriate driving
surface. If this occurs, maintain control of hicle must be driven as appropriate based
lane.
the vehicle by following the procedure be- on the conditions of the vehicle, road and
low. Please note that this procedure is only ∙ If you decide that it is not safe to re- traffic.
a general guide. The vehicle must be driven turn the vehicle to the road surface
as appropriate based on the conditions of based on vehicle, road or traffic con- WARNING
the vehicle, road and traffic. ditions, gradually slow the vehicle to a
The following actions can increase the
stop in a safe place off the road.
1. Remain calm and do not overreact. chance of losing control of the vehicle if
RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS there is a sudden loss of tire air pres-
2. Do not apply the brakes. sure. Losing control of the vehicle may
Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can cause a collision and result in personal
3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering
occur if the tire is punctured or is damaged injury.
wheel with both hands and try to hold a
due to hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air
straight course. ∙ The vehicle generally moves or pulls
pressure loss can also be caused by driving
4. When appropriate, slowly release the on under-inflated tires. in the direction of the flat tire.
accelerator pedal to gradually slow the ∙ Do not rapidly apply the brakes.
Rapid air pressure loss can affect the han-
vehicle.
dling and stability of the vehicle, especially ∙ Do not rapidly release the accelerator
at highway speeds. pedal.
∙ Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel.

1. Remain calm and do not overreact. DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND drive if your ability to operate your vehicle is
DRIVING impaired by alcohol, drugs, or some other
2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering
physical condition.
wheel with both hands and try to hold a
straight course. WARNING DRIVING SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
3. When appropriate, slowly release the Never drive under the influence of alco- Your NISSAN is designed for both normal
accelerator pedal to gradually slow the hol or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream
and off-road use. However, avoid driving in
vehicle. reduces coordination, delays reaction
deep water or mud as your NISSAN is
time and impairs judgement. Driving
4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe after drinking alcohol increases the mainly designed for leisure use, unlike a
location off the road and away from likelihood of being involved in an acci- conventional off-road vehicle.
traffic if possible. dent injuring yourself and others. Addi- Remember that 2-Wheel Drive models are
tionally, if you are injured in an accident, less capable than 4–Wheel Drive (4WD)
5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradu- alcohol can increase the severity of the
ally stop the vehicle. models for rough road driving and extrica-
injury. tion when stuck in deep snow or mud, or
6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers NISSAN is committed to safe driving. How- the like.
and contact a roadside emergency ever, you must choose not to drive under
service to change the tire. For addi- Please observe the following precautions:
the influence of alcohol. Every year thou-
tional information, refer to “Changing a sands of people are injured or killed in
flat tire” in the “In case of emergency” WARNING
alcohol-related collisions. Although the lo-
section of this manual. cal laws vary on what is considered to be ∙ Drive carefully when off the road and
legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol avoid dangerous areas. Every person
who drives or rides in this vehicle
affects all people differently and most
should be seated with their seat belt
people underestimate the effects of alco-
fastened. This will keep you and your
hol. passengers in position when driving
Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix! over rough terrain.
That is true for drugs (over-the-counter,
prescription) and illegal drugs, too. Don’t

∙ Do not drive across steep slopes. In- ∙ If your engine stalls or you cannot ∙ To avoid raising the center of gravity
stead drive either straight up or make it to the top of a steep hill, never excessively, do not exceed the rated
straight down the slopes. Off-road ve- attempt to turn around. Your vehicle capacity of the roof rack (if so
hicles can tip over sideways much could tip or roll over. Always back equipped) and evenly distribute the
more easily than they can forward or straight down in R (Reverse) gear. load. Secure heavy loads in the cargo
backward. Never back down in N (Neutral) or with area as far forward and as low as pos-
the clutch depressed (manual trans- sible. Do not equip the vehicle with
∙ Many hills are too steep for any ve-
mission vehicles), using only the tires larger than specified in this
hicle. If you drive up them, you may
brake, as this could cause loss of manual. This could cause your vehicle
stall. If you drive down them, you may
control. to roll over.
not be able to control your speed. If
you drive across them, you may roll ∙ Heavy braking going down a hill could ∙ Do not grip the inside or spokes of the
over. cause your brakes to overheat and steering wheel when driving off-road.
fade, resulting in loss of control and The steering wheel could move sud-
∙ Do not shift gears while driving on
an accident. Apply brakes lightly and denly and injure your hands. Instead
downhill grades as this could cause
use a low gear to control your speed. drive with your fingers and thumbs on
loss of control of the vehicle.
Use the hill descent control feature (if the outside of the rim.
∙ Stay alert when driving to the top of a so equipped).
∙ Before operating the vehicle, ensure
hill. At the top there could be a drop-
∙ Unsecured cargo can be thrown that the driver and all passengers
off or other hazard that could cause
around when driving over rough ter- have their seat belts fastened.
an accident.
rain. Properly secure all cargo so it will
∙ Always drive with the floor mats in
not be thrown forward and cause in-
place as the floor may become hot.
jury to you or your passengers.
∙ Lower your speed when encountering
strong crosswinds. With a higher cen-
ter of gravity, your NISSAN is more af-
fected by strong side winds. Slower
speeds ensure better vehicle control.

∙ Do not drive beyond the performance ∙ Accelerating quickly, sharp steering ∙ Whenever you drive off-road through
capability of the tires, even with 4WD maneuvers or sudden braking may sand, mud or water as deep as the
engaged (if so equipped). cause loss of control. wheel hub, more frequent mainte-
nance may be required. For additional
∙ For 4WD equipped vehicles, do not at- ∙ If at all possible, avoid sharp turning
information, refer to “Maintenance
tempt to raise two wheels off the maneuvers, particularly at high
under severe operating conditions” in
ground and shift the transmission to speeds. Your NISSAN 4WD vehicle has
the “Maintenance and schedules” sec-
any drive or reverse position with the a higher center of gravity than a pas-
engine running. Doing so may result senger car. The vehicle is not de-
in drivetrain damage or unexpected signed for cornering at the same
vehicle movement which could result speeds as passenger cars. Failure to
in serious vehicle damage or personal operate this vehicle correctly could
injury. result in loss of control and/or a roll-
over accident.
∙ Do not attempt to test a 4WD
equipped vehicle on a 2-wheel dyna- ∙ Always use tires of the same type,
mometer (such as the dynamometers size, brand, construction (bias, bias-
used by some states for emissions belted, or radial), and tread pattern on
testing), or similar equipment even if all four wheels. Install tire chains on
the other two wheels are raised off the the rear wheels when driving on slip-
ground. Make sure you inform test fa- pery roads and drive carefully.
cility personnel that your vehicle is
∙ Be sure to check the brakes immedi-
equipped with 4WD before it is placed
ately after driving in mud or water. For
on a dynamometer. Using the wrong
additional information, refer to “Wet
test equipment may result in drive-
brakes” in this section.
train damage or unexpected vehicle
movement which could result in seri- ∙ Avoid parking your vehicle on steep
ous vehicle damage or personal hills. If you get out of the vehicle and it
injury. rolls forward, backward or sideways,
you could be injured.

IGNITION SWITCH
WARNING To remove the key from the ignition switch:
∙ Never remove the ignition key or place 1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) posi-
the ignition switch in the LOCK position with the ignition switch in the ON
tion while driving. The steering wheel position.
will lock (for models with a steering 2. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK
lock mechanism). This may cause the position.
driver to lose control of the vehicle
and could result in serious vehicle 3. Remove the key from the ignition.
damage or personal injury. If the shift lever is moved to the P (Park)
position after the ignition switch is placed
in the OFF position or when the ignition
switch cannot be turned to the LOCK posi-
tion, proceed as follows to remove the key.
WSD0041
1. Move the shift lever into the P (Park)
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (if so position.
equipped)
2. Turn the ignition key slightly toward the
The ignition lock is designed so the ignition ON position.
switch cannot be placed in the LOCK posi-
3. Turn the key to the LOCK position.
tion and the key removed until the shift
lever is moved to the P (Park) position. 4. Remove the key.
When removing the key from the ignition, The shift lever is designed so it cannot be
make sure the shift lever is in the P (Park) moved out of P (Park) and into any of the
position. other gear positions if the ignition key is
placed in the OFF position or if the key is
If the shift lever is not returned to P (Park)
removed from the switch.
position, the ignition switch cannot be
placed in the LOCK position. The shift lever can be moved if the igni-
tion switch is in the ON position and the
foot brake pedal is depressed.
There is an OFF position between the KEY POSITIONS
LOCK and ON positions. The OFF position
is indicated by a “1” on the ignition LOCK: Normal parking position (0)
switch. When the ignition is in the OFF OFF: (Not used) (1)
position, the steering wheel is not locked
(for models with a steering lock mecha- ACC: (Accessories) (2)
nism). This position activates electrical accesso-
In order for the steering wheel to be locked, ries such as the radio when the engine is
it must be turned about 1/8 of a turn clock- not running.
wise from the straight up position. ON: Normal operating position (3)
To lock the steering wheel, turn the key This position turns on the ignition system
to the LOCK position. Remove the key. To and the electrical accessories.
unlock the steering wheel, insert the key
and turn it gently while rotating the WSD0052 START: (4)
steering wheel slightly right and left. This position starts the engine. As soon as
MANUAL TRANSMISSION (M/T) (if
If the key will not turn from the LOCK so equipped) the engine has started, release the key. It
position, turn the steering wheel to the automatically returns to the ON position.
left or right while turning the key to un- The ignition switch includes a device that
lock the key cylinder. helps prevent accidental removal of the NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
key while driving. SYSTEM (if so equipped)
The key can only be removed when the The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
ignition switch is in the LOCK position. will not allow the engine to start without
the use of the registered key.
On M/T models, to turn the ignition switch
to the LOCK position from the ACC or ON
position, place the ignition switch in the
OFF position, push the key in, then place the
ignition switch in the LOCK position.

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE STARTING THE ENGINE
If the engine fails to start using a registered ∙ Make sure the area around the vehicle is 1. Apply the parking brake.
key (for example, when interference is clear.
caused by another registered key, an auto- 2. Automatic transmission:
∙ Check fluid levels such as engine oil,
mated toll road device or automatic pay- Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N
coolant, brake and clutch fluid (if so
ment device on the key ring), restart the (Neutral). P (Park) is recommended.
equipped), and windshield-washer fluid
engine using the following procedures:
as frequently as possible, or at least The shift lever cannot be moved out
1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON po- whenever you refuel. of the P (Park) position and into any
sition for approximately 5 seconds. of the other gear positions if the ig-
∙ Check that all windows and lights are
2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or clean. nition switch is placed in the OFF po-
LOCK position, and wait approximately sition or if the key is removed from
∙ Visually inspect tires for their appear-
10 seconds. the ignition switch.
ance and condition. Also check tires for
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2. proper inflation. The starter is designed not to oper-
4. Restart the engine while holding the ∙ Check that all doors are closed. ate if the shift lever is in any of the
device (which may have caused the in- driving positions.
∙ Position seat and adjust head
terference) separate from the regis- Manual transmission:
restraints/headrests.
tered key.
∙ Adjust inside and outside mirrors. Move the shift lever to N (Neutral). De-
If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN press the clutch pedal to the floor
recommends placing the registered key on ∙ Fasten the seat belt and ask all passen- while cranking the engine.
a separate key ring to avoid interference gers to do likewise.
from other devices. The starter is designed not to oper-
∙ Check the operation of warning lights ate unless the clutch pedal is fully
when the key is placed in the ON posi-
depressed.
tion. For additional information, refer to
“Warning lights, indicator lights and au- 3. Crank the engine with your foot off
dible reminders” in the “Instruments the accelerator pedal by placing the
and controls” section of this manual. ignition switch in the START position.
Release the key when the engine
starts. If the engine starts, but fails to
run, repeat the above procedure.
DRIVING THE VEHICLE
∙ If the engine is very hard to start in 4. Allow the engine to idle for at least AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (A/T)
extremely cold weather or when re- 30 seconds after starting. Do not race (if so equipped)
starting, depress the accelerator the engine while warming it up. Drive at
pedal a little (approximately 1/3 to the a moderate speed for a short distance
floor) and hold it and then crank the first, especially in cold weather.
WARNING
engine. Release the key and the ac- ∙ Do not depress the accelerator pedal
celerator pedal when the engine NOTE: while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu-
starts. tral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive), 3, 2 or 1.
Care should be taken to avoid situations
Always depress the brake pedal until
∙ If the engine is very hard to start be- that can lead to potential battery dis-
shifting is completed. Failure to do so
cause it is flooded, depress the accel- charge and potential no-start conditions
could cause you to lose control and
erator pedal all the way to the floor such as:
have an accident.
and hold it. Crank the engine for
1. Installation or extended use of elec-
5-6 seconds. After cranking the en- ∙ Cold engine idle speed is high, so use
tronic accessories that consume bat-
gine, release the accelerator pedal. caution when shifting into a forward
tery power when the engine is not
Crank the engine with your foot off or reverse gear before the engine has
running (phone chargers, GPS, DVD
the accelerator pedal by placing the warmed up.
players, etc.).
ignition in the START position. Re- ∙ Never shift to either the P (Park) or R
lease the key when the engine starts. 2. The vehicle is not driven regularly (Reverse) position while the vehicle is
If the engine starts, but fails to run, and/or only driven short distances. moving forward and P (Park) or D
repeat the above procedure. (Drive) position while the vehicle is re-
In these cases, the battery may need to
be charged to maintain battery health. versing. This could cause an accident
CAUTION or damage the transmission.
Do not operate the starter for more ∙ Except in an emergency, do not shift
than 15 seconds at a time. If the engine to the N (Neutral) position while driv-
does not start, turn the key off and wait ing. Coasting with the transmission in
10 seconds before cranking again, oth- the N (Neutral) position may cause se-
erwise the starter could be damaged. rious damage to the transmission.

∙ Do not downshift abruptly on slippery Starting the vehicle
roads. This may cause a loss of 1. After starting the engine, fully depress
control. the foot brake pedal before moving the
shift lever out of the P (Park) position.
CAUTION
2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed
∙ Except in an emergency, do not shift and move the shift lever into a driving
to the N (Neutral) position while driv- gear.
ing. Coasting with the transmission in
the N (Neutral) position may cause se- 3. Release the foot brake, then gradually
rious damage to the transmission. start the vehicle in motion.
∙ To avoid possible damage to your ve- The automatic transmission is designed
hicle, when stopping the vehicle on an so the foot brake pedal MUST be de-
uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle by pressed before shifting from P (Park) to
depressing the accelerator pedal. The any drive position while the ignition LSD0151
foot brake should be used for this switch is in the ON position. To move the shift lever:
purpose. The shift lever cannot be moved out of Press the button while depressing
The A/T in your vehicle is electronically con- the P (Park) position and into any of the
the brake pedal
trolled to produce maximum power and other gear positions if the ignition
switch is placed in the LOCK or OFF posi- Press the button to shift
smooth operation.
tion. Shift without depressing the brake
The recommended operating procedures pedal
for this transmission are shown on the fol-
lowing pages. Follow these procedures for Shifting
maximum vehicle performance and driv- After starting the engine, fully depress the
ing enjoyment. brake pedal and move the shift lever out of
the P (Park) position.

WARNING The brake pedal should be depressed to D (Drive)
move the shift lever from N (Neutral) or
Apply the parking brake if the shift lever Use this position for all normal forward
any drive position to P (Park). driving.
is in any position while the engine is not
running. Failure to do so could cause Apply the parking brake. When parking on a 3 (Third gear)
the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll hill, apply the parking brake first, then move
away and result in serious personal in- the shift lever into the P (Park) position. Use this position for driving up and down
jury or property damage. long slopes where engine braking would
R (Reverse) be advantageous.
If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF
CAUTION Do not downshift into the 3 position at
position for any reason while the vehicle is
speeds over the following and do not ex-
in N (Neutral), or any D (Drive) position, the To prevent transmission damage, use ceed the following speeds in the 3 position.
ignition switch cannot be placed in the the R (Reverse) position only when the
LOCK position and the key cannot be re- vehicle is completely stopped. 2WD:
moved from the ignition switch. Move the 99 mph (160 km/h)
shift lever to the P (Park) position, then the Use the R (Reverse) position to back up.
ignition switch can be placed in the LOCK Make sure the vehicle is completely 4H:
position. stopped before selecting the R (Reverse)
93 mph (150 km/h)
position. The brake pedal must be de-
P (Park) pressed to move the shift lever from P 4LO:
(Park), N (Neutral) or any drive position to 34 mph (55 km/h)
CAUTION R (Reverse).
To prevent transmission damage, use 2 (Second gear)
N (Neutral)
the P (Park) position only when the ve- Use this position for hill climbing or engine
hicle is completely stopped. Neither forward nor reverse gear is en- braking on downhill grades.
gaged. The engine can be started in this
Use the P (Park) shift lever position when position. You may shift to N (Neutral) and Do not downshift into the 2 position at
the vehicle is parked or when starting the restart a stalled engine while the vehicle is speeds over the following and do not ex-
engine. Make sure the vehicle is completely moving. ceed the following speeds in the 2 position.
stopped.

2WD: To push the shift lock release, complete the
following procedure:
62 mph (100 km/h)
4H: 1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK
position and remove the key.
59 mph (95 km/h)
2. Apply the parking brake.
4LO:
3. Remove the shift lock release cover as
21 mph (35 km/h) shown.
1 (Low gear) 4. Use a protective cloth on the tip of a
Use this position when climbing steep hills small screwdriver before inserting it in
slowly or slow driving through deep snow, the shift lock release slot and pushing
sand or mud, or for maximum engine brak- down.
ing on steep downhill grades.
LSD0141 5. Move the shift lever to the N (Neutral)
Do not downshift into the 1 position at Shift lock release position while holding down the shift
speeds over the following and do not ex- lock release.
ceed the following speeds in the 1 position. If the battery is discharged, the shift lever
may not be moved from the P (Park) posi- 6. Place the ignition switch in the ON po-
2WD: sition to unlock the steering wheel (for
tion even with the brake pedal depressed.
37 mph (60 km/h) models with a steering lock mecha-
To move the shift lever, release the shift nism).
4H: lock. The shift lever can be moved to N
(Neutral). However, the steering wheel will 7. Now the vehicle may be moved to the
37 mph (60 km/h) be locked unless the ignition switch is desired location.
4LO: placed in the ON position (for models with a
If the shift lever cannot be moved out of P
steering lock mechanism). This allows the
12 mph (20 km/h) vehicle to be moved if the battery is dis- (Park), have the automatic transmission
charged. system checked as soon as possible. It is

WARNING Overdrive does not engage until the en-
gine has reached operating tempera-
If the shift lever cannot be moved from ture.
the P (Park) position while the engine is OFF: For driving up and down long
running and the brake pedal is de-
pressed, the stop lights may not work. slopes where engine braking is
Malfunctioning stop lights could cause necessary push the O/D off
an accident injuring yourself and switch once. The Overdrive OFF
others. indicator light in the instrument
panel comes on at this time.
Accelerator downshift
When cruising at a low speed or climbing a
— in D (Drive) position — gentle slope, you may feel uncomfortable
For passing or hill climbing, depress the shift shocks as the transmission shifts into
accelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts and out of overdrive repeatedly. In this
the transmission down into a lower gear, WSD0045 case, depress the overdrive switch to turn
depending on the vehicle speed. Overdrive (O/D) OFF switch the overdrive off. The Overdrive OFF indica-
tor light in the instrument panel comes on
Each time your vehicle is started, the trans- at this time.
mission is automatically “reset” to overdrive
ON. When driving conditions change, depress
the O/D off switch to turn the overdrive on.
ON: With the engine running and
the shift lever in the D (Drive) Remember not to drive at high speeds for
extended periods of time with the over-
position, the transmission up- drive off. This reduces fuel economy.
shifts into overdrive as vehicle
speed increases.

MANUAL TRANSMISSION (if so
equipped)
WARNING
∙ Do not downshift abruptly on slippery
roads. This may cause a loss of
control.
∙ Do not over-rev the engine when
shifting to a lower gear. This may
cause a loss of control or engine
damage.
CAUTION
WSD0154 LSD0148
∙ Do not rest your foot on the clutch 5 - speed 6 - speed
pedal while driving. This may cause Start the vehicle in 1st gear and shift to 2nd,
clutch damage. Shifting
3rd, 4th, 5th and 6th (if so equipped) gear in
∙ Fully depress the clutch pedal before To change gears, or when upshifting or sequence according to vehicle speed.
shifting to help prevent transmission downshifting, depress the clutch pedal
fully, shift into the appropriate gear, then To back up, depress the shift lever and then
damage. move it to the R (Reverse) position after
release the clutch slowly and smoothly.
∙ Stop your vehicle completely before stopping the vehicle completely.
shifting into R (Reverse). To ensure smooth gear changes, fully de-
On the 5-speed manual transmission
∙ When the vehicle is stopped with the press the clutch pedal before operating the model, you cannot shift directly from the
engine running (for example, at a stop shift lever. If the clutch pedal is not fully 5th gear into R (Reverse). First shift into N
light), shift to N (Neutral) and release depressed before the transmission is (Neutral), then in to R (Reverse) after stop-
the clutch pedal with the foot brake shifted, a gear noise may be heard. Trans- ping the vehicle completely.
applied. mission damage could occur.

If it is difficult to move the shift lever into R ∙ For VQ40DE 4-Wheel Drive models and Allowable maximum speed in each gear:
(Reverse) or 1st, shift into N (Neutral), then 4-Wheel Drive models (2H and 4H posi-
release the clutch pedal. Fully depress the tion): 2–Wheel Drive models (QR25DE engine)
clutch pedal again and shift into R (Re- GEAR mph (km/h)
GEAR CHANGE mph (km/h)
verse) or 1st. 1st 34 (54)
1st to 2nd 11 (17)
If your vehicle is equipped with 4-wheel 2nd to 3rd 17 (27) 2nd 58 (94)
drive, refer to “Transfer case shifting proce- 3rd to 4th 25 (40)
3rd 89 (144)
dures” in this section. 4th to 5th 32 (51)
5th to 6th 45 (72) 4th —
Suggested up-shift speeds 5th —
Suggested maximum speed in
The following are suggested vehicle 2–Wheel Drive models (VQ40DE engine)
speeds for shifting into a higher gear. each gear
These suggestions relate to fuel economy Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is GEAR mph (km/h)
and vehicle performance. Actual upshift not running smoothly, or if you need to ac- 1st 35 (56)
speeds will vary according to road condi- celerate. 2nd 60 (97)
tions, the weather and individual driving
habits. Do not exceed the maximum suggested 3rd 87 (141)
speed (shown below) in any gear. For level 4th —
∙ For QR25DE 2-Wheel Drive models: road driving, use the highest gear sug-
5th —
GEAR CHANGE mph (km/h) gested for that speed. Always observe
1st to 2nd 11 (17) posted speed limits, and drive according to 4–Wheel Drive models (VQ40DE engine)
2nd to 3rd 15 (24) the road conditions, which will ensure safe
operation. Do not over-rev the engine 2H position
3rd to 4th 24 (38)
4th to 5th 35 (56) when shifting to a lower gear as it may GEAR mph (km/h)
cause engine damage or loss of vehicle 1st 33 (54)
control. 2nd 58 (93)
3rd 84 (135)
4th —
5th —
6th —

PARKING BRAKE
4H position WARNING
GEAR mph (km/h)
∙ Be sure the parking brake is fully re-
1st 33 (54)
leased before driving. Failure to do so
2nd 58 (93) can cause brake failure and lead to an
3rd 62 (100) accident.
4th 62 (100)
5th 62 (100) ∙ Do not release the parking brake from
6th 62 (100) outside the vehicle.
4L position ∙ Do not use the shift lever in place of
the parking brake. When parking, be
GEAR mph (km/h) sure the parking brake is fully
1st 12 (20) engaged.
2nd 22 (35)
3rd 31 (50)
4th 31 (50)
through unintended operation of the LSD2755
5th 31(50)
vehicle and/or its systems, do not To engage: Pull the parking brake lever up
6th 31 (50)
䊊A .
tended in your vehicle. Additionally, To release:

the temperature inside a closed ve- 1. Firmly apply the foot brake.
hicle on a warm day can quickly be-
come high enough to cause a signifi- 2. Manual transmission models:
cant risk of injury or death to people
and pets. Place the shift lever in the N (Neutral)
position.
Automatic transmission models:
Move the shift lever to the P (Park) po-
sition.

CRUISE CONTROL
3. While pulling up on the parking brake ∙ If the SET indicator light blinks, turn the
lever slightly, press the button 䊊
B and ON•OFF switch off and have the system
lower the lever completely. checked. It is recommended that you
4. Before driving, be sure the brake warn- visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
ing light goes out. ∙ The SET indicator light may blink when
the ON•OFF switch is turned on while
pushing the ACCEL•RES, COAST•SET, or
CANCEL switch (located on the steering
wheel). To properly set the cruise con-
trol system, use the following proce-
dures.
WARNING
LSD2753 Do not use the cruise control when driv-
PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE ing under the following conditions:
CONTROL ∙ When it is not possible to keep the
vehicle at a set speed.
1. ACCEL•RES switch
∙ In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies
2. COAST•SET switch in speed.
3. CANCEL switch ∙ On winding or hilly roads.
4. ON•OFF switch ∙ On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.).
∙ If the cruise control system malfunc- ∙ In very windy areas.
tions, it cancels automatically. The SET
Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle
indicator light in the instrument panel control and result in an accident.
then blinks to warn the driver.

CAUTION ∙ The vehicle may not maintain the set To reset at a faster cruising speed, use
speed when going up or down steep one of the following three methods:
On manual transmission models, do not hills. If this happens, drive without the
shift into N (Neutral) without depress- ∙ Depress the accelerator pedal. When the
cruise control.
ing the clutch pedal when the cruise vehicle attains the desired speed, push
control is set. Should this occur, depress To cancel the preset speed, use one of the and release the COAST•SET switch.
the clutch pedal and turn the ON•OFF following three methods:
∙ Push and hold the ACCEL•RES switch.
switch off immediately. Failure to do so When the vehicle attains the speed you
∙ Push the CANCEL switch; the SET indi-
may cause engine damage. desire, release the switch.
cator light in the instrument panel goes
CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS out. ∙ Push and release the ACCEL•RES switch.
∙ Tap the brake pedal; the SET indicator Each time you do this, the set speed
The cruise control allows driving at a speed
light goes out. increases by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
between 25 - 89 mph (40 - 144 km/h) with-
out keeping your foot on the accelerator ∙ Turn the ON•OFF switch off. Both the To reset at a slower cruising speed, use
pedal. CRUISE indicator light and SET indicator one of the following three methods:
To turn on the cruise control, push the light in the instrument panel go out. ∙ Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the
ON•OFF switch. The CRUISE indicator light vehicle attains the desired speed, push
The cruise control is automatically can-
in the instrument panel comes on. the COAST•SET switch and release it.
celed and the SET indicator light in the in-
To set cruising speed, accelerate the ve- strument panel goes out if: ∙ Push and hold the COAST•SET switch.
hicle to the desired speed, push the COAST- Release the switch when the vehicle
∙ You depress the brake or clutch pedal (if slows to the desired speed.
•SET switch and release it. The SET indica- so equipped) while pushing the ACCEL-
tor light in the instrument panel comes on. •RES or COAST•SET switch. The preset ∙ Push and release the COAST•SET
Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. speed is deleted from memory. switch. Each time you do this, the set
Your vehicle maintains the set speed. speed decreases by about 1 mph
∙ The vehicle slows down more than (1.6 km/h).
∙ To pass another vehicle, depress the 8 mph (13 km/h) below the set speed.
accelerator pedal. When you release the To resume the preset speed, push and
pedal, the vehicle returns to the previ- ∙ You depress the clutch pedal (manual release the ACCEL•RES switch. The vehicle
ously set speed. transmission), or move the shift lever to returns to the last set cruising speed when
N (Neutral) (automatic transmission). the vehicle speed is over 25 mph (40 km/h).
BREAK-IN SCHEDULE FUEL EFFICIENT DRIVING TIPS
CAUTION Follow these easy-to-use Fuel Efficient ∙ Above 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more
Driving Tips to help you achieve the most efficient to use A/C to cool the vehicle
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km), fuel economy from your vehicle. due to increased aerodynamic drag.
follow these recommendations to ob-
tain maximum engine performance 1. Use Smooth Accelerator and Brake ∙ Recirculating the cool air in the cabin
and ensure the future reliability and Pedal Application when the A/C is on reduces cooling
economy of your new vehicle. Failure to load.
∙ Avoid rapid starts and stops.
follow these recommendations may re- 4. Drive at Economical Speeds and Dis-
sult in shortened engine life and re- ∙ Use smooth, gentle accelerator and tances
duced engine performance. brake application whenever possible.
∙ Observing the speed limit and not
∙ Avoid driving for long periods at con- ∙ Maintain constant speed while com- exceeding 60 mph (97 km/h) (where
stant speed, either fast or slow, and do muting and coast whenever pos- legally allowed) can improve fuel effi-
not run the engine over 4,000 rpm. sible. ciency due to reduced aerodynamic
∙ Do not accelerate at full throttle in any drag.
2. Maintain Constant Speed
gear. ∙ Maintaining a safe following distance
∙ Look ahead to try and anticipate and behind other vehicles reduces un-
∙ Avoid quick starts. minimize stops. necessary braking.
∙ Avoid hard braking as much as pos- ∙ Synchronizing your speed with traffic
sible. ∙ Safely monitoring traffic to anticipate
lights allows you to reduce your num- changes in speed permits reduced
∙ Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles ber of stops. braking and smooth acceleration
(805 kilometers). Your engine, axle or changes.
∙ Maintaining a steady speed can mini-
other parts could be damaged.
mize red light stops and improve fuel ∙ Select a gear range suitable to road
efficiency. conditions.
3. Use Air Conditioning (A/C) at Higher
Vehicle Speeds
∙ Below 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more
efficient to open windows to cool the
vehicle due to reduced engine load.
INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY
5. Use Cruise Control 9. Winter Warm Up ∙ Keep your engine tuned up.
∙ Using cruise control during highway ∙ Limit idling time to minimize impact ∙ Follow the recommended scheduled
driving helps maintain a steady to fuel economy. maintenance.
speed.
∙ Vehicles typically need no more than ∙ Keep the tires inflated to the correct
∙ Cruise control is particularly effective 30 seconds of idling at start-up to pressure. Low tire pressure increases
in providing fuel savings when driving effectively circulate the engine oil be- tire wear and lowers fuel economy.
on flat terrains. fore driving.
∙ Keep the wheels in correct alignment.
6. Plan for the Shortest Route ∙ Your vehicle will reach its ideal oper- Improper alignment increases tire wear
ating temperature more quickly and lowers fuel economy.
∙ Utilize a map or navigation system to
while driving versus idling.
determine the best route to save ∙ For vehicles equipped with , use
time. 10. Keeping your Vehicle Cool 4H or 4L position only when necessary.
7. Avoid Idling ∙ Park your vehicle in a covered parking 4-Wheel Drive operation lowers fuel
area or in the shade whenever pos- economy.
∙ Shutting off your engine when safe
sible. ∙ Use the recommended viscosity engine
for stops exceeding 30–60 seconds
saves fuel and reduces emissions. ∙ When entering a hot vehicle, opening oil. For additional information, refer to
the windows will help to reduce the “Engine oil and oil filter recommenda-
8. Buy an Automated Pass for Toll tions” in the “Technical and consumer
inside temperature faster, resulting in
Roads information” section of this manual.
reduced demand on your A/C sys-
∙ Automated passes permit drivers to tem.
use special lanes to maintain cruis-
ing speed through the toll and avoid
stopping and starting.

USING 4–WHEEL DRIVE (4WD)
(if so equipped)
WARNING CAUTION ∙ If the warning light is still on after the

above operation, have your vehicle
∙ For 4WD equipped vehicles, do not at- ∙ Do not drive the vehicle in the 4H or
checked as soon as possible. It is rec-
tempt to raise two wheels off the 4LO position on dry hard surface
ground and shift the transmission to roads. Driving on dry, hard surfaces in
any drive or reverse position with the 4H or 4LO may cause unnecessary
engine running. Doing so may result noise, tire wear and increased fuel TRANSFER CASE SHIFTING
in drivetrain damage or unexpected consumption. PROCEDURES
vehicle movement which could result
If the 4WD warning light turns on The part-time 4WD system provides three
in serious vehicle damage or personal
when you are driving on dry hard sur- positions (2WD, 4H and 4LO), so you can
injury.
face roads: select the desired drive mode according to
∙ Do not attempt to test a 4WD the driving conditions.
– In the 4H position, shift the 4WD
equipped vehicle on a 2-wheel dyna-
shift switch to 2–Wheel Drive
mometer (such as the dynamometers
(2WD).
used by some states for emissions
testing), or similar equipment even if – In the 4LO position for automatic
the other two wheels are raised off the transmission vehicles, stop the ve-
ground. Make sure you inform test fa- hicle and shift the shift lever to the
cility personnel that your vehicle is N (Neutral) position with the brake
equipped with 4WD before it is placed pedal depressed and shift the 4WD
on a dynamometer. Using the wrong shift switch to 2WD.
test equipment may result in drive-
– In the 4LO position for manual
train damage or unexpected vehicle
transmission vehicles, stop the ve-
movement which could result in seri-
hicle and shift the shift lever to the
ous vehicle damage or personal
N (Neutral) position with the clutch
injury.
pedal depressed and shift the 4WD
shift switch to 2WD.

2WD or 4WD shift procedure:
4WD Shift Switch Indicator Light

Wheels Driven Use Conditions 4WD Shift Procedure
Position 4WD shift Transfer 4LO position
Move the 4WD switch.
For driving on dry,
2WD <—> 4H
Rear wheels paved roads
4WD shift indicator light will indicate trans-
(Economy drive)
2WD fer shift position engaged.
For driving on rocky,
4 wheels sandy or snow-
covered roads
4H N (Neutral) N (Neutral) disen- 1. Stop the vehicle.
gages the automatic 2. For A/T vehicles: Move the shift lever
transmission (A/T) to the N (Neutral) position with the
mechanical parking brake pedal depressed.
lock, which will allow For manual transmission (M/T) ve-
*1 the vehicle to roll. Do hicles: Move the shift lever to the N
4LO May blink not leave the trans- (Neutral) position with the clutch
fer shift position in N depressed.
(Neutral).*2 3. For A/T vehicles: Depress and turn the
4WD shift switch to 4LO or 4H with the
brake pedal depressed.
For M/T vehicles: Depress and turn the
4WD switch to 4LO or 4H with the
4 wheels For use when maxi- clutch pedal depressed.
mum power and THE TRANSFER CASE DOES NOT ENGAGE
traction is required BETWEEN 4H AND 4LO (OR 4LO TO 4H) UN-
(for example, on LESS YOU HAVE FIRST STOPPED THE VE-
Illuminated steep grades or HICLE, DEPRESSED THE BRAKE PEDAL AND
rocky, sandy, muddy MOVED THE SHIFT LEVER TO N (NEUTRAL)
roads) FOR A/T VEHICLES. FOR M/T VEHICLES
YOU MUST MOVE THE SHIFT LEVER TO N
(NEUTRAL). *3
*1: Before moving the shift lever from N (Neutral), wait until the transfer 4LO position indicator light stays on steady. This indicates that the
4WD shift procedure is completed and the transfer gear is correctly set in the 4LO position. If the vehicle is shifted into gear before the
indicator is on steady, the transfer gear may grind, not engage correctly or stay in the neutral position.

- If the 4WD warning light illuminates, perform the following procedure to return the transfer case to correct operating condition.
1. Turn off the engine by turning the ignition switch off.
2. Start the engine.
- Check that the 4WD warning light turns off. If the 4WD warning light illuminates, have the system checked. It is recommended that you
3. Apply the parking brake, for A/T vehicles, depress the brake pedal and move the shift lever to N (Neutral) position. For M/T vehicles,
move the shift lever to the N (Neutral) position.
4. With the brake pedal depressed on A/T vehicles or with the clutch pedal depressed on M/T vehicles, move the 4WD shift switch to
the desired mode.
- Be sure to wait until the transfer gear change completes before shifting the shift lever from the N (Neutral) position.
*2: While changing in and out of 4LO, the ignition key must be on and the vehicle’s engine must be running for a shift to take place and for
the indicator lights (4WD shift and 4LO position indicator) to be operable. Otherwise, the shift will not take place and no indicator lights
will be on or flashing.
*3: Make sure the transfer 4LO position indicator light turns on when you shift the 4WD shift switch to 4LO. The indicator light will also
turn on when 4LO is selected. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system” in this section.

The transfer case 4WD shift switch is used
∙ The transfer 4LO position indicator ∙ When driving straight, shift the 4WD
to select either 2WD or 4WD depending on light must stop blinking and remain shift switch to the 2WD or 4H position.
the driving conditions. There are three illuminated or turn off before shifting Do not move the 4WD shift switch
types of drive modes available, 2WD, 4H and the transmission into gear. If the shift when making a turn or reversing.
4LO. lever is shifted from the N (Neutral)
The 4WD shift switch electronically controls ∙ Do not shift the 4WD shift switch (be-
position to any other gear when the
tween 2WD and 4H) while driving on
the transfer case operation. Rotate the transfer 4LO position indicator light is
steep downhill grades. Use the engine
switch to move between each mode, 2WD, blinking, the vehicle may move
brake and low A/T gears 2 (Second
4H and 4LO. unexpectedly.
gear) or 1 (Low gear), or M/T (1st gear
To change into or out of 4LO, the vehicle or 2nd gear) for engine braking.
CAUTION
MUST be stationary, move the shift lever ∙ Do not operate the 4WD shift switch
to N (Neutral), and for A/T vehicles de- ∙ Never shift the 4WD shift switch be- (between 2WD and 4H) with the rear
press the brake pedal or for M/T vehicles tween 4LO and 4H while driving. wheels spinning.
depress the clutch pedal. The switch ∙ The 4H position provides greater trac- ∙ Do not drive on dry hard surface roads
must be depressed and turned when tion. Avoid excessive speed, as it will in the 4H or 4LO position. Driving on
changing into or out of 4LO. cause increased fuel consumption dry hard surfaces in 4H or 4LO may
and higher oil temperatures, and cause unnecessary noise and tire
WARNING could damage drivetrain compo- wear. NISSAN recommends driving in
∙ When parking, apply the parking nents. Speeds over 62 mph the 2WD position under these
brake before stopping the engine and (100 km/h) in 4H is not recommended. conditions.
make sure that the 4WD shift indica- ∙ The 4LO position provides maximum ∙ The 4WD transfer case may not be
tor light is on and the ATP warning power and traction. Avoid raising ve- shifted between 4H and 4LO at low
light goes off. Otherwise, the vehicle hicle speed excessively, as the maxi- ambient temperatures and the trans-
could unexpectedly move even if the mum speed is approximately 31 mph fer 4LO position indicator light may
A/T is in the P (Park) position. (50 km/h). blink even when the 4WD shift switch
is shifted. After driving for a while you
can change the 4WD transfer case be-
tween 4H and 4LO.

When driving on rough roads: ∙ When the vehicle is stopped after
making a turn, you may feel a slight
∙ Set the 4WD shift switch to 4H or 4LO.
jolt after the shift lever is moved to N
∙ Drive carefully according to the road (Neutral) or P (Park). This occurs be-
surface conditions. cause the transfer clutch is released
and not because of a malfunction.
When the vehicle is stuck:
∙ Set the 4WD shift switch to 4H or 4LO. CAUTION
∙ Use the Electronic Locking Rear Differ- ∙ When driving straight, shift the 4WD
ential (E-Lock) system (if so equipped). shift switch to the 2WD or 4H position.
Turn the switch ON while the vehicle is Do not move the 4WD shift switch
stationary and apply the throttle to try when making a turn or reversing.
to free the vehicle. ∙ Do not shift the 4WD shift switch
∙ If it is difficult to free the vehicle, rock the LSD0145 while driving on steep downhill
vehicle back and forth between R (Re- grades. Use the engine brake and low
verse) and D (Drive) gears.
4WD shift switch operations automatic transmission gears 2 (Sec-
∙ Shift the 4WD shift switch to either the ond gear) or 1 (Low gear) or manual
∙ If the vehicle is stuck deep in mud, place transmission (1st gear or 2nd gear) for
stones or wooden blocks under the 2WD, 4H or 4LO position, depending on
driving conditions. engine braking.
tires. Then try the recovery procedures
above. Tire chains may be effective. ∙ Do not operate the 4WD shift switch
∙ If the 4WD shift switch is operated
with the rear wheels spinning.
while making a turn, accelerating or
CAUTION decelerating or if the key switch is ∙ Before placing the 4WD shift switch in
∙ Do not spin the tires excessively. Tires turned off while in the 4H or 4LO posi- the 4H position from 2WD, ensure the
will sink deep into the mud, making it tion, you may feel a jolt. This is not vehicle speed is less than 62 mph
difficult to free the vehicle. abnormal. (100 km/h). Failure to do so can dam-
age the 4WD system.
∙ Avoid shifting gears with the engine
running at high speeds as this may ∙ Never shift the 4WD shift switch be-
cause malfunction. tween 4LO and 4H while driving.

∙ The 4WD shift indicator light may 4WD warning light
blink while shifting from one drive
mode to the other. When the shifting
is completed, the 4WD shift indicator Comes on or
light will come on. Warning light
blinks when:
∙ If the 4WD warning light comes on, the
4WD shift indicator light goes out. There is a mal-
function in the
Comes on
CAUTION 4–Wheel Drive
system
If the 4WD shift indicator light indica-
tion changes to 2WD when the 4WD The difference
Blinks
shift switch is shifted to the 4H position in wheel rota-
slowly
at low ambient temperatures, the 2WD tion is large
LSD0147 mode may be being engaged due to
malfunctioning drive system. If the in- The 4WD warning light is located in the me-
4WD shift indicator light dicator does not return to normal and ter.
The 4WD shift indicator light is located in the 4WD warning light comes on, have
the system checked. It is recommended The 4WD warning light comes on when the
the odometer display. ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
The light should turn off within 1 second service. It turns off soon after the engine is started.
after placing the ignition switch in the ON If any malfunction occurs in the 4WD sys-
position. tem when the ignition switch is ON, the
While the engine is running, the 4WD shift warning light will either remain illuminated
indicator light will illuminate the position or blink.
selected by the 4WD shift switch. If the 4WD warning light comes on, the 4WD
shift indicator light goes out.

A large difference between the diameters
∙ Do not drive the vehicle in the 4H or ∙ The transfer case may be damaged if
of front and rear wheels will make the 4LO position on dry hard surface you continue driving with the warning
warning light blink slowly (about once per roads. Driving on dry, hard surfaces in light blinking.
2 seconds). Change the 4WD shift switch 4H or 4LO may cause unnecessary
into 2WD and do not drive fast. noise, tire wear and increased fuel
consumption.
CAUTION
If the 4WD warning light turns on
∙ If the warning light comes on or blinks when you are driving on dry hard sur-
slowly during operation, have your face roads:
vehicle checked as soon as possible. It
is recommended that you visit a – In the 4H position, shift the 4WD
NISSAN dealer for this service. shift switch to 2WD.
∙ Shifting between 4H and 4LO is not – In the 4LO position for automatic
recommended when the 4WD warn- transmission vehicles, stop the ve-
ing light turns on. hicle and shift the shift lever to the
N (Neutral) position with the brake
∙ When the warning light comes on, the pedal depressed and shift the 4WD
2WD mode may be engaged even if shift switch to 2WD.
the 4WD shift switch is in 4H. Be espe-
cially careful when driving. If corre- – In the 4LO position for manual
sponding parts are malfunctioning, transmission vehicles, stop the ve-
the 4WD mode will not be engaged hicle and shift the shift lever to the
even if the 4WD shift switch is shifted. N (Neutral) position with the clutch
pedal depressed and shift the 4WD
shift switch to 2WD.
∙ If the warning light is still on after the
above operation, have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible. It is rec-

ELECTRONIC LOCKING REAR
DIFFERENTIAL (E-Lock) SYSTEM (if
so equipped)
The E-Lock system can provide additional Dynamic Control (VDC) system is disabled CAUTION
traction and should only be used when a and the indicator light illuminates
vehicle has become or is becoming stuck. when the E-Lock system is on. ∙ After using the E-Lock system, turn
This system operates by electronically the switch OFF to prevent possible
“locking” the two rear drive wheels to- WARNING damage to driveline components
gether, allowing them to turn at the same from extended use.
∙ Never leave the E-Lock system on
speed. The system is used when it is not ∙ Do not drive the vehicle at speeds
when driving on paved or hard-
possible to free a stuck vehicle even when surfaced roads. Turning the vehicle faster than 12 mph (20 km/h) when
using the 4LO position (4-Wheel Drive ve- may result in the rear wheels slipping the system is engaged. Doing so could
hicles). and result in an accident and personal damage drivetrain components.
When added traction is required, activate injury. After using the E-Lock system ∙ Do not turn on the E-Lock system
the E-Lock system by pushing the switch to free the vehicle, turn the system off. while the tires are spinning. Doing so
ON. For additional information, refer to ∙ Use the E-Lock system only when could damage drivetrain
“Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) freeing a stuck vehicle. Try the 4LO po- components.
system switch” in the “Instruments and sition before using the E-Lock system.
controls” section of this manual. Once the Never use the E-Lock system on a slip-
system fully engages, the indicator light in pery road surface such as snow or ice
the instrument panel will remain on. When surface. Using the E-Lock system
the system is activated, both rear wheels when driving in these road conditions
will engage, providing added traction. may cause unexpected movement of
the vehicle during engine braking, ac-
The rear wheels may momentarily slip or celerating or turning, which may re-
move to engage the system, and the sys- sult in an accident and serious per-
tem will only engage up to approximately sonal injury.
4 mph (7 km/h). Once the vehicle is free, the
system should be turned off and driving
resumed.
The Anti-Lock Braking (ABS) system is dis-
abled and the ABS light illuminates when
the E-Lock system is on. Also, the Vehicle
PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS

through unintended operation of the
vehicle and/or its systems, do not
tended in your vehicle. Additionally,
the temperature inside a closed ve-
hicle on a warm day can quickly be-
come high enough to cause a signifi-
cant risk of injury or death to people
and pets.
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. M/T models:
WSD0050
Place the shift lever in the R (Reverse)
WARNING ∙ Safe parking procedures require that position. When parking on an uphill
both the parking brake be set and the
∙ Do not stop or park the vehicle over grade, place the shift lever in 1st gear.
transmission placed into P (Park) for
flammable materials such as dry
automatic transmission (A/T) models A/T models:
grass, waste paper or rags. They may
or in an appropriate gear for manual
ignite and cause a fire. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) po-
transmission (M/T) models. Failure to
do so could cause the vehicle to move sition.
unexpectedly or roll away and result 3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling
in an accident. Make sure the shift le- into traffic when parked on an incline, it
ver has been pushed as far forward as is a good practice to turn the wheels as
it can go and cannot be moved with- illustrated.
out depressing the foot brake pedal.
∙ HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB 䊊
A :
∙ Never leave the engine running while
the vehicle is unattended. Turn the wheels into the curb and
move the vehicle forward until the curb
POWER STEERING BRAKE SYSTEM
side wheel gently touches the curb. The power assisted steering uses a hy- The brake system has two separate hy-
draulic pump, driven by the engine, to as-
∙ HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB 䊊
B: draulic circuits. If one circuit malfunctions,
sist steering. you will still have braking at two wheels.
Turn the wheels away from the curb If the engine stops or the drive belt breaks,
and move the vehicle back until the you will still have control of the vehicle. BRAKE PRECAUTIONS
curb side wheel gently touches the However, much greater steering effort is
curb. needed, especially in sharp turns and at
Vacuum assisted brakes
low speeds. The brake booster aids braking by using
∙ HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO
CURB 䊊
C : engine vacuum. If the engine stops, you
WARNING can stop the vehicle by depressing the
Turn the wheels toward the side of the brake pedal. However, greater foot pres-
If the engine is not running or is turned
road so the vehicle will move away sure on the brake pedal will be required to
off while driving, the power assist for
from the center of the road if it moves. stop the vehicle and stopping distance will
the steering will not work. Steering will
4. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK be harder to operate. be longer.
position and remove the key.
Using the brakes
Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal
while driving. This will overheat the brakes,
wear out the brake pads faster, and reduce
gas mileage.
To help reduce brake wear and to prevent
the brakes from overheating, reduce speed
and downshift to a lower gear before going
down a slope or long grade. Overheated
brakes may reduce braking performance
and could result in loss of vehicle control.

WARNING shoes and/or drums/rotors are replaced,
– When replacing tires, install the
in order to assure the best braking perfor- specified size of tires on all four
∙ While driving on a slippery surface, be mance. wheels.
careful when braking, accelerating or
downshifting. Abrupt braking or ac- This procedure is described in the vehicle – When installing a spare tire, make
celerating could cause the wheels to service manual. It is recommended that sure that it is the proper size and
skid and result in an accident. you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. type as specified on the Tire and
Loading Information label. For ad-
∙ If the engine is not running or is ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS) ditional information, refer to “Tire
turned off while driving, the power as-
and Loading Information label” in
sist for the brakes will not work. Brak- WARNING the “Technical and consumer infor-
ing will be harder.
∙ The ABS is a sophisticated device, but mation” section of this manual.
Wet brakes it cannot prevent accidents resulting – For additional information, refer to
from careless or dangerous driving “Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-
When the vehicle is washed or driven techniques. It can help maintain ve- yourself ” section of this manual.
through water, the brakes may get wet. As hicle control during braking on slip-
a result, your braking distance will be lon- pery surfaces. Remember that stop- The ABS controls the brakes so the wheels
ger and the vehicle may pull to one side ping distances on slippery surfaces do not lock during hard braking or when
during braking. will be longer than on normal sur- braking on slippery surfaces. The system
faces even with ABS. Stopping dis- detects the rotation speed at each wheel
To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe and varies the brake fluid pressure to pre-
tances may also be longer on rough,
speed while lightly pressing the brake vent each wheel from locking and sliding.
gravel or snow covered roads, or if you
pedal to heat up the brakes. Do this until are using tire chains. Always maintain By preventing each wheel from locking, the
the brakes return to normal. Avoid driving a safe distance from the vehicle in system helps the driver maintain steering
the vehicle at high speeds until the brakes front of you. Ultimately, the driver is control and helps to minimize swerving
function correctly. responsible for safety. and spinning on slippery surfaces.
Parking brake break-in ∙ Tire type and condition may also af-
fect braking effectiveness.
Break in the parking brake shoes whenever
the stopping effect of the parking brake is
weakened or whenever the parking brake
ACTIVE BRAKE LIMITED SLIP (ABLS)
SYSTEM
Using the system instrument panel. The brake system then ∙ The ABLS system uses automatic brak-
operates normally but without anti-lock ing to transfer power from a slipping
Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. assistance. drive wheel to the wheel on the same
Depress the brake pedal with firm steady axle with more traction. The ABLS sys-
pressure, but do not pump the brakes. The If the ABS warning light illuminates during
the self-test or while driving, have the ve- tem applies braking to the slipping
Anti-lock Braking System will operate to wheel, which helps redirect power to
hicle checked. It is recommended that you
prevent the wheels from locking up. Steer the other wheel.
the vehicle to avoid obstacles.
Normal operation ∙ On 4–Wheel Drive models the ABLS sys-
WARNING tem operates in both 4H and 4LO
The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) oper- modes. If 4WD mode is engaged, the
Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so ates at speeds above 3 - 6 mph (5 - ABLS system operates for both drive
may result in increased stopping 10 km/h). The speed varies according to axles. On 2–Wheel Drive vehicles, the
distances. road conditions. ABLS system operates on the drive axle
Self-test feature When the ABS senses that one or more only.
wheels are close to locking up, the actuator
The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) in- ∙ The ABLS system is always on. In some
rapidly applies and releases hydraulic pres-
cludes electronic sensors, electric pumps, conditions, the system may automati-
sure. This action is similar to pumping the
hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The brakes very quickly. You may feel a pulsa- cally turn the ABLS system off. If the sys-
computer has a built-in diagnostic feature tion in the brake pedal and hear a noise tem is automatically turned off, normal
that tests the system each time you start from under the hood or feel a vibration brake function will continue. ABLS will
the engine and move the vehicle at a low from the actuator when it is operating. This function even when the Vehicle Dy-
speed in forward or reverse. When the self- is normal and indicates that the ABS is op- namic Control system is turned off.
test occurs, you may hear a “clunk” noise erating properly. However, the pulsation ∙ The ABLS does not operate if both
and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal. may indicate that road conditions are haz- wheels on a drive axle are slipping.
This is normal and does not indicate a mal- ardous and extra care is required while
function. If the computer senses a mal- driving.
function, it switches the ABS off and illumi-
nates the ABS warning light on the

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)
SYSTEM
WARNING ∙ If wheels or tires other than the The VDC system uses various sensors to
NISSAN recommended ones are used, monitor driver inputs and vehicle motion.
∙ The ABLS system helps provide in- Under certain driving conditions, the VDC
the ABLS system may not operate
creased traction, but will not prevent system helps to perform the following
properly and the slip indicator light
accidents due to abrupt steering op- functions:
may illuminate.
eration or by careless driving or dan-
gerous driving practices. Reduce ve- ∙ Controls brake pressure to reduce
hicle speed and be especially careful wheel slip on one slipping drive wheel
when driving and cornering on slip- so power is transferred to a non-
pery surfaces. Always drive carefully. slipping drive wheel on the same axle.
∙ Do not modify the vehicle’s suspen- ∙ Controls brake pressure and engine
sion. If suspension parts such as output to reduce drive wheel slip based
shock absorbers, struts, springs, sta- on vehicle speed (traction control func-
bilizer bars, bushings and wheels are tion).
not NISSAN approved for your vehicle ∙ If the 4WD transfer case is shifted into
or are extremely deteriorated, the
4LO the indicator light will come
ABLS system may not operate prop-
on and the VDC system will be turned
erly. This could adversely affect ve-
off. For additional information, refer to
hicle handling performance, and the
“Using 4–Wheel Drive (4WD)” in this sec-
slip indicator light may illuminate.
tion.
∙ If brake related parts such as brake
∙ Controls brake pressure at individual
pads, rotors and calipers are not
wheels and engine output to help the
NISSAN recommended or are ex-
driver maintain control of the vehicle in
tremely deteriorated, the ABLS sys-
the following conditions:
tem may not operate properly and the
slip indicator light may illuminate. – Understeer (vehicle tends to not fol-
low the steered path despite in-
creased steering input)
– Oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due
to certain road or driving conditions)
The VDC system can help the driver to The VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the WARNING
maintain control of the vehicle, but it can- VDC system. The indicator light illu-
not prevent loss of vehicle control in all driv- minates to indicate the VDC system is off. ∙ The VDC system is designed to help
ing situations. the driver maintain stability but does
When the VDC OFF switch is used to turn off
not prevent accidents due to abrupt
When the VDC system operates, the the system, the VDC system still operates
steering operation at high speeds or
indicator light in the instrument panel to prevent one drive wheel from slipping by by careless or dangerous driving
flashes so note the following: transferring power to a non-slipping drive techniques. Reduce vehicle speed and
wheel. The indicator light flashes if be especially careful when driving and
∙ The road may be slippery or the system this occurs. All other VDC functions are off cornering on slippery surfaces and al-
may determine some action is required and the indicator light will not flash. ways drive carefully.
to help keep the vehicle on the steered
The VDC system is automatically reset to ∙ Do not modify the vehicle’s suspen-
path.
on when the ignition switch is placed in the sion. If suspension parts such as
∙ You may feel a pulsation in the brake OFF position then back to the ON position. shock absorbers, struts, springs, sta-
pedal and hear a noise or vibration from bilizer bars, bushings and wheels are
The computer has a built-in diagnostic fea-
under the hood. This is normal and indi- not NISSAN recommended for your
ture that tests the system each time you
cates that the VDC system is working vehicle or are extremely deteriorated,
start the engine and move the vehicle for- the VDC system may not operate
properly.
ward or in reverse at a slow speed. When properly. This could adversely affect
∙ Adjust your speed and driving to the the self-test occurs, you may hear a clunk vehicle handling performance, and
road conditions. noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake the indicator light may flash or
For additional information, refer to “Slip in- pedal. This is normal and is not an indica-
the indicator light may
dicator light” and ”Vehicle Dynamic Control tion of a malfunction. illuminate.
(VDC) OFF indicator light” in the ”Instru-
ments and controls” section of this manual.
If a malfunction occurs in the system,
the indicator light will come on in the
instrument panel. The VDC system auto-
matically turns off when these indicator
lights are off.
∙ If brake related parts such as brake ∙ If wheels or tires other than the ∙ Do not modify the vehicle’s suspen-
pads, rotors and calipers are not NISSAN recommended ones are used, sion. If suspension parts such as
NISSAN recommended or are ex- the VDC system may not operate shock absorbers, struts, springs, sta-
tremely deteriorated, the VDC system properly and the indicator light bilizer bars, bushings and wheels are
may not operate properly and both may flash or the indicator light not NISSAN recommended for your
the and indicator lights may illuminate. vehicle or are extremely deteriorated,
may illuminate. the VDC system may not operate
∙ The VDC system is not a substitute for properly. This could adversely affect
∙ If engine control related parts are not winter tires or tire chains on a snow vehicle handling performance, and
NISSAN recommended or are ex- covered road. the indicator light may flash or
tremely deteriorated, both the the indicator light may
and indicator lights may
BRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION
illuminate.
illuminate. During braking while driving through turns,
the system optimizes the distribution of ∙ If brake related parts such as brake
∙ When driving on extremely inclined force to each of the four wheels depending pads, rotors and calipers are not
surfaces such as higher banked cor- on the radius of the turn. NISSAN recommended or are ex-
ners, the VDC system may not operate tremely deteriorated, the VDC system
properly and the indicator light WARNING may not operate properly and both
may flash or the indicator light the and the indicator
may illuminate. Do not drive on these ∙ The VDC system is designed to help
the driver maintain stability but does lights may illuminate.
types of roads.
not prevent accidents due to abrupt ∙ If engine control related parts are not
∙ When driving on an unstable surface steering operation at high speeds or NISSAN recommended or are ex-
such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or by careless or dangerous driving tremely deteriorated, both the
ramp, the indicator light may techniques. Reduce vehicle speed and and indicator lights may
flash or the indicator light may be especially careful when driving and illuminate.
illuminate. This is not a malfunction. cornering on slippery surfaces and al-
Restart the engine after driving onto ways drive carefully.
a stable surface.

HILL DESCENT CONTROL SYSTEM (if
so equipped)
∙ When driving on extremely inclined WARNING centrate on steering while reducing the
surfaces such as higher banked cor- burden of brake and accelerator operation.
∙ Never rely solely on the hill descent
ners, the VDC system may not operate ∙ When additional braking is required on
control system to control vehicle
properly and the indicator light speed when driving on steep downhill steep downhill roads, activate the hill
may flash or the indicator light grades. Always drive carefully and at- descent control system by pushing the
may illuminate. Do not drive on these tentively when using the hill descent switch on. For additional information,
types of roads. control system and decelerate the ve- refer to “Hill descent control switch” in
hicle speed by depressing the brake the “Instruments and controls” section
∙ When driving on an unstable surface of this manual.
such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or pedal if necessary. Be especially care-
ful when driving on frozen, muddy or ∙ Once the system is activated, the indi-
ramp, the indicator light may
extremely steep downhill roads. Fail- cator light will remain on in the instru-
flash or the indicator light may ure to control vehicle speed may re- ment panel. For additional information,
illuminate. This is not a malfunction. sult in a loss of control of the vehicle refer to “Hill descent control system ON
Restart the engine after driving onto and possible serious injury or death. indicator light” in the “Instruments and
a stable surface.
∙ The hill descent control may not con- controls” section of this manual.
∙ If wheels or tires other than the trol the vehicle speed on a hill under
NISSAN recommended ones are used, If the accelerator or brake pedal is de-
all load or road conditions. Always be pressed while the hill descent control sys-
the VDC system may not operate prepared to depress the brake pedal tem is on, the system will stop operating
properly and the indicator light to control vehicle speed. Failure to do temporarily. As soon as the accelerator or
may flash or the indicator light so may result in a collision or serious brake pedal is released, the hill descent
may illuminate. personal injury. control system begins to function again if
∙ The VDC system is not a substitute for The hill descent control system helps the hill descent control operating condi-
winter tires or tire chains on a snow maintain vehicle speed when driving under tions are fulfilled.
covered road. 15-21 mph (25-35 km/h) on steeper down- For the best results, when descending
hill grades. Hill descent control is useful steep downhill grades, the hill descent con-
when engine braking alone in 4H or 4L can- trol switch should be on and the shift lever
not control vehicle speed. Hill descent con- in 2 (Second gear) or 1 (Low gear) for engine
trol applies the vehicle brakes to control braking.
vehicle speed allowing the driver to con-

HILL START ASSIST SYSTEM (if so REAR SONAR SYSTEM (RSS) (if so
equipped) equipped)
WARNING When the vehicle is stopped on a hill, the hill

start assist system automatically keeps
∙ Never rely solely on the hill start assist the brakes applied. This helps prevents the
system to prevent the vehicle from vehicle from rolling backward in the time it
moving backward on a hill. Always takes the driver to release the brake pedal
drive carefully and attentively. De- and apply the accelerator.
press the brake pedal when the ve-
hicle is stopped on a steep hill. Be es- Hill start assist will operate automatically
pecially careful when stopped on a hill under the following conditions:
on frozen or muddy roads. Failure to ∙ The shift lever is moved to a forward or
prevent the vehicle from rolling back- reverse gear.
wards may result in a loss of control of
the vehicle and possible serious injury ∙ The vehicle is stopped completely on a
or death. hill by applying the brake.
∙ The hill start assist system is not de- The maximum holding time is 2 seconds. WSD0103
signed to hold the vehicle at a stand- After 2 seconds the vehicle will begin to roll
still on a hill. Depress the brake pedal back and hill start assist will stop operating WARNING
when the vehicle is stopped on a completely. ∙ Always turn and look back before
steep hill. Failure to do so may cause Hill start assist will not operate when the backing up. The RSS is not a substi-
the vehicle to roll backwards and may shift lever is moved to N (Neutral) or P (Park) tute for proper backing procedures.
result in a collision or serious personal or on a flat and level road. ∙ Read and understand the limitations
injury.
of the RSS as contained in this section.
∙ The hill start assist may not prevent Inclement weather may affect the
the vehicle from rolling backwards on function of the RSS; this may include
a hill under all load or road conditions. reduced performance or a false
Always be prepared to depress the activation.
brake pedal to prevent the vehicle
∙ This system is not designed to pre-
from rolling backwards. Failure to do
vent contact with small or moving
so may result in a collision or serious
objects.
personal injury.

COLD WEATHER DRIVING
∙ The system is designed as an aid to the tone will sound for only 3 seconds. FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK
the driver in detecting large station- Once the system detects an object ap-
proaching, the tone will sound again. To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply
ary objects to help avoid damaging de-icer through the key hole. If the lock
the vehicle. The system will not detect The RSS automatically turns on when the becomes frozen, heat the key before in-
small objects below the bumper, and shift lever is placed in R (Reverse) and the serting it into the key hole or use the re-
may not detect objects close to the ignition is ON. The RSS OFF switch on the mote keyless entry key fob (if so equipped).
bumper or on the ground. instrument panel allows the driver to turn
∙ If your vehicle sustains damage to the the RSS on and off. To turn the RSS off, the ANTIFREEZE
rear bumper fascia, leaving it mis- ignition must be on, and the shift lever in R
In the winter when it is anticipated that the
aligned or bent, the sensing zone may (Reverse). An indicator light on the switch
temperature will drop below 32°F (0°C),
be altered causing inaccurate mea- will illuminate when the system is turned
check the antifreeze to assure proper win-
surement of obstacles or false alarms. off. If the indicator light illuminates when
ter protection. For additional information,
the RSS is not turned off, it may indicate a
refer to “Engine cooling system” in the “Do-
The RSS sounds a tone to warn the driver of malfunction in the RSS.
obstacles near the rear bumper when the Keep the RSS sensors (located on the rear
shift lever is in R (Reverse). The system may bumper fascia) free from snow, ice and BATTERY
not detect objects at speeds above 3 mph large accumulations of dirt (do not clean This vehicle is equipped with a sealed
(5 km/h) and may not detect certain angu- the sensors with sharp objects). If the sen- maintenance free battery. It is recom-
lar or moving objects. sors are covered, it will affect the accuracy mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
The RSS detects obstacles up to 5.9 ft of the RSS. service.
(1.8 m) from the rear bumper with a de- DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER
creased coverage area at the outer cor-
ners of the bumper (refer to the illustration If the vehicle is to be left outside without
for approximate zone coverage areas). As antifreeze, drain the cooling system, includ-
you move closer to the obstacle, the rate of ing the engine block. Refill before operating
the tone increases. When the obstacle is the vehicle. For additional information, refer
less than 10 in (25.0 cm) away, the tone will to “Changing engine coolant” in the “Do-it-
sound continuously. If the RSS detects a yourself” section of this manual.
stationary or receding object further than
10 in (25.0 cm) from the side of the vehicle,
TIRE EQUIPMENT SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT ∙ Whatever the condition, drive with
1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed to It is recommended that the following items caution. Accelerate and slow down
provide superior performance on dry be carried in the vehicle during winter: with care. If accelerating or down-
pavement. However, the performance shifting too fast, the drive wheels will
of these tires will be substantially re- ∙ A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to re- lose even more traction.
duced in snowy and icy conditions. If move ice and snow from the windows
∙ Allow more stopping distance under
you operate your vehicle on snowy or and wiper blades. these conditions. Braking should be
icy roads, NISSAN recommends the use ∙ A sturdy, flat board to be placed under started sooner than on dry pavement.
of MUD & SNOW or ALL SEASON TIRES the jack to give it firm support.
on all four wheels. It is recommended ∙ Allow greater following distances on
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for the tire ∙ A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snow- slippery roads.
type, size, speed rating and availability drifts. ∙ Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).
information. These may appear on an otherwise
∙ Extra washer fluid to refill the
2. For additional traction on icy roads, clear road in shaded areas. If a patch
windshield-washer fluid reservoir.
studded tires may be used. However, of ice is seen ahead, brake before
some U.S. states and Canadian prov- DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE reaching it. Try not to brake while on
inces prohibit their use. Check local, the ice, and avoid any sudden steering
state and provincial laws before install- WARNING maneuvers.
ing studded tires. ∙ Do not use the cruise control on slip-
∙ Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain),
Skid and traction capabilities of studded very cold snow or ice can be slick and pery roads.
snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be very hard to drive on. The vehicle will ∙ Snow can trap dangerous exhaust
poorer than that of non-studded snow have much less traction or “grip” un- gases under your vehicle. Keep snow
tires. der these conditions. Try to avoid driv- clear of the exhaust pipe and from
ing on wet ice until the road is salted around your vehicle.
3. Tire chains may be used. For additional or sanded.
information, refer to “Tire chains” in the
“Do-it-yourself ” section of this manual.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so ∙ Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged 6. Before starting the engine, unplug and
equipped) extension cord rated for at least 10 A. properly store the cord to keep it away
Plug the extension cord into a Ground from moving parts.
Engine block heaters are used to assist Fault Interrupt (GFI) protected,
with cold temperature starting. grounded 110-VAC outlet. Failure to
The engine block heater should be used use the proper extension cord or a
when the outside temperature is 20°F (-7°C) grounded outlet can result in a fire or
or lower. electrical shock and cause serious
personal injury.
WARNING To use the engine block heater:
∙ Do not use your engine block heater 1. Turn the engine off.
with an ungrounded electrical system
or a 2-pronged adapter. You can be 2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine
seriously injured by an electrical block heater cord.
shock if you use an ungrounded
connection. 3. Plug the engine block heater cord into
a grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged exten-
∙ Disconnect and properly store the en- sion cord.
gine block heater cord before starting
the engine. Damage to the cord could 4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground
result in an electrical shock and can Fault Interrupt (GFI) protected,
cause serious injury. grounded 110-volt AC (VAC) outlet.
5. The engine block heater must be
plugged in for at least 2–4 hours, de-
pending on outside temperatures, to
properly warm the engine coolant. Use
an appropriate timer to turn the engine
block heater on.

MEMO

6 In case of emergency
Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14

First aid kit (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Towing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Towing recommended by NISSAN . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
(TPMS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Vehicle recovery
Changing a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 (freeing a stuck vehicle). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH FIRST AID KIT (if so equipped)
WARNING The first aid kit is located in the under-seat

storage bins.
∙ If stopping for an emergency, be sure
to move the vehicle well off the road. To access the first aid kit:
∙ Do not use the hazard warning flash-

ers while moving on the highway un-
less unusual circumstances force you
to drive so slowly that your vehicle
might become a hazard to other
traffic.
∙ Turn signals do not work when the
hazard warning flasher lights are on.
The flashers will operate with the ignition
LIC0394 switch placed in any position.
Push the switch on to warn other drivers
Some jurisdictions may prohibit the use
when you must stop or park under emer-
of the hazard warning flasher switch
gency conditions. All turn signal lights flash.
while driving.
6-2 In case of emergency

FLAT TIRE
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING

SYSTEM (TPMS)
This vehicle is equipped with TPMS. It moni-
tors tire pressure of all tires except the
spare. When the low tire pressure warning
light is lit, and the CHECK TIRE PRES (pres-
sure) warning message is displayed in the
odometer, one or more of your tires is sig-
nificantly under-inflated. If the vehicle is be-
ing driven with low tire pressure, the TPMS
will activate and warn you of it by the low
tire pressure warning light. This system will
activate only when the vehicle is driven at
LCE0108 LCE0113
speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h). For addi-
King Cab® model Crew Cab model tional information, refer to “Warning lights,
For King Cab® model, lift up the rear jump For Crew Cab model, lift up the rear bench indicator lights and audible reminders” in
seat and remove net to remove the first aid seat and remove the net to remove the first the “Instruments and Controls” section,
kit. For additional information, refer to aid kit. For additional information, refer to
and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System
“Jump Seats” in the “Safety — Seats, seat “Folding the rear bench seat up” in the
(TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving” section
belts and supplemental restraint system” “Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemen-
section of this manual. tal restraint system” section of this manual. of this manual.
WARNING
∙ Radio waves could adversely affect
electric medical equipment. Those
manufacturer for the possible influ-
ences before use.
In case of emergency 6-3

∙ If the low tire pressure warning light 3. Park on a level surface and apply the
∙ When replacing a wheel without the
illuminates while driving, avoid sud- parking brake. Shift the manual trans-
TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS
den steering maneuvers or abrupt mission into R (Reverse), or the auto-
will not function and the low tire pres-
braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off matic transmission into P (Park).
sure warning light will flash for ap-
the road to a safe location and stop proximately 1 minute. The light will re- 4. Turn off the engine.
the vehicle as soon as possible. Driv- main on after 1 minute. Have your
ing with under-inflated tires may per- tires replaced and/or TPMS system 5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic
manently damage the tires and in- reset as soon as possible. It is recom- and to signal professional road assis-
crease the likelihood of tire failure. mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer tance personnel that you need assis-
Serious vehicle damage could occur for these services. tance.
and may lead to an accident and could 6. Have all passengers get out of the ve-
∙ Replacing tires with those not origi-
result in serious personal injury. hicle and stand in a safe place, away
Check the tire pressure for all four from traffic and clear of the vehicle.
the proper operation of the TPMS.
tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the
recommended COLD tire pressure ∙ Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol WARNING
shown on the Tire and Loading Infor- tire sealant into the tires, as this may
mation label to turn the low tire pres- cause a malfunction of the tire pres- ∙ Make sure the parking brake is se-
sure warning light OFF. If the light still sure sensors. curely applied and the manual trans-
illuminates while driving after adjust- mission is shifted into R (Reverse), or
ing the tire pressure, a tire may be flat CHANGING A FLAT TIRE the automatic transmission into P
or the TPMS may be malfunctioning. If (Park).
If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions
you have a flat tire, replace it with a below: ∙ Never change tires when the vehicle is
spare tire as soon as possible. If no tire on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is
is flat and all tires are properly in- Stopping the vehicle hazardous.
flated, have the vehicle checked. It is
1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and ∙ Never change tires if oncoming traffic
away from traffic. is close to your vehicle. Wait for pro-
2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. fessional road assistance.

LCE2142 LCE0109 LCE0110
A. Blocks Getting the spare tire and tools 2. Release the strap to remove the tool
(King Cab® models) bag.
B. Flat tire
Blocking wheels The tool storage compartment is located
between the two rear jump seats.
Place suitable blocks at both the front and
back of the wheel diagonally opposite the 1. Turn the knob from the lock to the un-
flat tire to prevent the vehicle from moving lock position and remove the lid from
when it is jacked up. the tool storage compartment.
WARNING
Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle
may move and result in personal injury.

LCE2164 LCE2159 LCE2165
3. Collapse the jack to remove it from the Getting the spare tire and tools 3. Collapse the jack to remove it from the
storage location by inserting the wheel (Crew Cab models) storage location by inserting the
nut wrench into the jack screw at the wheel-nut wrench into the jack screw
top of the jack as shown. Turn the The tools and tool bag are located behind as shown and turning the wheel-nut
wheel-nut wrench counterclockwise the rear bench seat. wrench towards you until the jack be-
as shown until the jack screw becomes comes loose. Then loosen the jack
loose. Then loosen the jack with your 1. Remove the head restraints/headrests screw with your fingers until it is free.
fingers until it becomes free. and fold the rear bench seat down. For
additional information, refer to “Folding 4. Remove the jack from behind the seat.
4. Remove the jack. the rear bench seat down ” in the “Safe- 5. To reinstall the jack and tools, reverse
5. To reinstall the jack and tools, reverse ty–Seats, seat belts and supplemental steps 1 to 4.
steps 1 to 4. restraint system” section of this
manual.
2. Remove the tool bag and locate the
wheel-nut wrench.
Getting the spare tire and tools
(All models)
1. Seat the T-shaped end of the jacking
rod into the T-shaped opening of the
spare tire winch. Apply pressure to keep
the jacking rod engaged in the spare
tire winch and turn the jacking rod
counterclockwise to lower the spare
tire.
2. Once the spare tire is completely low-
ered, reach under the vehicle, remove
the retainer chain, and carefully slide
the tire from under the rear of the ve-
hicle. LCE2022
3. To reinstall the wheel, remove the cen-
ter cap and insert the tire chain
through the wheel. Be sure the rubber
spacer is centered on the wheel before
lifting. Use the assembled jacking rod
to slowly rotate the winch clockwise to
raise the wheel to the vehicle.
WCE0070 NOTE:
Inspect the spacer every six years and
replace as necessary. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.

CAUTION For additional information, refer to “Jacking
up vehicle and removing the damaged tire”
∙ Be sure to center the spare tire sus- in this section.
pending plate on the wheel and then
lift the spare tire. Take care not to scratch the wheel cap or
wheel surface.
∙ Failure to use the spacer may allow
the chain to get stuck on the wheel Jacking up vehicle and removing
nut holes. the damaged tire
WARNING
∙ Never get under the vehicle while it is
supported only by the jack. If it is nec-
essary to work under the vehicle, sup-
LCE2367 port it with safety stands.
Removing bolt-on wheel caps (if ∙ Use only the jack provided with your
so equipped) vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use
the jack provided with your vehicle on
CAUTION other vehicles. The jack is designed
for lifting only your vehicle during a
Do not use your hands to pry off wheel tire change.
caps or wheel covers. Doing so could
result in personal injury. ∙ Use the correct jack-up points. Never
use any other part of the vehicle for
The wheel cap 䊊 is only attached with the
1
jack support.
wheel nuts and is separate from the wheel
䊊2 . ∙ Never jack up the vehicle more than
necessary.
To remove the wheel cap, remove the
wheel nuts after the jack is securely sup- ∙ Never use blocks on or under the jack.
porting the vehicle and the tire clears the
ground.
∙ Do not start or run the engine while
vehicle is on the jack. It may cause the
vehicle to move. This is especially true
for vehicles with limited slip
differentials.
∙ Do not allow passengers to stay in the
vehicle while it is on the jack.
∙ Never run the engine with a wheel(s)
off the ground. It may cause the ve-
hicle to move.
WCE0152
Always refer to the illustration for the cor- 1. Loosen each wheel nut 1 or 2 turns by
rect placement and jack-up points for your turning counterclockwise with the
specific vehicle model and jack type. wheel nut wrench. Do not remove the
wheel nuts until the tire is off the
Carefully read the caution label attached
ground.
to the jack body and the following in-
structions.
2. Place the jack directly under the 5. Remove the wheel nuts and then re-
jack-up point as illustrated so the top move the tire.
of the jack contacts the vehicle at the
jack-up point. Align the jack head under
the arrow stamped on the side of the
frame or rear as shown.
The jack should be used on firm and
level ground.
LCE0087
3. Install the assembled jacking rod into
the jack as shown.
4. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the
jacking lever and rod. Carefully raise the
vehicle until the tire clears the ground.

4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire The wheel nuts must be kept tightened
touches the ground. Then, with the to specification at all times. It is recom-
wheel nut wrench, tighten the wheel mended that wheel nuts be tightened to
nuts securely in the sequence illus- specifications at each lubrication inter-
trated (䊊1 ,䊊
2 ,䊊
3 ,䊊
4 ,䊊
5 ,䊊
6 ). Lower the val.
vehicle completely .
Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pres-
sure.
WARNING
COLD pressure: After vehicle has been
∙ Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly
parked for 3 hours or more or driven less
tightened wheel nuts can cause the
than 1 mile (1.6 km).
wheel to become loose or come off.
This could cause an accident. COLD tire pressures are shown on the
∙ Do not use oil or grease on the wheel Tire and Loading Information label lo-
studs or nuts. This could cause the cated in the driver’s door opening.
WCE0063
nuts to become loose. 5. Securely store the jacking equipment
Installing the spare tire in the vehicle and the flat tire under the
∙ Retighten the wheel nuts when the
The spare tire is designed for emergency vehicle has been driven for 620 miles vehicle. For additional information
use. For additional information, refer to (1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire, about storing the flat tire, refer to “Get-
“Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself” etc.). ting the spare tire and tools” in this sec-
section of this manual. tion.
As soon as possible, tighten the wheel
1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface nuts to the specified torque with a
between the wheel and hub. torque wrench.
2. Carefully put the spare tire on and Wheel nut tightening torque:
tighten the wheel nuts finger tight. 98 ft-lb (133 N·m)
3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten
wheel nuts alternately and evenly in the
sequence illustrated (䊊1 ,䊊
2 ,䊊
3 ,䊊
4 ,䊊
5 ,䊊
6 )
until they are tight.
JUMP STARTING
WARNING To start your engine with a booster battery,

∙ Whenever working on or near a bat-
the instructions and precautions below tery, always wear suitable eye protec-
∙ Always make sure that the spare tire must be followed. tors (for example, goggles or indus-
and jacking equipment are properly
trial safety spectacles) and remove
secured after use. Such items can be- WARNING rings, metal bands, or any other jew-
come dangerous projectiles in an ac-
∙ If done incorrectly, jump starting can elry. Do not lean over the battery
cident or sudden stop.
lead to a battery explosion, resulting when jump starting.
∙ The spare tire is designed for emer- in severe injury or death. It could also ∙ Do not attempt to jump start a frozen
gency use. For additional information, damage your vehicle. battery. It could explode and cause
refer to “Wheels and tires” in the “Do-
∙ Explosive hydrogen gas is always serious injury.
present in the vicinity of the battery. ∙ The automatic engine cooling fan (if
Keep all sparks and flames away from so equipped) may come on at any
the battery. time without warning, even if the igni-
∙ Do not allow battery fluid to come into tion switch is in the OFF position and
contact with eyes, skin, clothing or the engine is not running. To avoid in-
painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a jury, keep hands and other objects
corrosive sulfuric acid solution which away from it.
can cause severe burns. If the fluid
should come into contact with any-
thing, immediately flush the con-
tacted area with water.
∙ Keep battery out of the reach of
children.
∙ The booster battery must be rated at
12 volts. Use of an improperly rated
battery can damage your vehicle.

∙ Make sure the jumper cables do not
touch moving parts in the engine
compartment and that the cable
clamps do not contact any other
metal.
4. Start the engine of the booster vehicle
and let it run for a few minutes.
5. Keep the engine speed of the booster
vehicle at about 2,000 rpm and start
the engine of the vehicle being jump
started.
CAUTION
LCE2223
sary electrical systems (lights, heater, Do not keep the starter motor engaged
WARNING for more than 10 seconds. If the engine
air conditioner, etc.).
Always follow the instructions below. does not start right away, place the ig-
Failure to do so could result in damage 3. Connect the jumper cables in the se- nition switch in the OFF position and
to the charging system and cause per- quence illustrated (䊊
A ,䊊
B ,䊊
C ,䊊
D ). wait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again.
sonal injury. 6. After starting the engine, carefully dis-
CAUTION connect the negative cable and then
1. If the booster battery is in another ve-
∙ Always connect positive (⫹) to posi- the positive cable.
hicle, position the 2 vehicles to bring
tive (⫹) and negative (⫺) to body
their batteries near each other.
ground (for example, strut mounting
Do not allow the two vehicles to bolt, engine lift bracket, etc.) — not to
touch. the battery.
2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift
lever to P (Park). Switch off all unneces-

PUSH STARTING IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS
CAUTION WARNING 2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all the
windows, move the heater or air condi-
∙ Do not push start this vehicle. The ∙ Do not continue to drive if your vehicle tioner temperature control to maxi-
3-way catalyst may be damaged. overheats. Doing so could cause en- mum hot and fan control to high
gine damage or a vehicle fire. speed.
∙ Automatic transmission models can-
not be push-started or tow-started. ∙ To avoid the danger of being scalded, 3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen
Attempting to do so may cause trans- never remove the radiator cap while
for steam or coolant escaping from the
mission damage. the engine is still hot. When the radia-
radiator before opening the hood. If
tor cap is removed, pressurized hot
∙ For manual transmission models, steam or coolant is escaping, turn off
water will spurt out, possibly causing
never try to start the vehicle by tow- the engine. Do not open the hood fur-
serious injury.
ing it. When the engine starts, the for- ther until no steam or coolant can be
ward surge could cause the vehicle to ∙ Do not open the hood if steam is com- seen.
collide with the tow vehicle. ing out.
4. Open the engine hood.
If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by
an extremely high temperature gauge WARNING
reading), or if you feel a lack of engine
power, detect abnormal noise, etc. take the If steam or water is coming from the
following steps. engine, stand clear to prevent getting
burned.
1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, ap-
ply the parking brake and move the 5. Visually check drive belts for damage
shift lever to N (Neutral) (manual trans- or looseness. Also check if the cooling
mission) or to P (Park) (automatic trans- fan is running. The radiator hoses and
mission). radiator should not leak water. If cool-
Do not stop the engine. ant is leaking, the water pump belt is
missing or loose, or the cooling fan
does not run, stop the engine.

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE
When towing your vehicle, all jurisdictional For additional information, refer to “Flat
WARNING
and local regulations for towing must be towing — 4WD with automatic transmis-
Be careful not to allow your hands, hair, followed. Incorrect towing equipment sion,” “Flat towing — 2WD with automatic
jewelry or clothing to come into contact could damage your vehicle. Towing in- transmission” and “Flat towing — 2WD/4WD
with, or get caught in, engine belts or structions are available from a NISSAN with manual transmission” in the “Technical
the engine cooling fan. The engine cool- dealer. Local service operators are gener- and consumer information” section of this
ing fan can start at any time. ally familiar with the applicable laws and manual.
procedures for towing. To assure proper
6. After the engine cools down, check the
towing and to prevent accidental damage TOWING RECOMMENDED BY
coolant level in the engine coolant res- NISSAN
to your vehicle, NISSAN recommends hav-
ervoir tank with the engine running.
ing a service operator tow your vehicle. It is NISSAN recommends towing your vehicle
Add coolant to the engine coolant res-
advisable to have the service operator based upon the type of drivetrain. For addi-
ervoir tank if necessary. Have your ve-
carefully read the following precautions: tional information, refer to the diagrams in
hicle repaired. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser- this section to ensure that your vehicle is
vice. WARNING properly towed.
∙ Never ride in a vehicle that is being
towed.
∙ Never get under your vehicle after it
has been lifted by a tow truck.
CAUTION
∙ When towing, make sure that the
transmission, axles, steering system
and powertrain are in working condi-
tion. If any of these conditions apply,
dollies or a flatbed tow truck must be
used.
∙ Always attach safety chains before
towing.

LCE2141
Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) models
with automatic transmission
NISSAN recommends that towing dollies
be used when towing your vehicle or place
the vehicle on a flatbed truck as illustrated.
CAUTION
Never tow 4WD models equipped with
an automatic transmission with any of
the wheels on the ground as this may
cause serious and expensive damage
to the transfer case and transmission.

CAUTION
Failure to follow these guidelines can
result in severe transmission damage.
∙ If you have to tow manual transmis-
sion models with the rear wheels on
the ground (if you do not use towing
dollies) or four wheels on the ground:
– Always release the parking brake.
– Move the transmission shift lever
to the N (Neutral) position
– For 4WD vehicles, always tow with
LCE2310
the transfer case in the 2 HI
position.
Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) models Your vehicle speed should never exceed
60 mph (97 km/h) when towing your ve- – Observe the following restricted
with manual transmission towing speeds and distances for
hicle. After towing 500 miles, start and idle
NISSAN recommends that towing dollies the engine with the transmission in N (Neu- manual transmission models only:
be used when towing your vehicle or place tral) for two minutes. Failure to idle the en- Speed: Below 60 mph (97 km/h)
the vehicle on a flatbed truck as illustrated. gine after every 500 miles of towing may
cause damage to the transmission’s inter- Distance: Less than 500 miles
If you must use a pull behind tow truck put (805 km)
nal parts.
the manual transmission in N (Neutral).
When towing long distances or speeds in
For 4WD vehicles, always tow with the excess of 60 mph (97 km/h), remove the
transfer case in the 2 HI position. propeller shaft before towing to prevent
damage to the transmission. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
more information.

– Place the ignition switch in the OFF
position, and secure the steering
wheel in a straight-ahead position
with a rope or similar device. Never
secure the steering wheel by plac-
ing the ignition switch in the LOCK
position. This may damage the
steering lock mechanism (for
models with a steering lock
mechanism).
LCE2311
Two-Wheel Drive models with CAUTION
automatic transmission ∙ Never tow automatic transmission
NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be models with the rear wheels on the
towed with the driving (rear) wheels off the ground or four wheels on the ground
ground or place the vehicle on a flatbed (forward or backward), as this may
truck as illustrated. cause serious and expensive damage
to the transmission. If it is necessary
to tow the vehicle with the front
wheels raised always use towing dol-
lies under the rear wheels.
∙ When towing automatic transmission
models with the front wheels on the
ground or on towing dollies:

– Move the transmission shift lever
to the N (Neutral) position
– Observe the following restricted
towing speeds and distances for
manual transmission models only:
Speed: Below 60 mph (97 km/h)
Distance: Less than 500 miles
(805 km)
When towing long distances or speeds in
excess of 60 mph (97 km/h), remove the
propeller shaft before towing to prevent
damage to the transmission. For additional
LCE2310
information, it is recommended that you
Two-Wheel Drive models with gine after every 500 miles of towing may visit a NISSAN dealer.
manual transmission cause damage to the transmission’s inter-
nal parts. VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a
NISSAN recommends that towing dollies stuck vehicle)
be used when towing your vehicle or place CAUTION
the vehicle on the flatbed truck as illus- There are two options to recover a stuck
Failure to follow these guidelines can vehicle: pulling and rocking. For additional
trated. result in severe transmission damage.
information regarding these options,
If you must use a pull behind tow truck put ∙ If you have to tow manual transmis- please refer to the following sections.
the manual transmission in N (Neutral). sion models with the rear wheels on
Your vehicle speed should never exceed the ground (if you do not use towing
60 mph (97 km/h) when towing your ve- dollies) or four wheels on the ground:
hicle. After towing 500 miles, start and idle – Always release the parking brake.
the engine with the transmission in N (Neu-
tral) for two minutes. Failure to idle the en-

Pulling a stuck vehicle If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, 4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and
etc., use a tow strap or other device de- backward.
WARNING signed specifically for vehicle recovery. Al-
∙ Shift back and forth between R (Re-
ways follow the manufacturer’s instruc-
To avoid vehicle damage, serious per- verse) and D (Drive) (automatic trans-
tions for the recovery device.
sonal injury or death when recovering a mission models) or 1st (Low) and R
stuck vehicle: Rocking a stuck vehicle (Reverse) (manual transmission
models).
∙ Contact a professional towing service
to recover the vehicle if you have any WARNING ∙ Apply the accelerator as little as pos-
questions regarding the recovery ∙ Stand clear of a stuck vehicle. sible to maintain the rocking motion.
procedure. ∙ Release the accelerator pedal before
∙ Do not spin your tires at high speed.
∙ Attach recovery devices only to main This could cause them to explode and shifting between R and D (automatic
structural members of the vehicle or result in serious injury. Parts of your transmission models) or 1st and R
the recovery hooks. vehicle could also overheat and be (manual transmission models).
∙ Do not use the vehicle tie-downs to damaged. ∙ Do not spin the tires above 34 mph
tow or free a stuck vehicle. If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, (55 km/h).
∙ Only use devices specifically designed etc., use the following procedure: 5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a
for vehicle recovery and follow the 1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control few tries, contact a professional towing
manufacturer’s instructions. (VDC) system. service to remove the vehicle.
∙ Always pull the recovery device 2. Make sure the area in front and behind
straight out from the front of the ve- the vehicle is clear of obstructions.
hicle. Never pull at an angle.
3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to
∙ Route recovery devices so they do not clear an area around the front tires.
touch any part of the vehicle except
the attachment point.

7 Appearance and care
Cleaning exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Air fresheners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Floor mats (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Removing spots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Most common factors contributing to
Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 vehicle corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Aluminum alloy wheels (if so equipped) . . . . . . . 7-3 Environmental factors influence the
Chrome parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 rate of corrosion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Tire dressings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Protect your vehicle from corrosion . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Cleaning interior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
CLEANING EXTERIOR
In order to maintain the appearance of WASHING ∙ Avoid using tight-napped or rough

your vehicle, it is important to take proper
Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty cloths, such as washing mitts. Care
care of it.
of water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly us- must be taken when removing
To protect the paint surfaces, wash your ing a mild soap, a special vehicle soap or caked-on dirt or other foreign sub-
vehicle as soon as you can: stances so the paint surface is not
general purpose dishwashing liquid mixed
scratched or damaged.
∙ After a rainfall to prevent possible dam- with clean, lukewarm (never hot) water.
age from acid rain. Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of
CAUTION clean water.
∙ After driving on coastal roads.
∙ Do not use car washes that use acid in Inside edges, seams and folds on the
∙ When contaminants such as soot, bird the detergent. Some car washes, es-
droppings, tree sap, metal particles or doors, hatches and hood are particularly
pecially brushless ones, use some vulnerable to the effects of road salt. There-
bugs get on the paint surface. acid for cleaning. The acid may react fore, these areas must be cleaned regularly.
∙ When dust or mud builds up on the sur- with some plastic vehicle compo- Take care that the drain holes in the lower
face. nents, causing them to crack. This
edge of the door are open. Spray water
could affect their appearance, and
Whenever possible, store or park your ve- under the body and in the wheel wells to
also could cause them not to function
hicle inside a garage or in a covered area. properly. Always check with your car loosen the dirt and wash away road salt.
When it is necessary to park outside, park in wash to confirm that acid is not used. A damp chamois can be used to dry the
a shady area or protect the vehicle with a ∙ Do not wash the vehicle with strong vehicle to avoid water spots.
body cover. household soap, strong chemical de- WAXING
Be careful not to scratch the paint sur- tergents, gasoline or solvents.
face when putting on or removing the ∙ Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun- Regular waxing protects the paint surface
body cover. light or while the vehicle body is hot, and helps retain new vehicle appearance.
as the surface may become Polishing is recommended to remove
water-spotted. built-up wax residue and to avoid a weath-
ered appearance before re-applying wax.
A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing
the proper product.
7-2 Appearance and care

∙ Wax your vehicle only after a thorough GLASS CAUTION
washing. Follow the instructions sup-
plied with the wax. Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and Follow the directions below to avoid
dust film from the glass surfaces. It is nor- staining or discoloring the wheels:
∙ Do not use a wax containing any abra- mal for glass to become coated with a film
sives, cutting compounds or cleaners after the vehicle is parked in the hot sun. ∙ Do not use a cleaner that uses strong
that may damage the vehicle finish. Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will easily acid or alkali contents to clean the
remove this film. wheels.
Machine compounding or aggressive pol-
∙ Do not apply wheel cleaners to the
ishing on a base coat/clear coat paint fin- CAUTION wheels when they are hot. The wheel
ish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks. temperature should be the same as
When cleaning the inside of the win-
REMOVING SPOTS dows, do not use sharp-edged tools, ambient temperature.
abrasive cleaners or chlorine-based ∙ Rinse the wheel to completely remove
Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust,
disinfectant cleaners. They could dam- the cleaner within 15 minutes after
insects, and tree sap as quickly as possible age the electrical conductors, radio an- the cleaner is applied.
from the surface of the paint to avoid last- tenna elements or rear window de-
ing damage or staining. Special cleaning froster elements. CHROME PARTS
products are available at a NISSAN dealer
or any automotive accessory store. It is ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS (if so Clean all chrome parts regularly with a
recommended that you visit a NISSAN equipped) non-abrasive chrome polish to maintain
dealer for these products. the finish.
Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge
UNDERBODY dampened in a mild soap solution, espe- TIRE DRESSINGS
cially during winter months in areas where
In areas where road salt is used in winter, it NISSAN does not recommend the use of
road salt is used. If not removed, road salt
is necessary to clean the underbody regu- tire dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a
can discolor the wheels.
larly in order to prevent dirt and salt from coating to the tires to help reduce discolor-
building up and causing the acceleration of ation of the rubber. If a tire dressing is ap-
corrosion on the underbody and suspen- plied to the tires, it may react with the coat-
sion. Before the winter period and again in ing and form a compound. This compound
the spring, the underseal must be checked may come off the tire while driving and
and, if necessary, re-treated. stain the vehicle paint.
Appearance and care 7-3
CLEANING INTERIOR
If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the Occasionally remove loose dust from the CAUTION
following precautions: interior trim, plastic parts and seats using a
vacuum cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe ∙ Never use benzine, thinner or any
∙ Use a water-based tire dressing. The similar material.
the vinyl and leather (if so equipped) sur-
coating on the tire dissolves more easily
faces with a clean, soft cloth dampened in ∙ Small dirt particles can be abrasive
than with an oil-based tire dressing.
mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a and damaging to leather surfaces
∙ Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help dry, soft cloth. and should be removed promptly. Do
prevent it from entering the tire not use saddle soap, car waxes, pol-
Regular care and cleaning is required in
tread/grooves (where it would be diffi- ishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents,
order to maintain the appearance of the
cult to remove). detergents or ammonia-based clean-
leather (if so equipped).
∙ Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry ers as they may damage the leather’s
Before using any fabric protector, read the natural finish.
towel. Make sure the tire dressing is
manufacturer’s recommendations. Some
completely removed from the tire ∙ Never use fabric protectors unless
fabric protectors contain chemicals that
tread/grooves. recommended by the manufacturer.
may stain or bleach the seat material.
∙ Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom- ∙ Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on
Use a cloth dampened only with water to
mended by the tire dressing manufac- meter or gauge lens covers. It may
clean the meter and gauge lens.
turer. damage the lens cover.
WARNING
Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot
steam cleaners) on the seat. This can
damage the seat or occupant classifi-
cation sensor. This can also affect the
operation of the air bag system and re-
sult in serious personal injury.

AIR FRESHENERS ∙ Use only Genuine NISSAN floor mats,
Most air fresheners use a solvent that or equivalent floor mats, that are spe-
could affect the vehicle interior. If you use cifically designed for use in your ve-
an air freshener, take the following precau- hicle model and model year.
tions: ∙ Properly position the mats in the
∙ Hanging-type air fresheners can cause floorwell using the floor mat position-
permanent discoloration when they ing hook. For additional information,
contact vehicle interior surfaces. Place refer to "Floor mat installation" in this
the air freshener in a location that al- section.
lows it to hang free and not contact an ∙ Make sure the floor mat does not in-
interior surface. terfere with pedal operation.
∙ Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip ∙ Periodically check the floor mats to
on the vents. These products can cause make sure they are properly installed.
LAI2085
immediate damage and discoloration
when spilled on interior surfaces. FLOOR MATS (if so equipped) ∙ After cleaning the vehicle interior,
check the floor mats to make sure
Carefully read and follow the manufactur- they are properly installed.
WARNING
er’s instructions before using the air fresh-
eners. To avoid potential pedal interference The use of Genuine NISSAN floor mats can
that may result in a collision, injury or extend the life of your vehicle carpet and
death: make it easier to clean the interior. Mats
should be maintained with regular clean-
∙ NEVER place a floor mat on top of an- ing and replaced if they become exces-
other floor mat in the driver front po- sively worn.
sition or install them upside down or
backwards.

Floor mat installation parking brake applied, fully apply and
release all pedals. The floor mat must
Your vehicle is equipped with floor mat po- not interfere with pedal operation or
sitioning hook(s). The number and shape of prevent the pedal from returning to its
the floor mat positioning hooks for each normal position.
seating position varies depending on the
vehicle.
dealer for details about installing the floor
When installing Genuine NISSAN floor mats, mats in your vehicle.
follow the installation instructions provided
with the mat and the following:
1. With the ignition in the OFF position, the
shift lever in P (Park) position (auto-
matic transmission models) or the shift
lever in the N (Neutral) position (manual LAI2042
transmission models) and with the Positioning hooks
parking brake fully applied, position the The illustration shows the location of the
floor mat in the floorwell so that the floor mat positioning hooks.
floor mat grommet holes are aligned
with the hook(s). SEAT BELTS
2. Secure the grommet holes into the The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping
hook(s) and ensure that the floor mat is them with a sponge dampened in a mild
properly positioned. soap solution. Allow the belts to dry com-
3. Make sure the floor mat does not inter- pletely in the shade before using them. For
fere with pedal operation. With the igni- additional information, refer to “Seat belt
tion still in the OFF position, the shift maintenance” in the “Safety—Seats, seat
lever in the P (Park) position (automatic belts and supplemental restraint system”
transmission models) or the shift lever section of this manual.
in the N (Neutral) position (manual
transmission models) and with the
CORROSION PROTECTION
WARNING MOST COMMON FACTORS freezing and where atmospheric pollution

CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE exists and road salt is used.
Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in
the retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye or CORROSION Temperature
chemical solvents to clean the seat Most vehicle corrosion is caused by: High temperatures accelerate the rate of
belts, since these materials may se-
∙ The accumulation of moisture- corrosion to those parts which are not well
verely weaken the seat belt webbing.
retaining dirt and debris in body panel ventilated.
sections, cavities, and other areas. Air pollution
∙ Damage to paint and other protective Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in
coatings caused by gravel and stone the air in coastal areas, or heavy road salt
chips or minor traffic collisions. use accelerates the corrosion process.
ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS Road salt also accelerates the disintegra-
tion of paint surfaces.
INFLUENCE THE RATE OF
CORROSION PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM
CORROSION
Moisture
∙ Wash and wax your vehicle often to
Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on keep the vehicle clean.
the vehicle body underside can accelerate
corrosion. Wet floor coverings will not dry ∙ Always check for minor damage to the
completely inside the vehicle and should paint and repair it as soon as possible.
be removed for drying to avoid floor panel ∙ Keep drain holes at the bottom of the
corrosion. doors open to avoid water accumula-
Relative humidity tion.
Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of ∙ Check the underbody for accumulation

high relative humidity, especially those ar- of sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with
eas where the temperatures stay above water as soon as possible.

CAUTION
∙ NEVER remove dirt, sand or other de-
bris from the passenger compart-
ment by washing it out with a hose.
Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner or
broom.
∙ Never allow water or other liquids to
come in contact with electronic com-
ponents inside the vehicle as this may
damage them.
Chemicals used for road surface de-icing
are extremely corrosive. They accelerate
corrosion and deterioration of underbody
components such as the exhaust system,
fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor pan
and fenders.
In winter, the underbody must be
cleaned periodically.
For additional protection against rust and
corrosion, which may be required in some
areas, it is recommended that you consult
a NISSAN dealer.

8 Do-it-yourself
Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 Replacing spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17

Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 Air cleaner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6 Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Changing engine coolant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 Brakes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8 Fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
5-speed Automatic Transmission Passenger compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
(if so equipped) Fluid (ATF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11 Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Power Steering Fluid (PSF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11 Key fob (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Brake and clutch (if so equipped) fluid . . . . . . . . . . 8-12 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12 Headlights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Clutch (if so equipped) fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12 Fog lights (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28
Windshield-washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13 Exterior and interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
Windshield-washer fluid reservoir. . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13 Wheels and tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14 Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15 Tire labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
Variable voltage control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16 Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38
Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16 Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39
Spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17 Changing wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-40
MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS
When performing any inspection or main-

∙ Always wear eye protection whenever ∙ Avoid contact with used engine oil and
tenance work on your vehicle, always take you work on your vehicle. coolant. Improperly disposed engine
care to prevent serious accidental injury to oil, engine coolant and/or other vehicle
yourself or damage to the vehicle. The fol- ∙ If you must run the engine in an en-
fluids can damage the environment. Al-
lowing are general precautions which closed space such as a garage, be sure
ways conform to local regulations for
should be closely observed. there is proper ventilation for exhaust
disposal of vehicle fluid.
gases to escape.
WARNING ∙ Never leave the engine or the trans-
∙ Never get under the vehicle while it is
mission related component harness
∙ Park the vehicle on a level surface, ap- supported only by a jack. If it is neces-
connector disconnected while the ig-
ply the parking brake securely and sary to work under the vehicle, sup-
nition switch is in the ON position.
block the wheels to prevent the ve- port it with safety stands.
hicle from moving. For manual trans- ∙ Never connect or disconnect the bat-
∙ Keep smoking materials, flame and
mission models, move the shift lever tery or any transistorized component
sparks away from the fuel tank and
to N (Neutral). For Automatic Trans- while the ignition switch is in the ON
battery.
mission (A/T) move the shift lever to P position.
∙ On gasoline engine models, the fuel
(Park) This “Do-it-yourself ” section gives instruc-
filter or fuel lines should be serviced
∙ Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF or because the fuel lines are under high tions regarding only those items which are
LOCK position when performing any pressure even when the engine is off. relatively easy for an owner to perform.
parts replacement or repairs. It is recommended that you visit a A Genuine NISSAN service manual is also
∙ If you must work with the engine run- NISSAN dealer for this service. available. For additional information, refer
ning, keep your hands, clothing, hair to “Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order
and tools away from moving fans, CAUTION information” in the “Technical and con-
belts and any other moving parts. ∙ Do not work under the hood while the sumer information” section of this manual.
∙ It is advisable to secure or remove any engine is hot. Turn the engine off and
You should be aware that incomplete or
loose clothing and remove any jew- wait until it cools down.
improper servicing may result in operating
elry, such as rings, watches, etc. be- difficulties or excessive emissions, and
fore working on your vehicle. could affect warranty coverage. If in doubt
about any servicing, it is recommended
that you have it done by a NISSAN dealer.
8-2 Do-it-yourself
ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK
LOCATIONS
QR25DE engine
2. Fuse/Fusible link box
3. Fuse box
4. Air cleaner
5. Engine oil filler cap
6. Engine oil dipstick
fluid reservoir
8. Drive belt location
9. Radiator cap
11. Battery
12. Engine coolant reservoir
WDI0643
Do-it-yourself 8-3
VQ40DE engine
2. Fuse/Fusible link box
3. Fuse box
4. Engine oil filler cap
5. Engine oil dipstick
fluid reservoir
7. Air cleaner
8. Drive belt location
9. Radiator cap
11. Battery
12. Engine coolant reservoir
LII0167
8-4 Do-it-yourself
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
The engine cooling system is filled at the CAUTION ∙ The life expectancy of the factory-fill
factory with a pre-diluted mixture of 50% coolant is 105,000 miles (168,000 km)
Genuine NISSAN Long Life ∙ Never use any cooling system addi-
or 7 years. Mixing any other type of
Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) and 50% water to tives such as radiator sealer. Additives
coolant other than Genuine NISSAN
provide year-round antifreeze and coolant may clog the cooling system and
Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue),
protection. The antifreeze solution con- cause damage to the engine, trans-
including Genuine NISSAN Long Life
tains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Addi- mission and/or cooling system.
Antifreeze/Coolant (green), or the use
tional engine cooling system additives are ∙ When adding or replacing coolant, be of non-distilled water will reduce the
not necessary. sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long life expectancy of the factory-fill cool-
Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or ant. For additional information, refer
WARNING equivalent. Genuine NISSAN Long Life to the "Maintenance and schedules"
Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is pre- section of this manual.
∙ Never remove the radiator or coolant diluted to provide antifreeze protec-
reservoir cap when the engine is hot. tion to -34° F (-37° C). If additional
Wait until the engine and radiator cool freeze protection is needed due to
down. Serious burns could be caused weather where you operate your ve-
by high pressure fluid escaping from hicle, add Genuine NISSAN Long Life
the radiator. For additional informa- Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) concen-
tion on precautions, refer to “If your trate following the directions on the
vehicle overheats” in the “In case of container. If an equivalent coolant
emergency” section of this manual. other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life
∙ The radiator is equipped with a pres- Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is used, fol-
sure type radiator cap. To prevent en- low the coolant manufacturer’s in-
gine damage, use only a Genuine structions to maintain minimum anti-
NISSAN radiator cap. freeze protection to -34° F (-37° C). The
use of other types of coolant solu-
tions other than Genuine NISSAN Long
Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or
equivalent may damage the engine
cooling system.
Do-it-yourself 8-5
This vehicle contains Genuine NISSAN Long WARNING
Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue). The life ex-
pectancy of the factory-fill coolant is ∙ To avoid the danger of being scalded,
105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 7 years. Mixing never change the coolant when the
any other type of coolant or the use of engine is hot.
non-distilled water will reduce the life ex- ∙ Never remove the radiator or engine
pectancy of the factory-fill coolant. For ad- coolant reservoir cap when the en-
ditional information, refer to the "Mainte- gine is hot. Serious burns could be
nance and schedules" section of this caused by high pressure fluid escap-
manual. ing from the radiator.
If the cooling system frequently requires ∙ Avoid direct skin contact with used
coolant, it is recommended that you visit coolant. If skin contact is made, wash
a NISSAN dealer for this service. thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner
LDI2831
as soon as possible.
For additional information on the location
CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT ∙ Keep coolant out of the reach of chil-
of the engine coolant reservoir, refer to “En-
dren and pets.
LEVEL gine compartment check locations” in this
section. Engine coolant must be disposed of prop-
Check the coolant level in the reservoir
erly. Check your local regulations.
when the engine is cold. If the coolant CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT
level is below the MIN level 䊊 B , add coolant
to the MAX level 䊊A . If the reservoir is empty, A NISSAN dealer can change the engine
check the coolant level in the radiator coolant. The service procedure can be
when the engine is cold. If there is insuffi- found in the NISSAN Service Manual.
cient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiator
Improper servicing can result in reduced
with coolant up to the filler opening and
also add it to the reservoir up to the MAX heater performance and engine over-
level 䊊A . heating.
8-6 Do-it-yourself
ENGINE OIL
LDI0437 LDI0467 LDI0371

VQ40DE QR25DE 5. Remove the dipstick again and check
CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL the oil level. It should be between the H
(High) and L (Low) marks 䊊 B . This is the
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
apply the parking brake. normal operating oil level range. If the
oil level is below the L (Low) mark 䊊 A ,
2. Start the engine and let it idle until it remove the oil filler cap and pour rec-
reaches operating temperature. ommended oil through the opening.
3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than Do not overfill 䊊 C .
10 minutes for the oil to drain back 6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.
into the oil pan.
It is normal to add some oil between oil
4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. maintenance intervals or during the
Reinsert it all the way.
break-in period, depending on the sever-
ity of operating conditions.
Do-it-yourself 8-7
CAUTION
Oil level should be checked regularly.
Operating the engine with an insuffi-
cient amount of oil can damage the en-
gine, and such damage is not covered
by warranty.
LDI2832 LDI2833
VQ40DE QR25DE
CHANGING ENGINE OIL 2. Start the engine and let it idle until it
reaches operating temperature, then
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and turn it off.
apply the parking brake.
3. Remove the oil filler cap 䊊
A by turning it
counterclockwise.
8-8 Do-it-yourself
4. Place a large drain pan under the drain CAUTION 8. Start the engine. Check for leakage
plug 䊊B. around the drain plug and oil filter. Cor-
Be careful not to burn yourself. The en- rect as required.
5. Remove the drain plug with a wrench gine oil may be hot.
by turning it counterclockwise and 9. Turn the engine off and wait more than
completely drain the oil. 6. Clean and reinstall the drain plug and a 10 minutes. Check the oil level with the
new washer. Securely tighten the drain dipstick. Add engine oil if necessary.
If the oil filter is to be changed, remove plug with a wrench. Do not use exces-
and replace it at this time. For addi- sive force.
tional information, refer to “Changing
Drain plug tightening torque:
engine oil filter” in this section.
25 ft-lb (34 N·m)
∙ Waste oil must be disposed of prop-
7. Refill engine with recommended oil
erly. through the oil filler opening, then install
∙ Check your local regulations. the oil filler cap securely.
For additional information on drain
WARNING and refill capacity, refer to “Recom-
∙ Prolonged and repeated contact with mended fluids/lubricants and capaci-
used engine oil may cause skin ties” in the “Technical and consumer
cancer. information” section of this manual.
∙ Try to avoid direct skin contact with The drain and refill capacity depends
used oil. If skin contact is made, wash on the oil temperature and drain time.
thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner Use these specifications for reference
as soon as possible. only. Always use the dipstick to deter-
mine when the proper amount of oil is
∙ Keep used engine oil out of reach of in the engine.
children.
Do-it-yourself 8-9
6. Wipe the engine oil filter sealing surface
with a clean rag.
CAUTION
Be sure to remove any old gasket mate-
rial remaining on the sealing surface of
the engine. Failure to do so could lead to
engine damage.
7. Coat the gasket on the new filter with
clean engine oil.
8. Screw on the oil filter until a slight resis-
tance is felt, then tighten an additional
2/3 turn.
LDI2865
QR25DE 9. Start the engine and check for leakage
3. Place a large drain pan under the oil around the oil filter. Correct as required.
filter. 10. Install the plate covering the oil filter.
4. Unscrew 䊊 A the plate covering the oil (For VQ40DE engine)
filter exposing the filter. (For VQ40DE 11. Turn the engine off and wait more than
engine) 10 minutes. Check the oil level. Add en-
5. Loosen the oil filter 䊊
B with an oil filter gine oil if necessary.
LDI2834
wrench by turning it counterclockwise.
VQ40DE Then remove the oil filter by turning it
CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER by hand.
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
CAUTION
apply the parking brake.
Be careful not to burn yourself. The en-
2. Turn the engine off. gine oil may be hot.
8-10 Do-it-yourself
5-SPEED AUTOMATIC POWER STEERING FLUID (PSF)
TRANSMISSION (if so equipped)
FLUID (ATF)
When checking or replacement is required, CAUTION
it is recommend that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service. ∙ DO NOT OVERFILL.
∙ Recommended fluid is Genuine
CAUTION NISSAN PSF-II or equivalent
∙ Use Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF. If
Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF is not
available, Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF
may also be used.
∙ Using automatic transmission fluid
other than Genuine NISSAN Matic S
ATF or Matic J ATF (or their equiva-
lents) will cause deterioration in
driveability and automatic transmis- WDI0256
sion durability, and may damage the
The fluid level should be checked using the
automatic transmission, which is not
HOT MAX range on the power steering fluid
covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle
reservoir at fluid temperatures of 122° -
Limited Warranty.
176°F (50° - 80°C) or using the COLD MAX
The specified automatic transmission fluid range on the power steering fluid reservoir
is also described on caution labels located at fluid temperatures of 32° - 86°F (0° - 30°C).
in the engine compartment. If the fluid is at or below the MIN line, add
Genuine NISSAN PSF-II or equivalent to HOT
MAX or COLD MAX depending on system
fluid temperature. Remove the cap and fill
through the opening.
Do-it-yourself 8-11
BRAKE AND CLUTCH (if so equipped)
FLUID
For additional information on brake fluid

specification, refer to “Recommended
fluids/lubricants and capacities” in the
“Technical and consumer information” sec-
WARNING
∙ Use only new fluid from a sealed con-
tainer. Old, inferior or contaminated
fluid may damage the brake and
clutch (if so equipped) systems. The
use of improper fluids can damage
the brake and clutch system and af-
fect the vehicle’s stopping ability.
LDI2835 LDI2835
∙ Clean the filler cap before removing.
BRAKE FLUID CLUTCH (if so equipped) FLUID
∙ Brake and clutch fluid is poisonous
and should be stored carefully in Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir. If Check the fluid level in the reservoir. The
marked containers out of reach of the fluid level is below the MIN line 䊊
B or the brake fluid reservoir is shared with the
children. brake warning light comes on, add Genu- clutch hydraulic system for manual trans-
ine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or missions. If the level is below the MIN line 䊊
B,
CAUTION equivalent DOT 3 fluid up to the MAX line 䊊 A . or the brake warning light comes on, add
If fluid must be added frequently, the sys- Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake
Do not spill the fluid on any painted sur- tem should be checked. It is recom- Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 fluid up to the
faces. This will damage the paint. If fluid mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for MAX line 䊊 A . If fluid must be added fre-
is spilled, immediately wash the surface this service. quently, the system should be checked. It is
with water. recommended that you visit a NISSAN
8-12 Do-it-yourself
WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID
Add a washer solvent to the washer for

∙ Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates
better cleaning. In the winter season, add a with water to the manufacturer’s rec-
windshield-washer antifreeze. Follow the ommended levels before pouring the
manufacturer’s instructions for the mix- fluid into the windshield-washer res-
ture ratio. ervoir. Do not use the windshield-
Refill the reservoir more frequently when washer reservoir to mix the washer
driving conditions require an increased fluid concentrate and water.
amount of windshield-washer fluid.
Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN
Windshield-Washer Concentrate Cleaner &
Antifreeze or equivalent.
CAUTION
LDI3136
∙ Do not substitute engine antifreeze
WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID coolant for windshield-washer solu-
RESERVOIR tion. This may result in damage to the
Fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir paint.
periodically. Add windshield-washer fluid ∙ Do not fill the windshield-washer res-
when the low windshield-washer fluid ervoir with washer fluid concentrates
warning light (if so equipped) comes on. at full strength. Some methyl alcohol
To fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir, based washer fluid concentrates may
lift the cap off the reservoir and pour the permanently stain the grille if spilled
windshield-washer fluid into the reservoir while filling the windshield-washer
opening. reservoir.
Do-it-yourself 8-13
BATTERY
Caution symbols for battery

WARNING
No smoking, No exposed flames, No Do not expose the battery to electrical sparks, flames or smoking. Hydrogen gas generated by the
䊊
1
Sparks battery is explosive. Explosive gases can cause blindness or injury.
Handle the battery cautiously. Always wear eye protection glasses to protect against explosion or
䊊
2 Shield eyes
battery acid.
䊊
3 Keep away from children Never allow children to handle the battery. Keep the battery out of the reach of children.
Do not allow battery fluid to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics, or painted surfaces. Sulfuric acid can
cause blindness or severe burns. After handling the battery or battery cap, do not touch or rub
䊊
4 Battery acid your eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. If the acid contacts your eyes, skin or clothing, immedi-
ately flush with water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention. Battery fluid is acid. If the
battery fluid gets into your eyes or onto your skin, it could cause loss of your eyesight or burns.
䊊
5 Note operating instructions Before handling the battery, read this instruction carefully to ensure correct and safe handling.
Hydrogen gas generated by battery fluid is explosive. Explosive gases can cause blindness or
䊊
6 Explosive gas
injury.
∙ Keep the battery surface clean and dry. Clean the battery with a solution of baking soda and water.
∙ Make certain the terminal connections are clean and securely tightened.
∙ If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or longer, disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal cable to prevent discharge.
8-14 Do-it-yourself
NOTE: WARNING
Care should be taken to avoid situations ∙ Do not expose the battery to flames,
that can lead to potential battery dis- an electrical spark or a cigarette. Hy-
charge and potential no-start conditions drogen gas generated by the battery
such as: is explosive. Explosive gases can
1. Installation or extended use of elec- cause blindness or injury. Do not allow
battery fluid to contact your skin,
eyes, fabrics or painted surfaces. Sul-
tery power when the engine is not
furic acid can cause blindness or in-
running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD jury. After touching a battery or bat-
players, etc.) tery cap, do not touch or rub your
2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. If
only driven short distances. the acid contacts your eyes, skin or
In these cases, the battery may need to clothing, immediately flush with wa- LDI3302
ter for at least 15 minutes and seek
be charged to maintain battery health. NOTE:
medical attention.
∙ When working on or near a battery, Do not try to open the top of the battery.
always wear suitable eye protection This battery is not equipped with remov-
and remove all jewelry. able vent caps.
∙ Battery posts, terminals and related JUMP STARTING
accessories contain lead and lead
compounds. Wash hands after If jump starting is necessary, refer to “Jump
handling. starting” in the “In case of emergency” sec-
tion of this manual. If the engine does not
∙ Keep battery out of the reach of start by jump starting, the battery may
children. have to be replaced. It is recommended
∙ Do not tip the battery. that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser-
vice.
Do-it-yourself 8-15
VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL DRIVE BELT
SYSTEM
The current sensor 䊊 A is located near the

battery along the negative battery cable. If
you add electrical accessories to your ve-
hicle, be sure to ground them to a suitable
body ground such as the frame or engine
block area.
LDI3300 WDI0639
VQ40DE
CAUTION
1. Power steering fluid pump pulley
∙ Do not ground accessories directly to 2. Automatic belt tensioner pulley
the battery terminal. Doing so will by- 3. Cooling fan pulley
pass the variable voltage control sys- 4. Air conditioner compressor pulley
tem and the vehicle battery may not 5. Crankshaft pulley
charge completely. 6. Generator pulley
∙ Use electrical accessories with the en-
WARNING
gine running to avoid discharging the
vehicle battery. Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF or
LOCK position before servicing drive
Your vehicle is equipped with a variable belt. The engine could rotate
voltage control system. This system mea- unexpectedly.
sures the amount of electrical discharge
from the battery and controls voltage gen-
erated by the generator.
8-16 Do-it-yourself
SPARK PLUGS
1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of un-

usual wear, cuts, fraying or looseness. If
the belt is in poor condition or is loose,
have it replaced or adjusted. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.
2. Have the belt checked regularly for
condition and tension in accordance
with the maintenance schedule found
in the "Maintenance and schedules"
LDI0461 SDI1895
QR25DE REPLACING SPARK PLUGS
1. Power steering fluid pump pulley
2. Water pump pulley Platinum-tipped spark plugs
3. Air conditioner compressor pulley (QR25DE models)
4. Crankshaft pulley
5. Generator pulley It is not necessary to replace platinum-
tipped 䊊A spark plugs as frequently as con-
ventional type spark plugs because they
last much longer. Follow the maintenance
log shown in the "Maintenance and sched-
ules" section of this manual. Do not service
platinum-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or
regapping.
∙ Always replace spark plugs with rec-
ommended or equivalent ones.
Do-it-yourself 8-17
AIR CLEANER
If replacement is required, it is recom-

this service.
Iridium-tipped spark plugs
(VQ40DE models)
It is not necessary to replace iridium-
tipped 䊊A spark plugs as frequently as con-
ventional type spark plugs because they
last much longer. Follow the maintenance
log shown in the "Maintenance and sched-
ules" section of this manual. Do not service
iridium-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or
regapping.
WDI0686 LDI0465
∙ Always replace spark plugs with rec- VQ40DE QR25DE
ommended or equivalent ones. The air cleaner filter should not be cleaned To remove the QR25DE air cleaner filter:
and reused. Replace it according to the
If replacement is required, it is recom-
maintenance log shown in the "Mainte- 1. Unlatch the clips 䊊
A ,䊊
B ,䊊
C .
this service. nance and schedules" section of this 2. Push down half of air cleaner to clear
manual. When replacing the filter, wipe the the bottom retainers.
inside of the air cleaner filter housing and
the cover with a damp cloth. 3. Lift up on half of air cleaner to remove
the air cleaner filter
To remove the VQ40DE air cleaner filter:
䊊
1 Unlatch the clips and remove the air
cleaner cover. Remove the air cleaner
filter.
8-18 Do-it-yourself
WARNING
∙ Operating the engine with the air
cleaner removed can cause you or
others to be burned. The air cleaner
not only cleans the air, it stops the
flame if the engine backfires. If it isn’t
there, and the engine backfires, you
could be burned. Do not drive with the
air cleaner removed, and be careful
when working on the engine with the
air cleaner removed.
∙ Never pour fuel into the throttle body
or attempt to start the engine with
the air cleaner removed. Doing so LDI0442 LDI2047
could result in serious injury. IN-CABIN MICROFILTER 2. Gently lift up on the tab 䊊
1 .
The in-cabin microfilter restricts the entry 3. Pull the filter cover toward you and then
of airborne dust and pollen particles and down 䊊 2 .
reduces some objectionable outside
4. Remove the old filter 䊊
3 .
odors. The filter is located behind the glove
box. For additional information on change
NOTE:
intervals, refer to the "Maintenance and
schedules" section of this manual. The filter is marked with air flow arrows.
To replace the filter, perform the following The end of the filter with the arrow
procedure: should face the rear of the vehicle. The
arrows should face downward.
1. Open the glove box and press in on the
sides so that it will open completely al- 5. Insert the new filter into the housing
lowing it to hang by the cord. and slide it over to the right.
Do-it-yourself 8-19
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
6. Replace the filter cover. The cover will CLEANING

click into place under the tab.
If your windshield is not clear after using
7. Install the glove box door. the windshield-washer or if a wiper blade
chatters when running, wax or other mate-
rial may be on the blade or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a
washer solution or a mild detergent. Your
windshield is clean if beads do not form
when rinsing with clear water.
Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth
soaked in a washer solution or a mild de-
tergent. Then rinse the blades with clear
water. If your windshield is still not clear
LDI2725
after cleaning the blades and using the
wiper, replace the blades. REPLACING
Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.
CAUTION
Worn windshield wiper blades can 1. Lift the wiper arm away from the wind-
damage the windshield and impair shield.
driver vision. 2. Push and hold the release tab 䊊
A , and
then move the wiper blade down 䊊 B
the wiper arm to remove.
3. Remove the wiper blade.
4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the
wiper arm until it clicks into place.
8-20 Do-it-yourself
BRAKES
CAUTION If the brakes do not operate properly, have

the brakes checked. It is recommended
∙ After wiper blade replacement, return that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser-
the wiper arm to its original position; vice.
otherwise it may be damaged when
the hood is opened. Self-adjusting brakes
∙ Make sure the wiper blades contact Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting
the glass; otherwise the arms may be brakes.
damaged from wind pressure.
The front and rear disc-type brakes self-
∙ Worn windshield wiper blades can adjust every time the brake pedal is ap-
damage the windshield and impair plied.
driver vision.
WARNING
Have your brake system checked if the
brake pedal height does not return to
normal. It is recommended that you
Brake pad wear indicators
The disc brake pads on your vehicle have
audible wear indicators. When a brake pad
LDI3120 requires replacement, a high pitched
If you wax the surface of the hood, be care- scraping or screeching sound will be heard
ful not to let wax get into the windshield- when the vehicle is in motion. The noise will
washer nozzle . This may cause clogging or be heard whether or not the brake pedal is
improper windshield-washer operation. If depressed. Have the brakes checked as
wax gets into the nozzle, remove it with a soon as possible if the wear indicator
needle or small pin 䊊1 . sound is heard.
Do-it-yourself 8-21
FUSES
Under some driving or climate conditions,

occasional brake squeak, squeal or other
noise may be heard. Occasional brake
noise during light to moderate stops is nor-
mal and does not affect the function or
performance of the brake system.
Proper brake inspection intervals should
be followed. For additional information re-
garding brake inspections, refer to the ap-
propriate maintenance schedule informa-
tion in the "Maintenance and schedules"
LDI0455 LDI0457
Two types of fuses are used. Type 䊊 A is If a type 䊊
A fuse is used to replace a type 䊊B
used in the fuse boxes in the engine com- fuse, the type 䊊 A fuse will not be level with
partment. Type 䊊B is used in the passenger the fuse pocket as shown in the illustration.
compartment fuse box. This will not affect the performance of the
fuse. Make sure the fuse is installed in the
Type 䊊A fuses are provided as spare fuses.
fuse box securely.
They are stored in the passenger compart-
ment fuse box. Type 䊊 B fuses cannot be installed in the
underhood fuse boxes. Only use type 䊊 A
Type 䊊 fuses can be installed in the engine
A
fuses in the underhood fuse boxes.
compartment and passenger compart-
ment fuse boxes.
8-22 Do-it-yourself
If any electrical equipment does not come
on, check for an open fuse.
1. Be sure the ignition switch and the
headlight switch are OFF.
2. Open the engine hood.
3. Remove the fuse box cover by pushing
the tab and lifting the cover up.
4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.
The fuse puller is located in the center
of the fuse block in the passenger
compartment.
LDI2838 LDI2826
ENGINE COMPARTMENT 5. If the fuse is open 䊊
A , replace it with a
new fuse 䊊 B.
WARNING 6. If a new fuse also opens, have the elec-
Never use a fuse of a higher or lower trical system checked and repaired. It is
amperage rating than that specified on recommended that you visit a NISSAN
the fuse box cover. This could damage dealer for this service.
the electrical system or electronic con- Fusible links
trol units or cause a fire.
If the electrical equipment does not oper-
ate and fuses are in good condition, check
the fusible links. If any of these fusible links
are melted, replace with only Genuine
NISSAN parts.
Do-it-yourself 8-23
If any electrical equipment does not oper-
ate, check for an open fuse.
1. Be sure the ignition switch and the
headlight switch are OFF.
2. Pull the fuse box cover to remove.
3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.
LDI2839 LDI0456
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT 4. If the fuse is open 䊊
A , replace it with an
equivalent good fuse 䊊 B.
WARNING 5. Reverse step 2 to reinstall fuse box
Never use a fuse of a higher or lower cover.
amperage rating than that specified on 6. If a new fuse also opens, have the elec-
the fuse box cover. This could damage trical system checked and repaired. It is
the electrical system or electronic con- recommended that you visit a NISSAN
trol units or cause a fire. dealer for this service.
8-24 Do-it-yourself
BATTERY REPLACEMENT
How to replace the extended storage CAUTION

switch:
Be careful not to allow children to swal-
1. To remove the extended storage low the battery or removed parts.
switch, be sure the ignition switch is in
the OFF or LOCK position.
2. Be sure the headlight switch is in the
OFF position.
3. Remove the fuse box cover.
4. Pinch the locking tabs 䊊 A found on
each side of the storage switch.
5. Pull the storage switch straight out
from the fuse box 䊊
B.
LDI2736
Extended storage switch
If any electrical equipment does not oper-
ate, remove the extended storage switch
and check for an open fuse.
NOTE:
The extended storage switch is used for
long term vehicle storage. Even if the ex-
tended storage switch is broken it is not
necessary to replace it. Replace only the
open fuse in the switch with a new fuse.
Do-it-yourself 8-25
∙ Do not touch the internal circuit and
electric terminals as it could cause a
malfunction.
∙ When changing the battery, do not let
dust or oil get on the key fob.
∙ There is danger of explosion if a lithium
battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace
only with the same or equivalent type.
Recommended battery: CR2025 or equiva-
lent.
䊊
4 Close the lid securely.
5. Press the button, then
the button two or three times to
check the key fob operation.
If the battery is removed for any reason
other than replacement, perform step 5.
∙ An improperly disposed battery can
hurt the environment. Always confirm
local regulations for battery disposal.
LDI2026
∙ The key fob is water-resistant; how-
KEY FOB (if so equipped) 䊊
3 Install a new battery 䊊
C with the “+” fac-
ever, if it does get wet, immediately
ing down. wipe completely dry.
Replace the battery in the key fob as fol-
lows: ∙ Hold the battery by the edges. Holding ∙ The operational range of the key fob
the battery across the contact points
䊊
1 Open the lid using a coin 䊊
A .
will seriously deplete the storage ca-
extends to approximately 33 ft (10 m)
from the vehicle. This range may vary
䊊
2 Remove the battery 䊊
B. pacity. with conditions.
8-26 Do-it-yourself
LIGHTS
FCC Notice: HEADLIGHTS ∙ Aiming is not necessary after replac-

For USA: The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type ing the bulb. When aiming adjustment
This device complies with Part 15 of the which uses a replaceable headlight (halo- is necessary, it is recommended that
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol- gen) bulb. A bulb can be replaced from in- you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
lowing two conditions: (1) This device service.
side the engine compartment without re-
may not cause harmful interference, and
moving the headlight assembly. Fog may temporarily form inside the lens
(2) this device must accept any interfer-
of the exterior lights in the rain or in a car
ence received, including interference
CAUTION wash. A temperature difference between
that may cause undesired operation.
the inside and the outside of the lens
∙ High pressure halogen gas is sealed
Note: causes the fog. This is not a malfunction. If
inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may
large drops of water collect inside the lens,
Changes or modifications not expressly break if the glass envelope is
it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
approved by the party responsible for scratched or the bulb is dropped.
dealer for servicing.
compliance could void the user’s author- ∙ When handling the bulb, do not touch
ity to operate the equipment. the glass envelope.
For Canada: ∙ DO NOT TOUCH THE BULB WITH BARE
This devise complies with Industry HANDS.
Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two ∙ Use the same number and wattage as
conditions: (1) this device may not cause shown in the chart.
interference, and (2) this device must ac- ∙ Do not leave the bulb out of the head-
cept any interference, including interfer- light reflector for a long period of time
ence that may cause undesired opera- as dust, moisture and smoke may en-
tion of the device. ter the headlight body and affect the
performance of the headlight.
Do-it-yourself 8-27
3. Disconnect the electrical connector FOG LIGHTS (if so equipped)
from the rear end of the bulb.
For additional information on fog light bulb
4. Turn the bulb retaining ring 䊊 A counter- replacement, refer to the instructions out-
clockwise until it is free from the head- lined in this section.
light reflector and then remove it.
Replacing the fog light bulb
5. Carefully remove the headlight bulb. Do
not shake or rotate the bulb 䊊B when If fog light bulb replacement is required, it is
removing it. recommended that you visit a NISSAN
Replacing the headlight bulb
1. Insert the bulb. CAUTION
DO NOT TOUCH THE BULB WITH BARE ∙ High pressure halogen gas is sealed
HANDS. inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may
break if the glass envelope is
2. Install and tighten the bulb retainer. scratched or the bulb is dropped.
∙ Be sure the lip of the bulb socket con- ∙ When handling the bulb, do not touch
tacts the headlight body. the glass envelope.
3. Push the electrical connector into the ∙ Use the same number and wattage as
bulb plastic base until it snaps and originally installed as shown in the
stops. chart.
WDI0294 4. Connect the negative (-) battery cable. ∙ Do not leave the bulb out of the fog
light for a long period of time as dust,
Removing the headlight bulb 5. Close the hood.
moisture and smoke may enter the
1. Open the hood. fog light body and affect the perfor-
mance of the fog light.
2. Disconnect the negative (-) battery
cable.
8-28 Do-it-yourself
EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS
Item Wattage (W) Bulb No.*
Headlight assembly
High/Low/Daytime running lights (if so
60/55 HB5
equipped)
Turn/Park 28/8 W28/8W
Side marker 3.8 194
Fog lights* (if so equipped) 55 H11
Map light 8 —
Room light* 8 —
Vanity mirror light (if so equipped)* 2.1 —
High-mounted stop light/Cargo light* 12.8 912
Rear combination light
Turn 27 3156AK LDI0713
Stop/Tail 27/8 3157K 1. Map light
Back-up 18 921 2. Room light
License plate light 5 W5W 3. High-mounted stop light/Cargo
Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information. light
*It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for replacement. 4. License plate light
5. Rear combination light
6. Fog light (if so equipped)
7. Headlight assembly/Daytime run-
ning light
Do-it-yourself 8-29
: Indicates bulb removal
: Indicates bulb installation
LDI0478
Map light
Use a cloth 䊊
1 to protect the housing.
WDI0306
Replacement procedures
All other lights are either type A, B, C or D.
When replacing a bulb, first remove the lens
and/or cover using a cloth and suitable
tool.
8-30 Do-it-yourself
To replace the license plate light:
1. Apply force as shown in image to re-
move tension that locks bulb assembly
to the bumper.
2. Pivot bulb assembly away from bum-
per to release fully.
3. Rotate the bulb retainer as shown in
the image.
4. Pull the bulb out to remove and re-
place.
*Left side assembly is shown. Right
side assembly is mirror.
WDI0300
Rear combination light
LDI3134
License plate light
Do-it-yourself 8-31
WHEELS AND TIRES
If you have a flat tire, refer to “Flat tire” in ing” section, and “Flat tire” in the “In The tire pressures should be
the “In case of emergency” section of case of emergency” section of this checked when the tires are cold. The
this manual. manual. tires are considered COLD after the
TIRE PRESSURE vehicle has been parked for 3 or
Tire inflation pressure
more hours, or driven less than 1 mile
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Check the tire pressures (including (1.6 km) at moderate speeds.
(TPMS) the spare) often and always prior to
This vehicle is equipped with TPMS. It long distance trips. The recom-
monitors tire pressure of all tires ex- mended tire pressure specifications
cept the spare. When the low tire are shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
pressure warning light is lit and the certification label or the Tire and
CHECK TIRE PRES (pressure) warning Loading Information label under the
message is displayed in the odom- “Cold Tire Pressure” heading. The Tire
eter, one or more of your tires is sig- and Loading Information label is af-
nificantly under-inflated. fixed to the driver side center pillar.
Tire pressures should be checked
TPMS will activate only when the ve- regularly because:
hicle is driven at speeds above
16 mph (25 km/h). Also, this system ∙ Most tires naturally lose air over
may not detect a sudden drop in tire time.
pressure (for example, a flat tire while ∙ Tires can lose air suddenly when
driving). driven over potholes or other ob-
For additional information, refer to jects or if the vehicle strikes a
“Low tire pressure warning light” in curb while parking.
the “Instruments and controls” sec-
tion, “Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-
tem (TPMS)” in the “Starting and driv-
8-32 Do-it-yourself
Incorrect tire pressure, including ∙ Before taking a long trip, or
under inflation, may adversely af- whenever you heavily load your
fect tire life and vehicle handling. vehicle, use a tire pressure
gauge to ensure that the tire
WARNING pressures are at the specified
∙ Improperly inflated tires can fail level.
suddenly and cause an ∙ For additional information re-
accident. garding tires, refer to “Impor-
∙ The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating tant Tire Safety Information”
(GVWR) is located on the (US) or “Tire Safety Information”
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certifica- (Canada) in the Warranty Infor-
tion label. The vehicle weight mation Booklet.
capacity is indicated on the Tire
and Loading Information label.
Do not load your vehicle beyond
this capacity. Overloading your
vehicle may result in reduced
tire life, unsafe operating condi-
tions due to premature tire fail-
ure, or unfavorable handling
characteristics and could also
lead to a serious accident. Load-
ing beyond the specified capac-
ity may also result in failure of
other vehicle components.
Do-it-yourself 8-33
䊊
5 Tire size: Refer to “Tire labeling” in
this section.
䊊
6 Spare tire size.
LDI2007
Tire and Loading Information 䊊
4 Cold tire pressure: Inflate the
label tires to this pressure when the
tires are cold. Tires are consid-
䊊
1 Seating capacity: The maximum
ered COLD after the vehicle has
number of occupants that can
been parked for 3 or more hours,
be seated in the vehicle.
or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
䊊
2 Vehicle load limit: Refer to “Ve- at moderate speeds. The rec-
hicle loading information” in the ommended cold tire inflation is
“Technical and consumer infor- set by the manufacturer to pro-
mation” section of this manual. vide the best balance of tire
䊊
3 Original tire size: The size of the wear, vehicle handling, driveabil-
ity, tire noise, etc., up to the vehi-
tires originally installed on the
vehicle at the factory. cle’s GVWR.
8-34 Do-it-yourself
3. Remove the gauge. Size Cold Tire Infla-
4. Read the tire pressure on the tion Pressure
gauge stem and compare to the Front and Rear
specification shown on the Original Tire:
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. label or the 235/75R15
240 kPa, 35 PSI
Tire and Loading Information la- P265/70R16
bel. P265/75R16
P265/60R18
5. Add air to the tire as needed. If
too much air is added, press the Spare Tire: Full size
core of the valve stem briefly
with the tip of the gauge stem to
LDI0393 release pressure. Recheck the
Checking tire pressure pressure and add or release air
as needed.
1. Remove the valve stem cap from
the tire. 6. Install the valve stem cap.
2. Press the pressure gauge 7. Check the pressure of all other
squarely onto the valve stem. Do tires, including the spare.
not press too hard or force the
valve stem sideways, or air will
escape. If the hissing sound of air
escaping from the tire is heard
while checking the pressure, re-
position the gauge to eliminate
this leakage.
Do-it-yourself 8-35
WDI0394 WDI0395
Example Example
TIRE LABELING 䊊
1 Tire size (example: P215/65R15 3. Two-digit number (65): This
Federal law requires tire manufac- 95H) number, known as the aspect
turers to place standardized infor- ratio, gives the tire’s ratio of
1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is de- height to width.
mation on the sidewall of all tires. signed for passenger vehicles
This information identifies and de- (not all tires have this informa- 4. R: The “R” stands for radial.
scribes the fundamental character- tion). 5. Two-digit number (15): This num-
istics of the tire and also provides the
2. Three-digit number (215): This ber is the wheel or rim diameter
Tire Identification Number (TIN) for
number gives the width in milli- in inches.
safety standard certification. The TIN
can be used to identify the tire in meters of the tire from sidewall
case of a recall. edge to sidewall edge.
8-36 Do-it-yourself
6. Two- or three-digit number (95):
This number is the tire’s load in-
dex. It is a measurement of how
much weight each tire can sup-
port. You may not find this infor-
mation on all tires because it is
not required by law.
7. H: Tire speed rating. You should
not drive the vehicle faster than
the tire speed rating.
LDI2786
Example
䊊2 TIN (Tire Identification Number) 3. Two-digit code: Tire size.
for a new tire (example: DOT XX XX 4. Three-digit code: Tire type code
XXX XXXX) (Optional).
1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “De- 5. Four numbers represent the
partment Of Transportation”. week and year the tire was built.
The symbol can be placed For example, the numbers 3103
above, below or to the left or means the 31st week of 2003. If
right of the Tire Identification these numbers are missing then
Number. look on the other sidewall of the
2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s tire.
identification mark.
Do-it-yourself 8-37
䊊
3 Tire ply composition and material Indicates whether the tire requires TYPES OF TIRES
an inner tube (“tube type”) or not
The number of layers or plies of WARNING
(“tubeless”).
rubber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate 䊊
7 The word “radial” ∙ When changing or replacing tires, be
sure all four tires are of the same type
the materials in the tire, which in- The word “radial” is shown if the tire (i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) and
clude steel, nylon, polyester and oth- has radial structure. construction. A NISSAN dealer may be
ers. able to help you with information
䊊
8 Manufacturer or brand name about tire type, size, speed rating and
䊊
4 Maximum permissible inflation
Manufacturer or brand name is
availability.
pressure ∙ Replacement tires may have a lower
shown.
This number is the greatest amount speed rating than the factory
Other Tire-related Terminology equipped tires, and may not match
of air pressure that should be put in the potential maximum vehicle
the tire. Do not exceed the maximum In addition to the many terms that
speed. Never exceed the maximum
permissible inflation pressure. are defined throughout this section, speed rating of the tire.
Intended Outboard Sidewall is (1) the
䊊
5 Maximum load rating sidewall that contains a whitewall, ∙ Replacing tires with those not origi-
This number indicates the maxi- bears white lettering or bears the proper operation of the low tire
mum load in kilograms and pounds manufacturer, brand, and/or model pressure warning system.
that can be carried by the tire. When name molding that is higher or
replacing the tires on the vehicle, al- deeper than the same molding on
the other sidewall of the tire, or (2)
ways use a tire that has the same
the outward facing sidewall of an
load rating as the factory installed
asymmetrical tire that has a particu-
tire. lar side that must always face out-
䊊
6 Term of “tubeless” or “tube type” ward when mounted on a vehicle.
8-38 Do-it-yourself
∙ Always use tires of the same type, Summer tires For additional traction on icy roads, stud-
size, brand, construction and tread ded tires may be used. However, some U.S.
NISSAN specifies summer tires on some states and Canadian provinces prohibit
pattern on all four wheels. Failure to models to provide superior performance
do so may result in a circumference their use. Check local, state and provincial
on dry roads. Summer tire performance is
difference between tires on the front laws before installing studded tires. Skid
substantially reduced in snow and ice.
and rear axles which can cause the and traction capabilities of studded snow
Summer tires do not have the tire traction
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system tires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer
rating “M&S” on the tire sidewall.
to malfunction resulting in personal than that of non-studded snow tires.
injury or death, excessive tire wear If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy
or icy conditions, NISSAN recommends the TIRE CHAINS
and may damage the transmission
and differential gears. use of SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all Use of tire chains may be prohibited ac-
four wheels. cording to location. Check the local laws
∙ For additional information regarding
Snow tires before installing tire chains. When installing
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety
tire chains, make sure they are the proper
Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor-
If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to size for the tires on your vehicle and are
mation” (Canada) in the Warranty In-
select tires equivalent in size and load rat- installed according to the chain manufac-
formation Booklet.
ing to the original equipment tires. If you do turer’s suggestions. Use only SAE class “S”
All season tires not, it can adversely affect the safety and chains. Class “S” chains are used on ve-
handling of your vehicle. hicles with restricted tire to vehicle clear-
NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some ance. Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains
models to provide good performance all Generally, snow tires have lower speed rat- are designed to meet the minimum clear-
year, including snowy and icy road condi- ings than factory equipped tires and may ances between the tire and the closest ve-
tions. All Season tires are identified by ALL not match the potential maximum vehicle hicle suspension or body component re-
SEASON and/or M&S on the tire sidewall. speed. Never exceed the maximum speed quired to accommodate the use of a
Snow tires have better snow traction than rating of the tire. winter traction device (tire chains or
All Season tires and may be more appropri- If you install snow tires, they must be the cables). The minimum clearances are de-
ate in some areas. same size, brand, construction and tread termined using the factory equipped tire
pattern on all four wheels. size. Other types may damage your vehicle.
Use chain tensioners when recommended
by the tire chain manufacturer to ensure a
tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain
Do-it-yourself 8-39
must be secured or removed to prevent Wheel nut tightening torque:
the possibility of whipping action damage
to the fenders or underbody. If possible, 98 ft-lb (133 N·m)
avoid fully loading your vehicle when using
The wheel nuts must be kept tight-
tire chains. In addition, drive at a reduced
speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may be ened to specifications at all times.
damaged and/or vehicle handling and It is recommended that wheel nuts
performance may be adversely affected. be tightened to specification at
Tire chains must be installed only on the each tire rotation interval.
rear wheels and not on the front wheels.
WARNING
Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving
with chains in such conditions can cause ∙ After rotating the tires, check
damage to the various mechanisms of the and adjust the tire pressure.
vehicle due to some overstress. WDI0258 ∙ Retighten the wheel nuts when
Use only the 2WD range when driving on CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES the vehicle has been driven for
clear paved roads. 600 miles (1,000 km) (also in
Tire rotation cases of a flat tire, etc.).
NISSAN recommends rotating the ∙ Do not include the spare tire in
tires every 5,000 miles (8,000 km). the tire rotation.
For additional information on tire re- ∙ For additional information re-
garding tires, refer to “Impor-
placing procedures, refer to “Flat tire” tant Tire Safety Information”
in the “In case of emergency” section (US) or “Tire Safety Information”
in this manual. (Canada) in the Warranty Infor-
As soon as possible, tighten the mation Booklet.
wheel nuts to the specified torque
with a torque wrench.
8-40 Do-it-yourself
∙ The original tires have built-in Replacing wheels and tires
tread wear indicators. When the When replacing a tire, use the same size,
wear indicators are visible, the tread design, speed rating and load carry-
tire(s) should be replaced. ing capacity as originally equipped. For ad-
∙ Tires degrade with age and use. ditional information, refer to “Wheels and
Have tires, including the spare, tires” in the “Technical and consumer infor-
over 6 years old checked by a mation” section of this manual.
qualified technician because
some tire damage may not be WARNING
obvious. Replace the tires as ∙ The use of tires other than those rec-
necessary to prevent tire failure ommended or the mixed use of tires
and possible personal injury. of different brands, construction
(bias, bias-belted or radial), or tread
WDI0259 ∙ Improper service of the spare patterns can adversely affect the ride,
Tire wear and damage tire may result in serious per- braking, handling, Vehicle Dynamic
sonal injury. If it is necessary to Control (VDC) system, ground clear-
1. Wear indicator repair the spare tire, it is recom- ance, body-to-tire clearance, tire
mended that you visit a NISSAN chain clearance, speedometer cali-
2. Location mark dealer for this service. bration, headlight aim and bumper
∙ For additional information re- height. Some of these effects may
WARNING lead to accidents and could result in
garding tires, refer to “Impor-
∙ Tires should be periodically in- serious personal injury.
tant Tire Safety Information”
spected for wear, cracking, (US) or “Tire Safety Information”
bulging or objects caught in the (Canada) in the Warranty Infor-
tread. If excessive wear, cracks, mation Booklet.
bulging or deep cuts are found,
the tire(s) should be replaced.
Do-it-yourself 8-41
∙ If your vehicle was originally ∙ When replacing a wheel without the ∙ Do not install a damaged or deformed
equipped with four tires that were the TPMS such as the spare tire, TPMS will wheel or tire even if it has been re-
same size and you are only replacing not function and the low tire pressure paired. Such wheels or tires could
two of the four tires, install the new warning light will flash for approxi- have structural damage and could fail
tires on the rear axle. Placing new tires mately 1 minute. The light will remain without warning.
on the front axle may cause loss of on after 1 minute. Have your tires re-
∙ The use of retread tires is not
vehicle control in some driving condi- placed and/or TPMS system reset as
recommended.
tions and cause an accident and per- soon as possible. It is recommended
sonal injury. that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ∙ For additional information regarding
service. tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety
∙ If the wheels are changed for any rea-
Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor-
son, always replace with wheels ∙ Replacing tires with those not origi-
mation” (Canada) in the Warranty In-
which have the same off-set dimen- nally specified by NISSAN could affect
formation Booklet.
sion. Wheels of a different off-set the proper operation of the TPMS.
could cause premature tire wear, de- Four-wheel drive models
∙ The TPMS sensor may be damaged if
grade vehicle handling characteris-
it is not handled correctly. Be careful
tics, affect the VDC system and/or in-
when handling the TPMS sensor. CAUTION
terference with the brake discs. Such
interference can lead to decreased ∙ When replacing the TPMS sensor, the Always use tires of the same type, size,
braking efficiency and/or early brake ID registration may be required. It is brand, construction (bias, bias-belted
pad wear. For additional information recommended that you visit a NISSAN or radial), and tread pattern on all four
on wheel off-set dimensions, refer to dealer for ID registration. wheels. Failure to do so may result in a
“Wheels and tires” in the “Technical circumference difference between tires
∙ Do not use a valve stem cap that is not
and consumer information” section of on the front and rear axles which will
specified by NISSAN. The valve stem
this manual. cause excessive tire wear and may
cap may become stuck.
damage the transmission, transfer case
∙ Be sure that the valve stem caps are and differential gears.
correctly fitted. Otherwise the valve
may be clogged up with dirt and
cause a malfunction or loss of
pressure.
8-42 Do-it-yourself
If excessive tire wear is found, it is recom- Care of wheels Observe the following precautions if the
mended that all four tires be replaced with FULL SIZE TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire
tires of the same size, brand, construction ∙ Wash the wheels when washing the ve- must be used. Otherwise, your vehicle
and tread pattern. The tire pressure and hicle to maintain their appearance. could be damaged or involved in an acci-
wheel alignment should also be checked ∙ Clean the inner side of the wheels when dent:
and corrected as necessary. It is recom- the wheel is changed or the underside
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for of the vehicle is washed. WARNING
this service.
∙ Do not use abrasive cleaners when To help reduce the risk of a crash which
Wheel balance washing the wheels. may result in personal injury or death:
Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle ∙ The TEMPORARY FULL SIZE spare tire
∙ Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents
handling and tire life. Even with regular use, should be used for emergency use
or corrosion. Such damage may cause
wheels can get out of balance. Therefore, only. It should be replaced with the
loss of pressure or poor seal at the tire
they should be balanced as required. standard tire at the first opportunity
bead.
Wheel balance service should be per- to avoid possible tire or differential
∙ NISSAN recommends waxing the road damage.
formed with the wheels off the vehicle.
wheels to protect against road salt in
Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle ∙ Drive carefully while the TEMPORARY
areas where it is used during winter.
could lead to mechanical damage. FULL SIZE spare tire is installed. Avoid
∙ For additional information regarding Spare tire (FULL SIZE TEMPORARY sharp turns and abrupt braking while
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety USE ONLY spare tire) driving. The vehicle driving perfor-
Information” (US) or “Tire Safety In- mance may be affected when driving
When replacing a wheel without the TPMS
formation” (Canada) in the Warranty such as the spare tire, the TPMS will not on wet or snow covered roads.
Information Booklet. function. ∙ When the TEMPORARY FULL SIZE
Your vehicle may be equipped with a full spare tire is installed, the Vehicle Dy-
size spare that is a different size or brand namic Control (VDC) will normally not
than the tires originally installed on the ve- be affected.
hicle. This full size spare tire is intended for
temporary use only and should be re-
placed at the first opportunity.
Do-it-yourself 8-43
∙ When the TEMPORARY FULL SIZE ∙ Do not use more than one TEMPO-
spare tire is installed, the following RARY FULL SIZE spare tire at the same
systems may not work correctly: time.
– Tire Pressure Monitoring System ∙ Do not tow a trailer when the TEMPO-
(TPMS) RARY FULL SIZE spare tire is installed.
– Forward Emergency Braking (FEB) CAUTION
(if so equipped)
∙ Do not use tire chains on a TEMPO-
∙ Periodically check the TEMPORARY RARY FULL SIZE spare tire. Tire chains
FULL SIZE spare tire inflation pressure. will not fit properly and may cause
Always keep the TEMPORARY FULL damage to the vehicle.
SIZE spare tire inflated to the pressure
specification shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label.
∙ With the TEMPORARY FULL SIZE spare
tire installed do not drive the vehicle
at speeds faster than 50 mph
(80 km/h).
∙ When driving on roads covered with
snow or ice, the TEMPORARY FULL SIZE
spare tire should be used on the front
wheels and the original tire used on
the rear wheels. Use tire chains only
on the drive wheels.
∙ Do not use the TEMPORARY FULL SIZE
spare tire on other vehicles.
8-44 Do-it-yourself
9 Maintenance and schedules
Maintenance requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Maintenance schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Additional maintenance items for
Scheduled maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 severe operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Where to go for service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Standard maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Emission control system maintenance . . . . . . . 9-8
Explanation of general maintenance Chassis & body maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Maintenance under severe operating
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . 9-5 conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Emission control system maintenance:. . . . . . . 9-5 Severe driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Chassis and body maintenance:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Maintenance log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS GENERAL MAINTENANCE
Some day-to-day and regular mainte- SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE During the normal day-to-day operation of
nance is essential to maintain your vehicle the vehicle, general maintenance should
good mechanical condition, as well as its The maintenance items listed in this sec- be performed regularly as prescribed in
emissions and engine performance. tion are required to be serviced at regular this section. If you detect any unusual
intervals. However under severe driving
It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure sounds, vibrations or smells, be sure to
conditions, additional or more frequent
that the scheduled maintenance, as well as check for the cause or have it checked
maintenance will be required.
general maintenance, is performed. promptly. In addition, it is recommended
WHERE TO GO FOR SERVICE that you visit a NISSAN dealer if you think
As the vehicle owner, you are the only one that repairs are required.
who can ensure that your vehicle receives If maintenance service is required or your
proper maintenance. You are a vital link in vehicle appears to malfunction, have the When performing any checks or mainte-
the maintenance chain. systems checked and serviced. It is recom- nance work, closely observe the “Mainte-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for nance precautions” in the “Do-it-yourself”
GENERAL MAINTENANCE this service. section of this manual.
General maintenance includes those items NISSAN technicians are well-trained spe-
which should be checked during normal
EXPLANATION OF GENERAL
cialists and are kept up-to-date with the
day-to-day operation. They are essential latest service information through techni-
MAINTENANCE ITEMS
for proper vehicle operation. It is your re- cal bulletins, service tips and training pro- Additional information on the following
sponsibility to perform these procedures grams. They are completely qualified to items with “ * ” is found in the “Do-it-
regularly as prescribed. work on NISSAN vehicles before work be- yourself ” section of this manual.
Performing general maintenance checks gins.
requires minimal mechanical skill and only
Outside the vehicle
You can be confident that a NISSAN deal-
a few general automotive tools. er’s service department can perform the The maintenance items listed here should
These checks or inspections can be done service needed to meet the maintenance be performed from time to time, unless
by yourself, a qualified technician or, if you requirements on your vehicle. otherwise specified.
prefer, a NISSAN dealer. Doors and engine hood: Check that the
doors and engine hood operate properly.
Also ensure that all latches lock securely.
Lubricate hinges, latches, latch pins, rollers
and links if necessary. Make sure that the
9-2 Maintenance and schedules
secondary latch keeps the hood from Wheel alignment and balance: If the ve- pedal does not catch or require uneven
opening when the primary latch is re- hicle should pull to either side while driving effort. Keep the floor mat away from the
leased. on a straight and level road, or if you detect pedal.
uneven or abnormal tire wear, there may
When driving in areas using road salt or Automatic transmission P (Park) mecha-
be a need for wheel alignment. If the steer-
other corrosive materials, check lubrica- nism: On a fairly steep hill check that the
ing wheel or seat vibrates at normal high-
tion frequently. vehicle is held securely with the shift lever
way speeds, wheel balancing may be
in the P (Park) position without applying any
Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regular needed.
brakes.
basis. Make sure that the headlights, stop
lights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and other For additional information regarding tires,
Brake pedal: Check the pedal for smooth
lights are all operating properly and in- refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”
operation. If the brake pedal suddenly goes
stalled securely. Also check headlight aim. (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in
down further than normal, the pedal feels
the Warranty Information Booklet.
Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)*: When check- spongy or the vehicle seems to take longer
ing the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are Windshield: Clean the windshield on a to stop, have your vehicle checked imme-
missing, and check for any loose wheel regular basis. Check the windshield at least diately. It is recommended that you visit a
nuts. Tighten if necessary. every six months for cracks or other dam- NISSAN dealer for this service. Keep the
age. Have a damaged windshield repaired floor mat away from the pedal.
Tire rotation*: Tires should be rotated ev-
by a qualified repair facility.
ery 5,000 miles (8,000 km). Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull
Windshield wiper blades*: Check for the vehicle to one side when applied.
Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge
often and always prior to long distance cracks or wear if they do not wipe properly. Parking brake: Check the parking brake
trips. If necessary, adjust the pressure in all Inside the vehicle operation regularly. The vehicle should be
tires, including the spare, to the pressure securely held on a fairly steep hill with only
specified. Check carefully for damage, cuts The maintenance items listed here should the parking brake applied. If the parking
or excessive wear. be checked on a regular basis, such as brake needs adjustment, it is recom-
when performing scheduled maintenance, mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
cleaning the vehicle, etc. this service.
transmitter components: Replace the
TPMS transmitter grommet seal, valve core Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for Seats: Check seat position controls such
and cap when the tires are replaced due to smooth operation and make sure the as seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc., to
wear or age. ensure they operate smoothly and all
Maintenance and schedules 9-3
latches lock securely in every position. Under the hood and vehicle Engine coolant level*: Check the coolant
Check that the head restraints/headrests level when the engine is cold.
move up and down smoothly and the locks The maintenance items listed here should
be checked periodically (for example, each Engine drive belts*: Make sure the drive
(if so equipped) hold securely in all latched belts are not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.
positions. time you check the engine oil or refuel).
Battery (for maintenance free batter- Engine oil level*: Check the level after
Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat parking the vehicle on a level spot and
belt system (for example, buckles, anchors, ies)*: This vehicle is equipped with a sealed
turning off the engine. Wait more than
adjusters and retractors) operate properly maintenance free battery. It is recom-
15 minutes for the oil to drain back into the
and smoothly, and are installed securely. mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for oil pan.
Check the belt webbing for cuts, fraying, service.
Exhaust system: Make sure there are no
wear or damage.
NOTE: loose supports, cracks or holes. If the
Steering wheel: Check for changes in the sound of the exhaust seems unusual or
steering system, such as excessive free Care should be taken to avoid situations there is a smell of exhaust fumes, immedi-
play, hard steering or strange noises. that can lead to potential battery dis- ately have the exhaust system inspected. It
charge and potential no-start conditions is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
Warning lights and chimes: Make sure all such as: dealer for this service. For additional infor-
warning lights and chimes are operating mation, refer to “Exhaust gas (carbon mon-
1. Installation or extended use of elec-
properly. oxide)” in the “Starting and driving” section
Windshield defroster: Check that the air tery power when the engine is not of this manual.
comes out of the defroster outlets properly running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for
and in sufficient quantity when operating players, etc.). fuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after the
the heater or air conditioner. 2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or vehicle has been parked for a while. Water
only driven short distances. dripping from the air conditioner after use
Windshield wiper and washer*: Check is normal. If you should notice any leaks or if
that the wipers and washer operate prop- In these cases, the battery may need to fuel fumes are evident, check for the cause
erly and that the wipers do not streak. be charged to maintain battery health. and have it corrected immediately.
Brake and clutch (if so equipped) fluid
level*: Make sure that the fluid level is be-
tween the MAX and MIN lines on the reservoir.
EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE ITEMS
Power steering fluid level* and lines: The following descriptions are provided to NOTE:
Check the level when the fluid is cold, with give you a better understanding of the
the engine off. Check the lines for proper NISSAN does not advocate the use of
scheduled maintenance items that should
attachment, leaks, cracks, etc. non-OEM approved aftermarket flush-
be regularly checked or replaced. The
ing systems and strongly advises
Radiator and hoses: Check the front of the maintenance schedule indicates at which
against performing these services on a
radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, mileage/time intervals each item requires
NISSAN product. Many of the aftermar-
leaves, etc., that may have accumulated. service.
ket flushing systems use non-OEM ap-
Make sure the hoses have no cracks, defor- In addition to scheduled maintenance, proved chemicals or solvents, the use of
mation, rot or loose connections. your vehicle requires that some items be which has not been validated by NISSAN.
Underbody: The underbody is frequently checked during normal day-to-day opera-
For recommended fuel, lubricants, fluids,
exposed to corrosive substances such as tion. For additional information, refer to
grease, and refrigerant, refer to “Recom-
those used on icy roads or to control dust. It “General maintenance” in this section.
is very important to remove these sub- mended fluids/lubricants and capaci-
stances, otherwise rust may form on the Items marked with “*” are recommended ties” in the “Technical and consumer in-
floor pan, frame, fuel lines and around the by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. formation” section of this manual.
exhaust system. At the end of winter, the You are not required to perform mainte-
nance on these items in order to maintain EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
underbody should be thoroughly flushed
with plain water, being careful to clean the warranties which come with your MAINTENANCE:
those areas where mud and dirt may accu- NISSAN. Other maintenance items and in- Drive belts*: Check engine drive belts for
mulate. For additional information, refer to tervals are required. wear, fraying or cracking and for proper
the “Appearance and care” section of this tension. Replace any damaged drive belts.
When applicable, additional information
manual.
can be found in the “Do-it-yourself ” section Engine air filter: Replace at specified inter-
Windshield-washer fluid*: Check that of this manual. vals. When driving for prolonged periods in
there is adequate fluid in the reservoir. dusty conditions, check/replace the filter
more frequently.
Engine coolant*: Replace coolant at the
specified interval. When adding or replac-
ing coolant, be sure to use only Genuine
NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue)
or equivalent with the proper mixture. (For CHASSIS AND BODY Tire rotation: Tires should be rotated every
additional information on the proper mix- MAINTENANCE: 5,000 miles (8,000 km) according to the in-
ture for your area, refer to “Engine cooling structions under “Explanation of general
system” in the “Do-it-yourself ” section of Brake lines and cables: Visually inspect for maintenance items” in this section. When
this manual.) proper installation. Check for chafing, rotating tires, check for damage and un-
cracks, deterioration, and signs of leaking. even wear. Replace if necessary.
NOTE: Mixing any other type of coolant Replace any deteriorated or damaged
or the use of non-distilled water may re- parts immediately. Transmission fluid/oil, differential oil: Vi-
duce the recommended service interval sually inspect for signs of leakage at speci-
of the coolant. Brake pads and rotors: Check for wear, fied intervals.
deterioration and fluid leaks. Replace any
Engine oil and oil filter: Replace engine oil deteriorated or damaged parts immedi-
and oil filter at the specified intervals. For ately.
recommended oil grade and viscosity refer
to “Recommended fluids/lubricants and Exhaust system: Visually inspect the ex-
capacities” in the “Technical and consumer haust pipes, muffler and hangers for leaks,
information” section of this manual. cracks, deterioration, and damage. Tighten
connections or replace parts as necessary.
Evaporative emissions control vapor
lines*: Check vapor lines for leaks or loose- In-cabin microfilter: Replace at specified
ness. Tighten connections or replace parts intervals. When driving for prolonged peri-
as necessary. ods in dusty conditions, replace the filter
more frequently.
Fuel lines*: Check the fuel hoses, piping
and connections for leaks, looseness, or Steering gear and linkage, axle and sus-
deterioration. Tighten connections or re- pension parts, drive shaft boots: Check
place parts as necessary. for damage, looseness, and leakage of oil
or grease. Under severe driving conditions,
Spark plugs: Replace at specified intervals. inspect more frequently.
Install new plugs of the same type as origi-
nally equipped.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES STANDARD MAINTENANCE
To help ensure smooth, safe and economi- ∙ Repeated short trips of less than The following tables show the standard
cal driving, NISSAN provides two mainte- 10 miles (16 km) with outside tempera- maintenance schedule. Depending upon
nance schedules that may be used, de- tures remaining below freezing. weather and atmospheric conditions,
pending upon the conditions in which you varying road surfaces, individual driving
∙ Operating in hot weather in stop-
usually drive. These schedules contain habits and vehicle usage, additional or
and-go “rush hour” traffic.
both distance and time intervals, up to more frequent maintenance may be re-
120,000 miles (192,000 km)/144 months. For ∙ Extensive idling and/or low speed driv- quired. After 120,000 miles
most people, the odometer reading will in- ing for long distances, such as police, (192,000 km)/144 months, continue
dicate when service is needed. However, if taxi or door-to-door delivery use. maintenance at the same mileage/time
interval.
you drive very little, your vehicle should be ∙ Driving in dusty conditions.
serviced at the regular time intervals
∙ Driving on rough, muddy or salt spread
shown in the schedule.
roads.
After 120,000 miles
∙ Towing a trailer, using a camper or using
(192,000 km)/144 months, continue a car-top carrier.
maintenance at the same mileage/time
intervals. NOTE:
ADDITIONAL MAINTENANCE ITEMS For vehicles operated in Canada, both
FOR SEVERE OPERATING standard and severe maintenance items
CONDITIONS should be performed at every interval.
Additional maintenance items for severe

operating conditions should be per-
formed on vehicles that are driven under
especially demanding conditions. Addi-
tional maintenance items should be per-
formed if you primarily operate your vehicle
under the following conditions:
∙ Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles
(8 km).
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace

MAINTENANCE OPERATION MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or miles x 1,000 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60
months, whichever comes first. (km x 1,000) (8) (16) (24) (32) (40) (48) (56) (64) (72) (80) (88) (96)
Months 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72
Drive belts See NOTE (1) I* I* I*
Air cleaner filter See NOTE (2) R R
EVAP vapor lines I* I* I*
Fuel lines I* I* I*
Fuel filter See NOTE (3)
Engine coolant* See NOTE (4)(5)
Engine oil R R R R R R R R R R R R
Engine oil filter R R R R R R R R R R R R
Spark plugs See NOTE (6) Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000 km)
Intake and exhaust valve clearances* See NOTE (7)

Months 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144
Drive belts See NOTE (1) I* I* I* I* I* I*
Air cleaner filter See NOTE (2) R R
EVAP vapor lines I* I* I*
Fuel lines I* I* I*
Fuel filter See NOTE (3)
Engine coolant* See NOTE (4)(5)
Engine oil R R R R R R R R R R R R
Engine oil filter R R R R R R R R R R R R
Spark plugs See NOTE (6) Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000 km)
Intake and exhaust valve clearances* See NOTE (7)
NOTE:
(1) After 40,000 miles (64,000 km) or 48 months, inspect every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 12 months. Replace the drive belts if
found damaged.
(2) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more frequent maintenance may be required.
(3) Periodic maintenance is not required.
(4) First replacement interval is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 84 months. After first replacement, replace every 75,000 miles
(120,000 km) or 60 months.
(5) Use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent with proper mixture ratio of 50% antifreeze and 50%
demineralized or distilled water. Mixing any other type of coolant or the use of non-distilled water may reduce the life expectancy
of the factory fill coolant.
(6) Replace spark plug when the plug gap exceeds 0.053 in (1.35 mm) even if within specified periodic replacement mileage.
(7) Periodic maintenance is not required. However, if valve noise increased, inspect valve clearance.
* Maintenance items and intervals with “*” are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform
such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and
intervals are required.
CHASSIS & BODY MAINTENANCE
Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace,

Months 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72
Brake lines & cables I I I I I I
Brake pads & rotors夝 I I I I I I
Brake fluid夝 R R R
Automatic transmission fluid See NOTE (1) I I I I I I
Manual transmission gear oil See NOTE (2) I I I I I I
Differential gear oil See NOTE (2) I I I I I I
Transfer fluid See NOTE (2) I I I I I I
Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension I I I
parts夝
Propeller shaft & drive shaft boots (4WD mod- I I I I I I
els)夝
Tire rotation See NOTE (3)
Exhaust system夝 I I I
In-cabin microfilter R R R R

Months 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144
Brake lines & cables I I I I I I
Brake pads & rotors夝 I I I I I I
Brake fluid夝 R R R
Automatic transmission fluid See NOTE (1) I I I I I I
Manual transmission gear oil See NOTE (2) I I I I I I
Differential gear oil See NOTE (2) I I I I I I
Transfer fluid See NOTE (2) I I I I I I
Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension I I I
parts夝
Propeller shaft & drive shaft boots (4WD mod- I I I I I I
els)夝
Tire rotation See NOTE (3)
Exhaust system夝 I I I
In-cabin microfilter R R R R
NOTE:
Maintenance items with “夝” should be performed more frequently according to “Maintenance under severe driving conditions”.
(1) If towing a trailer, using a car-top carrier, or driving on rough or muddy roads, change (not just inspect) oil at every 20,000 miles
(32,000 km) or 24 months. Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF or Matic J ATF (or their
equivalents) may cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and may damage the automatic
transmission. Damage caused by the use of other fluids is not covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
(2) If towing a trailer, using a camper or a car-top, or driving on rough or muddy roads, change (not just inspect) oil at every
20,000 miles (32,000 km) or 24 months.
(3) For additional information on tire rotation, refer to “General maintenance” in this section.

MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE
OPERATING CONDITIONS
The maintenance intervals shown on the SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS ∙ Extensive idling and/or low speed driv-
preceding pages are for normal operating ing for long distance, such as police, taxi
conditions. If the vehicle is mainly operated ∙ Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles or door-to-door delivery use.
under severe driving conditions as shown (8 km).
∙ Driving in dusty conditions.
below, more frequent maintenance must ∙ Repeated short trips of less than
be performed on the following items as 10 miles (16 km) with outside tempera- ∙ Driving on rough, muddy or salt spread
shown in the table. tures remaining below freezing. roads.
∙ Operating in hot weather in stop- ∙ Towing a trailer, using a camper or a
and-go “rush hour” traffic. car-top carrier.
Maintenance operation: Inspect = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary.
Maintenance item Maintenance operation Maintenance interval
Brake fluid Replace Every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 12 months
Brake pads & rotors Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months
Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspension parts Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months
Propeller shaft & drive shaft boots (4WD models) Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months
Exhaust system Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months

MAINTENANCE LOG
5,000 Miles (8,000 km) or 6 10,000 Miles (16,000 km) or 12 15,000 Miles (24,000 km) or 18
Months Months Months
Dealer Name: Dealer Name: Dealer Name:
Date: Date: Date:
Mileage: Mileage: Mileage:
Dealer Dealer Dealer
Stamp: Stamp: Stamp:
Date: Date: Date:
Date: Date: Date:

Date: Date: Date:
Date: Date: Date:
Date: Date: Date:

95,000 Miles (152,000 km) or 114 100,000 Miles (160,000 km) or 105,000 Miles (168,000 km) or 126
Months 120 Months Months
Date: Date: Date:
Date: Date: Date:

10 Technical and consumer information
Recommended fluids/lubricants and Tire and Loading Information label . . . . . . . . . 10-18

capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Air conditioner specification label. . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
Fuel recommendation Installing front license plate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
(for QR25DE models). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5 Installing front license plate with
Fuel recommendation grommets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
(for VQ40DE models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7 Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) fuel Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
recommendation (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 Vehicle load capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Engine oil and oil filter Securing the load. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11 Utili-track® channel system
Air conditioner system refrigerant and (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
oil recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12 Loading tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 Truck-camper loading information . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Crew cab models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Wheels and tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
King Cab® models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Special Body vehicles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
When traveling or registering in another
country. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16 Location for center of gravity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16 Vehicle load weight capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) Measurement of weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16 Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Engine serial number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16 Maximum load limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . 10-17 Towing load/specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Emission control information label . . . . . . . . . 10-18 Towing safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Flat towing – 4WD with automatic Emission control system warranty. . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42 Reporting safety defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
Flat towing – 2WD with automatic Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M)
transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43 test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46
Flat towing – 2WD/4WD with manual Event Data Recorders (EDR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47
transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43 Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order
Uniform tire quality grading. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44 information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47
RECOMMENDED FLUIDS/
LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES
The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be a little different. When refilling, follow the procedure
described in the “Do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.
Fluid type Capacity (approximate) Recommended Fluids/Lubricants
Metric US Imperial
Measure Measure Measure
• For additional information, refer to “Fuel recommenda-
tion (for QR25DE models)”, “Fuel recommendation (for
Fuel 80 L 21-1/8 gal 17-5/8 gal
VQ40DE models)” or “Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) fuel rec-
ommendation” in this section.
• Genuine “Nissan Motor Oil 5W-30” (or equivalent) is
With oil filter recommended.
4.6 L 4-7/8 qt 4 qt
change • If the above motor oil is not available, a synthetic SAE
5W-30 GF-5 SN engine oil may be used. Damage caused
QR25DE
by the use of motor oil (or engine oil) other than as rec-
Engine oil*1
Without oil ommended is not covered under NISSAN’s New Vehicle
Drain and refill 4.3 L 4-1/2 qt 3-3/4 qt
filter change Limited Warranty. For additional information, refer to “En-
*1: For additional
gine oil and oil filter recommendation” in this section.
information, refer to
• Genuine “Nissan Motor Oil 5W-30” (or equivalent) is
“Engine” in the “Do-it-
With oil filter recommended.
yourself” section of 5.1 L 5-3/8 qt 4-1/2 qt
change • If the above motor oil is not available, a synthetic SAE
this manual.
5W-30 GF-5 SN engine oil may be used. Damage caused
VQ40DE
by the use of motor oil (or engine oil) other than as rec-
Without oil ommended is not covered under NISSAN’s New Vehicle
4.8 L 5-1/8 qt 4-1/4 qt
filter change Limited Warranty. For additional information, refer to “En-
gine oil and oil filter recommendation” in this section.
Engine coolant QR25DE 9.4 L 2-1/2 gal 2-1/8 gal • Pre-diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/
(with reservoir) VQ40DE 10.2 L 2-3/4 gal 2-1/4 gal Coolant (blue) or equivalent
10-2 Technical and consumer information

Metric US Imperial
• Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ
5 M/T 2.9 L 3-1/8 qt 2-1/2 qt Multi 75W-85
• If Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ
Manual transmission gear oil 6 M/T 4X2 4.0 L 4-1/4 qt 3-1/2 qt Multi is not available, API GL-4, Viscosity SAE 75W-85 may
be used as a temporary replacement. However, use
6 M/T 4X4 4.2 L 4-1/2 qt 3-3/4 qt Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ
Multi as soon as it is available.
• Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF
• NISSAN recommends using Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF
in NISSAN automatic transmissions. If Genuine NISSAN
Matic S ATF is not available, Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF
Refill to the proper level according to the may also be used. Do not mix with other fluids. Using flu-
Automatic transmission fluid
instructions in the “Do-it-yourself ” section. ids that are not equivalent to Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF
or Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF may damage the auto-
matic transmission. Damage caused by the use of other
automatic transmission fluids is not covered under the
NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Genuine NISSAN Matic D ATF recommended
• Using fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic D ATF may
cause deterioration in driveability and transfer durability,
Transfer fluid 2.0L 2-1/8 qt 1-3/4 qt
and may damage the transfer. Damage caused by the
use of other fluids is not covered by the NISSAN New Ve-
hicle Limited Warranty.
• Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super GL-5
Front final drive oil 0.85 L 1-3/4 pt 1-1/2 pt
80W-90 or equivalent conventional (non-synthetic) oil
Rear final drive oil (except for 6 speed M/T or E-Lock ve- • Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super-S GL-5
1.6 L 3-3/8 pt 2-7/8 pt
hicles) synthetic 75W-90 or equivalent
Technical and consumer information 10-3

Metric US Imperial
• Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil synthetic 75W-140 or API
Rear final drive oil (for 6 speed M/T or E-Lock vehicles) 2.0 L 4-1/4 pt 3-1/2 pt
GL-5 synthetic gear oil, Viscosity SAE 75W-140
Power Steering Fluid (PSF) — — — • Genuine NISSAN PSF-II or equivalent.
• Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid*2 or
Brake and clutch (if so equipped) fluid — — — equivalent DOT 3
*2: Available in mainland USA through a NISSAN dealer.
Multi-purpose grease — — — • NLGI No. 2 (Lithium Soap base)
• HFC-134a (R-134a)
Air conditioning system refrigerant — — — • For additional information, refer to “Air conditioner speci-
fication label” in this section.
• Genuine NISSAN A/C System Oil Type R (KLH00-PAGR0)
or equivalent
Air conditioning system oil — — —
• For additional information, refer to “Air conditioner speci-
fication label” in this section.
• Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate
Windshield-washer fluid 4.5 L 1-1/4 gal 1 gal
Cleaner & Antifreeze or equivalent

FUEL RECOMMENDATION (for ∙ Do not use a fuel containing more ∙ U.S. government regulations require
QR25DE models) than 15% ethanol in your vehicle. Your ethanol dispensing pumps to be iden-
vehicle is not designed to run on a fuel tified by a small, square, orange and
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an oc- containing more than 15% ethanol. black label with the common abbre-
tane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Using a fuel containing more than 15% viation or the appropriate percentage
Index) number (Research octane number ethanol in a vehicle not specifically for that region.
91). designed for a fuel containing more
than 15% ethanol can adversely affect Gasoline specifications
CAUTION the emission control devices and sys- NISSAN recommends using gasoline that
∙ Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door tems of the vehicle. Damage caused meets the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC)
label can operate on E-85. Fuel system by such fuel is not covered by the specifications where it is available. Many of
or other damage can occur if E-85 is NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty. the automobile manufacturers developed
used in vehicles that are not designed ∙ Do not use fuel that contains the oc- this specification to improve emission con-
to run on E-85. tane booster methylcyclopentadienyl trol system and vehicle performance. Ask
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Using your service station manager if the gaso-
∙ Using a fuel other than that specified
fuel containing MMT may adversely line meets the WWFC specifications.
could adversely affect the emission
control system, and may also affect affect vehicle performance and ve-
hicle emissions. Not all fuel dispens-
Reformulated gasoline
the warranty coverage.
ers are labeled to indicate MMT con- Some fuel suppliers are now producing re-
∙ Under no circumstances should a tent, so you may have to consult your formulated gasolines. These gasolines are
leaded gasoline be used, because this gasoline retailer for more details. specially designed to reduce vehicle emis-
will damage the three-way catalyst. Note that Federal and California laws sions. NISSAN supports efforts towards
prohibit the use of MMT in reformu- cleaner air and suggests that you use re-
lated gasoline. formulated gasoline when available.

Gasoline containing oxygenates ∙ If a methanol blend is used, it should orange and black label with the common
contain no more than 5% methanol abbreviation or the appropriate percent-
Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline contain- (methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It age for that region.
ing oxygenates such as ethanol, Methyl should also contain a suitable
Tert-butyl Ether (MTBE) and methanol with amount of appropriate cosolvents
E–85 fuel
or without advertising their presence. and corrosion inhibitors. If not prop- E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85%
NISSAN does not recommend the use of erly formulated with appropriate co- fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline.
fuels of which the oxygenate content and solvents and corrosion inhibitors, E-85 can only be used in a Flexible Fuel
the fuel compatibility for your NISSAN can- such methanol blends may cause fuel Vehicle (FFV). Do not use E-85 in your ve-
not be readily determined. If in doubt, ask system damage and/or vehicle per- hicle. U.S. government regulations require
your service station manager. formance problems. At this time, suf- fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be iden-
ficient data is not available to ensure tified by a small, square, orange and black
If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, that all methanol blends are suitable label with the common abbreviation or the
please take the following precautions as for use in NISSAN vehicles. appropriate percentage for that region.
the usage of such fuels may cause vehicle
performance problems and/or fuel system If any driveability problems such as engine Fuel containing MMT
damage. stalling and difficult hot-starting are expe-
rienced after using oxygenate-blend fuels, MMT, or methylcyclopentadienyl manga-
∙ The fuel should be unleaded and have immediately change to a non-oxygenate nese tricarbonyl, is an octane boosting ad-
an octane rating no lower than that fuel or a fuel with a low blend of MTBE. ditive. NISSAN does not recommend the
recommended for unleaded gasoline. use of fuel containing MMT. Such fuel may
Take care not to spill gasoline during re- adversely affect vehicle performance, in-
∙ If an oxygenate-blend other than fueling. Gasoline containing oxygenates cluding the emissions control system. Note
methanol blend is used, it should can cause paint damage. that while some fuel pumps label MMT
contain no more than 15% oxygenate. content, not all do, so you may have to
E–15 fuel
consult your gasoline retailer for more de-
E-15 fuel is a mixture of approximately 15% tails.
fuel ethanol and 85% unleaded gasoline.
E-15 can only be used in vehicles designed
to run on E-15 fuel. U.S. government regula-
tions require fuel ethanol dispensing
pumps to be identified with small, square,
Aftermarket fuel additives Incorrect ignition timing may result in ∙ Using a fuel other than that specified
spark knock, after-run and/or overheating, could adversely affect the emission
NISSAN does not recommend the use of which may cause excessive fuel consump-
any aftermarket fuel additives (for ex- control system, and may also affect
tion or engine damage. If any of the above the warranty coverage.
ample, fuel injector cleaner, octane
symptoms are encountered, have your ve-
booster, intake valve deposit removers, ∙ Under no circumstances should a
etc.) which are sold commercially. Many of leaded gasoline be used, because this
these additives intended for gum, varnish visit a NISSAN dealer for servicing.
will damage the three-way catalyst.
or deposit removal may contain active sol- However, now and then you may notice
vents or similar ingredients that can be ∙ Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in your
light spark knock for a short time while vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed to
harmful to the fuel system and engine. accelerating or driving up hills. This is not run on E-15 or E-85 fuel. Using E-15 or
Octane rating tips a cause for concern, because you get the E-85 fuel in a vehicle not specifically
greatest fuel benefit when there is light designed for E-15 or E-85 fuel can ad-
Using unleaded gasoline with an octane spark knock for a short time under heavy versely affect the emission control
rating lower than recommended can engine load. devices and systems of the vehicle.
cause persistent, heavy “spark knock.” Damage caused by such fuel is not
(“Spark knock” is a metallic rapping FUEL RECOMMENDATION (for covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle
noise.) If severe, this can lead to engine VQ40DE models) Limited Warranty.
damage. If you detect a persistent heavy
spark knock even when using gasoline Use unleaded regular gasoline with an oc- ∙ Do not use fuel that contains the oc-
of the stated octane rating, or if you hear tane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock tane booster methylcyclopentadienyl
steady spark knock while holding a Index) number (Research octane number manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Using
steady speed on level roads, have a 91). fuel containing MMT may adversely
NISSAN dealer correct the condition. Fail- affect vehicle performance and ve-
ure to correct the condition is misuse of CAUTION hicle emissions. Not all fuel dispens-
the vehicle, for which NISSAN is not re- ers are labeled to indicate MMT con-
∙ Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door tent, so you may have to consult your
sponsible.
label can operate on E-85. Fuel system gasoline retailer for more details.
or other damage can occur if E-85 is Note that Federal and California laws
used in vehicles that are not designed prohibit the use of MMT in reformu-
to run on E-85. lated gasoline.

∙ U.S. government regulations require NISSAN does not recommend the use of ∙ If a methanol blend is used, it should
ethanol dispensing pumps to be iden- fuels of which the oxygenate content and contain no more than 5% methanol
tified by a small, square, orange and the fuel compatibility for your NISSAN can- (methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It
black label with the common abbre- not be readily determined. If in doubt, ask should also contain a suitable
viation or the appropriate percentage your service station manager. amount of appropriate cosolvents
for that region. and corrosion inhibitors. If not prop-
If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, erly formulated with appropriate co-
Gasoline specifications please take the following precautions as solvents and corrosion inhibitors,
the usage of such fuels may cause vehicle such methanol blends may cause fuel
NISSAN recommends using gasoline that performance problems and/or fuel system system damage and/or vehicle per-
meets the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) damage. formance problems. At this time, suf-
specifications where it is available. Many of ficient data is not available to ensure
the automobile manufacturers developed ∙ The fuel should be unleaded and have that all methanol blends are suitable
this specification to improve emission con- an octane rating no lower than that for use in NISSAN vehicles.
trol system and vehicle performance. Ask recommended for unleaded gasoline.
your service station manager if the gaso- If any driveability problems such as engine
∙ If an oxygenate-blend other than stalling and difficult hot-starting are expe-
line meets the WWFC specifications. methanol blend is used, it should rienced after using oxygenate-blend fuels,
Reformulated gasoline contain no more than 10% oxygenate. immediately change to a non-oxygenate
(MTBE may, however, be added up to fuel or a fuel with a low blend of MTBE.
Some fuel suppliers are now producing re- 15%.)
formulated gasolines. These gasolines are Take care not to spill gasoline during re-
specially designed to reduce vehicle emis- ∙ E-15 fuel contains more than 10% oxy- fueling. Gasoline containing oxygenates
sions. NISSAN supports efforts towards genate. E-15 fuel will adversely affect can cause paint damage.
cleaner air and suggests that you use re- the emission control devices and sys-
formulated gasoline when available. tems of the vehicle and should not be
used. Damage caused by such fuel is
Gasoline containing oxygenates not covered by the NISSAN New Ve-
Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline contain- hicle Limited Warranty.
ing oxygenates such as ethanol, Methyl
Tert-butyl Ether (MTBE) and methanol with
or without advertising their presence.
E–15 fuel that while some fuel pumps label MMT Incorrect ignition timing may result in
content, not all do, so you may have to spark knock, after-run and/or overheating,
E-15 fuel is a mixture of approximately 15% consult your gasoline retailer for more de- which may cause excessive fuel consump-
fuel ethanol and 85% unleaded gasoline. tails. tion or engine damage. If any of the above
E-15 can only be used in vehicles designed symptoms are encountered, have your ve-
to run on E-15 fuel. Do not use E-15 in your Aftermarket fuel additives
vehicle. U.S. government regulations re- NISSAN does not recommend the use of visit a NISSAN dealer for servicing.
quire fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be any aftermarket fuel additives (for ex-
identified with small, square, orange and ample, fuel injector cleaner, octane However, now and then you may notice
black label with the common abbreviation booster, intake valve deposit removers, light spark knock for a short time while
or the appropriate percentage for that re- etc.) which are sold commercially. Many of accelerating or driving up hills. This is not
gion. these additives intended for gum, varnish a cause for concern, because you get the
or deposit removal may contain active sol- greatest fuel benefit when there is light
E–85 fuel
vents or similar ingredients that can be spark knock for a short time under heavy
E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85% harmful to the fuel system and engine. engine load.
fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline.
E-85 can only be used in a Flexible Fuel Octane rating tips FLEXIBLE FUEL VEHICLE (FFV) FUEL
Vehicle (FFV). Do not use E-85 in your ve- Using unleaded gasoline with an octane RECOMMENDATION (if so
hicle. U.S. government regulations require rating lower than recommended can equipped)
fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be iden- cause persistent, heavy “spark knock.”
tified by a small, square, orange and black (“Spark knock” is a metallic rapping Your vehicle is designed to use (E-85) Fuel
label with the common abbreviation or the noise.) If severe, this can lead to engine Ethanol, “Regular” unleaded regular gaso-
appropriate percentage for that region. damage. If you detect a persistent heavy line or any percentage of the two fuels
spark knock even when using gasoline combined.
Fuel containing MMT
of the stated octane rating, or if you hear U.S. government regulations require Fuel
MMT, or methylcyclopentadienyl manga- steady spark knock while holding a Ethanol dispensing pumps to have a
nese tricarbonyl, is an octane boosting ad- steady speed on level roads, have a small, square, orange and black label
ditive. NISSAN does not recommend the NISSAN dealer correct the condition. Fail-
with the common abbreviation or the
use of fuel containing MMT. Such fuel may ure to correct the condition is misuse of
adversely affect vehicle performance, inappropriate percentage for that region.
the vehicle, for which NISSAN is not re-
cluding the emissions control system. Note sponsible.
CAUTION WARNING NOTE:
Use of other fuels such as Fuel Metha- ∙ Ethanol vapors are extremely flam- When the ambient temperature is above
nol may cause powertrain damage or a mable and could cause serious per- 90°F (32°C), you may experience hard
loss of vehicle performance. sonal injury. starting and rough idle following start
up even if the above recommendations
Under no circumstances should a ∙ Never have any smoking materials lit are followed.
leaded gasoline be used, because this in or near the vehicle when removing
will cause damage to the three-way the fuel filler cap or filling the tank. Starting
catalyst. The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it un-
∙ Do not use E-85 as a cleaning agent
and never use it near an open flame. suitable for use when ambient tempera-
General information tures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the range of
This information is for Flexible Fuel Vehicles Fuel requirements 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), you may experience
(FFV) only. FFV vehicles can be identified by an increase in the time it takes for you en-
Your vehicle will operate on both unleaded
the fuel filler door label that states Ethanol gine to start, and a deterioration in drivabil-
regular gasoline with an octane rating of at ity (sags and/or hesitations) until the en-
(E-85) or Unleaded Gasoline Only. This sec- least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Re- gine is fully warmed up.
tion only covers those subjects that are search octane number 91), or E-85 fuel, or
unique to Flexible Fuel Vehicles. any mixture of these two. Fuel consumption
For the best starting and vehicle driveabil- Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per
CAUTION gallon than gasoline, you will experience an
ity results, do not continually switch be-
Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door tween E-85 and unleaded regular gasoline. increase in fuel consumption. You can ex-
label can operate on E-85. Fuel system If you must switch fuels, NISSAN recom- pect your fuel mileage to decrease by
or other damage can occur if E-85 is mends the following: about 30% compared to gasoline opera-
used in vehicles that are not designed tion.
to run on E-85. ∙ do not switch when the fuel gauge indi-
cates less than 1/4 full
Ethanol Fuel (E-85) ∙ add more than 5 gallons of fuel
E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ∙ operate the vehicle immediately after
ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. refueling for a period of at least 5 min-
utes
Replacement parts
Many components in your Flexible Fuel Ve-
hicle (FFV) are designed to be compatible
with ethanol. Always be sure that your ve-
hicle is serviced with correct ethanol com-
patible parts.
CAUTION
Replacing fuel system components
with non-ethanol compatible compo-
nents can damage your vehicle and
may also affect the warranty coverage.
Maintenance
LTI2061
If you operate your vehicle using E-85 fuel, cation or International Lubricant Standard-
follow the correct maintenance log shown
ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER
RECOMMENDATIONS ization and Approval Committee (ILSAC)
in the “Maintenance and schedules” sec- certification and SAE viscosity standard.
Selecting the correct oil These oils have the API certification mark
on the front of the container. Oils which do
CAUTION It is essential to choose the correct grade, not have the specified quality label should
Do not use ethanol mixture greater quality and viscosity engine oil to ensure not be used as they could cause engine
than 85% in your vehicle. It will cause satisfactory engine life and performance. damage.
difficulty in cold starting and may affect For additional information, refer to “Recom-
driveability. mended fluids/lubricants and capacities” Oil additives
in this section. NISSAN recommends the
NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil
use of an energy conserving oil in order to
additives. The use of an oil additive is not
improve fuel economy.
necessary when the proper oil type is used
Select only engine oils that meet the and maintenance intervals are followed.
American Petroleum Institute (API) certifi-
Oil which may contain foreign matter or rect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
has been previously used should not be not covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle REFRIGERANT AND OIL
used. Limited Warranty.
RECOMMENDATIONS
Oil viscosity Your engine was filled with a high-quality
engine oil when it was built. You do not have The air conditioner system in your
The engine oil viscosity or thickness to change the oil before the first recom- NISSAN vehicle must be charged with the
changes with temperature. Because of mended change interval. Oil and filter refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) and
this, it is important to select the engine oil change intervals depend upon how you NISSAN A/C system oil Type R (KLH00-
viscosity based on the temperatures at use your vehicle. PAGRO) or the exact equivalents.
which the vehicle will be operated before Operation under the following conditions
the next oil change. Choosing an oil viscos- CAUTION
may require more frequent oil and filter
ity other than that recommended could changes: The use of any other refrigerant or oil
cause serious engine damage. will cause severe damage to the air con-
∙ repeated short distance driving at cold ditioning system and will require the re-
Selecting the correct oil filter outside temperatures placement of all air conditioner system
Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a ∙ driving in dusty conditions components.
high-quality Genuine NISSAN oil filter. When ∙ extensive idling The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your
replacing, use a Genuine NISSAN oil filter or NISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth’s
its equivalent for the reason described in ∙ towing a trailer
ozone layer. Although this refrigerant does
“Change intervals.”
∙ stop and go commuting not affect the earth’s atmosphere, certain
Change intervals For additional information, refer to the
government regulations require the recov-
“Maintenance and schedules” section of ery and recycling of any refrigerant during
The oil and oil filter change intervals for automotive air conditioner system service. A
your engine are based on the use of the this manual.
NISSAN dealer has the trained technicians
specified quality oils and filters. Using en-
and equipment needed to recover and re-
gine oil and filters that are not of the speci-
cycle your air conditioner system refrigerant.
fied quality, or exceeding recommended oil
and filter change intervals could reduce It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
engine life. Damage to the engine caused dealer when servicing your air conditioner
by improper maintenance or use of incor- system.
SPECIFICATIONS
ENGINE
Model QR25DE VQ40DE

Type Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC
Cylinder arrangement 4-cylinder in-line 6-cylinder, V-block, Slanted at 60°
Bore x Stroke in (mm) 3.504 x 3.937 (89.0 x 100.0) 3.760 x 3.622 (95.5 x 92)
Displacement cu in (cm3) 151.82 (2,488) 241.27 (3,954)
Firing order 1–3–4–2 1–2–3–4–5–6
Idle speed
M/T
A/T in N (Neutral) position Refer to the “Emission control information label” on the underside of the hood.
Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idle
speed)
CO % at idle
Standard PLZKAR6A-11 DILFR5A-11 ( for non FFV models)
Spark plug
DILFR5A-11D (for FFV models)
Spark plug gap (Nominal) in (mm) 0.043 (1.1) 0.043 (1.1)
Camshaft operation Timing chain Timing chain
This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.

WHEELS AND TIRES
Wheel Type Offset in (mm) Size
Steel 0.79 (20) 15 x 6.5JJ
Steel 1.18 (30) 16 x 7JJ
Aluminum 1.18 (30) 16 x 7J
Aluminum 1.18 (30) 18 x 7.5J
Tires Size
235/75R15
P265/70R16
P265/75R16
P265/60R18
Spare tire Size
Steel Full size
Alloy 16” Full size
Alloy 18” P265/70R16

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS
Overall length
Short wheel base in 205.5 (5,220)
(mm)
Long wheel base in 219.4 (5,574)
(mm)
Overall width in 72.8 (1,850)
(mm)
Overall height (includes
roof rails)
Crew Cab models
S, SV, DR and SL in 70.1 (1,780)
(mm)
Pro-4X in 73.9 (1,878)
(mm)
King Cab® models
S and SV I-4 in 68.7 (1,745)
(mm)
SV, DR and Pro-4X in 69.7 (1,770)
(mm)
Track Width
Front and rear in 61.8 (1,570)
(mm)
Wheelbase
Short wheel base in 125.9 (3,200)
(mm)
Long wheel base in 139.9 (3,554)
(mm)
Gross vehicle weight lbs.
rating (kg) Refer to the “F.M.V.S.S./
Gross axle weight rat- C.M.V.S.S. certification
ing label” on the center pil-
Front lbs. lar between the driver’s
(kg) side front and rear
Rear lbs. doors.
(kg)

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
IN ANOTHER COUNTRY
When planning to drive your NISSAN ve-

hicle in another country, you should first
find out if the fuel available is suitable for
your vehicle's engine.
Using fuel with an octane rating that is too
low may cause engine damage. All gaso-
line vehicles must be operated with un-
leaded gasoline. Therefore, avoid taking
your vehicle to areas where appropriate
fuel is not available.
When transferring the registration of
your vehicle to another country, state,
province or district, it may be necessary
to modify the vehicle to meet local laws LTI0085 LTI0130
and regulations. QR25DE engine
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The laws and regulations for motor vehicle (VIN) PLATE ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER
emission control and safety standards
The VIN plate is attached as shown. This The number is stamped on the engine as
vary according to the country, state, prov-
number is the identification for your vehicle shown.
ince or district; therefore, vehicle specifica-
tions may differ. and is used in the vehicle registration.
When any vehicle is to be taken into an-
other country, state, province or district
and registered, its modifications, trans-
portation and registration are the re-
sponsibility of the user. NISSAN is not re-
sponsible for any inconvenience that
may result.

LTI0127 LTI0135 WTI0099
VQ40DE engine Type A (if so equipped) Type B (if so equipped)
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICATION
LABEL
The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certifi-
cation label is affixed as shown. This label
contains valuable vehicle information, such
as: (GVWR), (GAWR), month and year of
manufacture, (VIN), etc. Review it carefully.

LTI0133 LTI2252 WTI0100
EMISSION CONTROL Type A (if so equipped) Type B (if so equipped)
INFORMATION LABEL TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION
LABEL
The emission control information label is
attached to the underside of the hood as The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire
shown. and Loading Information label. The label is
located as shown.

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE
License plate bolt tightening torque:

3.8 - 4.7 ft-lb. (5.10 - 6.37 N·m)
LTI0206 LTI0137
AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION
LABEL INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE
WITH GROMMETS
The air conditioner specification label is af-
fixed as shown. Use the following steps to mount the front
license plate with grommets:
1. Make holes on the plastic finisher at the
location mark (small dimple) using a
0.37 in (9.5 mm) drill. Apply light pressure
to the drill. Insert two plastic grommets
provided. Install the license plate holder
using the two bolts (and washers) pro-
vided.
2. Mount the license plate using two M6-
14 mm bolts.
VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION
WARNING ∙ GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb ∙ Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load
weight plus the combined weight limit, Total load capacity - maxi-
∙ It is extremely dangerous to of passengers and cargo. mum total weight limit specified
ride in a cargo area inside a ve- of the load (passengers and
hicle. In a collision, people riding ∙ GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-
in these areas are more likely to cargo) for the vehicle. This is the
ing) - maximum total combined maximum combined weight of
be seriously injured or killed. weight of the unloaded vehicle, occupants and cargo that can be
∙ Do not allow people to ride in passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer loaded into the vehicle. If the ve-
any area of your vehicle that is tongue load and any other op- hicle is used to tow a trailer, the
not equipped with seats and tional equipment. This informa-
seat belts. trailer tongue weight must be in-
tion is located on the cluded as part of the cargo load.
∙ Be sure everyone in your vehicle F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification This information is located on the
is in a seat and using a seat belt label. Tire and Loading Information la-
properly. bel.
∙ GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) -
TERMS maximum weight (load) limit ∙ Cargo capacity - permissible
It is important to familiarize yourself specified for the front or rear axle. weight of cargo, the subtracted
with the following terms before This information is located on the weight of occupants from the
loading your vehicle: F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification load limit.
label.
∙ Curb Weight (actual weight of
your vehicle) - vehicle weight in- ∙ GCWR (Gross Combined Weight
cluding: standard and optional rating) - The maximum total
equipment, fluids, emergency weight rating of the vehicle, pas-
tools, and spare tire assembly. sengers, cargo, and trailer.
This weight does not include
passengers and cargo.

VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY
Before driving a loaded vehicle, con-
firm that you do not exceed the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
or the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) for your vehicle. Both the
GVWR and GAWR are located on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.
For additional information, refer to
“Measurement of weights” in this
section.
Do not exceed the load limit of your
vehicle shown as “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo” on
the Tire and Loading Information la-
bel. Do not exceed the number of
occupants shown as “Seating Ca-
pacity” on the Tire and Loading Infor-
mation label.
To get “the combined weight of oc-
cupants and cargo”, add the weight
of all occupants, then add the total
luggage weight. Examples are
shown in the following illustration.
LTI2320
Example
Steps for determining correct 5. Determine the combined weight
load limit of luggage and cargo being
loaded on the vehicle. That
1. Locate the statement “The com- weight may not safely exceed
bined weight of occupants and the available cargo and luggage
cargo should never exceed XXX load capacity calculated in
lbs. or XXX kg” on your vehicle’s step 4.
placard.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a
2. Determine the combined weight trailer, load from your trailer will
of the driver and passengers be transferred to your vehicle.
that will be riding in your vehicle. Consult this manual to deter-
mine how this reduces the avail-
3. Subtract the combined weight LTI0102
able cargo and luggage load ca-
of the driver and passengers
pacity of your vehicle. SECURING THE LOAD
from XXX lbs. or XXX kg.
Before driving a loaded vehicle, con- For your convenience, tie down hooks (if so
4. The resulting figure equals the firm that you do not exceed the equipped) are placed at each corner of the
available amount of cargo and GVWR or the GAWR for your vehicle. truck box. These may be used to help se-
luggage load capacity. For ex- For additional information, refer to cure cargo loaded into the truck box.
ample, if the XXX amount equals “Measurement of weights” in this
1,400 lbs. and there will be five WARNING
section.
150 lbs. passengers in your ve- ∙ Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
hicle, the amount of available Also check tires for proper inflation straps to help prevent it from sliding
pressures. For additional informa- or shifting. Do not place cargo higher
cargo and luggage load capac- than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop
tion, refer to the “Tire and Loading
ity is 650 lbs. (1,400-750 (5 X 150) = or collision, unsecured cargo could
Information label” in the “Do-it-
650 lbs.) or (640-340 (5 X 70) = cause personal injury.
yourself ” section of this manual.
300 kg.)
∙ Do not load your vehicle any heavier WARNING
than the GVWR or the maximum front
∙ Properly install and tighten the tie-
and rear GAWRs. If you do, parts of
down cleats into the Utili-track® chan-
your vehicle can break, tire damage
nel system. Also, do not attach any
could occur, or it can change the way
rope or straps directly to the channel.
your vehicle handles. This could result
Failure to properly install the tie-
in loss of control and cause personal
down cleats or attaching ropes or
injury.
straps directly to the channel can
cause the cargo to become unse-
cured. In a sudden stop or collision,
unsecured cargo could cause per-
sonal injury.
LTI2082 straps to help prevent it from sliding
UTILI-TRACK® CHANNEL SYSTEM (if or shifting. In a sudden stop or colli-
so equipped) personal injury.
1. Side channels
The Utili-track® channel system allows you
2. Header channel to move tie-down clamps in the bed to the
best location to secure a load.
3. Floor channels
The tie-down cleats must be installed so
the clamp is properly seated in the notches
in the rail. If the tie-down cleat is not seated
in the notches, it will not be flush with the
rail and cannot be properly tightened. The
bolt in the center of the cleat must be tight-
ened hand tight (20 – 40 in-lbs.)

Check the tightness of the tie-down cleat
periodically during a trip to make sure the
center bolt has not become loose.
Install the tie-down cleat as follows:
1. Remove the side channels by sliding
them out the back of the truck bed.
Properly store the side channels.
2. Loosen the center bolt completely.
LTI0103
3. Insert the cleat into the channel per-
pendicular to the channel as shown.
Then rotate the cleat clockwise 90° and
slide it to the desired location.
LTI0104
4. Position the cleat so the nubs on the
bottom fully seat into the channel de-
tents.

WTI0124
5. There should be no gap between the
bottom of the cleat and the top of the
channel. Tighten the center bolt hand
tight (20-40 in-lbs.).

LTI0106
CAUTION
∙ Install only one cleat per section of
channel.
∙ Applying loads at angles to the cleats
greater than 45° or loads greater than
150 lbs. (header and floor channels) or
200 lbs. (side channels) may cause
damage to the channel or bed.

LTI0123 WTI0119
1 correct installation, 2 incorrect installation
CAUTION
WARNING
Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
Do not install accessories over the gap straps to prevent it from sliding or shift-
between the front and rear side chan- ing. Use the channel end stoppers to
nels. Doing this could affect the rear help secure items in the channels from
structure in certain rear impacts, which sliding off the end of the truck bed.
could result in serious injury.
Channel end stoppers (if so
equipped)
The channel end stoppers should be used
to help prevent accessories installed in the
channels from sliding or shifting off the end
of the truck bed.

They must be installed so they are properly
WARNING ∙ Overloading not only can
seated in the detents in the channel.
∙ Properly secure all cargo with shorten the life of your vehicle
Install the channels end stoppers as fol-
ropes or straps to help prevent and the tire, but can also cause
lows:
it from sliding or shifting. Do not unsafe vehicle handling and
place cargo higher than the longer braking distances. This
1. Remove the channel protectors by slid-
seatbacks. In a sudden stop or may cause a premature tire fail-
ing them out the back of the truck bed.
collision, unsecured cargo could ure which could result in a seri-
Properly store the channel protectors.
cause personal injury. ous accident and personal in-
2. Loosen the bolt on the center of the jury. Failures caused by
end stopper with the provided wrench ∙ Do not load your vehicle any overloading are not covered by
and insert it into the channel. heavier than the GVWR or the the vehicle’s warranty.
maximum front and rear
3. Position the end stopper to the desired
GAWRs. If you do, parts of your
location on the channel so the nubs on
vehicle can break, tire damage
the bottom of the end stopper fully
could occur, or it can change the
seat into the channel detents.
way your vehicle handles. This
4. Tighten the bolt on the center of the could result in loss of control
end stopper with the provided wrench. and cause personal injury.
LOADING TIPS
∙ The GVW must not exceed GVWR
or GAWR as specified on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification
label.
∙ Do not load the front and rear
axle to the GAWR. Doing so will
exceed the GVWR.

TRUCK-CAMPER LOADING
INFORMATION
CREW CAB MODELS

Crew Cab short wheel base models
should not be used to carry a slide-in
camper.
KING CAB® MODELS
This information is provided for you to
properly install a slide-in camper and is
based on the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration regulations. It is rec-
ommended that, before installing the
camper, you carefully read the following in-
formation and ensure that the camper
meets the specifications. LTI0128 LTI0129
This information may not apply to some LOCATION FOR CENTER OF When the truck is used to carry a slide-in
Canada model vehicles. GRAVITY camper, the total cargo load of the truck
consists of the camper manufacturer’s
SPECIAL BODY VEHICLES The illustration indicates the recom- weight figure, plus:
Some vehicles are equipped with commer- mended cargo center of gravity location.
∙ the weight of installed additional
cial or camper bodies. However, this Own- King Cab®: camper equipment not included in the
er’s Manual does not cover these options. camper manufacturer’s weight figure,
For additional information, refer to the L1 = 36.7 in (931 mm)
body manufacturer’s instruction manual. ∙ the weight of camper cargo,
WARNING
∙ and the weight of occupants in the
Improper loading may be dangerous. If camper.
a load is too far back, it can affect han-
dling characteristics. If a load is too far
forward, the front axle may be
overloaded.

TOWING A TRAILER
The total cargo load should not exceed the MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS WARNING
truck’s pay load weight rating and the
camper’s center of gravity should fall within Secure loose items to prevent ∙ Overloading or improper loading of a
the truck’s recommended center of gravity weight shifts that could affect the trailer and its cargo can adversely af-
location when installed. balance of your vehicle. When the ve- fect vehicle handling, braking and
hicle is loaded, drive to a scale and performance and may lead to
WARNING accidents.
weigh the front and the rear wheels
Overloading or improper loading can separately to determine axle loads. ∙ Do not tow a trailer when the TEMPO-
adversely affect vehicle handling, brak- Individual axle loads should not ex- RARY FULL SIZE spare tire is installed.
ing and performance and may lead to ceed either of the GAWR. The total of
accidents. CAUTION
the axle loads should not exceed the
GVWR. These ratings are given on ∙ Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy
VEHICLE LOAD WEIGHT CAPACITY load for the first 500 mile (805 km).
the vehicle certification label. If
The vehicle payload weight capacity Your engine, axle or other parts could
weight ratings are exceeded, move be damaged.
shown on the Tire and Loading Information
or remove items to bring all weights
label, refer to “Tire and Loading Information ∙ For the first 500 miles (805 km) that
label” in this section, indicates the maxi-
below the ratings.
you tow a trailer, do not drive over
mum total weight of passengers, optional 50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make
equipment (air conditioning, trailer hitch, starts at full throttle. This helps the
etc.) and cargo that your vehicle is de- engine and other parts of your vehicle
signed to carry. wear in at the heavier loads.
Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm Your new vehicle was designed to be used
that you do not exceed the GVWR or the primarily to carry passengers and cargo.
GAWR for your vehicle. For additional infor- Remember that towing a trailer places ad-
mation, refer to ’’Vehicle loading informa- ditional loads on your vehicle’s engine,
tion’’ in this section. drive train, steering, braking and other sys-
tems.
Also check tires for proper inflation pres-
sures. For additional information, refer to
the Tire and Loading Information label.
A NISSAN Towing Guide (U.S. only) is avail- Temperature conditions can also affect
able on the website at towing. For example, towing a heavy trailer
www.nissanusa.com. This guide includes in high outside temperatures on graded
information on trailer towing capability and roads can affect engine performance and
the special equipment required for proper cause overheating. The engine protection
towing. mode, which helps reduce the chance of
MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS engine damage, could activate and auto-
matically decrease engine power. Vehicle
Maximum trailer loads speed may decrease under high load. Plan
your trip carefully to account for trailer and
Never allow the total trailer load to exceed
vehicle load, weather and road conditions.
the value specified in the “Towing
Load/Specification” chart found in this sec-
tion. The total trailer load equals trailer WARNING
weight plus its cargo weight. LTI0161 Overheating can result in reduced en-
gine power and vehicle speed. The re-
∙ When towing a trailer load of The GCWR equals the combined weight of
duced speed may be lower than other
3,500 lbs. (1,587 kg) or more, trailers the towing vehicle (including passengers
traffic, which could increase the chance
with a brake system MUST be used. and cargo) plus the total trailer load. Tow- of a collision. Be especially careful when
The maximum Gross Combined Weight ing loads greater than these or using im- driving. If the vehicle cannot maintain a
Rating (GCWR) should not exceed the value proper towing equipment could adversely safe driving speed, pull to the side of the
specified in the following “Towing affect vehicle handling, braking and perfor- road in a safe area. Allow the engine to
Load/Specification” chart. mance. cool and return to normal operation. For
The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is additional information, refer to “If your
not only related to the maximum trailer vehicle overheats” in the “In case of
emergency” section of this manual.
loads, but also the places you plan to tow.
Tow weights appropriate for level highway
driving may have to be reduced for low
traction situations (for example, on slippery
boat ramps).

CAUTION
Vehicle damage resulting from im-
proper towing procedures is not cov-
ered by NISSAN warranties.
WTI0160 CA0036
Tongue load Maximum Gross Vehicle Weight
When using a weight carrying or a weight (GVW)/maximum Gross Axle
distributing hitch, keep the tongue load be- Weight (GAW)
tween 10 - 15% of the total trailer load or use
the trailer tongue load specified by the The GVW of the towing vehicle must not
trailer manufacturer. The tongue load exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
must be within the maximum tongue load (GVWR) shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
limits shown in the following “Towing certification label. The GVW equals the
Load/Specification” chart. If the tongue combined weight of the unloaded vehicle,
load becomes excessive, rearrange cargo passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer tongue
to allow for proper tongue load. load and any other optional equipment. In
addition, front or rear GAW must not ex-
ceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certifica-
tion label.
Towing capacities are calculated assum- 3. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from cargo in the trailer and vehicle may need to
ing a base vehicle with driver and any op- the GVWR. The remaining amount is be moved or removed to meet the speci-
tions required to achieve the rating. Addi- the available maximum tongue load. fied ratings.
tional passengers, cargo and/or optional
To determine the available towing capacity, Example:
equipment, such as the trailer hitch, will
use the following procedure.
add weight to the vehicle and reduce your ∙ Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) as weighed
vehicle’s maximum towing capacity and 1. Find the GCWR for your vehicle on the on a scale- including passengers, cargo
trailer tongue load. "Towing Load/Specification" chart and hitch - 5,185 lbs. (2352 kg).
found in this section. ∙ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The vehicle and trailer need to be weighed
to confirm the vehicle is within the GVWR, 2. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification la-
Front GAWR, Rear GAWR, Gross Combined from the GCWR. The remaining amount bel - 5,815 lbs. (2638 kg).
Weight Rating (GCWR) and Towing capacity. is the available maximum towing ca- ∙ Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR)
pacity. from “Towing Load/Specification" chart
All vehicle and trailer weights can be mea-
sured using platform type scales com- To determine the Gross Trailer Weight, - 11,133 lbs. (5050 kg).
monly found at truck stops, highway weigh weigh your trailer on a scale with all equip- ∙ Maximum Trailer towing capacity from
stations, building supply centers or salvage ment and cargo, that are normally in the “Towing Load/Specification" chart -
yards. trailer when it is towed. Make sure the 6,100 lbs. (2767 kg).
Gross Trailer Weight is not more than the
To determine the available payload capac-
Gross Trailer Weight Rating shown on the
ity for tongue load, use the following proce-
trailer and is not more than the calculated
dure.
available maximum towing capacity.
1. Locate the GVWR on the
Also weigh the front and rear axles on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.
scale to make sure the Front Gross Axle
2. Weigh your vehicle on the scale with all Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weight are not
of the passengers and cargo that are more than Front Gross Axle Weight and
normally in the vehicle when towing a Rear Gross Axle Weight on the
trailer. F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. The

5,815 lbs. (2638 kg) GVWR shown in the “Towing Load/Specification” TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION
chart even if the calculated available
– 5,185 lbs. (2352 kg) GVW
tongue weight is greater than 15 percent. If WARNING
= 630 lbs. (286 kg) Available for tongue the calculated tongue weight is less than
weight The towing capacities provided in this
10 percent, reduce the total trailer weight to
manual are for general reference only.
match the available tongue weight.
The safe towing capacity of your vehicle
11,133 lbs. (5050 kg) GCWR Always verify that available capacities are is affected by dealer and factory in-
– 5,185 lbs. (2352 kg) GVW within the required ratings. stalled options and passenger and
cargo loads. You must weigh the vehicle
= 5,948 lbs. (2698 kg) Capacity available for Trailer frontal area and trailer as described in this manual
towing to determine the actual vehicle towing
CAUTION capacity. Do not exceed the published
maximum towing capacity or the GCWR
630 lbs. (286 kg) Available tongue Exceeding the maximum trailer frontal
or the GVWR shown on the
weight area specification may exceed the tow-
FMVSS/CMVSS label. Doing so can re-
/ 5,948 lbs. (2698 kg) Available capacity ing capacity of the vehicle. This may af-
sult in an accident causing serious per-
fect the towing performance and lead
= 10 % tongue weight sonal injury or property damage.
to vehicle damage.
The available towing capacity may be less The trailer frontal area affects the towing
than the maximum towing capacity due to load of a trailer. The frontal area is the total
the passenger and cargo load in the ve- area of the vehicle and trailer that is af-
hicle. fected by air resistance while towing. Do
Remember to keep trailer tongue weight not exceed the maximum trailer frontal
between 10 - 15 percent of the trailer weight area specification shown in the "Towing
or within the trailer tongue load specifica- Load/Specification” chart. The frontal area
tion recommended by the trailer manufac- can be determined by multiplying the
turer. If the tongue load becomes exces- width of the trailer by the height of the
sive, rearrange the cargo to obtain the trailer. For example, a trailer that is 8 feet
proper tongue load. Do not exceed the wide by 6 feet tall has a trailer frontal area of
maximum tongue weight specification 48 square feet.
King Cab® 2WD (4 cyl) King Cab® 2WD (6 cyl) King Cab® 4WD (6 cyl) Crew Cab 2WD Crew Cab 4WD
Maximum Towing Capacity*1,
3,810 lbs. (1,728 kg) 6,720 lbs. (3,048 kg) 6,510 lbs. (2,953 kg) 6,640 lbs. (3,012 kg) 6,380 lbs. (2,894 kg)
*2, *3
Maximum Tongue Load*2, *3 381 lbs. (173 kg) 672 lbs. (305 kg) 651 lbs. (295 kg) 664 lbs. (301 kg) 638 lbs. (289 kg)
Maximum Gross Combined
7,937 lbs. (3,600 kg) 11,230 lbs. (5,094 kg) 11,230 lbs. (5,094 kg) 11,230 lbs. (5,094 kg) 11,230 lbs. (5,094 kg)
Weight Rating
Maximum trailer frontal area 30 sq feet (2.78 sq meters)
*1:
∙ The towing capacity is calculated using the SAE International SAE J2807 test method. Additional passengers, cargo and/or optional
equipment will add weight to the vehicle and reduce your vehicle’s maximum towing capacity.
∙ All towing above 1,000 lbs. (454 kg) requires the use of trailer brakes.
∙ NISSAN recommends the use of a tandem axle trailer whenever towing above 3,000 lbs. (1,361 kg).
*2: The maximum towing capacity when using the Genuine NISSAN step bumper as a ball mount is 3,500 lbs. (1,588 kg) and 350 lbs. (158 kg)
tongue load.
*3: Use of a weight-distributing hitch system is recommended when towing over 5,000 lbs.

TOWING SAFETY WARNING ∙ The threaded shank of the hitch ball
Trailer hitch must be long enough to be properly
Trailer hitch components have specific secured to the ball mount. There should
Your vehicle may be equipped with an op- weight ratings. Your vehicle may be ca- be at least 2 threads showing beyond
tional trailer tow package. The trailer tow pable of towing a trailer heavier than the lock washer and nut.
package includes a receiver-type frame the weight rating of the hitch compo-
nents. Never exceed the weight rating Ball mount
mounted hitch. This hitch is rated for the
maximum towing capacity of this vehicle of the hitch components. Doing so can The hitch ball is attached to the ball mount
when the proper towing equipment is cause serious personal injury or prop- and the ball mount is inserted into the
erty damage. hitch receiver. Choose a proper class ball
used. Choose a proper ball mount and
hitch ball that is rated for the trailer to be Hitch ball mount based on the trailer weight. Addi-
towed. Genuine NISSAN ball mounts and tionally, the ball mount should be chosen to
hitch balls are available from a NISSAN Choose a hitch ball of the proper size and keep the trailer tongue level with the
dealer. weight rating for your trailer: ground.
If your vehicle is not equipped with the op- ∙ The required hitch ball size is stamped
tional trailer tow package, check the tow- on most trailer couplers. Most hitch
ing capacity of your bumper hitch or balls also have the size printed on the
receiver-type frame mounted hitch. top of the ball.
Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and ∙ Choose the proper class hitch ball
trailer. A Genuine NISSAN trailer hitch is based on the trailer weight.
available from a NISSAN dealer. Make sure
the trailer hitch is securely attached to the ∙ The diameter of the threaded shank of
vehicle to help avoid personal injury or the hitch ball must be matched to the
property damage due to sway caused by ball mount hole diameter. The hitch ball
crosswinds, rough road surfaces or pass- shank should be no more than 1/16”
ing trucks. smaller than the hole in the ball mount.

Weight carrying hitches NOTE:
A weight carrying or “dead weight” ball A weight-distributing hitch system may
mount is one that is designed to carry the affect the operation of trailer surge
whole amount of tongue weight and gross brakes. If you are considering use of a
weight directly on the ball mount and on weight-distributing hitch system with a
the receiver. surge brake-equipped trailer, check with
the surge brake, hitch or trailer manufac-
Weight distribution hitch turer to determine if and how this can be
This type of hitch is also called a “load- done.
leveling” or “equalizing” hitch. A set of bars Follow the instructions provided by the
attach to the ball mount and to the trailer manufacturer for installing and using the
to distribute the tongue weight (hitch weight-distributing hitch system.
weight) of your trailer. Many vehicles can’t
LTI0132
carry the full tongue weight of a given General set-up instructions are as follows:
Bumper towing trailer, and need some of the tongue 1. Park unloaded vehicle on a level sur-
weight transferred through the frame and face. With the ignition on and the doors
The Genuine NISSAN step bumper has pro-
visions to install a trailer hitch ball and is pushing down on the front wheels. This closed, allow the vehicle to stand for
designed to tow trailers of a maximum gives stability to the tow vehicle. several minutes so that it can level.
weight of 3,500 lbs. (1,588 kg). A weight-distributing hitch system (Class 2. Measure the height of a reference point
To install a trailer hitch ball cut out the circle IV) is recommended if you plan to tow trail- on the front and rear bumpers at the
in the center of the step bumper 䊊 A , then ers with a maximum weight over 5,000 lbs. center of the vehicle.
remove it to install the trailer hitch ball. (2,268 kg). Check with the trailer and towing
equipment manufacturers to determine if 3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle and ad-
they recommend the use of a weight- just the hitch equalizers so that the
distributing hitch system. front bumper height is within 0 -
.5 inches (0 – 13 mm) of the reference
height measured in step 2. The rear
bumper should be no higher than the
reference height measured in step 2.
WARNING Class II hitch CAUTION
Properly adjust the weight distributing Class II trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ∙ Special hitches which include frame
hitch so the rear of the bumper is no ball mount and hitch ball) can be used to reinforcements are required for tow-
higher than the measured reference tow trailers of a maximum weight of ing above 2,000 lbs. (907 kg). Suitable
height when the trailer is attached. If 3,500 lbs. (1,587 kg). Genuine NISSAN hitches, ball mounts
the rear bumper is higher than the mea- and hitch balls for pickup trucks and
sured reference height when loaded, The Genuine NISSAN step bumper is con- sport utility vehicles are available at a
the vehicle may handle unpredictably sidered a Class II ball mount. NISSAN dealer.
which could cause a loss of vehicle con- Class III hitch ∙ The hitch should not be attached to or
trol and cause serious personal injury or
affect the operation of the impact-
property damage. Class III trailer hitch equipment (receiver,
absorbing bumper.
ball mount and hitch ball) can be used to
Sway control device tow trailers of a maximum weight of
WARNING
Sudden maneuvers, wind gusts, and buf- 5,000 lbs. (2,268 kg).
feting caused by other vehicles can affect ∙ Do not use axle-mounted hitches.
trailer handling. Sway control devices may Class IV hitch
∙ Do not modify the vehicle exhaust
be used to help control these affects. If you Class IV trailer hitch equipment (receiver, system, brake system, etc. to install a
choose to use one, contact a reputable ball mount and hitch ball) can be used to trailer hitch.
trailer hitch supplier to make sure the sway tow trailers of a maximum weight of
control device will work with the vehicle, ∙ To reduce the possibility of additional
10,000 lbs. (4,535 kg). A weight distributing damage if your vehicle is struck from
hitch, trailer and the trailer’s brake system.
hitch should be used to tow trailers that the rear, where practical, remove the
Follow the instructions provided by the
weigh over 5,000 lbs. (2,268 kg). receiver when not in use.
manufacturer for installing and using the
sway control device. Your vehicle may be equipped with Class IV ∙ Regularly check that all trailer hitch
trailer hitch equipment that has a mounting bolts are securely
Class I hitch
10,000 lbs. (4,535 kg) maximum weight rat- mounted.
Class I trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball ing, but your vehicle is only capable of tow-
mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow ing the maximum trailer weights shown in
trailers of a maximum weight of 2,000 lbs. the “Towing Load/Specification” chart in
(907 kg). this section.
Tire pressures Trailer lights tor, an adapter will be needed to connect
the trailer lights to the vehicle. Adapters are
∙ When towing a trailer, inflate the CAUTION available at auto parts stores and hitch re-
vehicle tires to the recom- tailers.
When splicing into the vehicle electrical
mended cold tire pressure indi- system, a commercially available Trailer brakes
cated on the Tire and Loading In- power-type module/converter must be
formation label. If your trailer is equipped with a braking
used to provide power for all trailer
system, make sure it conforms to federal
lighting. This unit uses the vehicle bat-
∙ Trailer tire condition, size, load rat- and/or local regulations and that it is prop-
tery as a direct power source for all
ing and proper inflation pressure erly installed.
trailer lights while using the vehicle tail
should be in accordance with the light, stop light and turn signal circuits Vehicles equipped with a 7–pin trailer har-
trailer and tire manufacturer’s as a signal source. The ness connector are pre-wired for a trailer
module/converter must draw no more brake controller. It is recommended that
specifications. than 15 milliamps from the stop and tail you visit a NISSAN dealer for a trailer brake
Safety chains lamp circuits. Using a adapter harness.
module/converter that exceeds these
Always use suitable safety chains between power requirements may damage the WARNING
your vehicle and the trailer. The safety vehicle’s electrical system. See a repu-
table trailer dealer to obtain the proper Never connect a trailer brake system di-
chains should be crossed and should be
equipment and to have it installed. rectly to the vehicle brake system.
attached to the hitch, not to the vehicle
bumper or axle. The safety chains can be When towing a trailer load of 3,500 lbs.
Trailer lights should comply with federal
attached to the bumper if the hitch ball is (1587 kg) or more, trailers with a brake
and/or local regulations. For assistance in
mounted to the bumper. Be sure to leave system MUST be used. However, most
hooking up trailer lights, it is recommended
enough slack in the chains to permit turn- states require a separate braking system
that you visit a NISSAN dealer or reputable
ing corners. on trailers with a loaded weight above a
trailer dealer. Vehicles equipped with the
specific amount. Make sure the trailer
optional trailer tow package are equipped
meets the local regulations and the regu-
with a 7-pin trailer harness connector. A flat
lations where you plan to tow.
4–pin harness is available from your dealer
for vehicles without a tow package. If your Several types of braking systems are avail-
trailer is equipped with a flat 4-pin connec- able.
Surge Brakes -The surge brake actuator is A Genuine NISSAN jumper harness is avail- ∙ Check your hitch, trailer tire pressure,
mounted on the trailer tongue with a hy- able that is specifically designed to be used vehicle tire pressure, trailer light opera-
draulic line running to each trailer wheel. when installing an aftermarket brake con- tion, and trailer wheel lug nuts every
Surge brakes are activated by the trailer troller. time you attach a trailer to the vehicle.
pushing against the hitch ball when the ∙ Be certain your rearview mirrors con-
Install the aftermarket electric trailer brake
tow vehicle is braking. Hydraulic surge form to all federal, state or local regula-
controller according to the manufacturer’s
brakes are common on rental trailers and tions. If not, install any mirrors required
instructions.
some boat trailers. In this type of system, for towing before driving the vehicle.
there is no hydraulic or electric connection Pre-towing tips
for brake operation between the tow ve- ∙ Determine the overall height of the ve-
hicle and the trailer. ∙ Be certain your vehicle maintains a level hicle and trailer so the required clear-
position when a loaded and/or un- ance is known.
Electric Trailer Brakes -Electric braking loaded trailer is hitched. Do not drive the
systems are activated by an electronic sig- Trailer towing tips
vehicle if it has an abnormal nose-up or
nal sent from a trailer brake controller (spe- nose-down condition; check for im- In order to gain skill and an understanding
cial brake-sensing module). If electric trailer proper tongue load, overload, worn sus- of the vehicle’s behavior, you should prac-
brakes are used, refer to “Electric trailer pension or other possible causes of ei- tice turning, stopping and backing up in an
brake controller" in this section. ther condition. area which is free from traffic. Steering sta-
bility and braking performance will be
Have a professional supplier of towing ∙ Always secure items in the trailer to pre- somewhat different than under normal
equipment make sure the trailer brakes are vent load shift while driving. driving conditions.
properly installed and demonstrate proper
brake function testing. ∙ Keep the cargo load as low as possible ∙ Always secure items in the trailer to pre-
in the trailer to keep the trailer center of vent load shift while driving.
Electric trailer brake controller gravity low.
∙ Lock the trailer hitch coupler with a pin
Trailers equipped with electric brakes may ∙ Load the trailer so approximately 60% or lock to prevent the coupler from in-
require the installation of an aftermarket of the trailer load is in the front half and advertently becoming unlatched.
trailer brake controller. 40% is in the back half. Also make sure ∙ Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or
the load is balanced side to side. stops.
∙ Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.
∙ Always drive your vehicle at a moderate 5. Shift the transmission into P (Park). ∙ While going downhill, the weight of the
speed. trailer pushing on the tow vehicle may
6. Make sure the indicator light (if so decrease overall stability. Therefore, to
∙ When backing up, hold the bottom of equipped) indicates the transfer case is maintain adequate control, reduce your
the steering wheel with one hand. Move in 4H, 4L, or 2H and that the ATP light is speed and shift to a lower gear. Avoid
your hand in the direction in which you off. If the indicator light is flashing, long or repeated use of the brakes
want the trailer to go. Make small cor- or the ATP light is ON, make sure the when descending a hill, as this reduces
rections and back up slowly. If possible, transmission is in P (Park) (A/T) and their effectiveness and could cause
have someone guide you when you are turn the 4WD switch to 2WD or 4H. For overheating. Shifting to a lower gear in-
backing up. additional information, refer to “Auto- stead provides “engine braking” and re-
Always block the wheels on both vehicle matic transmission park warning light” duces the need to brake as frequently.
and trailer when parking. Parking on a in the “Instruments and controls” sec-
tion and “Using 4-wheel drive (4WD)” in ∙ If the engine coolant temperature rises
slope is not recommended; however, if you
the “Starting and driving” section of this to a high temperature, refer to “If your
must do so:
manual. vehicle overheats” in the “In case of
emergency” section of this manual.
CAUTION 7. Turn off the engine.
If you move the shift lever to the P (Park) To drive away: ∙ Trailer towing requires more fuel than
position before blocking the wheels normal circumstances.
and applying the parking brake, trans- 1. Start the vehicle.
∙ Avoid towing a trailer for your vehicle’s
mission damage could occur. 2. Apply and hold the brake pedal. first 500 miles (805 km).
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal. 3. Shift the transmission into gear. ∙ For the first 500 miles (805 km) that you
2. Have someone place blocks on the 4. Release the parking brake. do tow, do not drive over 50 mph
downhill side of the vehicle and trailer (80 km/h).
wheels. 5. Drive slowly until the vehicle and trailer
are clear from the blocks. ∙ Have your vehicle serviced more often
3. After the wheel blocks are in place, than at intervals specified. For addi-
slowly release the brake pedal until the 6. Apply and hold the brake pedal. tional information, refer to “Mainte-
blocks absorb the vehicle load. 7. Have someone retrieve and store the nance Schedules” in the “Maintenance
blocks. and schedules” section of this manual.
4. Apply the parking brake.
∙ When making a turn, your trailer wheels ∙ Be careful when passing other vehicles. ∙ Check your hitch, trailer wiring harness
will be closer to the inside of the turn Passing while towing a trailer requires connections, and trailer wheel lug nuts
than your vehicle wheels. To compen- considerably more distance than nor- after 50 miles (80 km) of travel and at
sate for this, make a larger than normal mal passing. Remember, the length of every break.
turning radius during the turn. the trailer must also pass the other ve-
∙ When launching a boat, don’t allow the
hicle before you can safely change
∙ Crosswinds and rough roads will ad- water level to go over the exhaust tail
lanes.
versely affect vehicle/trailer handling, pipe or rear bumper.
possibly causing vehicle sway. When ∙ Downshift the transmission to a lower
∙ Make sure you disconnect the trailer
being passed by larger vehicles, be pre- gear for engine braking when driving
lights before backing the trailer into the
pared for possible changes in cross- down steep or long hills. This will help
water or the trailer lights may burn out.
winds that could affect vehicle han- slow the vehicle without applying the
dling. brakes. When towing a trailer, final drive gear oil
should be replaced and transmission
Do the following if the trailer begins to ∙ Avoid holding the brake pedal down too
oil/fluid should be changed more fre-
sway: long or too frequently. This could cause
quently. For additional information, refer
the brakes to overheat, resulting in re-
1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal to the “Do-it-yourself ” section in this
duced braking efficiency.
to allow the vehicle to coast and steer manual.
as straight ahead as the road condi- ∙ Increase your following distance to al-
tions allow. This combination will help low for greater stopping distances FLAT TOWING – 4WD WITH
stabilize the vehicle while towing a trailer. Anticipate stops AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
and brake gradually. Towing a vehicle behind a recreational ve-
– Do not correct trailer sway by steer-
ing or applying the brakes. ∙ NISSAN recommends that the cruise hicle, such as a motor home, is sometimes
control not be used while towing a called flat towing.
2. When the trailer sway stops, gently ap-
trailer.
ply the brakes and pull to the side of the
road in a safe area. ∙ Some states or provinces have specific
regulations and speed limits for ve-
3. Try to rearrange the trailer load so it is
hicles that are towing trailers. Obey the
balanced as described in this section.
local speed limits.

CAUTION ∙ Always tow with the manual transmis-
∙ For emergency towing procedures re-
sion in Neutral.
fer to “Towing recommended by
∙ DO NOT flat tow a 4WD vehicle
NISSAN” in the “In case of emergency” ∙ For 4WD vehicles, always flat tow with
equipped with an automatic trans-
section of this manual. the transfer case in the 2 HI position.
mission. Flat towing or using a vehicle
dolly WILL DAMAGE internal transmis- To tow a vehicle equipped with an auto- ∙ Your vehicle should never exceed
sion parts due to lack of lubrication. matic transmission, an appropriate vehicle 60 mph (97 km/h) when flat towing your
∙ For emergency towing procedures re- dolly MUST be placed under the towed ve- vehicle.
fer to “Towing recommended by hicle’s drive wheels. Always follow the dolly
manufacturer’s recommendations when ∙ After towing 500 miles (805 km), start
NISSAN” in the “In case of emergency” and idle the engine with the transmis-
section of this manual. using their product.
sion in Neutral for two minutes. Failure
FLAT TOWING – 2WD WITH FLAT TOWING – 2WD/4WD WITH to idle the engine after every 500 miles
MANUAL TRANSMISSION (805 km) of towing may cause damage
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION to the transmission’s internal parts.
Towing a vehicle behind a recreational ve-
Towing a vehicle behind a recreational vehicle, such as a motor home, is sometimes
hicle, such as a motor home, is sometimes called flat towing.
called flat towing.
CAUTION
CAUTION
∙ Failure to follow these guidelines can
∙ Failure to follow these guidelines can result in severe transmission damage.
result in severe transmission damage.
∙ Whenever flat towing your vehicle, al-
∙ Whenever flat towing your vehicle, always tow forward, never backward.
ways tow forward, never backward.
∙ For emergency towing procedures re-
∙ DO NOT tow any automatic transmis- fer to “Towing recommended by
sion vehicle with all four wheels on the NISSAN” in the “In case of emergency”
ground. Doing so WILL DAMAGE inter- section of this manual.
nal transmission parts due to lack of
transmission lubrication.

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING
DOT (Department of Transportation) Qual- ment as measured under controlled WARNING

ity Grades: All passenger car tires must conditions on specified government test
conform to federal safety requirements in surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire The temperature grade for this tire is
addition to these grades. marked C may have poor traction perfor- established for a tire that is properly in-
mance. flated and not overloaded. Excessive
Quality grades can be found where appli- speed, under-inflation, or excessive
cable on the tire sidewall between tread loading, either separately or in combi-
WARNING
shoulder and maximum section width. For nation, can cause heat build-up and
example: The traction grade assigned to this tire possible tire failure.
is based on straight-ahead braking
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature traction tests, and does not include ac-
A celeration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
Treadwear peak traction characteristics.
The treadwear grade is a comparative rat- Temperature A, B and C
ing based on the wear rate of the tire when
tested under controlled conditions on a The temperature grades are A (the high-
specified government test course. For ex- est), B, and C, representing the tire’s resis-
ample, a tire graded 150 would wear one tance to the generation of heat, and its
and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the ability to dissipate heat when tested under
government course as a tire graded 100. controlled conditions on a specified indoor
The relative performance of tires depends laboratory test wheel. Sustained high tem-
upon the actual conditions of their use, perature can cause the material of the tire
however, and may depart significantly from to degenerate and reduce tire life, and ex-
the norm due to variations in driving habits, cessive temperature can lead to sudden
service practices and differences in road tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
characteristics and climate. level of performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the Federal Mo-
Traction AA, A, B and C
tor Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
The traction grades, from highest to low- represent higher levels of performance on
est, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades repre- the laboratory test wheel than the mini-
sent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pave- mum required by law.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
WARRANTY
Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the fol- For USA You may notify NISSAN by contact-
lowing emission warranties: ing our Consumer Affairs Depart-
If you believe that your vehicle has a
For USA
defect which could cause a crash or ment, toll-free, at 1-800-NISSAN-1.
1. Emission Defects Warranty could cause injury or death, you For Canada
2. Emissions Performance Warranty should immediately inform the Na- If you believe that your vehicle has a
Details of this warranty may be found with tional Highway Traffic Safety Admin- defect which could cause a crash or
other vehicle warranties in your Warranty In- istration (NHTSA) in addition to noti-
could cause injury or death, you
formation Booklet which comes with your fying NISSAN. should immediately inform Trans-
NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive a War-
ranty Information Booklet, or it is lost, you If NHTSA receives similar complaints, port Canada in addition to notifying
may obtain a replacement by writing to: it may open an investigation, and if it NISSAN.
finds that a safety defect exists in a
∙ Nissan North America, Inc. If Transport Canada receives com-
Consumer Affairs Department group of vehicles, it may order a re- plaints, it may open an investigation,
P.O. Box 685003 call and remedy campaign. However, and if it finds that a safety defect
Franklin, TN 37068-5003 NHTSA cannot become involved in exists in a group of vehicles, it may
For Canada individual problems between you, request that NISSAN conduct a recall
your dealer, or NISSAN. campaign. However, Transport
Emission Control System Warranty
Details of this warranty may be found with To contact NHTSA, you may call the Canada cannot become involved in
other vehicle warranties in your Warranty In- Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at individual problems between you,
formation Booklet which comes with your 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); your dealer, or NISSAN.
NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive a War- go to http://www.safercar.gov; or You may contact Transport Canada’s
ranty Information Booklet, or it is lost, you write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400
may obtain a replacement by writing to: Defect Investigations and Recalls Divi-
Seventh Street, SW., Washington, D.C. sion toll free at 1-800-333-0510. You
∙ Nissan Canada Inc. 20590. You can also obtain other in- may also report safety defects online
5290 Orbitor Drive
Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5
formation about motor vehicle safety at: https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-
from http://www.safercar.gov. Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/fc-
READINESS FOR INSPECTION/
MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST
cp.aspx?lang=eng (English speakers) WARNING If a powertrain system component is re-

or https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf- paired or the battery is disconnected, the
A vehicle equipped with Four-Wheel vehicle may be reset to a “not ready” condi-
Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/fc- Drive (4WD) should never be tested us- tion. Before taking the I/M test, check the
cp.aspx?lang=fra (French speakers) ing a two wheel dynamometer (such as vehicle’s inspection/maintenance test
Additional information concerning the dynamometers used by some readiness condition. Place the ignition
states for emissions testing), or similar switch in the ON position without starting
motor vehicle safety may be ob- equipment. Make sure you inform the the engine. If the Malfunction Indicator
tained from Transport Canada’s test facility personnel that your vehicle Light (MIL) comes on steady for 20 seconds
Road Safety Information Centre at is equipped with 4WD before it is placed and then blinks for 10 seconds, the I/M test
1-800-333-0371 or online at on a dynamometer. Using the wrong condition is “not ready”. If the MIL does not
www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety (English test equipment may result in transmis- blink after 20 seconds, the I/M test condi-
speakers) or sion damage or unexpected vehicle tion is “ready”. It is recommended that you
www.tc.gc.ca/securiteroutiere movement which could result in serious visit a NISSAN dealer to set the “ready con-
vehicle damage or personal injury. dition” or to prepare the vehicle for testing.
(French speakers).
Due to legal requirements in some states
To notify NISSAN of any safety con- and Canadian Provinces, your vehicle may
cerns please contact our Consumer be required to be in what is called the
Information Centre toll free at 1-800- “ready condition” for an
387-0122. Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of the
emission control system.
The vehicle is set to the “ready condition”
when it is driven through certain driving
patterns. Usually, the ready condition can
be obtained by ordinary usage of the ve-
hicle.

EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR) OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE
MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data These data can help provide a better un- Genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for this
Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an derstanding of the circumstances in which model year and prior can be purchased. A
EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data Genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best
crash-like situations, such as an air bag are recorded by your vehicle only if a non- source of service and repair information for
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data trivial crash situation occurs; no data are your vehicle. This manual is the same one
that will assist in understanding how a ve- recorded by the EDR under normal driving used by the factory-trained technicians
hicle’s systems performed. The EDR is de- conditions and no personal data (e.g. working at NISSAN dealerships. Genuine
signed to record data related to vehicle dy- name, gender, age and crash location) are NISSAN Owner’s Manuals can also be pur-
namics and safety systems for a short recorded. However, other parties, such as chased.
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. law enforcement, could combine the EDR
For USA
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to re- data with the type of personally identifying
cord such data as: data routinely acquired during a crash in- For current pricing and availability of Genu-
vestigation. ine NISSAN Service Manuals, contact:
∙ How various systems in your vehicle
were operating; To read data recorded by an EDR, special www.nissan-techinfo.com
equipment is required and access to the
∙ Whether or not the driver and passen- For current pricing and availability of Genu-
vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to
ger safety belts were buckled/fastened; ine NISSAN Owner’s Manuals, contact:
the vehicle manufacturer and NISSAN
∙ How far (if at all) the driver was depress- dealer, other parties, such as law enforce- 1-800-247-5321
ing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; ment, that have the special equipment, can
and, read the information if they have access to For Canada
the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data will only be To purchase a copy of a Genuine NISSAN
∙ How fast the vehicle was traveling. accessed with the consent of the vehicle Service Manual or Owner’s Manual, for this
∙ Sounds are not recorded. owner or lessee or as otherwise required or model year and prior, please contact your
permitted by law. nearest NISSAN dealer. For the phone num-
ber and location of a NISSAN dealer in your
area, call the NISSAN Information Center at
1-800-387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN rep-
resentative will assist you.

MEMO

11 Index
4WD warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15 Anchor point locations . . . . . . . . . . .1-34
B
5-Speed automatic transmission Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-76
fluid (ATF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11 Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43
Back button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13
Anti-lock brake warning light. . . . . . . .2-15
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43, 8-14
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) . . . . . .5-36
A Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Apps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-77
Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25
Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24
Active Brake Limited Slip (ABLS) Key fob. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25, 8-26
Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-37
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37 Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . .5-13
AM/FM radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-48
Air bag (See supplemental restraint Belt (See drive belt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16
AM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . .4-38
system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-73 Bluetooth® audio. . . . . . . . . . . .4-70, 4-73
Auxliliary (AUX) devices operation . . .4-50
Air bag system Bluetooth® hands-free phone
Bluetooth® audio. . . . . . . . . .4-70, 4-73
Front (See supplemental front impact air system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-103
Compact disc (CD) player . . . . . . .4-56
bag system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-81 Bluetooth® connections . . . . . . . .4-100
FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD) Connecting procedure . . . . .4-90, 4-106
Air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . .1-89
Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . .1-90, 2-20 player. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-46, 4-51 Phone indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-88
Air bag warning light, FM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . .4-38 Text messaging. . . . . . . . . .4-96, 4-108
supplemental . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-90, 2-20 iPod® Player . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-63, 4-67 Voice commands. . . . . . . . . . . . .4-91
Air cleaner housing filter . . . . . . . . . .8-18 iPod® player operation . . . . . .4-63, 4-67 Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
Air conditioner Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-37 without Navigation System . . . . . . . .4-85
Air conditioner operation . . . . .4-27, 4-35 Steering wheel audio control Bluetooth® streaming audio with
Air conditioner service. . . . . . . . . .4-37 switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-75 Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-73
Air conditioner specification label . .10-19 Autolight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30 Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-68
Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil Automatic Brake
recommendations . . . . . . . . . . .10-12 Automatic power window switch . . .2-51 Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) . . . .5-36
Air conditioner system refrigerant Automatic transmission position Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12
recommendations . . . . . . . . . . .10-12 indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20 Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . .8-29
Heater and air conditioner Driving with automatic Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-23, 4-35 transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14 Brake warning light. . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . .4-37 Automatic anti-glare inside mirror . . . .3-16 Brake wear indicators . . . . . . .2-24, 8-21
Air flow charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-28 Automatic door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6 Parking brake operation. . . . . . . . .5-21
Alarm system Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . .8-21
AUX jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-58
(See vehicle security system) . . . . . . .2-25 Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21 Clutch
Brake system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35 Clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12 D
Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24 Clutch interlock (clutch start) switch . . .2-38
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) system . .2-32
Brightness/contrast button . . . . . .4-9, 4-15 C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . .10-17
Brightness control Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43 Defroster switch
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32 Compact disc (CD) player . . . . . . . . . .4-56 Rear window and outside mirror
Bulb check/instrument panel . . . . . . . .2-15 Compass. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11 defroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28
Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-29 Compass and outside temperature Rear window defroster switch . . . . .2-28
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10 Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . .10-15
Compass display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11 Dimmer switch for instrument panel . . .2-32
C Display controls
Connect phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-77
Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45 (see control panel buttons). . . . . . .4-4, 4-10
Capacities and recommended fuel/ Control panel buttons . . . . . . . . . .4-4, 4-10 Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3
lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Back button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13 Door open warning light . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Cargo lamp switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34 Brightness/contrast button . . . .4-9, 4-15 Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16
Cargo Enter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4, 4-10 Driving
(See vehicle loading information) . . . . .10-20 Setting button. . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8, 4-13 Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . .5-43
Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . .4-84 Driving with automatic
With navigation system. . . . . . .4-10, 4-11
CD care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-75 Controls transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
CD player (See audio system). . . . . . . .4-56 Audio controls (steering wheel). . . . .4-75 Driving with manual transmission . . .5-19
Child restraints . . . . . . . .1-25, 1-26, 1-28, 1-31 Precautions when starting and
Heater and air conditioner
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-23, 4-35 driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
CHildren) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-31 Coolant Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Precautions on child Capacities and recommended
restraints . . . . . . . . .1-28, 1-41, 1-56, 1-68 fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 E
Top tether strap anchor point Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . .8-6
locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-34 Checking engine coolant level . . . . . .8-6
Child restraint with top tether strap . . . .1-33 Economy - fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Engine coolant temperature gauge . .2-6 Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock)
Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . .3-6 Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-7
Chimes, audible reminders . . . . . . . . .2-24 system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Cleaning exterior and interior . . . . . .7-2, 7-4 Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock)
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46 system switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37
Clock set/adjustment . . . . . . . . . .4-8, 4-13 Curtain side-impact and rollover air
Clock setting (models with Navigation Emission control information label . . . .10-18
bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-87
System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13 Emission control system warranty . . . .10-45
Engine
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . .5-13
11-2
Capacities and recommended Fusible links. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 F
Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . .8-6
Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8 First aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2 G
Changing engine oil filter. . . . . . . . .8-10 Flashers
Checking engine coolant level . . . . . .8-6 (See hazard warning flasher switch) . . . .6-2 Garage door opener, HomeLink® Universal
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . .8-7 Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3, 6-4 Transceiver . .2-55, 2-56, 2-57, 2-58, 2-58, 2-59
Engine compartment check Floor mat positioning aid . . . . . . . . . . .7-6 Gauge
locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3 Fluid Engine coolant temperature gauge . .2-6
Engine coolant temperature gauge . .2-6 Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12 Engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . .2-8
Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . .8-5 Capacities and recommended Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7 fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Engine oil and oil filter Clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11 Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
Engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . .2-8 Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7 Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9
Engine oil pressure warning light . . . .2-17 Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11 Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . .10-12 Windshield-washer fluid . . . . . . . . .8-13 Voltmeter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8
Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . .10-16 F.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . .10-17 General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Engine specifications . . . . . . . . . .10-13 Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33 Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13 Front air bag system
Engine Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45 (See supplemental restraint system). . . .1-81
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . .2-6 Front-door pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40 H
Engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . . . .2-8 Front power seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-5
Enter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4, 4-10 Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2 Hands-free phone system,
Event Data recorders . . . . . . . . . . . .10-47 Fuel Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-103
Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide). . . . . . .5-2 Capacities and recommended Hazard warning flasher switch. . . . . . . .6-2
Explanation of maintenance items . . . . .9-2 fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . .2-29
Explanation of scheduled maintenance Fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25 Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . . .2-29
items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5 Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27
Extended storage switch . . . . . . . . . .8-25 Fuel octane rating . . . . . . . . . .10-7, 10-9 Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10
Eyeglass case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45 Fuel recommendation . . . . . . .10-5, 10-7 Heated seat switches . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34
Loose fuel cap warning . . . . . . .2-5, 3-11 Heater
Fuel efficient driving tips . . . . . . . . . . .5-24 Heater and air conditioner
Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-11 controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-23, 4-35
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7 Heater operation . . . . . . . . . .4-26, 4-36
Fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22 Hill descent control switch. . . . . . . . . .2-36
11-3
Hill descent control system . . . . . . . . .5-41 Key fob battery replacement. . . . .8-25, 8-26 Headlight and turn signal switch. . . .2-29
Hill start assist system . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42 Keyless entry Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . .2-29
HomeLink® Universal Without Intelligent Key system Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27
Transceiver . .2-55, 2-56, 2-57, 2-58, 2-58, 2-59 (See remote keyless entry system) . . .3-7 Interior light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-54
Hood release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10 Keys Light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System Low tire pressure warning light . . . . .2-18
keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2 Low windshield-washer fluid warning
light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
I Passenger air bag and status light. . .1-83
L Security indicator light . . . . . . . . . .2-22
Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11 Warning/indicator lights and audible
Immobilizer system. . . . . . . . . . .2-26, 5-12 Labels reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
Important vehicle information label . . .10-17 Air conditioner specification label . . .10-19 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27
In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19 C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . .10-17 Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-55
Increasing fuel economy. . . . . . . . . . .5-25 Emission control information label . .10-18 Lock
Indicator lights and audible reminders Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . .10-16 Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . .3-6
(See warning/indicator lights and audible F.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . .10-17 Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3
reminders) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20 Tire and Loading Information label . .10-18 Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
Inside automatic anti-glare mirror . . . . .3-16 Vehicle identification number (VIN) . .10-16 Loose fuel cap warning . . . . . . . . .2-5, 3-11
Instrument brightness control . . . . . . .2-32 Vehicle identification number (VIN) Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . .0-6, 2-2 plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-16 Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . .2-18
Instrument panel dimmer switch . . . . .2-32 Warning labels (for SRS) . . . . . . . . .1-89 Low windshield-washer fluid warning
Interior light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-54 LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
iPod® Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-63, 4-67 CHildren) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-31 Luggage rack (see roof rack) . . . . . . . .2-48
ISOFIX child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-31 Launch bar menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9 Luggage
License plate (See vehicle loading information) . . . . .10-20
Installing the license plate . . . . . . .10-19
J Light
Air bag warning light . . . . . . . .1-90, 2-20 M
Jump seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7 Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . . .8-29
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-12, 8-15 Bulb check/instrument panel . . . . . .2-15 Maintenance
Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-29 General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . .2-17 Inside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3
K Exterior and Interior lights . . . . . . . .8-29 Maintenance precautions. . . . . . . . .8-2
Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28 Outside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2 Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33 Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . .1-25
11-4
Under the hood and vehicle . . . . . . .9-4 Oil Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
Maintenance log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-13 Capacities and recommended Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11
Maintenance requirements. . . . . . . . . .9-2 fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Precautions
Maintenance schedules . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7 Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8 Maintenance precautions. . . . . . . . .8-2
Maintenance under severe operation Changing engine oil filter. . . . . . . . .8-10 On-pavement and off-road driving
conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12 Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . .8-7 precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-6
Malfunction indicator light . . . . . . . . . .2-21 Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7 Precautions on booster
Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-3 Engine oil and oil filter seats . . . . . . . . . . . .1-28, 1-41, 1-56, 1-68
Manual windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49 recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11 Precautions on child
Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-55 Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . .10-12 restraints . . . . . . . . .1-28, 1-41, 1-56, 1-68
Map pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41 One shot call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-106 Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . .1-15
Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3 Outside mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17 Precautions on supplemental restraint
Instrument brightness control . . . . .2-32 Overdrive switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18 system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-73
Mirror Overhead sunglasses holder . . . . . . . .2-45 Precautions when starting and
Automatic anti-glare inside mirror . . .3-16 Overheat driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
Outside mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17 If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . .6-14 Programmable features . . . . . . . .4-8, 4-13
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15 Owner's manual order form . . . . . . . .10-47 Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-14
Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15 Owner's manual/service manual order
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15 information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-47
Mobile apps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-77 R
Moonroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-52
P Radio
Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . .4-84
N Parking FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)
Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . .5-21 player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-46, 4-51
NissanConnect® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-77 Parking/parking on hills . . . . . . . . .5-34 Steering wheel audio control
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Phone, Bluetooth® hands-free system. .4-103 switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-75
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26, 5-12 Power Readiness for inspection maintenance
NISSAN voice recognition system . . . . .4-113 Front seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . .1-5 (I/M) test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-46
Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4 Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51
Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39 Rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6
O Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11 Rear sliding window. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-52
Power steering system. . . . . . . . . .5-35 Rear sonar system OFF switch . . . . . . .2-39
Octane rating Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49 Rear Sonar System (RSS). . . . . . . . . . .5-42
(See fuel octane rating) . . . . . . . . .10-7, 10-9 Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . .2-51 Rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4 Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39 RearView Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-16
11-5
Rear window and outside mirror defroster Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . .1-24 Stability control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38
switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28 Three-point type with retractor . . . . .1-18 Standard maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7
Rear window defroster switch . . . . . . .2-28 Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24 Starting
Recommended Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . .1-18, 2-19 Before starting the engine . . . . . . . .5-13
Recorders Seats Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . .6-12, 8-15
Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-47 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2 Precautions when starting and
Refrigerant recommendation . . . . . . .10-12 Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2 driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
Registering a vehicle in another Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . .1-3 Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-14
country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-16 Rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6 Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Remote keyless entry system . . . . . .3-6, 3-7 Security indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22 Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . .10-45 Security system (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Steering
Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48 System), engine start . . . . . . . . . .2-26, 5-12 Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11
Security systems Power steering system. . . . . . . . . .5-35
Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . .2-25 Tilting steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . .3-14
S Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21 Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14
Service manual order form. . . . . . . . .10-47 Steering wheel audio control switch . . .4-75
Safety Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . .4-37 Stop light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-29
Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . .3-6 Setting button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8, 4-13 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40
Child seat belts . . . . .1-28, 1-41, 1-56, 1-68 Shifting Storage tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43
Reporting safety defects (US only) . .10-45 Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . .5-15 Sunglasses case. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45
Seat Manual transmission . . . . . . . . . . .5-19 Sunglasses holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45
Jump seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7 Shift lock release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-52
Seat adjustment Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . . .1-24 Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14
Front manual seat adjustment . . . . . .1-3 Side air bag system (See supplemental Supplemental air bag warning labels . . .1-89
Front power seat adjustment . . . . . .1-5 side air bag, curtain and rollover air bag Supplemental air bag warning
Seatback pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41 systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-87 light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-90, 2-20
Seat belt Siri® Eyes-Free . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-78, 4-81 Supplemental front impact air bag
Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-25 Smartphone connectivity . . . . . . . . . .4-77 system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-81
Infants and small children . . . . . . . .1-26 Sonar Supplemental restraint system
Injured Person . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18 Rear system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42 Information and warning labels . . . .1-89
Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-27 Spark plug replacement . . . . . . . . . . .8-17 Precautions on supplemental restraint
Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . .1-15 Spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17 system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-73
Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-13 Supplemental restraint system
Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4 (Supplemental air bag system) . . . . . . .1-73
Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . .1-25 Speedometer and odometer . . . . . . . .2-4 Switch
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15, 7-6 SRS warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-89 Autolight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30
11-6
Automatic power window switch . . .2-51 Tire and Loading Information label . .10-18 Truck - camper loading . . . . . . . . . . .10-29
Clutch interlock (clutch start) Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-39 Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32
switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38 Tire pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . .8-32, 8-32
Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) Tire rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-40
system switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37 Tires of 4-wheel drive. . . . . . . . . . .8-42 U
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33 Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-38
Hazard warning flasher switch. . . . . .6-2 Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . .10-44 Under seat storage bin. . . . . . . . . . . .2-42
Headlight and turn signal switch. . . .2-29 Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . .8-32, 10-14 Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . .10-44
Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . .2-29 Wheel/tire size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-14 USB interface
Hill descent control switch. . . . . . . .2-36 Tire pressure Audio file operation . . . . . . . . . . . .4-62
Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11 Low tire pressure warning light . . . . .2-18 USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection Port
Instrument brightness control . . . . .2-32 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . .5-3 (models with Navigation System) . . . . .4-61
Overdrive switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18 Top tether strap child restraint . . . . . . .1-33 USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection Port
Power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . .3-4 Towing (models without Navigation System) . . .4-58
Rear sonar system OFF switch . . . . .2-39 2-wheel drive models . . . . . . . . . . .6-19 Using 4-Wheel Drive (4WD). . . . . . . . . .5-26
Rear window and outside mirror 4-wheel drive models . . . . . . . .6-17, 6-18
defroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28 Flat towing . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-42, 10-43
Rear window defroster switch . . . . .2-28 Towing load/specification . . . . . . .10-34 V
Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32 Tow truck towing . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-15
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-30 Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-30 Variable voltage control system . . . . . .8-16
T Transceiver Vehicle dimensions and weights . . . . .10-15
HomeLink® Universal Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6 Transceiver . . . . . . . . . .2-55, 2-56, 2-57, OFF switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35
Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18, 3-18 2-58, 2-58, 2-59 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system . .5-38
Tailgate latch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22, 3-23 Transmission Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-16
Temperature gauge Driving with automatic Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . .10-16
Engine coolant temperature gauge . .2-6 transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14 Vehicle identification number (VIN)
Theft (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System), Driving with manual transmission . . .5-19 plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-16
engine start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26, 5-12 Travel (See registering a vehicle in another Vehicle immobilizer system . . . . . .2-26, 5-12
Three-way catalyst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3 country). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-16 Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . .10-20
Tie down hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24 Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9 Vehicle recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-19
Tilting steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14 Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4 Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . . . .2-25
Tire Troubleshooting guide (NISSAN voice Vehicle security system (NISSAN Vehicle
Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3, 6-4 recognition system) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-117 Immobilizer System), engine start . .2-26, 5-12
Spare tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5, 8-43 Truck box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18, 3-18 Ventilators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-23
11-7
Visors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14 Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
Voice Prompt Interrupt. . . . . . . .4-88, 4-106 Warning lights, indicator lights and audible
Voice recognition system . . . . . . . . . .4-113 reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Voltmeter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8 Weights
(See dimensions and weights) . . . . . . .10-15
Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . .8-32, 10-14
W Wheel/tire size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-14
When traveling or registering in another
Warning country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-16
4WD warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49
Air bag warning light . . . . . . . .1-90, 2-20 Locking passengers' windows . . . . .2-51
Anti-lock brake warning light . . . . . .2-15 Manual windows . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49
Battery charge warning light . . . . . .2-17 Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49
Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16 Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . .2-51
Door open warning light . . . . . . . . .2-17 Rear sliding window. . . . . . . . . . . .2-52
Engine oil pressure warning light . . . .2-17 Windshield-washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . .8-13
Hazard warning flasher switch. . . . . .6-2 Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . .8-20
Loose fuel cap warning . . . . . . .2-5, 3-11 Wiper
Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . . . .2-18 Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20
Low tire pressure warning light . . . . .2-18 Wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . .2-28
Low windshield-washer fluid warning
light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
Passenger air bag and status light. . .1-83
Seat belt warning light . . . . . . .1-18, 2-19
Supplemental air bag warning
light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-90, 2-20
TPMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . .2-25
Warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
Warning labels (for SRS) . . . . . . . . .1-89
Warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
Audible reminders. . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
11-8
MEMO
MEMO
MEMO
MEMO
MEMO
GAS STATION INFORMATION
FUEL RECOMMENDATION (for ∙ Do not use a fuel containing more

For additional information, refer to “Recom-
QR25DE models): than 15% ethanol in your vehicle. Your mended fluids/lubricants and capacities”
vehicle is not designed to run on a fuel in the “Technical and consumer informa-
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an oc- containing more than 15% ethanol. tion” section of this manual.
tane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock In- Using a fuel containing more than 15%
dex) number (Research octane number 91). FUEL RECOMMENDATION (for
ethanol in a vehicle not specifically
designed for a fuel containing more VQ40DE models):
CAUTION than 15% ethanol can adversely affect Use unleaded regular gasoline with an oc-
∙ Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door the emission control devices and sys- tane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock
label can operate on E-85. Fuel system tems of the vehicle. Damage caused Index) number (Research octane number
or other damage can occur if E-85 is by such fuel is not covered by the
91).
used in vehicles that are not designed NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
to run on E-85. ∙ Do not use fuel that contains the oc- CAUTION
∙ Using a fuel other than that specified tane booster methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Using ∙ Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door
could adversely affect the emission label can operate on E-85. Fuel system
control system, and may also affect fuel containing MMT may adversely af-
fect vehicle performance and vehicle or other damage can occur if E-85 is
the warranty coverage. used in vehicles that are not designed
emissions. Not all fuel dispensers are
∙ Under no circumstances should a labeled to indicate MMT content, so you to run on E-85.
leaded gasoline be used, because this may have to consult your gasoline re- ∙ Using a fuel other than that specified
will damage the three-way catalyst. tailer for more details. Note that Fed- could adversely affect the emission
eral and California laws prohibit the use control system, and may also affect
of MMT in reformulated gasoline. the warranty coverage.
∙ U.S. government regulations require ∙ Under no circumstances should a
ethanol dispensing pumps to be iden- leaded gasoline be used, because this
tified by a small, square, orange and will damage the three-way catalyst.
black label with the common abbre-
viation or the appropriate percentage
for that region.
∙ Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in your For additional information, refer to “Recom- ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION:
vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed to mended fluids/lubricants and capacities”
in the “Technical and consumer informa- QR25DE engine models:
run on E-15 or E-85 fuel. Using E-15 or
E-85 fuel in a vehicle not specifically tion” section of this manual. • Genuine “NISSAN Motor Oil 5W-30” (or
designed for E-15 or E-85 fuel can ad- FLEXIBLE FUEL VEHICLE (FFV) equivalent)
versely affect the emission control FUEL RECOMMENDATION (if so VQ40DE engine models:
devices and systems of the vehicle.
Damage caused by such fuel is not equipped): • Genuine “NISSAN Motor Oil 5W-30” (or
covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle If your vehicle is equipped as a Flexible Fuel equivalent)
Limited Warranty. Vehicle (FFV) your vehicle is designed to For additional information, refer to “Engine
∙ Do not use fuel that contains the oc- use (E-85) Fuel Ethanol, “Regular” unleaded oil and oil filter recommendations” in the
tane booster methylcyclopentadienyl regular gasoline or any percentage of the “Technical and consumer information” sec-
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Using two fuels combined. tion of this manual.
fuel containing MMT may adversely
affect vehicle performance and ve- CAUTION COLD TIRE PRESSURE:
hicle emissions. Not all fuel dispens- ∙ Using a fuel other than that specified For additional information, refer to “Tire and
ers are labeled to indicate MMT con- could adversely affect the emission Loading Information label” in the “Technical
tent, so you may have to consult your control system, and may also affect and consumer information” section of this
gasoline retailer for more details. the warranty coverage. manual.
Note that Federal and California laws
prohibit the use of MMT in reformu- ∙ Under no circumstances should a The label is typically located on the driver
lated gasoline. leaded gasoline be used, because this side center pillar or on the driver’s door. For
will damage the three-way catalyst. additional information, refer to “Wheels and
∙ U.S. government regulations require tires” in the “Do-it-yourself ” section of this
ethanol dispensing pumps to be iden- For additional information, refer to “Recom- manual.
tified by a small, square, orange and mended fluids/lubricants and capacities”
black label with the common abbre- in the “Technical and consumer informa-
viation or the appropriate percentage tion” section of this manual.
for that region.
RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLE
BREAK-IN PROCEDURE:
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of
vehicle use, follow the break-in procedure
recommendations for the future reliability
and economy of your new vehicle. For ad-
ditional information, refer to “Break-in
schedule” in the “Starting and driving” sec-
tion of this manual. Failure to follow these
recommendations may result in vehicle
damage or shortened engine life.
Printing : July 2018
Publication No.: OM19EA 0D40U0
Printed in the U.S.A. D40-D

2019 Frontier

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2019 Frontier

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2019 Frontier

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2019 FRONTIER

For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.

Contents Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1

Instruments and controls 2

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4

Starting and driving 5

Appearance and care 7

Maintenance and schedules 9

Technical and consumer information 10

1. Rear seat belts (P. 1-15)

0-2 Illustrated table of contents

1. Engine hood (P. 3-10)

Illustrated table of contents 0-3

1. Rear sliding window

0-4 Illustrated table of contents

Illustrated table of contents 0-5

1. Vents (P. 4-23)

0-6 Illustrated table of contents

Illustrated table of contents 0-7

0-8 Illustrated table of contents

Illustrated table of contents 0-9

Warning Name Page Warning Name Page Indicator Name Page

CRUISE indicator 2-20

0-10 Illustrated table of contents

Hill descent con- 2-21 Turn signal/ 2-23

Overdrive OFF 2-22

Security indicator 2-22

SET indicator light 2-22

Slip indicator light 2-23

Transfer 4LO posi- 2-23

Illustrated table of contents 0-11

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Pregnant women. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18

∙ Do not leave children unattended in-

1-2 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

1-4 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5

1-6 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7

1-8 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9

1-10 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11

1-12 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

2. Push and hold the lock knob and push

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13

1-14 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

∙ Do not attach anything to the head

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15

1-16 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17

1-18 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21

1-22 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23

WARNING ∙ If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt WARNING

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27

1-28 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system